5044.

o 4093 c d

Bid g P cc u i s r t e l n ai

Pt ln as Fiiy at c l

Petrochem icals
Industrial Projects Oo n r s e h
AO ri w n vv e e

Page 1 of 663

suraj_engineer@yahoo.co.uk

IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h

5044. o 4093 c d

Pfc r ae e
The objective of this work is to present to the engineering reader information about the practical professional aspects of Engineering involvement within Oil & Energy Industrial facilities promotion. These industries produce various types of gases in condensed form for the transportation through the pipelines for supply to the real consumer or the end user and also various petrochemical products as well as many bye products are produced. All disciplinary budding working engineers in the industry & particularly in the execution field shall be benefited by the information provided. The contents have been extracted from the practical experience earned in the field. A brief on the description of the terms used has been included. It has been noted that experiences attained are usually not recorded on documents for the benefit of the incoming young engineers to learn from the seniors’ experience resulting adversely on that these budding engineers depend solely on their individuals exclusive learning in the field based on the university learning which is not virtually adequate for a fast progress achievement. Therefore, to fulfill the requirement to extend the learned resources to the incoming new engineers, this small work in hard copy is presented to help those who intend to know in advance about an overall perspective of building new facilities or extending the existing one to further development. The information has been given in text only. No photo or diagram could be incorporated as under the obligations of the contracts such information should not be revealed for a definite number of years from the contract commencement day to maintain the secrecy conduct clause on various contracts. Only certain google earth images included to assist the reader. This work may not provide with the in-depth specialized subjective knowledge but definitely, illumine with an idea how the procedures move in the field which knowledge cannot be drawn from the university. This book might prove beneficial for the candidates aspiring to become Certified Professional Engineers within the purview of EMF (Engineers Mobility Forum, the Bharat represebtation by The Institution Of Engineers India). Of course, the . contents of the book are very boring but practical. The contents vary in nature including the usual procedures of the EPC nature of contracts involving in general types of Industrial jobs carried out in the industry. Also included certain statements & reporting Also, procedures as well as contract matters generally adopted. It is uncommon among engineers to be used to reading this type of work but practically, it is necessary. It is hoped that reader shall enjoy the boring work.
Page 2 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo.co.uk

IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h

5044. o 4093 c d

I am grateful to Cdr Eng A K Poothia, The Secretary & Director general of The Institution of Engineers (India) for commending this work & extending most useful advise for which attempts were made to incorporate to some extent. Attempts shall continue to incorporate the readers’ suggestions as much as practically feasible . feasible.

Author – IEI Professional Engineer Suraj Singh

August 15, 2009

--------------------------------------Refer to the various photographs appended somewhere else.Source Google

I dx ne

Ha i g ed n
In u tria ds l d v lo m n e e p e t, p lic , c m o e ts o y o pnn P je t D s n C n c ro c e ig , o tra t a a &M c lla e u w rd is e n o s E g e rin n in e g C n tru tio &C n ls os c n o tro Ts g e tin P re C m is io in , o ms n g c m is io in , s rt u , o m s n g ta p p rfo a c e rm n e & m in n n e a te a c P je t m n g m n ro c a a e e t D ta d e ile E g e rin n in e g R q ire e ts e u mn B ild gD s nC n e t u in e ig o c p P c re e t ro u m n C n tru tio os c n P -C m is io in re o m s n g

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Chapter 9 Chapter 10 Chapter 11

Page 3 of 663

suraj_engineer@yahoo.co.uk

IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h

5044. o 4093 c d

12 Chapter 12 13 Chapter 13 14 Chapter 14 15 Chapter 15 16 Chapter 16

E e u nP n x c tio la E v n e ta c u e fo n iro m n l la s s r p n In u tria c in la t d s l ity C n tru tio C n c o s c n o tra ts HE SS C m e ia o m rc l Cn c o tra ts R fe n e e re c s Sb u

Chapter 1
G el n e r a A Industrial development- Processing Facility formation
(Refer to photos) It is necessary in the interest of the economical development, industrial project should be efficiently promoted as Industry being backbone of a nation. Sooner the industry creation, better the prospects for the nation. Therefore, the value engineering should efficiently be applied for the product proposed to be facilitated to enable the consumer delivered with the most economic & qualitative products.

B

Policy decision- Authorization-Technology Promotion

The government should promptly decide relevant policy in a positive manner for the time is extremely important to be used properly to get the optimum use of the project provided adequate funds are available within the budget or finance borrowing should be made. Value engineering should be properly studied by experts to reach a conclusion that the product shall be processed imparting no adverse effect to the environment, shall be most economical in production cost, shall be easy to be transported to the end user facility, shall be most beneficial to the society from every aspect/view of cost & economy uplift as well as shall promote the technology & provide benefits to the people globally in long run.

Page 4 of 663

suraj_engineer@yahoo.co.uk

IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h

5044. o 4093 c d

C

Facility requirement –

Value Engineering effective application, Effective Technology, Product end User Requirement Necessity, Approval & Financing, international competition, Cost effectiveness & environment tenability, Sustainability. Should these points be met by the proposal, the project may be given a go ahead subject to the meeting other criteria.

D

Facility Justification & Feasibility –

Environment sustainability - Cost viability in long term – Nationally beneficial to add to economic growth – multi purpose approach & creation of employment casual as well as regular. Export potential of the product. Processing Technology & availability of raw material. Adequacy of availability of terrain & routes. Selection of the planning & execution mode. Availability of the expertise & experts along with all other inter related professionals.

A
1 2

Components Elements
general

of any Facility - inclusions in

3

4

Availability of the natural gas or oil fields from where the natural resources are being tapped out at offshore location Availability of the land for the required processing area onshore with acceptable terrain that may be used for the complete chemical engineering applications as well as transportation of the processed products to the outlet leading to the consumers’ locations Plant processing scheme & Technology with legal license for the defined period Liquefied Natural Gas tanks, cryogenic containments with spillage & other components etc for the storage purpose at minus temperature Plant processing trains elements, complete with complete descriptions of heavy & light industrial equipment Utilities areas element for the integration with plant equipment Off sites element for sub assistance to aforesaid Intake Piping for circulation & delivery into plant equipment for cooling Seawater basin for storage of seawater & delivery to plant Piping, pipe supports, pipe sleepers & pipe racks for the product transportation & handling Service air & Instrument air circulation piping Chlorination plant & its system for the purpose of chlorinating the water
suraj_engineer@yahoo.co.uk

5

Page 5 of 663

IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h

5044. o 4093 c d

6 7 8

9

10

11

12

13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Storage & Warehousing for the physical handlings of subsidiaries Drainage infrastructure from plant to receiving basin & then to outfall structure through the discharge channels duly provided with metal lugs & channels Ditches completely lined to carry out to the final discharge the storm water from various catchments areas of the plant. Complete Package drainage system for, oily water, acid water, dusty water, sewage etc. Water line for the whole site for various purposes including loss prevention i.e. fire fighting with fresh water as well as back up sea water supply Cooling water line throughout the whole industrial area zone taking in water from the intake at sea, supplying to the industries & then through the return headers discharging to the sea directly after being supplied once as well as employing cooling water system technology to re-circulate the water & only make up water to be supplied. Pipe supports, pipe anchors, general anchors, big anchors/thrust blocks at various spacing. Pipes supports to be connected to sleepers & direct supports using structural steel connection for both direct clamping as well as achieving sliding action to make up for the expansion Electrical heat tracing system for the piping system carrying minus temperature liquid or gas to keep the pipe on required temperature not allowing freezing of the material for example Sulphur can freeze within pipe line. Administration as well as Amenities buildings elements for the operation & maintenance as well as supply that should contain various offices with access control Electrical main, sub stations, switchgears, package sub stations, Pump houses, Guard houses, Visitor’s areas, Ring Main Units, transformers, heavy duty armoured cables Central controlled as well as Operations building to control the whole plants from one single location Consumer receipt stations to be used by the consumer delivery control Pump houses at various locations Water retaining structures such as sumps, receiving basins, drainage channel, outfall discharge to the sea. Site security arrangements, fencing, surveillance Site telecommunications All loss prevention arrangements including internal & external fire fighting. Adequacy of plant & non- plant area of roads & paving, maintenance tracks, road crossings, utility crossings, road culverts, pipe culverts, transit manholes,
suraj_engineer@yahoo.co.uk

Page 6 of 663

IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h

5044. o 4093 c d

21 22 23 24

24

25 26

27 28

29

30

Soil erosion protection for the machines & equipment Facility bye product plants as extensions & every required elements for that. All related civil engineering disciplinary structures for the buildings, sheds, equipment vessels as well as other equipment. Vessels such as cracking furnace, wash water structures, cracked gas compressor, propane compressor, ethane compressor, boilers, auxiliary boilers, various types of spheres, steel tanks, fuel towers, rotary equipment, reciprocating equipment etc. Shall be a part of the plant & necessary foundations for these be constructed according to the requirement. Massive concrete blocks shall be required for many of such major foundations. Civil engineering foundation structural requirement shall vary from a simple machine plinth to independent footings to combined footing to strip footing to raft & piles as well as massive block foundations. Concrete shall generally be low heat cement based produced by using micro silica or GGBS ground granulated blast furnace slag replacement up to an extent of 70% as also pulverized fly ash PFA. The bases of pipe racks may be either steel structure or RCC construction. Foundations of the pipe racks shall generally be of RCC bases or independent footings. Overhead crossing shall be required at many locations for the pipe to jump over roads. Cathodic protection boyh critical & non critical requirement for the corrosion control of the reinforcement from a central control anode station shall also be necessary. Earthing for the individual structures, equipment as well as network. Coloured Covered Cable trenches RCC walled, buried directly to ground or cable ducts shall also be included in design forming a major part of the facility. These ducts shall be coordinated to various interface crossing requiring site resolutions to protect interface clashes. Heavy-duty Concrete pavement shall be required in the plant area for the purpose of the maintenance of the machines as well as movement of heavy vehicles. On the area where no pavement is included, stone aggregate shall be spread & compacted to avoid soil effect on the vessel or equipment. In addition important administration areas shall be given an attractive soft & hard landscape provision. Access security arrangement shall also be made with automatic controls using card readers etc.& installation of CCTV. Inclusion of flare towers & radio masts is also contemplated.

B

Components brief
suraj_engineer@yahoo.co.uk

Page 7 of 663

IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h

5044. o 4093 c d

LNG tanks- (Refer to photo) These components are meant to store Liquefied Natural Gas 80000cum capacity each within the steel tank. A RCC with pre-stress arrangement for the cables structure of about 80 m dia, 800 mm thick wall as we as a height of 50 m was used for the prevention spillage. Each tank was provided a spillage tank outside at finished ground level. The top of the tank was a permanent formed cupola structure raised to the level by compressed air. Cryogenic steel was used to maintain about (–)60 degrees temperature of the condensed gas. The concrete of the circular walls was poured using kwickform in 5 m lifts. A cantilever operational platform was constructed on the cupola. Compressors- (Refer to photo) Compressors are to be installed as a part of trains for the Ethylene production unit. Being heavy reciprocating machines to be installed on massive foundations at elevated levels tabletops are constructed resting on massive concrete foundation. Foundation concrete for one compressor being 400 cum about 25m long, 12 m wide as well as 2 m deep. This carried thick columns above to support tabletop. Steel plate inserted between the equipment & epoxy grout. Tabletops are constructed of thick framed slabs resting on thick columns. The arrangement of the tabletop slabs are complicated in all respects about civil as well as mechanical inserts. Such type of thick & massive elements require special type of cement probably with high slag replacement which could be pulverized fly ash or ground granulated fibres or microsilica. Particular arrangements are worked for the curing solutions for such low heat generating cements to effect thermal curing methods. Cracking gas furnaces- (Refer to photo) this meant for the purpose of cracking gas from the refinery as bye product for the transmission to the compressors for the production of ethane as well as propane. These are tall heavy structures vertically oriented in group of vessels & founded on a common base. Other structures (Refer to photo) included wash water structures, auxiliary boilers within the processing train. Also included various spheres to contain gases as well as tanks for storage. Foundations for the tanks are generally constructed of RCC ring beams. Other structures are provided with independent footings stripped using grade beams. Seawater basin- (Refer to photo) A RCC open reservoir meant to collect water from sea through 2 # 84” pipes, supply to the plant various trains requirement & after cooling the system dispose water to be disposed from the industrial locations to the receiving basin & then to outfall chamber. It is a huge voluminous open structure constructed of
Page 8 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo.co.uk

IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h

5044. o 4093 c d

RCC base slabs provided construction joints during construction, peripheral retaining walls up to 12 m high not more than 9 m panel as well as covered pump house area & baffles. Such structures must be water tight from all locations of the water storage portions duly tested for water tightness using BS 8007 criteria. Concrete protection is applied for both below ground as well as above ground surfaces. Many other stationary (Refer to photo) as well as vibratory equipments are included for the processing plants for which foundations are constructed accordingly either as footings bases or combined footings. These horizontal or vertical vessels are erected on these bases connected using anchor bolts & grouting done between the sitting steel plate & the top of concrete. For vibratory equipment, epoxy grouting is applied while for stationary, cementitious. Sump chambers – These covered chambers are used for the collection of water from various catchment areas & constructed of RCC underground structures duly tested for water tightness using BS 8007 criteria. Concrete protection is applied for both below ground as well as above ground surfaces. Manholes, catch basins, rainwater ditches, etc are constructed using RCC. Manholes are meant for the sewerage line oily manholes for oily discharge, catch basins for rainwater. Generally, these units are in large numbers for any plant area making it preferable to produce by pre casting on site for which all working details for the yard are required to be issued to site. Open ditches are constructed for the discharge of storm water. These ditches can also be used for the purpose to give way to fire water disposal during any fire on the installation. This may also be used for the purpose of any water line maintenance discharge from any single loop. At the commencement the section is shallow but as it reached moving within various catchments, the section is considerably deepened like a big drain. Piping (Refer to photo) of carbon steel or ductile iron or Fiber reinforced plastics family GRP, ERP, GRE etc are used depending on the requirement & structural adequacy to sustain various imposable stresses. Stress analysis is carried out for various loops giving the location of various supports as well as anchoring requirement. Various types of supports are designed for varying diameter of the pipes for the on ground or underground or aboveground use.
Page 9 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo.co.uk

IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h

5044. o 4093 c d

FRP (Fiber Reinforced Plastic) Pipes RTRP stands for reinforced thermosetting resin pipe, a composite material consisting of a thermosetting polymer, a type of polyster reinforced with glass or other fibers that provide strength & stiffness to a composite material. Different types of resins used for manufacturing GRP, GRV & GRE pipes are Isophthalic resin, Vinylester resin & Epoxy resin respectively that are selected according to the required properties like chemical resistance, temperature resistance & mechanical properties. The resins provide thermal & chemical properties such as glass transition temperature, resistance to heat, chemical resistance etc. required for finished product. The properties of GRP pipes can be varied by changing the ratio of raw materials as well as winding angle. These pipes consist of three layers adherent to each having different characteristics in relation to functional requirement. Inner Liner – Veil (Glass), Resin: CSM (Glass), Resin Structural wall - Roving (Glass), Resin External liner- Veil (Glass), Resin Inner Liner – Veil (Glass), Resin: CSM (Glass), Resin Inner Liner one is chemical resistant being in direct contact with fluid & therefore, responsible to resist chemical corrosion as well as permeability. The internal surface is particularly smooth to reduce the fluid head losses & also opposes the growth of minerals & algae. Lines has two monolithic sub layers. Inner in contact with fluid is reinforced with glass veil with a resin content 90 %, outer reinforced with CSM glass with resin content 70 % by weight. The standard liner thickness is about 0.5 to 1.5 mm. Structural wall - Roving (Glass), Resin Glass Reinforced layers guarantee the mechanical resistance of the whole pipe against stresses due to internal & external pressure, external loads as well as thermal loads. For GRP / GRV pipes, the layer is obtained by applying on the previous partly cured liner continuous riving of glass wetted with resin under controlled tension. For GRE pipes, the structural wall is wound directly on a wet liner. The layer can contain aggregates like silica sand if allowed by specifications while thickness depends on design conditions. External liner- Veil (Glass), Resin Topcoat or external liner is the outer layer of pipe consisting of pure resin. UV protectors may be added if so required to protect the pipe from solar exposure. In case of severe exposure condition like aggressive soils or very corrosive environment, the external liner
Page 10 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo.co.uk

IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h

5044. o 4093 c d

can be reinforced with a surfing veil or added with filters or pigments. Fiberglass composites consist of glass fiber reinforcements, thermosetting resins & additives designed & processed to meet specific functional performance criteria. Amount, type & orientation of glass fibers in pipe provides mechanical strength. C Glass, E glass & ECR / Advantex glass are used commonly depending on pipe application. Various forms of glass reinforcements are surface veil, chopped strand mat (CSM), chopped roving, filament roving & woven roving (WR). Raw materials like catalyst, accelerators, inhibitors, aggregates & pigments are used together with resin & glass reinforcements to achieve desired properties of fiber glass product. Catalyst is an organic compound which when added to resin in presence of an accelerator determines the polymerization reaction at ambient temperature. Acceletor is a chemical compound used together with a catalyst to shorten the polymerization time. Inhibitor is added to the resin to reduce reactivity at ambient temperature. There are two manufacturing processes Dual helical filament winding process & the other being Continuous winding process (Drostholm) Pipe racks (Refer to photo) are used for the purpose of running the piping from one point to the other over ground levels. These are generally steel structures founding on RCC footings but RCC frames structures are also used. Several km of pipes are run on these racks supported & anchored to the rack structures. These are fully accessible structures for maintenance purpose. Open flooring is provided. Heat tracing is applied on the piping carrying minus degree gas which may freeze during flow & block pipes for the protection of which, the heat is continuously maintained on the piping to keep the gas in the condensed form. Various loops are provided on the piping routes for various purposes. Pipe supports / sleepers are used for the purpose of carrying the pipes at near ground levels. These are RCC units located at defined spacing. For direct support of the pipes, steel structural supports are used remaining connected or touching pipe by shoes over lengths at various spacing meant for the purpose of sliding also. For deciding the locations of the supports & the anchorage, stress analysis is conducted that dictates the spacing, dimensions & the pipe structural base design. For a pipe of dia not more than 4 m, not more than 12 m spacing is adopted. For other smaller dia pipes, the spacing depends up on the standard length of the pipes. Pipes that need sliding movement at the joints are provided such a base that allows the movement of the pipe in the direction
Page 11 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo.co.uk

IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h

5044. o 4093 c d

of its run. For that, PTFE (Poly Tetra Fluro Ethylene) bearings fixed on steel plates duly designed to withstand imposed force are provided. Below the pipe support shoe steel portion, a stainless steel plate is provided so that this plate slides over the PTFE pads. Anchor sleepers, big sleepers, thrust blocks are used at various points depending on the stress analysis requirement on the en-route pipeline. These are thick & voluminous structures requiring thousand of cum of RCC for an individual sleeper connecting a group of pipes. On the pipe loops various kinds of stresses from all directions are imposed during operations or flows which are to be resisted by these sleepers. At the change in directions of the pipe routes as well as at the Tee locations etc, big sleepers or thrust blocks are provided to resist the resultant forces. These are constructed of massive blocks of RCC. Access platforms are constructed to access to an area above the pipe level for the maintenance purpose. EOT cranes are installed for the maintenance as well as lifting & placing the pipes & other items in the shops. These also meet the crossing over pipes requirement. Proper ladders, handrails & open floorings are provided for the safe access. RCC box culverts are used for the cross over of the underground pipes below roads. Pipes culverts are also used wherever required. For the accommodation of the spillage tanks, bunding is carried out around to hold oil during spillage. Pipes are connected to the base slab using steel connecting arrangements. Enough space is allowed for the maintenance purpose for free movement as well as circulation. Receiving basin is meant for the collection of used water purpose to further discharge into the outfall at the sea. This is also a considerable size of structure collecting water from the return piping headers discharge, letting it accumulate & the dispose into the outfall channel for further discharge into the sea. Various types of steel stop logs are installed to control the flow according to the capacity of the channel & the receiving basin keeping abreast also the maintenance function of the piping. Structure consists of RCC retaining walls in the flow direction & RCC base slab. Flare towers (Refer to photo) are required to establish a system to dispose safely into the environment the gases that cannot be used any further keeping in view that the compositions of the disposable gas does not deteriorate the environment. Height of these towers are kept considerably so that gases are burn away into the environment safely. Proper arrangements are done for the founding as well as the stability of the tall
Page 12 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo.co.uk

IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h

5044. o 4093 c d

structure. Pump houses are installed as large size & highly elevated steel buildings housing a train of various pumps, electrical equipment, chlorination plant, rotary drums, intake equipment etc. The piping is routed on ground, vertically as well as horizontally on various types of supports of complex design. Various types of structural steel access platforms are built for the operational & maintenance purpose. These water is pumped into the supply manifolds located just outside where is applied the chlorination & then the pipes are routed to the main route on ground up to various industrial users. Hundreds of thousand cum of RCC structures are built for the supporting bases as well as for the anchoring arrangements depending General components for other facilities ‘Train’ indicates the separate process trains. ‘String’ indicates parallel process line-ups of equipment within a train ‘Common’ to be used for equipment that does not exclusively belong to one train but serves the total complex. Process / Unit : Slug Catcher - Condensate Stabilisation (Column) - Flash Gas Compression - Acid Gas Removal - Dehydration, Mercaptan and - Mercury Removal Unit (Operating + Regeneration) Sulphur Recovery Unit; Sulphur Degassing - Claus Offgas Treating - Off-Gas Thermal Oxidation - NGL Extraction and Fractionation (Overall) - Refrigeration Unit - LPG and Ethane Treating Unit (LTU) - Field Condensate Treating - Plant Condensate Treating LIN & LOX Storage & Vapourisation - Air Separation Units (ASU’s) - SGP Reactors Syngas Treatment - Steam Methane Reformer SMR Unit - One SMR plus one Prereformer 1x 50% One SMR plus one Pre-reformer Hydrogen Manufacturing - One High Temperature Shift (HTS) and PSA unit with compression 1 x 50% One High Temperature Shift (HTS) and PSA unit with compression - Heavy Paraffin Synthesis - Water Distillation Unit - Catalyst Activation and Regeneration - Light Ends Stripper - Light Detergent Feedstock Heavy Paraffin Conversion - Synthetic Crude Distiller - High Vacuum Unit Catalytic Dewaxing - Base Oils Re-Distillation Reliability and availability, particularly system uptime are key project drivers. A
Page 13 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo.co.uk

IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h

5044. Page 14 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo.Water Distillation . o 4093 c d systems effectiveness model shall be developed for the complex comprising the base case configuration of the offshore facilities and GTL (Gas to liquid) plant configuration FEED for the project units so that the required overall system effectiveness of 335 stream days per annum is reached in a cost effective manner.The ASU’s main purpose shall be to produce oxygen for use in the SGP as well as also produce HP Nitrogen for the CAR unit.NGL Extraction and Fractionation . Onshore downstream: Synthesis The onshore downstream synthesis comprises Gasification Process.Air Separation Units.SRU Offgas Treating or SCOT Unit . Treating of the ethane (ethane recovery and treating facilities shall be installed later) and LPG products to further remove residual traces of sulphur.Catalyst Activation & Regeneration .Sulphur Recovery (Claus Unit) and Storage . Condensate and water / kinetic hydrate inhibitor (KHI) & corrosion inhibitor ex the slug catcher are separated.comprises Slug Catcher .Condensate Stabilisation .co. The sulphur components so removed shall be converted to elemental sulphur for export as liquid sulphur. LP Nitrogen and compressed air for use as site utilities.Dehydration and Mercaptan Removal .Acid Gas Removal . there shall be multiphase carbon-steel trunk line to the common slug catcher.Steam Methane Reformer . water. Chemical injection and regular pigging shall be applied for corrosion as well as hydrate formation inhibition to the carbon steel lines. CO2 and mercury from the feed gas. water and CO2. The produced fluids are received into the slug catcher in the upstream onshore facilities. Onshore upstream .Hydrogen Manufacturing . From each platform. Condensate is stabilised and treated (for sulphur removal / conversion) for export sales.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h .Final treating for finished NGL products: LPG and Ethane Treating Unit Field and Plant Condensate Treating In the Onshore Upstream facilities. Water is sent to a dedicated effluent treatment which caters for the KHI and possible saline components. Wet feed gas ex the slug catcher is routed to gas treatment followed by NGL extraction and fraction.Heavy Paraffin Synthesis. The offshore development concept is based on direct transportation of the produced fluids and gas from the wells on platforms to shore without any offshore process or treatment. The gas treating facilities remove sulphur components.

The CAR Unit shall be used to regenerate the HPS reactor catalyst. SCD & Base Oil (HVU. the throughput of the complex is limited by the capacity in the HPC (one single maximum size reactor per train). The remainder of the HPS product shall be routed to the HPC where the paraffinic molecules are cracked and isomerised into middle distillate range components. Onshore downstream: Liquids processing The onshore downstream liquids processing scope comprises Light Ends Stripper . the SCD bottom product stream shall be recycled to extinction back to the HPC.Synthetic Crude Distillation & Stabilisation. Gas Oil and an SCD bottom product stream.5044. which are subsequently distilled by the SCD into LPG. components shall be recovered and after hydrogenation. The HMU uses a High Temperature Shift (on a part of the SMR syngas) and a PSA Unit to produce an ultra pure H2 stream mainly for use as a reactant in the SMR and the Liquids Processing Unit.co. a Waxy Raffinate fraction and a residual fraction.Heavy Paraffin Conversion . The SMR syngas has a higher H2 content than the SGP syngas and is used to supplement the syngas feed going to the second stage of the HPS reactors. The reaction in the HPS follows the Fischer-Tropsch chemistry and produces significant quantities of process water as a by-product. For the no Base Oil case. o 4093 c d In the SGP syngas shall be produced from natural gas (NG) and oxygen by partial oxidation. The WDU shall be used to strip hydrocarbons from the process water which be subsequently sent to the effluent treatment plant for recovery. The SGP syngas requires treatment to remove soot and undesirable by-products. LDF. Naphtha. CO and CO2 be removed. that is recycled to the HPC.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . In the LDF Unit. Kerosene. HPC.Light Detergent Feedstock Units Base Oil Units: High Vacuum Unit . the SCD bottom product stream is routed to the HVU for further separation into Vacuum Gas Oil. Page 15 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. In the LES Unit water. The Waxy Raffinate fraction is shall be catalytically isomerised in the CDW and then separated into products according to boiling range and viscosity in the RDU.Catalytic De-Waxing Unit . In the SMR hydrogen rich syngas shall be produced from NG and steam by a catalytic reforming process.Base Oils Re-distillation Unit The LES. In the “No Base Oil” mode. In the “Base Oil” mode of operation. The SGP produces the majority of the syngas for subsequent conversion to a synthetic heavy paraffin stream in the HPS. CDW and RDU) Units shall be also collectively referred to as the Liquids Processing Unit or LPU. rundown to storage for sale as a product.

Liquid sulphur shall be piped to common RLC facilities.Storage and Loading Facilities including onsite product storage . storage and export.Storage and Offsite Systems comprise Relief & Blow down System. General.Cooling Water System .co.Flushing Oil System . 6. It shall be used for verification of selection and detailing / sizing of equipment for procurement engineering Page 16 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Collection and Primary Treatment Effluent Water Treatment . Auxiliary boilers and gas turbines with Heat Recovery Steam Generators (HRSGs) shall be included to facilitate black start capability. Field condensate shall be stored in an on-site as well as an off-site shipping tank prior to export via the RLC harbour. Design Basis – Mechanical Equipment Table Of Contents 1. The steam shall be generated in the synthesis section thereby effectively utilising the exothermic heat of the process reactions. Chilled Water and Closed . Supporting facilities: Storage & off-sites . plant condensate (blended with naphtha) and GTL products shall be stored on site and transported to the RLC harbour for shipping. o 4093 c d Supporting facilities: Utilities Utility systems comprise . Shop Testing Design Basis – Mechanical Equipment Objective The purpose of this part is to provide the design basis for all mechanical equipment (rotating equipment + static equipment) on scheme.Sour Water Stripper . LPG shall be transported directly to the RLC facilities for refrigeration. 4. 3.Boiler Feed Water. to enhance reliability of the steam and power system. Design Basis – Mechanical Equipment.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Demineralised. List Of Codes. Specifications and Standards. Steam and gas turbines shall be provided for shaft power and generation of electrical power.Raw.Instrument and Tool Air System . 5. Equipment Selection. In general. Potable & Service Water Systems . including flares .5044. Cooling shall be principally by air but cooling water may also used where appropriate. 2.Drainage. Steam is the principal heating medium but fired heaters and a heat transfer fluid system shall be provided for specific applications. Steam & Condensate Systems .Aqueous Ammonia System Utility systems shall be designed to allow stand-alone operation of the GTL complex.Power Generation and Distribution Cooling Water Systems: Cooling Water System. Spare Parts.Nitrogen System .Heat Transfer Fluid System .Slops & Intermediate Storage.

Technical Specification of Vibration Monitoring System.7% reliability. documents listed in the Requisition and applicable specification / data sheets included elsewhere for the consideration as part of the FEED. Equipment specifications and data sheets included elsewhere for the consideration as part of the FEED. saliferous and highly corrosive atmosphere prevalent at open Coastal area. o 4093 c d (while developing EPIC documentation). The plant facility design and installation shall consider 100% equipment redundancy (where applicable). be designed and constructed for a minimum service life of 30 years with equipment providing at least 2 years of uninterrupted continuous service while first major over-haul requirement not before 10-years being a design criterion. Specifications and Standards The main cooling water pumps and associated auxiliaries and other mechanical equipment shall be designed and manufactured in compliance with the Requisition. Plate Heat Exchangers – Design and Construction RA Piping General Design. Standards and Reference Documents The Equipment Specification lists the applicable International Codes and Standards. RA Pressure Vessels. The Basic Engineering Data developed shall be applied for development of FEED documents. Applicable Codes. Piping Material Specification. 100% availability of the plant. Lifting Equipment Technical Regulations. start up. Equipment selection to ensure 99. Company standards applicable to other disciplines shall be listed in individual. Surfaces. Diesel Engines. Vendor experience for previous supply of at least 2 validly similar design equipment and proven track record of at least two years trouble free running history / experience (in conditions similar to this project conditions) shall be applicable. Page 17 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. The packages and equipment shall be suitable for outdoor installation in salt laden. Diesel Engine Driven Generator. General.5044.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Project Design Basis. shutdown and emergency. List Of Codes. RA Above ground Welded Storage Tanks. Reference to any Standards or Codes shall mean the latest edition of that Standard or Code including addenda or supplements or revisions thereto as on the effective date of contract. company specifications. Equipment Identification and Tag Numbering. Project Documents. Design Life & Experience Mechanical Equipment and associated auxiliaries shall be suitable for the specified operating conditions including any upset. RA Pressure Vessel Design and Fabrication.co. Standard Specification for Painting and Wrapping of Metal. RA Air Cooled Heat Exchanger Design and Fabrication. environmental conditions.

NFPA20 Standard for the Installation of Stationary Centrifugal Fire Pumps for fire Protection. Chapter V Basic Data for Wind loads Part2. BS CP3. V Non-Destructive Examination. ASME B16. ISO 1940 Mechanical Vibration – Balance Requirements of Rigid Rotors.co. BS 848 Fans for General Service. ASME B16. HI Standards (HI-2. Chemical and Gas Industry Service. Safe to operate and Maintain.VIII Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels (Div. ISO : 10440 (Part 2) Packaged Air Compressors (Oil Free). ISO 2858 End Suction Centrifugal Pumps. Nameplates shall be in SS316 materials. Method for Mechanical Testing of Steel Products The principles to be adopted during the selection & specification of prime equipment and equipment within the package can be summarised as follows: Design life being 30 years. II Material Specifications (Part A. Heavy Duty Chemical and Gas Industry Services (relevant sections shall be applicable). High availability. The nameplates indicating major design parameters / specified parameters shall be screw attached to the equipment. ISO:3046 Standards for Combustion Ignition Engines.2M Vertical Centrifugal Pumps. API 670 Vibration. Axial Position and Bearing Temperature Monitoring. I). Systems. AWWA American Water Works Association.6) Hydraulic Institute Standards on Centrifugal Pumps. API 526 Flanged Steel Pressure Relief Valve BSEN 13414 Steel Wire Rope Slings. B. ASME B31. Typical subjects to be addressed / considered during the equipment selection and final preparation of the purchase requisitions are addressed in the following sections. BSEN 10204 Types of Inspection Documents – Metallic Product. Safety Standards.5044. o 4093 c d International Codes and Standards API RP 500 Recommended Practice for Classification of Location of Electrical Installation. ASME Sec. IX Welding and Brazing Qualifications. ASME Sec. ASME B16.3 Petroleum Refinery Piping. API 2000 Venting Atmospheric and Low Pressure Tanks. Page 18 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. FEM Standards Federation of European Manufacture Standards on Drum Screens.5 Steel Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. NFPA 24 Standard for Installation of Fire Mains. API 650 Welded Steel Tanks UBC Uniform Building Codes (Earth Quake Zones). ASME Sec. ISO 9001 International Organisation for Standardisation. API 520 Sizing Selection and Installation of Pressure Relieving Devices. ASME Sec.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. API 610 Centrifugal Pumps for Petroleum. API 675 Positive Displacement Pumps – Controlled Volume. C & D). API 673 Centrifugal fans for Petroleum.1M Horizontal Centrifugal Pumps. Standard / Proven Equipment Model. ANSI B 73. ASME B30 Crane Safety Standards.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . AMCA Air Movement and Control Association. ANSI B73. ASTM A370 American Society for Testing and Materials – Standard Test.47 Large diameter steel flanges (NPS 26” to NPS 60”).

Equipment Covered This design basis covers the requirement for the following equipment :  Main Cooling Water Pumps . mixed  flow seawater service Pumps complete with electric motor drive.Vertically suspended.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Instrumentation / Controls Equipment Supplier shall include all required package / equipment / auxiliaries controls for safe operation of equipment. includes sump pumps and drain water pumps. consider / advise measures that would be applied when equipment noise level exceeds to noise level specified at respective specification and data sheets. Data sheets and P&ID’s. VSD. includes hypochlorite dosing pumps / dilution  pumps etc.co.  Local Control Panel (LCP) and associated auxiliaries. Where it is not feasible despite the best design available. Supplier shall submit estimated noise level. The instrumentation for communication with DCS shall be included to comply with requirements specified in respective Equipment Specifications. Effort shall be made to standardise the spares stocking by minimising the variety of makes and types of auxiliary equipment used within the package. o 4093 c d Equipment Standardization The design of rotating / mechanical equipment shall ensure high equipment availability and maintainability. Transformer.  Submersible Motor Pumps (Portable).  Centrifugal Pumps (General Service). This standardisation shall be applied so far as it does not interfere with the selection of an optimal solution for the specified operating conditions and duly considered equipment to minimize spares stocking. submerged pump end.  Firewater Pumps (as per NFPA 20) Page 19 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Noise Equipment design shall meet the noise level (85 dBA @ 1m) specified in Company standards. acoustic enclosures and / or acoustic insulation shall be provided. It is Supplier’s full responsibility to ensure that noise level of supplied equipment (including drive equipment as a combined unit) shall not exceed the maximum allowable as specified in Project HSE Plan.5044. Effort shall be made to select equipment with low noise level.

Pumps line shaft bearings shall be service fluid lubricated however. Mechanical Plant. The pump houses being in non-hazardous area while the pumps are operating in very corrosive environment i. Coupling guards shall be made from non-sparking material. The pumps shall be shop assembled to the maximum extent possible to consider minimum site assembly work and shipment limitations. The vertical centrifugal pumps handling liquids whose vapour pressure is below atmospheric pressure. wind etc. Pumps shall be in parallel Page 20 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo.e. vertically suspended. The pump datasheets shall address the pump drive train requirements.5044.  Workshop / Warehouse and Piping Manifold area cranes)  Fixed Bar Screens cooling water common raking facility  Rotating Drum Screens  Stop Logs (Intake and Receiving Basin)  Emergency Diesel Generator Set. The offered vibration monitoring system for pump / motor shall be in compliance with API 670 recommendations. o 4093 c d  Instrument Air Compressor and Dryer Package  Centrifugal Fan (at Hydrogen disengagement Tank of Chlorination Plant)  EOT Cranes / Semi Portal Cranes (Pump house. Receiving Basin. submerged pump end mixed flow seawater service line shaft Pumps with right angle discharge head shall comply with Project Specification requirements.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . dust. Supplier incorporate pump bearing design or operation strategy that shall take care of start-up scenario of stand-by pumps that would be with dried up bearings. salt laden sea mist. The pumps and auxiliary items located at Pump House shall be designed for outdoor conditions as pump house is only a shelter with partially covered sides.co. can be provided with gland packing suitable for the service. vibration levels. Flexible coupling shall be selected for the duty by main cooling water pump sets’ Vendor. line shaft and thrust bearing design criteria etc). Local Control Panel (LCP) and complete electrical set-up shall be provided by Pump Vendor (single point responsibility for Tender Scope). HIS Standards and in general compliance to API 610 Standards (where applicable for this service such as pump rotor dynamics.  Vessels and Storage Tanks  Electro Chlorination Plant Equipment Equipment Selection Main Cooling Water Pump Sets The electric motor driven (through VSD). VSD’s.

In case of blocked discharge the specific unit shall be able to withstand shut off head condition for at least 5 minutes without any damage to pump and its auxiliary items. Pumps shall have head curves rising continuously to shutoff. In case of CCV failure. the selection correctness i. shall comply with requirements of API 682. Two-stage overhung and single stage double suction overhung pumps shall not be offered. o 4093 c d operation with head rising continuously to shutoff are required. Pumps shall be selected so that it is possible to achieve 10% head rise / 5% head decrease at rated capacity by replacement with new impellers.e.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Complete testing requirements shall be as specified in pump specification and Data sheets elsewhere.co. Pumps selection shall consider common pump model (to the extent feasible) that provides stable continuous operating range and includes governing process flow requirements. Maximum allowable flow shall not be less than 120% of best efficiency capacity of the rated impeller. Pump model testing is required. Pump impellers shall be closed or semi-open type – open impellers are not acceptable. Centrifugal Pumps (General Service) Centrifugal pumps for non-hydrocarbon service shall comply with Project Specification and ANSI Standards B 73. the specific unit shall be able to withstand reverse rotation up to full speed.5044. Pump construction shall be specified on the pump datasheet elsewhere. The mechanical seal when specified in data sheet. compatibility to service fluid / material grades availability etc. Seal system piping shall be as a minimum in SS 316L or suitable to service.2 M and ISO 2858. Material of construction of Page 21 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Pump’s right angle discharge head shall be with expansion-joint to tie-in with downstream flanged CCV (Combined Check Valve). To achieve this pump model commonality the pump driver could be of different rating and of different VSD speed range. shall be the Suppliers’ responsibility for providing right pump sets for the service. Pumps materials for major items / wetted parts shall be specified in Pump data sheets for Vendor review. Shutoff head shall preferably be in the range of 110 .1 M or B 73. Use of inducers to enhance NPSH is not acceptable. Pump set items shall be new and shall be selected by Pump Vendor to provide the single point responsibility of meeting specified pump duty requirements and service.120% of rated head. Mechanical seal design and material selection shall be suitable for the service fluid continuous operation with maximum operating temperature.

When piping sections are to be cleaned from sediments. Firewater Pumps Fresh water service Firewater Pumps shall be planned to provide fire protection to equipment by deluge. The Manufacturer’s Standard design shall be acceptable for sump pit installation drainage duty portable submersible motor-pumps. The pump motor shall be water jacketed to provide cooling to motor by service fluid.5kW 120 20 – 55kW 110 = 75kW 105. Coupling shall be forged steel flexible type with spacer. The horizontal centrifugal type Fire Pump sets shall be in accordance with NFPA (National Fire Protection Association) 20 design requirements. water flow test devices etc. o 4093 c d pump components shall meet the requirements as specified in equipment data sheet and compatible to service. Page 22 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo.co. The pump motor shall be oil filled type and provided with two sets of mechanical seals for double security. An electric motor driven jockey (makeup) pump shall also be installed to maintain the header pressure of fire Main Ring. One pump set shall be with electric motor drive and other with a diesel engine driver.5044. The selected pumps shall be a listed one per Firewater Pumps specifications and pump requirements in-line with NFPA 20. Removable coupling guards shall be made from non sparking material suitable for very corrosive environment.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Motor Nameplate Rating Percentage of Rated Pump Power = 18. For safe custody. electric motor nameplate rating shall be as below. these pumps shall be stored in warehouse / maintenance workshop when not in use. Inspection and Tests shall be carried out as per Engineering Standards and as covered in applicable specification. The fire pump packages shall be with listed (UL / FM approved) pump set items and pump controller for fire protection service auxiliary items included in the packages comprise of circulation relief valve. Pump shall be fitted with cable and watertight cable connector. As a minimum. Sump Pumps (Portable Submersible Motor-Pumps) Portable Submersible Motor Pump shall be utilised for dewatering of pump house and receiving basins. The tough duty submersible-motor pump’s housing and impeller shall be in aluminum bronze (or alternately in super duplex stainless steel) material and all major components subjected to wear be coated with polyurethane for longer service life in fine grain abrasive application. These drainage pumps shall be with lifting hook for portability and placed / lowered in sump pits of pump basin / receiving basin area whenever basin emptying is planned. The pump impeller shall be semi open type. the pumps are required to be compatible with nature of seawater service fluid with sediments / grits.

When more than one pump is installed on single suction line. Metering devices for pump tests shall be listed. The plant facility shall be provided with two numbers of packages operating under lead lag basis. The diesel engine and drive train components shall be listed items for the fire pump service. Package Start / Stop and lead / lag operation shall be monitored from skid installed UCP on pressure level signals.co. Air Compressor shall be oil-free. The controllers for the motor and diesel engine shall comply to specification of NFPA 20 Chapter 7 (motor) / Chapter 9 (engine).uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Each pump shall have automatic relief valve listed for the fire pump service installed and set below the shutoff pressure at minimum expected suction pressure. The oil-field type Page 23 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. o 4093 c d Pumps shall get supply from storage tank(s) of adequate capacity for the expected duration.5044. Package units (train of compressor and dryer) shall be installed on single lift skid and compressor unit be inside its enclosure for sound attenuation. Fire Pump Driver – The lead fire pump and Jockey pump shall be with electric motor drive while back-up fire pump with diesel engine drive. lube oil console and air cooler for lube oil and compressed air (inter and after cooler of compressor). Fire pump shall not furnish less than 150% of rated capacity at a total head of not less than 65% of the rated head and total shutoff head shall not exceed 140% of the rated head. The flexible coupling between pump and driver shall also be listed for the service. Each individual pump shall be tested at the factory to provide detailed performance data and demonstrate compliance to specification. Each pump shall have its own test loop. the suction pipe layout at the pumps shall be arranged so that each pump receive its proportional supply. Jockey / Make-up pumps shall have rated capacities not less than any normal leakage rate and discharge pressure sufficient to maintain the system pressure. Instrument Air Compressor – Dryer Package The Air Compressor – Dryer Package construction shall be to Vendor Standards designed for Coastal Area installations. The Fire Pump installation shall include water flow test devices to allow test of the pump at its rated conditions as well as the maximum flow condition. Controls – Each pump shall have its dedicated driver and each driver its controller. air cooled. The daily maximum average temperature shall be considered for compressor and its compressed air cooler sizing. electric motor driven Screw type Air Compressor unit complete with its UCP (Unit Control Panel). Pump capacity selection shall be to NFPA 20 rated provisions and be specified at respective data sheets. The automatically controlled Fire Pumps shall be provided with a listed float operated air release valve (when automatically controlled deluge system is planned).

Fans shall be shop tested for the performance and stand by switch-over controls.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . A common facility delivering complete plant needs including instrument air needed for Chlorination Plant is envisaged in this Phase of project. Fans shall be provided with barrier type filter systems.5044. The power distribution to the long travel is by enclosed type bus bars system (with rubber lip seal) and cross travel / hoisting power distribution is through power festoon cable system. Air Dryer unit shall be heatless PSA (Pressure Swing Adsorption) type complete with twin molecular seive (aluminum silicate) desiccants towers and timer based controls for air flow switch-over.co. Fans shall be sized to deliver the air flow & differential pressure required for the H2 disengagement duty under all operating conditions. o 4093 c d air-to-air heat exchange cooler in SS316 (SS – Stainless Steel) or construction with marine installation coating shall be specified to provide rugged construction in corrosive sea coast environment. the possibility of extending the long travel of installed crane and any considerations for additional second crane shall be reviewed (as a separate study) and study recommendations shall be implemented. DCS communication as per package P&ID shall be achievable as a minimum battery limit pressure. The power margin for electric motor drivers shall be in accordance with Specification at the rated conditions. Currently PH has one 17m span crane with main hook capacity of 60T and auxiliary hook capacity of 14T. Electric Overhead Travelling (EOT) Cranes / Semi Portal Cranes EOT Crane The Pump House is provided with maintenance duty EOT Crane to handle load lifts during pump overhaul and general lifting needs. temperature and dew point level shall be reported besides running status. In Project. The compressed air temperature down stream of air cooler shall be limited to 58°C (with air cooler sized for ambient temperature of 50°C). This unit shall be located downstream of Air Compressor unit and shall handle specified flow delivered by upstream air compressor unit. Compressed air shall be stored in Plant’s Service Air Storage Vessel and dried instrument quality air stored at Instrument Air Storage Vessel sized to cater for the Plant needs. Package instrumentation (PLC controls) for lead-lag controls shall be in Vendor’s local control cabinet. The crane construction as defined below Page 24 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Fans (Cf Blower) .Fans shall comply with requirements of specifications generally per API 673 and company engineering standard. Normally two fans (2 x 100%) shall be installed each to run and deliver the required dilution air – with automatic switch over controls to other fan in case one fan trips. filter shall be suitable for severe sandy & dusty atmosphere with rain hood and bird-screen.

511) and suitable for safe area outdoor location (though installed in Pump house shelter).co. Crane shall also be provided with remote radio communication set-up for crane operator use. The complete crane shall be designed to provide access platform / service walk-way for servicing the equipment and flood-lights to illumine the work area. The power distribution to the cross travel and hoisting motion is through power festoon cable system and long travel by cable reel. Page 25 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. the possibility of extending the long travel of installed crane and any considerations for additional second crane shall be reviewed as a separate study. crane controls to incorporate normal and creep speed motion controls for precise adjustment. The crane shall be with operator cabin located at one end of the crane bridge (girder) & provided with remote radio communication set-up for crane operator use. Currently has one semi-portal 23m span crane with main hook capacity of 10T.511) and suitable for safe area outdoor location. Complete crane shall be designed to provide access platform / service walkway for servicing the equipment and floodlights shall be attached to the crane bridge for work area lighting. Crane load lift capacity per Phase crane and provision for auxiliary hook shall be maintained as the load lifts provision are with adequate margin.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . A suitable sun shield shall be provided for the festoon cables – when in the parked position. o 4093 c d shall apply for any additional crane purchase. The EOT Crane shall be top running double girder type designed for maintenance duty class 2M (FEM 9. The crane construction as defined below shall be applied when any additional crane purchase shall be in picture. The crane shall be with crane operator cabin located at one end of the crane bridge (girder). In Project. The power distribution to the long travel shall be through enclosed type 7-bus bar system (with rubber lip seal) and cross travel / hoist motion power supply through power festoon cable system. Crane load lift capacity per Phase crane shall be maintained as the load lifts provision is with adequate margin. Semi Portal Crane The Mechanical Plant (Screen Yard) is provided with maintenance duty Semi-Portal Crane to handle load lifts during drum screen overhaul and general stop log lifting needs. The crane shall be designed for maintenance duty class 2M (FEM 9. The power distribution to the long / cross travel and hoisting motion shall be Similar to Phase power distribution system.5044. The semi portal Crane shall be top running double girder type electric overhead traveling crane with one end of the crane bridge supported at runway beam and other end resting on a portal frame.

In addition one complete warehouse spare suspended grab bucket c/w hydraulic power pack shall be considered for the Phase facilities.Receiving Basin Area. The equipment construction shall be similar as stated in above. The common raking machine shall be grab bucket type rake assembly with replaceable tines. The screen bar panel shall be removable type and for easy cleaning these should be installed with 80 degree angle of installation.co.g. One number of rake machine for Pump House and rake machines for Pump House (1 op. Electro-Chlorination Plant and Piping Manifold Section. arrested in bar screens. + 1 sb.5 T of load) for disposal of rejects etc. The power distribution for cross travel. over head monorail traverse and power supply cable festoon. The assembly shall comprise of the following main components – electrically operated travelling trolley. hoist mechanism for grab bucket lowering and hoisting complete with PLC type Local Control Panel and pendant controls. E. Design Basis – Mechanical Equipment Alternate trash rake machine would also be reviewed to consider efficient scraping of bars at fixed bar screen panels (availability of traversing trash rake with scrapping in ascending action for reclamation of attached sea shells and barnacles from bar screen shall be investigated). The hoisting mechanism and hydraulic power pack shall be attached to traveling trolley. Mechanical Plant – Bar Screen and Raking Mechanism Bar screen panel consisting of fixed rectangular steel bar sections with 50 mm spacing shall be installed at pump intake basin (upstream of rotating drum screens). long travel and hoist motion shall be through power festoon cable system.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . o 4093 c d Other EOT Cranes The maintenance load lift facility e.O. hydraulically assisted grab bucket complete with associated hydraulic power pack.) shall be installed yet to remove trash / debris / marine seaweeds / sea shells etc. Mechanical Plant – Stop Logs Page 26 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. The crane load lift criteria as detailed in material handling study shall be accomplished. The screen panel size similar to PH installation shall be considered for this phase. Plant Workshop / Warehouse.T cranes of adequate capacity shall be installed at the following Plant Facility areas .5044. trash / debris bin (to hold and carry 0.

coating/painting requirements and other corrosion protection system viz. The drum screen shall be provided with PLC type local control panel (LCP). Vessels and Storage Tanks Pressure Vessels Pressure vessel shall be designed in accordance with ASME SEC VIII. The screen panel backwash set-up shall be incorporated in drum screen design for efficient screening operation.co. Guide frame for each stop log shall also be provided by the stop logs supplier to embed in pump house civil work. The Drum Screen Supplier shall include Lubrication console for Pillow Blocks Bearing. The drum shall be shaft mounted and supported on bearing block at both the ends. cathodic protection as applicable. The sealing between the civil work and screen drum to eliminate by-pass of fed seawater shall be achieved as per the recommendation / arrangement offered by the equipment supplier. of pump basins. The stop log items supply and construction specification shall include material of construction. The installation shall be provided with service / inspection platforms and suitable structure for falling object protection to service the equipment even in operation. Stop log designs construction and supply shall include equalising valve and a common lifting beam (Vendor supplied) with adequately sized slings. The inner periphery of drum shall be with elevated plate buckets to lift the screenings up to debris hopper located inside the screen structure. The rotating motion to drum screen shall be through rack and pinion drive. the LCP shall also be interfaced with DCS. rack shall be in sectors for attachment to drum by bolting. o 4093 c d Plate gates type Stop Logs (stop gates) similar to Phase I installation and dimensions compatible with civil design shall be planned for pump channels. The Drum Screen shall consist of a rotating structure for drum and wire mesh panels attached to drum periphery.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h .5044. Rotating Drum Screens The double side entry and central rejects disposal type rotating Drum Screen with 3 mm (~ 6 mesh) opening wire mesh panels (removable panels) shall be installed for fine screening of intake seawater. DIV-1 ‘Boiler and Pressure Vessels: Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels’ and shall be code Page 27 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. this debris hopper shall be in two separated section to allow rotation of drum supporting structural members. The logs are not in use. The equipment shall be for sea water service as such construction in Duplex Stainless Steel (DSS) materials (of suitable ASTM grade) is envisaged in Phase II of the project. interfaced with water differential level instrument and drum screen drive to monitor & control operational speed. One screen shall serve 2 nos.

Emergency Diesel Generator Set Emergency Diesel Generator (EDG) set shall comply with requirements of Company standard and specification. then sump shall be equipped with a drain pipe with flanged nozzle. Wind and earthquake loadings shall not to be considered to act simultaneously. Rectangular tanks (if applicable) shall be designed in accordance with “Roark’s Formulas for Stress and Strain” published by author Warren C. The minimum shell and head thickness for carbon steel pressure vessels.co. trunnions and lifting lugs shall be designed to withstand the equipment lifting weight considering an impact factor of 1. All vessel nozzles connections are to be flanged connections. Fixed roof tanks shall be of cone roof. The EDG package shall be self contained and shall not Page 28 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. inspection. Tanks shall also comply with requirements of COMPANY standard and specification. material fabrication. unless otherwise specified on datasheet. Storage Tanks Design. without any internal coating. Wind and earthquake loadings shall be calculated in accordance with standards. Vessel heads shall be 2:1 ellipsoidal. shall be 3 mm unless specified otherwise in the datasheets.) or end flanges as specified in equipment datasheets.0 mm. testing and preparation for shipment (where applicable) of welded steel tanks shall be in accordance with API-650. Wind design loadings to be in accordance with BS CP3. Tank bottoms shall be sloped downward conically (either crown up or crown down) as specified in the data sheets. The equipment and relevant lifting accessories as tailing lugs. Tank shall be designed for earthquake loadings according to Uniform Building Code (UBC) with applicable Zone number as 1. Part 2. Young or similar structural design practices. erection (where applicable). If tank is provided with drainage sumps. The structural access platforms for operation / servicing shall be supplied and installed by others.5. The minimum corrosion allowance shall be added to both sides of nonremovable CS internals when exposed to corrosive fluid or vapour.5044. Pressure / Vacuum relief devices shall be provided. however attachment clips shall be provided on the vessels. Pressure vessels shall also comply with requirements of COMPANY standard and specification. o 4093 c d stamped. Removable CS internal parts shall be provided with corrosion allowance equal to half the specified value on each surface exposed to corrosion fluid or vapour. if tank is designed for pressure/ vacuum conditions. Chapter V.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Vessels shall be with manholes (24” min. including corrosion allowance shall be 6.) / handholes (12” min. The minimum internal corrosion allowance for carbon steel and low alloy steel vessels. These shall be provided for ease of servicing and operation and complete with davit.

Supplier shall prepare project specific QA plan / Inspection & Test plan. spare parts for pre-commissioning. turbocharged type and provided with primary battery start-up and back-up start by compressed service air of plant supply. EDG Room ventilation shall be achieved by suitably over sizing the motor driven radiator fan. Day tank may be part of the diesel engine generator skid or as a separate tank outside the skid.co. It shall be possible to start the EDG package from remote systems on failure of mains supply or manually from the package itself. o 4093 c d depend on external utilities for operation. Generator & other electrical equipment shall comply with requirements specified in the Company Standard Electrical Specification – Diesel Engine Driven Generator / Electrical Design Basis. Engine shall be radiator cooled. Shop Testing Main equipment and auxiliaries shall undergo shop and site testing. EDG shall be located indoor. Supplier shall prepare test procedures for specified tests and submit the same for Company / Contractor review / approval. The fuel system shall include spring loaded fuel valve (actuated by fusible plug / melting fuse) that shall shut upon “FIRE”. to meet the specified noise levels. Generally. Procedures shall be in line with requirements of contract specification / applicable international standards as a minimum. Lubrication and cooling systems shall comply with requirements specified in ISO : 3046 and COMPANY standard. Day tank capacity shall be suitable for at least 8 hours running of the package at full load without replenishment. acceptance criteria etc. Based on the above requirements. commissioning & start up as well as for the defined maintenance period are provided. Suitable synchronising hardwired interface shall be provided for the same. The inspection & test plan and equipment data sheets shall identify Company / Contractor witness requirements clearly. Spare Parts Spare parts for main equipment and auxiliaries shall be in line with requirements specified in Project Spare Parts procedure and Company standards referred therein. Buildings on the plants are of two classes one being process while the other non Page 29 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Test procedures shall also identify the methodology of test.5044. EDG package shall be provided with a control panel which shall be located in the switchgear room away from the package. inside acoustically treated and ventilated building. Diesel engine of package shall be 4-stroke. applicable international standards.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Dedicated diesel fuel system shall be provided with a day tank.

The area where transformers are located are constructed around by firewalls. Information technology etc. Proper insulation is carried out for the building envelope to reduce the thermal heat flow into the buildings to maintain the required design conditions for economical air-conditioning. structured cabling. grills & diffusers. electrical installation of low power as well as high power. False ceiling. All reinforcing bars are clipped & wired naked maintaining the continuity of the bars. main & sub stations. Also included smoke detection systems along with fire fighting system for internal as well as for exterior use. volume control dampers. accessories & other controls. heavy equipment like lathe machines. amenities. steel furniture. Cathodic protection is used to control the corrosion of the reinforcement by providing electrode at the structure centrally controlled from one location. are included. security controls etc.co. racks etc Building services require HVAC chillers. air handling units. transformers etc. package units. Ducts for supply & return run in the plenum between the false ceiling & the slab soffit. all. Fresh water system is also included for the areas locating expensive & strategic equipment for electrical supply as well as emergency controls. sub main stations. This gas spreads in the unventilated space & extinguishes the fire immediately. control. trolleys. Electrical supply is distributed by Main station. lockers etc & tools. Also included CCTV. These steel buildings are provided with all mechanical furniture. wherein switchgears are accommodated. tool cabinets. gatehouses. warehouses etc.5044. Sub station comprises of HV & LV areas. cable cellars.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . operation. Generally administrative. fiber optics cabling. benches. Also included steel buildings for the industrial support purpose namely workshops. ducting. The buildings require equipments such as office furniture & also steel furniture such as lockers. switchgears transformers. fire fighting. Industries within plant area employ their individual systems for fire fighting bust preferably a sea water back up fire fighting system is also included as stand by. telecommunications. Page 30 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. forklift. fittings such as fire dampers. Fire suppression system is used in the buildings by the name FM 200 or Inergen etc to extinguish the fire within seconds & minutes. steel racks. o 4093 c d process. pump houses. shelving. radars controls. Cooling towers are installed when the supplied water is required to be re-circulated for many uses for the concerned industry in which case only makeup water is supplied to maintain the balance.

local equipment room. MCC-motor control centre. o 4093 c d For once through system. CW-cooling water. FMEA.above ground. ISTintegrated system test. IO&M-initial operating & maintenance. installation & commissioning. F&G-fire & gas system. PA/GA-public address / general alarm. PCS-process & utility control system. MOV-motor operated valve. LBV-line break valves. EPIC. GAD-general arrangement drawing. PDS. EWS-engineering work station. PDS-power distribution control centre. LLCC-local lot control centre. PH. PC-pre-commissioning. COMcommissioning. Easement. LER. ONAF-oil natural air forced. GRP.engineering. HVAC-heat ventilation & air conditioning. AFC-approved for construction.intermediate distribution frame. BFDblock flow diagram.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . PDS-plant design system. FO-fiber optics. GPS-geo positioning system. Contract award & Miscellaneous Abbreviations Some useful abbreviations generally used on the design documents for references:A / G . PEMS. PLS-programmable logical controller. PMS-power management system. CP-cathodic protection. the water is supplied & returned after cooling the industrial systems into the returned headers without any circulations. I / O-input /output. In some cases a combination of both could be adopted for economy. intool. GIS. MWS-marine warranty surveyor. & GRE piping). AFD-approved for design.process & Page 31 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo.glass reinforced polyester. MC-mechanical completion.power energy management system. GRE-glass reinforced epoxy. LAN-local area network. FRP-fiber reinforced plastic ( generic name including GRP.trade mark name of Intergraph software for instrumentation eng. ONON-oil natural air natural. ITP-inspection & test plans.glass reinforced vinyl Easter. P & ID. CCWS-common cooling water system. PABX-private automated telephone exchange.plesiochronous digital hierarchy. PFS-process flow scheme. procurement. CDR-conceptual design report. PIS-plant information system. MDF-main distribution frame.gas insulated switchgear. MTO-material take off. IDF. DCS-distributed control system. CCR-central control room. ICA-instrument. FEED-front end engineering design. CT-cooling tower. HSSD-high sensitivity smoke detection. ESDV-emergency shut down valve. CCTV-closed circuit television system. GRV. FAT-factory acceptance test.all and provided by Client to be used by Contractor for the purpose of construction.5044. PFD-process flow diagram. ---------------------------------Chapter 2 Project Design. GRV. FOTS-fiber optics transmission system. HMI-human machine interface.pump house. DC-direct current. control & automation.co.failure mode & effects analysis.

hydrographic engineers. SAFE.5044. SDH-synchronous digital hierarchy. Procurement & Installation contract award. QA/QC-quantity assurance/quality control.uk Page 32 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . U/Gunderground. This class of tendering necessitates a very competitive & competent bidders to be technically.co. UPS-uninterrupted power system. electrical engineers. RFQ-requisition for quotation. SPT sustained performance test.Engineering Procurement. UFS-utility flow scheme. PTZ-plant tilt zoom. NCS-National construction specification. EPIC.safety analysis function evaluation chart. geological engineers. ROW-right of way. 2 After having the basic design been desk conceptualized.Front End Engineering Design Involvement of multidisciplinary teams for the required designs. technology & construction details that is fed to the Client for inception of the whole scheme which the Client approves & based on FEED tender documents are prepared for the Engineering. commercially & in all respects a completely sound organization. PSV-pressure safety valve. civil engineers etc. TTL-transistor transistor logic. suraj_engineer@yahoo. VSDSvariable speed drive system FEED. further FEED detailed works shall be undertaken by all disciplinary teams for elaborate formations of various details to be used on the project. PSFS-process safety flow scheme. STM. SCADA-supervisory control & monitoring system. TETRA-trunked radio. IT engineers. shall be included to formulate an overall strategy of designing the plant system and supported by soil engineers. SubContractor. availability & maintainability. RB-receiving basin. reservoir engineers. chemical engineers. TPI-third party inspector. Installation & Construction EPC. TPC-Third Party Certification agency. Supplier. RMU-ring main unit. 1 Process engineers. VDRL-vendor data requisition list.Engineering Procurement & Construction Contractor. Complete Front End Loading is to be established & provided to the design scheme. o 4093 c d instrumentation diagram. RAM-reliability. PSS-plant safety system. UFD-utility flow diagram.synchronous time moduling. RFC-ready for commissioning. Vendor Sub Contractors as Engineering Consultants 3 Front End Engineering Design requires complete know how about the proposed facility design. mechanical engineers. RTU-remote transmission terminal unit. VSD-variable speed drive.

 These documents should be crystal clear without any ambiguity. 5 6 Project Tender Documents  The aforesaid teams of the engineers shall prepare all required documents necessary for the invitation of the EPIC tenders from the short listed parties. Design SubContractor shall also be included as support in case the EPIC organization is not a designer or consultancy group or not having an in-house design capability. other studies & observations. soil test reports. All disciplines shall be given full feed back in all respects in the form of project drawings. o 4093 c d 4 EPIC contracting requires complete design know how giving all detailed design calculations for the best & warranted performance of the facility as well as commercially competitive. marine survey report. EPIC contracting proposes its own SubContractors as well as vendors organization to be included as further support. The FEED contractor of the client should provide as much data as possible to enable the contractor to understand the client requirement fully for the EPIC implementation contract & price according. It must again be stressed that FEED is endorsed by the EPIC contractor while submitting bid as an evidence of acceptance of FEED & its incorporation on the detailed designs based on which the works shall be executed.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . bathymetric survey report. marine geological report. all other essential parts of the project demands.  Documents shall be provided in soft as well as hard copies  Production of such huge volume of design documents amounts to requirement of very experienced teams of experts for all disciplines to meet the schedule requirement Page 33 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. As far as possible.5044. climatic conditions.  Project design parameters should be explicitly defined.co. These documents must cover the basic requirement & design philosophy pertaining all disciplines to enable the bidder know each & every requirement precisely. All documents based on the aforesaid abbreviations are produced schematically while preparing the FEED documents for the information purpose to the bidder about the intention of the client requirement. details about the equipment to be included on the project should be given within the documents. quality standards to be adhered to. survey reports. All national & international codes to be followed should be enlisted explicitly. specifications. various milestones.

 Requirements for vendors’ selection  Pre-qualification  Prior to issuing any call for tender for critical items. supply of parts.  Make provisions for online monitoring of vital rotating machinery  Define criticality ratings for equipment. Contractor shall check Vendors' capabilities such as:  Ability to submit tenders conforming conforming quality requirements  Technical and financial long term stability. In particular Contractor shall:  Make permanent provisions for accessibility (without dismantling of other equipment).e. capability to supply after sales service for maintenance. integrate the maintenance requirements in the Vendor selection process.uk Page 34 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Bid Evaluation 1 Contractor shall take into account at the bid evaluation stage the following Criteria for Vendors selection and accordingly advise Vendors that their bids shall be evaluated on such basis so that the vendors must include any price if so effected by such considerations: suraj_engineer@yahoo. lay down and handling of heavy parts. sparing requirements for equipment. components and parts  Contractor shall prepare and submit the required maintenance documentation as generally defined in the relevant Exhibits. the performance and conformity tests. and obtain Vendor’s documentation generally defined as such. the quality control process of raw materials. o 4093 c d Maintenance Preparation Documents This though applies at the end of construction i.  Existence and suitability of Quality Assurance procedures within Vendor's structure.co. technical assistance.5044. dismantling/tooling. the assembly of components. mechanical completion of the project but information are required to be issued at the FEED stage for the evaluation purpose Contractor's obligations pertaining maintenance preparation  General engineering and procurement  Contractor shall take into account in the design of the FACILITY the maintainability Criteria. covering the manufacturing process. philosophy and spares to be defined in the FEED Design Package. the internal quality audits. procedure for collection of product performance feed back etc.

Recommended frequency and duration of maintenanceinterventions (total annual duration. training programme (rating)-Vendor Maintenance Recommendations-Management and monitoring (rating)-First level maintenance (rating)-Diagnosis tables (rating)suraj_engineer@yahoo. cost of spare parts needed for such components). The cost of spare parts contractually required according to the specifications shall be included within the bid correctly. The performance shall also be witnessed by visiting the location of the spare parts.uk Page 35 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Quality Assurance.Similar record should be confirmed from the data base of the successful projects on the vendor’s track record & included with the submission to the engineer as an evidence to monitor the product efficiency. Safety / Protection rating-Verification of performance evolution-Means for condition monitoring . after sales structure.5044.co. The vendor shall provide with the technical brochures of the product to the contractor along with the bid all documents giving the performance evidences. Standardization (identification of non-standard components. justifications for recommending such components. equipment etc. maximum duration of a major interventionAvailability / Reliability / MTBF / MTTR-Availability of after sales service (rating)Availability of spare parts lists Availability of documentation lists-Availability of documentation lists-Operational List of special tools maintainability-Modularity / Disassembly-Accessibility (rating)-The ratings should be obtained from some of the independent agencies published documents which should indicate that the observation & the relevant studies performed without any interference by the vendor. The components should be fully reliable to meet the intended functional requirement for the efficient performance operations. Reliability of Components (identification of components non standardized or non tested by Vendor under conditions similar to project conditions). guaranteed reliability Contract (rating).Proposals for maintenance contract (rating). Cost of two years or as specified in the contract recommended operating spare parts for all the machines or equipment to be installed on the project. o 4093 c d 2 3 4 5 6 Bid price and conformity to project specification. Handling (rating). These third party agencies usually publish the effectiveness of these vendors product & services in parts or in totality at regular intervals or as required for some special assignment. Availability guarantees-Ratio optimal conditions / optimal performancesEvidences to be obtained from the prospective vendors by visiting to the factory as well as to the references works carried out on track record. Maintenance Guarantees-This guarantee is required for the contractual maintenance duration for all the machines. Stability of Vendor.

Logic diagrams.On-line monitoring. tools. Technical Proposal 1 It is unavoidable in this age of tendering particularly on the Industrial projects of international Quality Requirement Assurance nature. serial number.Lists of consumables. spare parts. check.General arrangement drawings.Contractor shall prepare and include a Vendors' maintenance requirements specification in ‘call for tenders’ and ‘purchase orders’ in line with the Client guidance and submit for approval. The contractor shall comply with all the manufacturer’s instruction in respect of the equipment or the product & evidence in this respect to be provided as quality documentation to the engineer for approval & recording. including description of personnel. o 4093 c d Preventive and on-condition operations (rating)-Method of intervention (rating)Identification of conformity certificates-Requirements for component testing.Schematic and wiring drawings. under format attached or equivalent.Lubrication schedule. Vendor’s obligations to be enforced by Contractor 1 Contractor shall generally carry out the procurement steps required to have the Vendors who meet maintenance requirements specifications for the supply of equipment and documentation. tag number. instruments)-Software documentation both in electronic format and as a hard copy-Operating documentation-Operating procedures. 3 The Vendors’ Maintenance Dossiers shall generally include but not be limited to as the guidance is in essence.First level maintenance by operators.Spare parts lists (SPL). on-failure and overhaul maintenance procedures. purchase order number)Connection parameters (piping.Trouble shooting charts.uk Page 36 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h .Control loop diagrams. cause and effect sheets.5044.Drawing. Equipment data-Equipment descriptions-Equipment inventory-Technical data sheets (reference number. Maintenance documentation (per type of equipment).Section drawings. approve and issue Vendor maintenance documentation (the Maintenance Dossier) and prepare the Mechanical Catalogue. 4 All these documents & also any other additionally required one shall be approved by the engineer for implementation on the performance monitoring.Scheduled inspections or interventions-Preventive. All these documents shall be properly numbered & recorded by the document centre. drawings required .co. electrical. that the bids are submitted suraj_engineer@yahoo.On-line monitoring. The provision of the aforesaid documents from the vendors records substantiate the vendor’s claim about the reliability & leads one-step to customer satisfaction.List of special tools. 2 Contractor shall obtain.

deviation from the contract & its controls. whatever contents of the suraj_engineer@yahoo. full design criteria. execution plan. software to be used. Hazard study. materials proposed from the authentic source. machinery & man power proposal. evidence of past safety capability records. In case the technical bid is rejected. complete safety programme detailing & risk analysis. bidder is adequately resourceful. Technical bid is always a lead submission package that is invited to fully assure whether or not. various well designed forms to be employed for the whole duration of the project It also requires descriptive proposals from the Quality Assurance & quality control section providing all necessary formats & detailed methods of quality control maintenance including Inspection & test plans. designer’s potential. method statements. Engineering procedures including procurement shall also be included within this proposal giving complete feed back on proposed designing system. o 4093 c d in two parts together or separately depending upon the Client requirement. safety records. bid is evaluated. check lists & all quality documentation procedures. Technical bid should contain fully descriptive & completely integrated infrastructure of the bidder in all respects about design & execution philosophies. All procedures pertaining company documentations shall be included involving internal documents matrix used & ensuring that documents traceability is smooth. there shall be no need for the bidder propose commercial part of the bid. complete requirement of the job related material.uk 3 4 5 6 Page 37 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . 2 Technical bid is a voluminous document containing complete details of the bidder’s intentions to carry out the project execution from the commencement to the completion stage describing in details ways & methods for every part of the proposed project. the bidder is capable to execute & prosecute the project smoothly. proposed independent testing laboratory. technical capable & scrutinizing all other aspects. acceptability of Third Party Certification. how these shall be handled & whether or not. job temporary facilities to accommodate the manpower etc Since the Technical Proposal is based on the provided FEED documents by the client or the client appointed FEED contractor.5044.co. alternative proposal if so necessary contemplated by the bidder. safety plans proposed.

No room is allowed for any commercial reflection within this submission. The base firm proposal should not at all deviate from the FEED requirement.co. The client is never interested in a voluminous documentation for show purpose but a precise content giving all true & relevant information is always welcome. It is a long format but should be precise & to the point. equipment & all other items to be used for the permanent inclusions on the project should be enlisted in a scheduled manner in line with the FEED requirement. These chapters should be simple in the style to allow full communication of the bidder to the engineer/client to facilitate an easy understanding of the proposed execution. should be based on the technical directives included within the FEED. Proposed work schedule to meet the defined milestones should be explicitly described convincing every one concerned that the bidder approach is feasible in practical terms. These levels should meet the defined criteria according to the FEED as well as professional competencies. In brief all other proposals for the proposed facilities for the temporary works as well as for the permanent works should be included explicitly. It should be remembered that all these proposal documents shall be required for the actual demonstration proving the consistency as well as competency of the proposal. The bidder is required to endorse the Technical bid stating that the bid is completely based upon the FEED meeting all requirements unconditionally. The content of certification should be in accordance to the format provided. 7 There may be an alternative proposal in addition to the firm proposal which may satisfy the requirement of FEED in addition to making cost & time saving to the client according to the Value engineering consideration that the client could accept if within the FEED. All workforce & staffing levels as well as management to supervise & direct the project should be clearly defined including the CVs of all key levels. The Technical proposal is very comprehensive presentation content wise giving all information of the contract execution wise from the design to the performance & handover stage. o 4093 c d Technical Proposal be presented.uk 8 9 Page 38 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h .5044. In fact the consistency & capacity of the bidder is measured from this submission. Many rounds of the submission are conducted to scrutinize the submission of all chapters. It is better not to propose suraj_engineer@yahoo. All sources of the materials. Design procedures should be clearly defined in a precise manner including giving all designation of Information Technology to be utilized for the project.

comments are received from the engineer asking for many clarifications which are difficult to reply positively. o 4093 c d something which is not practiced by the bidder. 10 Quality required assurance as well as Execution statements constitute very important & significant role for providing value to the technical bid for which due time & devotion must be given by the bidder. After having the Technical bid qualified by the bidder.co.5044. The EPIC contract shall be awarded after complete scrutiny of the bid documents & the availability of the performance bonds & ascertaining fully the sufficiency of the quality as well as capability of the proposed Contractor. the short listed parties shall be invited to tender for the EPIC bid who in turn calculate the demanded facility EPIC or EPC lump sum firm price for the whole or part of the job in defined fixed time based on the FEED documents. the qualified bidders shall be notified about the opening time schedule of the commercial bids. The successful bidder shall affirmatively make available its representative to suraj_engineer@yahoo. A letter of award shall be issued by the Client representative instructing the successful bidder to immediately commence the job giving the effective date of commencement. Sufficiency of the Technical bid shall decide whether or not. the call for the commercial presentation should be given or there is no use in case the bid fails to meet the FEED requirement. An agenda shall be drawn for the kick off meeting defining the sequence of the points to be discussed & the officials & authorities from both parties to be present during the kick off meeting.uk 2 3 4 Page 39 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . A date shall be appointed by the Client for the execution of the contract between the Client & the successful bidder as well as for the kick off meeting. Be straightforward for the submission. otherwise demonstration could detract the bidder. The experts should be engaged for the detailed inclusions of the necessary information inclusion within the documents for the client consideration. Once the bidder is short listed by the engineer or client by the establishment of the bid competency. the commercial bid should be considered. Many cases have been noticed when after the proposal. provided which submission shall be Technical in one part & Commercial on the other. Contract award 1 Within this procedure. Untoward information should preferably be avoided.

Programme shall cover an overall outline in Gnat format with CPM support. should there be any delay to the project planned progress. coordinate & recovery shall be applied. Execution Programming a contractual binding document 1 Contractor shall immediately prepare a detailed execution plan based on the brief level 1 plan that was included within the Technical Proposal at bid stage for the complete contract works from level 1 to level 5 or as the case may be. discipline & element or component wise detailed activities. This programme shall be supported by a detailed method statement giving complete information about the phases of works & their elements arranged in an order keeping in view the priorities on the project & to accomplish aforesaid approved programme effectively. detailed man power. 5 Details about all deductibles. identification of problems with the resolutions. the Client enjoys the legal right to claim the tender bond amount from the surer bank. Major sequences of the operations to be covered from the home office activities suraj_engineer@yahoo. A date shall also be fixed by the Client instructing the Contractor to submit the performance bonds. amounts covered under all policies etc shall be submitted according to the documentation procedures. machines availability histograms. cash flow etc.co. Once the Contractor’s programme is approved. o 4093 c d execute the formal contract documents on that day failing which. recovering delays methods. insurance policies about the works as well as for the employees accidents coverage as well as all other document about these according to the General Conditions of the Contracts (GCC). detailed machineries. In addition to an overall descriptive programme. activities wise measurement of work percentage based on agreed method of man-hours evaluation or time based activities as well as cost wise breakdown applicable to (WBS) work activity breakdown structure.5044.uk 2 3 4 Page 40 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . monthly 90 days look ahead monthly programme shall also be charted out regularly to monitor the progress on detailed basis. it shall not be altered but constitute as a base programme to monitor the whole progress progress. in the primavera or MS project software format as agreed with the engineer or defined in the contract. work planned progress. include all contract milestones defined. Progress S curves indicating various phases shall be included showing man-hours histograms.

selection of sub Contractor. other Contractors Interface coordination. Material management system-customs formalities-port storage-& transportation to site-warehousing-storage-material handling-general responsibilities of field materials personnel-material receiving & inspections requirements-maintenance procedures-protection & preservation procedures. Construction sequence-temporary facilities-including utilities & camp accommodations-site preparations-underground piping-underground electrical & instrumentation-civil foundations & concrete work-structural steel-equipment erection-pipe fabrication-pipe erection-electrical-instrumentation control systemstelecommunication-painting-insulation-pipeline. Operations. Contracting strategy-direct hire-direct control or management. Mobilization-break down of manpower by trade including manpower histograms-major equipment utilization schedule. sub Contractor’s offices & all other directly or indirectly connected parties giving full description about the corporate structures of all related contracting parties on the project. suraj_engineer@yahoo. quality assurance. material storing. Contractor’s organization including details of its organization. customs. contract head office. (CVs) curriculum vitae respecting Key Personnel to be involved for the complete execution of the contract project shall be proposed for approval by the Client. Every project defines its level of requirement pertaining the essential qualification & expertise for the key personnel to be dedicated to it Format for Execution Programme only for guidance Scope. sub Contractors organization. job positions & descriptions of key personnel down up to supervisory level. Home office activities. procurement. engineering. procurement. Quality management systems. deliveries controls. cost control & taking down to the site relevant activities in all respects. o 4093 c d including corporate management affairs.uk 6 7 8 9 Page 41 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . This part shall be taken up & considered very seriously as the work progress movement rests on its actual level of performance. Without approval no key personnel shall be allowed to work on the contract. documentation. designing.co. 5 Organization charts shall be presented showing contract design office.5044. Work breakdown structure. site office.

Close out. Mechanical completion incorporating pre-commissioning. commissioning. AttachmentSite organization charts. Construction ability checks. document control. Proposals for technical resolutions. performance & maintenance Operations & maintenance Third Party Certifications suraj_engineer@yahoo.uk 2 3 4 5 6 Page 42 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h .equipmentprocurement-physical construction-contract management – construction project management. Design. Detailing.Safety plans-Training-Induction-Regular coursesSpecial courses. Heavy lift & transport.Site Walks-Tool Box Talks-Risks Analysis-Corrective Programmes-Inspections-Awards-Audits Quality Assurance QA / QC. Site works queries. Sub contract plannumber.Pre Commissioning. Health & Environment. Temporary facilities & camp accommodation plan.dossiers Engineering – Design detailed philosophy.co. Documentation appraisals. Field non manual staffing plan. Field non manuals. manpower loading-histogram by trade including both directs & indirects.Mobilization-materials-manpower. Engineering meetings. 11 12 Stages of Execution-EPIC / EPC-Construction Contractor 1 Safety. Manpower (direct & indirect). Construction automation plan.Audits. Site security. Personal transport. name & scope of each subcontract. Equipment utilization plan. Construction Method statements Construction & Controls . Shop drawingsWorking drawings-Schedules-Technical Queries. acceptance.5044. Level 2 construction schedule. inference of technical documents.laboratory. Pre-commissioning & commissioning organization-job descriptions. o 4093 c d 10 Health safely & environment-responsibility of safety personnel-HSE process & execution plan-HSE orientation-HSE site programs-construction environment control procedures-permitting-medical facilities.Quality plans-Training-Induction-Regular coursesSpecial courses. Testing .

Various classes of training are necessary to be imparted to the site personnel Page 43 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Health & EnvironmentFirst & foremost is the safety for any project. safety team must be present & support the construction team for smooth safety management. approved & issued by the safety department for the guidance of the construction personnel.rectification.Pre commissioning & commissioning-site acceptance test. Safety is the responsibility of every one.Operation & maintenance Manuals Punch List / Snags .uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Safety plansDiscipline activity based safety plans should be prepared in conjunction with construction in-charge.Visual defects-Technical defects.Issued for Construction documents-Red Lines Mark ups-As built.remedial measures-investigations Mechanical Completion.maintenance & successful performance Hand Over-Recording the learning of lessons-suggestions-about the sub Contractors.minor non-conformancesnags. the execution of the activity should be suspended.performance . In case no proper arrangements are made to keep safety intact. Without safety no work is allowed.relevant guarantees for the required periods. 8 9 10 11 12 --------------------------------------Industrial Safety Briefs Safety.co.about the Client engineers-Close Out-discharge Warranty liability .plant performance Final Completion . Training. Site engineers should abide by the instruction & direction given by the safety personnel. Every person working on the project must use personnel protective equipment PPE & all necessary special precautions must be taken whenever directed by the safety official responsible for the project. All activities must be conducted in a safe manner to the best possible minimum cost incurred on safety. On important works. Proper care must be taken during deep excavation works as well as overhead works. o 4093 c d 7 Project records .5044. Slogan SAFETY FIRST is very common among the safety promoting projects.

How to make the workers understand all procedures of safe handling the operations so as no operation should effect the workers’s health badly causing no overstress physically.Training should be given to all personnel to keep the working & other areas tidy during & on the end of the day.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Material should not lie here & there. How to handle the ground works & how to handle the overhead works. Fire watch Every workers should be clearly taught the ways of possible fire incident & if occurs. Liquid consumption & food Every worker should consume water or available drinks after a period of work to protect one from the adverse effect of dehydration & should be allowed the intermittent rest pauses. tool box talk should be given to the group working on the activity involving any or all calling. Heat stroke On constriction sites particularly in hot & arid regions. Working environment should be felt comfortable by all concerned personnel. the effects of heatstroke are imminent to workers. o 4093 c d for onsite implementation. They should be taught the methods of how to prevent such incidents by gradually inducting the worker to the hot working conditions & over timings adjustments. How minor or major injury may occur during carelessly using the tools & how to act if injured.co. how to handle to extinguish. Tools should be properly kept on site. Toolbox talks In general. all personnel should be given safety induction course duly recorded on proper register for the training.Immediate on the joining. House keeping.5044. prior to begin any activity. Dust prevention Dust accumulation causes environment degradation & affects working on site. Supervising safety Every supervisor should be trained for the understanding of managing safe supervision over the site operations. During Page 44 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. The course must include all precautionary instructions required on the site generally to be prosecuted onsite. Induction.

Provision of the platform guardrail of suitable height. They should be explained about all types of dangers if the tools are not properly used during work Risks AnalysisKeeping in view all types of operations on site. what risk are imminent. First aids use. ample means of water should be available to spread on site so that the dust does not lift into air. site walk should be conducted by the safety engineer with the site in-charge to pin point the deficiency on safety & on site correction applied. Tool Box TalksEvery skilled worker. Special coursesHow to take precaution to avoid electric shocks or some other hazard. o 4093 c d such inclement weather conditions.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Accessibility to site horizontally as well as vertically should be explicitly explained to every one. which location shall not be more than 8 m.5044. How to construct for temporary platforms at high levels to be used for various purposes to meet the site instant requirement.co. Regular coursesIn groups workers should be given feed back on the site safety as well as gas inhale prevention. For example use of wooden or Aluminum ladder in excavation areas or to the higher working areas. should be studied by the safety engineer & in cooperation with the construction people & expected causes of risk & their relevant solutions be explained to the team for implementation on Page 45 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Fire extinguishers use. supports. Incentive should be given to the leading workers who keep proper safety as well as check & advise coworkers & colleagues to take due measures. toe board etc. semi skilled or unskilled should know about proper use of the tools & maintenance of these. during fire how & where to assemble. how the fire alarm works etc. Site Safety WalksWhenever necessary. How to access emergency phones for hospitals. Positioning of the ladders in the trenches. Sanitary Adequate arrangements must be made on site for the workers & staff to use sanitary facilities throughout the currency of the project to maintain the working area healthy & hygienic. Platform construction.

System Security & Operability Analysis-It is very significant from safety engineering viewpoint.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Until complete problems are listed. concrete pump operation or any other equipment operation requires a complete safe operation system. the site engineer should be intimated for the corrective measures. SAFOP-Safe Operation. safety programmes should be conducted on site from every aspects to make all aware of overall safety to avoid accidents Practical training should be conducted for the equipment operators to let them understand the effects of not conforming to the safety practice. A healthy worker on site works many times better than a sick & unsafe worker. Third Party Certification for the crane particularly. How to operate these machines safely on site. the safety records physically on site & due observation circulated along with the proposed corrective measures. InspectionsSafety engineer should inspect working areas frequently to examine that the arrangements adopted on site for the running operation meet the necessary criteria of the safety rules & if observed certain deficiency.co. ProgrammesRegular & frequently. It is better to spend reasonable amount on safety rather than spending on loss of work causing inefficiency on site. o 4093 c d site as well as properly documented. awarding system should be adopted for the workers who work on full safety on site. License of operators as well as banks man instruction manual. AwardsTo motivate the workers on site to take due safety measures during working hours & thereafter as well. AuditsCorporate safety team should check casually & as programmed. complete analysis is a must to know & select the best safety methods SYSOP.5044. Only licensed operator should be allowed to carry out the lifting operations. applicable procedures may Page 46 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo.Safety Analysis. Safety of heavy equipmentCrane operation.Prior to an application of the safety.It is the key to the success of the project in all respects. shovel operation. SAFAN.

gas explosion & electric default. Therefore. middle management. For information. Total quality management. these import application of all precautionary measures selection of which depend on the detailed requirement as obtained from the risk analysis & details of equipment operations. Attempts should be made to take due measure to prevent accident in hot work as well as cold work areas & also in restricted & confined entry areas. site checks. while quality control applies to particular quality control procedure. inspection & test plans & so many other technical involvement during construction operations. OPTAN. Many have the unclear concept of these terms. QA / QC Briefs Quality plans-Training-Induction-Regular courses-Special courses. 2. past track records confirms the competent standing of the company on QA. QA is a principle term applies to overall quality system management means. Permit to Work PTW must be applied to work in such areas of the facility. field offices 7 in field. branch office.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h .5044.dossiers 1. market collaboration & so many other aspects which cannot be covered in brief explanation. --------------------------------------Quality Assurance.co. QA involves major policy & competency of the company.Auditslaboratory. It is added that now QA involves quality requirement for all its intended purposes.Operator task Analysis-Control & field Operator-This part also involves detailed study as well as precise applications. Quality plans This term includes company quality manual & project quality plan. Based on the successful completion of various projects conforming to QA. Company quality manual 1. The term Quality Assurance which includes quality control being significantly important form the customer satisfaction viewpoint. Systems generally involve safety against fire. must be clearly understood by all participants on the project. for example laboratory testing of material. o 4093 c d not be known. workers. Follow up of the whole procedures as included within the quality plan from project inception to the handover & discharge successfully to the customer full satisfaction is termed Quality Assurance. These include working of all departments of the company in both home office. A primary document of the company announcing company’s quality basic policies Page 47 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Company mean not the company management but all members of the company at all levels of corporate & home office. No slackening should be allowed. market contribution. lower management.

company’s strength comprehensively giving machinery as well as manpower. company’s organization. instructions & job descriptions of its middle & lower level officers. accounting management. Virtually it is like a constitution of the company telling every thing about the company management. procurement & material handlings. Based on the contents of this document. This documents main chapters include company policy. constitution of the governing board. Company’s planned approach in business & how to satisfy a prospective customer. full operational descriptions. company’s organization approach & basis. 3. management of its various departments. All sections are included as completely descriptive giving elaborate information to the concerned person. Company’s project quality manual For the purpose of including within the technical package submission for the tender bid as well as for the contract documentation submission for approval purpose. This document is specifically constituted for the management control of the relevant project & gives all information applicable to the project. Manual is a permanent document amendable from time to depending on the advancement & progress of the organization. company’s goals. policy decisions.co. Project Quality Plan 1. incorporations & accounting. 2. company’s various sections or divisions. which cannot be generalized. company’s know how potential all but not limited to these. human resources management. directors’ responsibilities. Description & magnitude of the project & company’s general policy towards this. company’s objectives in national as well as international market.Brief details of the project & contract-Project execution programme-Corporate Page 48 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. job description of the corporate & senior staff. The major policies included within this document shall guide the contents formation within the project quality plans. staffing level. transportation but not the least. It provides the details of the corporate management. o 4093 c d in full. The contents of the information depend on the specific requirement of the project & may differ from one project to another as well as from one discipline to another. a document containing specific project details in conformance with the company quality manual giving full & elaborate explanation of the ways of executing the relevant project from the award to the handover & final completion stage is entitled Company’s project quality manual. corporate structure. further documents for presentation & approval are prepared for the upcoming projects or tenders submission.5044. Contents of this document should be like sub headings given below for guidance. 2. company’s potential. documentation system.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h .

office involvement-Joint venture involvement-Sub Contractors involvementSpecialist vendor/s involvement-Corporate management & Co ordinationCorporate Safety.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . company manual.5044. The draft should be approved by the management & then by the Client. ITP or inspection & test plans. The document should be prepared by the quality manager/engineer in conjunction with corporate as well as project manager/construction manager/project engineer after studying all details & specification relevant to the contract. 6. The records should provide guide lines to generally used documents namely NCR or non conformance report. In case any alteration is required. check list etc. All relevant supervisory staff must know about the contents & interpretation of the documents to their respective discipline & fully explained to all how the implementation shall be effected. Page 49 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. health & environment-Corporate Engineering Corporate Quality assurance-Corporate Procurement-Corporate supports for all disciplines-Project site/field management & Co ordination-Project site/field Safety. The proposed schedule of method statements about the construction & other disciplines should also be indicatively included. It should be distributed as controlled copy & not to be altered. General Conditions of contract. 5.co. international. another approval should be obtained. The term ‘quality procedures’ is applied to all such documentations. This document should detail the proposed documentation to be made on site in relevance to the specific project. 7. 4. o 4093 c d 3. health & environment-Project site/field Engineering-Project site/field Quality assurance-Project site/field Procurement-Project site/field supports for all disciplines Aforesaid chapters or parts of the documents should be designed in conformance to specific requirements meeting the contract criteria. conventional practical standards & the ultimate objective customer satisfaction.

All suraj_engineer@yahoo. Company / Client shall verify this at the time of review of CV’s and interviews of Key Personnel. 2 Contractor shall carry out site surveys to familiarise himself with the existing installations if any. and to retrieve necessary information (data. drawings etc.uk Page 50 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . These actual surveys shall form the basis of the actual design to be approved by the engineer or the client. so as not to impede the progress of the detailed Design. pipelines.co. pipelines corridors and tie-ins locations. Site survey is also required to verify the proposed pipelines routes and confirm the tie-ins location and configuration etc. Company / Client places a very high importance on the Contractor’s selection of an internationally recognised Detail Engineering and Design Sub-Contractor or “in-house” organisation with a proven track record of undertaking and successfully delivering similar projects in a single location under one roof. efficient and cost-effective end product FACILITY is the quality of detailed engineering and design. This shall be one of the key bid evaluation criteria for the selection of the Contractor. o 4093 c d --------------------------------------Chapter 3 Ei ei g n e g r n n Introduction 1 Company / Client believes from its vast experience that one of the key foundation blocks for successful. The CVs shall be reviewed from an overall qualification viewpoint which means only academic qualification shall be not exclusively a basis but practical specific experience on interdisciplinary sphere to be considered for the acceptance of the proposed key personnel along with general capabilities such as communication skills.5044. Accordingly. efficiency to carry out jobs in the field & in office environment & effective response the client personnel to prosecute the project coordination activities. the Engineering and Design Subcontractor shall mobilise their team for the Project. The survey provided with the FEED or the tender document shall be treated only for guidance. infrastructures. Therefore.) All survey records & database shall be verified by conducting full survey of the site to the requirement of the contractor’s scope of works. It shall be Contractor’s responsibility to ensure that all relevant documentation and drawings available with Company / Client (at various locations) are retrieved in a timely manner.

5044. so that the project specifications are satisfactorily met at the end of the project execution. Start-Up. any construction facilities needed at Construction Site within Plant Industrial City. procurement. The contractor shall consider the FEED only as a guidance for client’s requirement & therefore. the contractor shall be bound to apply all the FEED requirement & if possible upgrade during the design. However. detailed definition. detailed engineering. Commissioning. Contractor shall ensure the maintainability criteria. maintenance philosophy and spare parts philosophy.co. supply. At the design stage. Contractor acknowledges that the FEED Design Package does not define the Work in full detail. are fully considered in the development of the detailed design from the FEED. suraj_engineer@yahoo. The contractor shall certify while submitting the tender that every criteria mentioned within the FEED documents have been considered while designing the project & included in price. Initial Operation and Maintenance and hand-over of the FACILITY. process engineering. In undertaking the detailed design. the Contractor shall undertake all necessary geotechnical and geophysical surveys to ensure connections to the existing Phase Installations are correct.uk 4 5 6 7 Page 51 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Contractor shall carry out any and all engineering required for provision of his construction Accommodation Camp. fully develop the project from conceptualisation to the completion accordingly. commissioning and any other engineering work that Contractor shall need to develop for the required design. as well as any construction engineering required for the Work. 3 Engineering shall include endorsement and upgrade of FEED including design optimisations. procurement. Contractor shall start from the engineering documentation supplied by Company / Client contained in the FEED Design Package and shall further develop the design to achieve the Contract objectives and requirement. o 4093 c d the records or as built drawings required for the purpose of coordination shall be required for practical interfaces & coordination criteria which should be requested to be issued by the relevant authority according to the planned requirements. Any deviation should be explicitly detailed. construction. Installation. Testing. installation. Any alternative proposal should also be elaborately detailed for the engineer’s or the client consideration. Pre-Commissioning.

However. 9 General Engineering Requirements 1 Contractor shall prepare all engineering documentation required for the Work. Company / Client’s decision shall be binding and shall have no cost and / or schedule impact to Company / Client. which Company / Client is in possession. drawings lists. but not limited to the following engineering services: Develop and update / upgrade drawings.co. The design should be explicitly clear in its basics theoretical calculative form giving adequate details to be well understood & coordinate properly all sequential activities for the team engineers to co-relate at various stages & at various offices. Company / Client shall be consulted for taking the appropriate joint decision. suraj_engineer@yahoo. The Company / Client Engineering Standards. Contractor shall work closely with Company / Client to achieve this task. o 4093 c d 8 Contractor shall carry out engineering as per Contract Specifications. Clear details save the time & provide efficiency on the performance of execution. document index. Engineering and design of all tie-ins and tie-outs to existing Phase installations shall be undertaken in such a manner that do not cause interruption of water supply or shutdown to the existing End-Users.uk 2 3 Page 52 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Contractor shall have to arrange for the referenced Standards not available from Company / Client.5044. shall be made available to Contractor. However. the documents listed and produce all or any other documents required for the successful completion of the Work. Contractor shall undertake the detail design of the FACILITY utilizing the typical details pertaining to the project. though which may not be unavoidable from an working engineering viewpoint. codes and practices. These documents should provide comprehensive engineering design information for all disciplines involved on the project such that all details are self explanatory requiring as minimum as possible further issues to produce works executive details in the form of shop & working drawings. incase of conflict or contradiction with Company / Client Corporate Standards and the latest edition / revision of the recognised international standards. Contractor engineering group in charge of detailed engineering shall provide all details necessary to be produced for carrying out the job satisfactorily & conveniently without any break of understanding the project details smoothly by the engineers involved.

construction. Operability. testing procedure. Review / update FEED specification and data sheets (as required. installation. Evaluate bids received from Vendors and Subcontractors. requisition schedules and all other necessary engineering deliverables. and prepare additional document when required). maintainability. Commissioning.5044. Prepare Final Documentation specified suraj_engineer@yahoo. Provide detailed material take-off and continuous monitoring of material changes for all engineering disciplines.co. Basis of Design Philosophies.uk 8 9 10 11 12 Page 53 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . engineering material requisitions. engineering drawings. Witness and report FAT (Factory Acceptance Tests) at Vendors Premises. Develop and update equipment lists. Specifications etc. drawings. other documentation and include / update Project design drawings (core drawings / specification to be submitted to Company / Client prior to approval by Contractor. Deliverable Register. specifications. Develop testing procedures including SAT (Site acceptance test) for individual facilities and Performance Test Procedure for the FACILITY. o 4093 c d Deliverable Review and Approval Matrix. reliability and ensure its concurrence with environmental regulations and requirements. Prepare Scope of Work and Specification of Sub-Contracts. Start-up and Initial Operation and Maintenance including assistance to Subcontractors / Vendors in the interpretation of specifications and drawings. Incorporate process requirements in detailed design and engineering. drawings. Provide engineering support for procurement. Vendor drawing requirements list & schedule (VDRLS) and purchase requisitions (PR) and amendments as necessary up to 'As built' status. 4 Review & update documents for safety. calculation sheets. Procedures. P&Ids (Piping & instrumentation diagrams). technical 5 6 7 Review and approval of Vendors data. PFD’s (Process flow diagrams). Data Sheets.

ladders or ducts (300 mm width and larger)  All civil / structural works  Intake area upstream of Seawater Pumps. o 4093 c d 13 Where there is a conflict in specifications.co. crossover on existing piping / new pipelines. codes or standards. FEED 3D model may be utilized by EPIC Contractor for further development. The final 3-D CAD model shall include sufficient detail to allow plot plans and layout drawings to be produced from the model. Vents. Contractor shall not employ any proprietary techniques or add-in programmes while developing the 3-D CAD model that may prevent Company / Client from fully maintaining the model after takeover.uk 4 5 Page 54 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . All piping within package units such as Electro chlorination plant.5044. The decision on all technical queries shall be made by Company / Client in writing which shall be final and binding without any cost or schedule impact. Contractor shall provide view-only access to the 3-D CAD model for Company / Client’s nominated personnel whether they are located on Contractor’s premises [Office or site] or if they are accessing the system remotely during the course of detail engineering. in existing culverts. etc. The model shall include modeling of the following as a minimum  All Piping / pipeline  Pipe supports / saddles for piping larger or equal to DN50  Fresh Water Distribution System (Firewater storage and distribution)  Electrical and Instrumentation items including cable trays. manholes and vacuum breakers. Contractor shall provide a user manual to aid future update of 3-D CAD model by Company / Client. A copy of (review model) updated regularly during Construction and engineering stages shall be available at Company / Client’s suraj_engineer@yahoo. drains. Contractor shall immediately bring such conflict to the notice of Company / Client on a ‘Technical Query’ form. 3 Contractor shall provide the entire model to Company / Client as part of final documentation. 3DCad Model 1 Company / Client requires a 3-D CAD (PDS) model to be developed for the project. 2 All existing facilities (to the extent required) at locations such as tie-ins.

fire fighting controls. all equipment necessary for the complete facility safety & controls. Plastic Model Contractor shall design. The designing team should understand explicitly the contract philosophy & the FEED documents prior to commencing the design work. training and support for Company / Client’s nominated personnel so that their use of the system is unencumbered and effective. to be included on the Plant facility whatsoever. all structures. Design of the whole project components / constituents are demanded to be produced one by one meeting the timely requirement to the project plan.co. The models shall be produced to an acceptable size so that every part of the project is clearly identifiable by the user personnel. o 4093 c d Offices at site. buildings. Complete Project Design Systems should be produced based on the FEED & the best possible design alternatives for a minimum cost.uk 2 3 Page 55 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Engineering Design1 For EPIC or EPC. for making it operational. Equipment selections may take time & delay the whole facility construction therefore. prompt decisions should be made. As far as possible. all related control instruments. In addition. which machines may include horizontal & vertical vessels. Related drawings about equipment based on the feed back available from the FEED should be schematically produced for the considerations of the structural design engineers for initial use suraj_engineer@yahoo. It should be kept in view that the foundation designs pertaining the equipment depend on the parameters of the equipment. sections within that & many different views for clarity. gas tanks. gas installations. etc. These models should be fabricated in different modes like drawings that means bird’s eye view. pumps. fabricate and assemble a plastic model for all facilities which include all pipeline / piping. Contractor shall provide documentation. The project target to be achieved should be clearly understood. oil tanks. safety installations. the design part is a major contribution to the successful execution of the contract.5044. Initial foundations designs may be amended based on the final selection for the inclusion of the equipment. all essential design details shall be included for the exhibition purposes. First & the foremost significant part of the design process is the selection of the processing machine / equipment to be installed as a part of the processing trains. vibratory & rotating machines. electrical installations.

storage. Initial drawings after complete checking & review of the design calculations should be properly recorded. All design discipline engineers should report to the engineering project engineer or Manager as the case may be. Plan showing out plan to facilitate construction of temporary structures for the use by the Contractor. o 4093 c d which shall vary may be to an extent of 10 to 15 % during final stage of the designs issue. equipment maintenance. Design drawings in general may be classified to the following categories Facilities Key plan showing all sections or zones Plan showing process & non process area indicating trains. approved & issued for Client review & approval. The discipline wise engineering design work should then be entrusted to the charge of a disciplinary design engineer. offsites. 4 All constituent parts or elements of the project regarding all engineering disciplines should be enlisted & a programme charted out to show the start & issue dates pertaining various design drawings for review & approval by the Clients. Facilities drawings should be classified into the lay out of the trains with location of all equipment & piping scheme. control as well administrative areas.co.uk 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Page 56 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . circulation. access to site & all other necessary information the Contractor or bidder shall require to take into consideration the impact of cost on price. utilities. Plan showing located areas for warehousing. All designs of the equipment to be included other than the trains should also be similarly produced in a timely manner. All designs should be correlated in sequence so as not to miss any part of ant machine in the train. Plan showing hazards & non-hazard areas based on HAZOP studies conducted suraj_engineer@yahoo. proposed location of sea intake as well as discharge into sea. Plan showing existing facility if any. Facilities drawing showing all line plans & isometrics of the processing technology & piping giving capacities. The Client should promptly review these drawings & issue consent to facilitate the design team to proceed further for detailed design work.5044.

open ditches. closed drains. environment related issues. security fencing. chemical manholes. cable trench. Plan showing location of all buildings process as well as non-process. maintenance roads layouts including types. sanitary. interconnecting cable infrastructures. Plan showing philosophy of the communication. duct banks. card readers. street lighting infrastructure. HVAC. services to be coordinated with the existing services requiring work permits from operating authorities in the form of hot & cold works etc. chemical disposal etc. 13 Plan showing complete & comprehensive philosophy adopted for the proposed plant system. CCTV closed circuit television. & sections Plant Piping layouts & pipe racks around including overhead crossings suraj_engineer@yahoo. proposed interfaces. sewerage. Plan showing location of all utilities buildings & electrical infrastructure buildings. manholes.uk 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Page 57 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . drainage. All equipment major & minor foundation layouts All underground utilities & services including drainage. oily manholes. & shall include catch basins. satellite control. Plan showing all major & minor buildings & other structures required for the complete control & administration of the plant operation.5044. o 4093 c d by a specialist agency. loss prevention. building management. Architectural plans for buildings including elevation & sections Structural plans for buildings including elevations & sections Bar bending schedules for all members of the structures building wise Discipline wise plans for services such as electrical. roads. cathodic protection philosophy for the whole plant. covered trenches. security access. proposed road crossings. landscape areas. maintenance access. Roads layouts. fire fighting. mechanical.co. pipe culverts. water supply. telecommunication. buried trenches.

standard items should be included in the designs for easy suraj_engineer@yahoo.uk 2 3 4 5 Page 58 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Crosscheck must be applied to all these details prior to giving a final approval. the good-looking details are difficult for execution. which should then be submitted along with the building permit application to the relevant municipality if so required. There shall definitely hundreds of such details discipline wise. details of all elements necessary for execution or for the transmission of the information to equip the shop floor drawing engineers for working drawing production. The design engineers should also commence with the detailing of all structural & architectural elements of the included parts of the project. the design team should concentrate to produce all necessary drawings. Details should be as easy as possible to save the procurement as well as execution duration to minimize the cost. Concept of the detailing is a cumbersome job requiring competent skill on the part of the design engineer who coordinates mentally all possible operations related to the designing & construction by these details. Sometimes. This part always consumes much time & therefore adequate staffing should be allowed for details production. It is suggestible that as far as practicable. Working out of the details shall require multiple considerations of thought to be given for the end results of the design so as to make it convenient for the ease of construction execution with the application of minimum efforts with keeping cost to a minimum as far as practically feasible. various details on plans. These detailing should include sections.co.5044. o 4093 c d Interconnection layouts 24 Structural plans for the pipe racks giving all design details Structural plans for the steel buildings giving all design details External roads interconnection & access to plants Landscaping giving all soft & hard landscape layouts 25 26 Engineering Detailing1 After having received the preliminary drawings approved by the Client. The details dictate on many outcome on site & help the construction engineers a lot if well thought of in advance. All other disciplinary details should also be taken up simultaneously.

Details should be explicit to make the engineering coordination easy for easy references. Scheduler has to go through all these procedures immersing fully for all related items. 6 Also cross-references on the drawings should be properly reflected for there are chances of missing these. No limit governs the quantification of the production of schedules for it depends on the discipline as well as the size of the project. It is also suggested that what details are required should be planned in advance of commencing the detailing work in the form of a working schedule to keep a control on the quantity of detailing work. But quality schedules help the placement of the procurement orders.co. It requires complete know how of item under consideration. These queries further augment the recording & execution complicity. Scheduling is no easy job. There may be hundreds of such schedules for some project while some only a few. suraj_engineer@yahoo. Some competent engineer should concentrate on one activity to reach it to the conclusive decision so as to be finally sent to drafting section. Also these items are well known to the experience supervisors involved with the construction operations. After producing all necessary detailed documents. Typical details production shall give good results for the production purpose.uk 2 3 Page 59 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . It has been experience that multiplicity of documents coordination creates unnecessary difficulties for the execution team while clashes & absence of necessary details as well as so many other factors result in the raising of engineering & site technical queries ETQ & STQ respectively.5044. Design Schedules1 Major items schedules respecting all disciplines should also be included within the detailed designs to guide the construction team for placing various Material Take Off MTO after due verification. Unnecessary details should be avoided. o 4093 c d procurement. It also requires complete coordination within all relevant drawings & technical documents to reach final take off the quantities & the applicability of the specifications & drawings as well as specialist specifications produced by the manufacturers. Generally it happens due to the involvement of many hands as well as change of heads on the same job. a guiding bill of quantity BOQ should be prepared for the whole project to assist the construction team to place various order after due verification of the quantities as well as the applicable specifications & codes.

In some case based on the contract drawings & shop drawings further details are worked out which are consistent with approved drawings. details provided on the approved drawings & the trade practice & further minute technicalities involved for the production operations. Shop drawings All details as explained above cannot be practically produced within these documents. detailed drawings. o 4093 c d SubmissionsAll aforesaid project documents which may include all design drawings.5044. These can be entitled shop drawings.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . schedules. These drawings should be well drawn clearly so that supervisors do not require further assistance to get the job done without further details. the document should be copied in required numbers as agreed within the documentation procedures duly sealed on the document & circulated to the concerned parties. It is not essential that the documents should be approved in first submission. Depending upon various factors related to available material. Copies should also be transmitted to the engineer for site use. There shall be hundreds & may be thousands such documents necessary to be produced from time to time of site requirement. it shall be essential to produce some more documents to be used by the shop floor engineer. Otherwise these drawings should also be approved by the engineer in which case proper documentation is necessary followed by the issuing procedures as Page 60 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. These documents should also be passed through the approval procedures & IFC document should be issued to site for construction. Comments received back from the engineer should be incorporated on the revised documents & resubmitted keeping the process continued until the documents are approved for construction. may be used directly virtually off record.co. After the approval for construction status. These drawings should also be approved but all drawings do not require approval. These documents shall be worked out from the coordination among all such gathered information solving probable clashes & giving a final shape for production or execution on site. Working drawingsEven after the availability of all approved documents. These drawings should support with further details of the sequence of works in the form of real fabrication & execution at shop floor or on site. project specifications designed by the specialist engineers should be registered properly according to the agreed system of documentation & thereafter be submitted under cover of a transmission sheet to the approving authority engineer for technical approval in the form of IFC Issue for Construction. there shall be required some more drawings to be used by the supervisors on site as well as in the workshop.

5044. which should be recorded on the STQ for confirmation. o 4093 c d explained earlier. post contract documents etc which should be suraj_engineer@yahoo. Site works queriesDuring carrying out works on site. All virtual clashes on site due to unforeseen conditions may be resolved on site & recorded as technical resolution in the same manner. Full details in the form of sketches are prepared & put in the form of STQs or directly as sketches as working drawing as convenient. a solution be proposed or clarification sought or understanding for confirmation made. there shall be many instances when alternative detailed proposal are to be worked out for site requirement to meet the design criteria & practicalities. Engineer scrutinizes the questions & writes back the answers for execution on site & recorded as red line mark up. This document is originated by the relevant engineer. Documentation appraisalsAt time of the contract execution as well as during the whole currency of the contract. ETQ is generally used by the Engineering team only whilst the STQ is used for the site execution purpose. discrepancies are raised in the form of a technical questions format giving full details regarding the discrepancy & if possible. dictated by the site conditions & to comply with the specifications & design criteria. checked by the technical or engineering section & authorized by the site management for transmission to the engineer for response. it usually happens that suitable adjustments have to be made to the design details on the safer consideration. proposals for such problems are made for the engineer’s approval. the Contractor shall from time to time receive thousands of documents in the form of contract documents. Such situation requires an agreement between the Contractor & the engineer on site. For the resolution of the correct detail.co. There may be engineering queries ETQ or site technical queries STQ or SC site clarification depending on the mode of the format adopted on the project. 1 Proposals for technical resolutionsOther than aforesaid queries.uk 2 Page 61 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Technical QueriesA technical query is raised when some discrepancy is discovered pertaining any design item not correlating or corresponding between architectural & structural or any other discipline drawing details.

This activity requires total concentration to study the contents of the design & their coordination & mutual interfaces. All such documents should be registered in such a way that traceability functions efficiently without wasting time of the engineers unnecessarily. Project engineer should immediately notify any missing information to be provided proficiently. Project in-charge should ensure that all required documents according to the register as well as fulfilling practical needs of the project for construction have been issued by the designers.5044. o 4093 c d appraised properly & competently. Only a competent project engineer or an experienced discipline engineer should be entrusted the job to explore any missing information as well as to know whether or not the issued documents are giving adequate information for the purpose of full construction or yet. Study & review should not be confined to design drawings only but detailed specifications should also be included so that complete project requirement is properly integrated for physical execution. the technical queries are necessary to be raised. It depends on the volume of the documents what duration is required for complete understanding of the technicalities involved on the design. 3 Construction ability checksIssued / approved for construction documents pertaining all disciplines must be checked sequence wise as well as discipline wise to make sure that these contain well-coordinated information necessary for the 100 % construction of the relevant portion or element. Arrangements should be such that documents for a particular element on the job should be proficiently filtered out for better control. Hundreds of clarification questions are raised by suraj_engineer@yahoo. Inference of technical documentsInference of the technical documents is no easier an activity. Engineering meetings Meetings for the engineering discipline form extremely significant portion of the contract. Actually this activity commences at the tender negotiation time when technical proposal is submitted. Any clashes observed should be recorded any ETQ or RTQ raised for a possible resolution without any delay to the execution. The approval about the queries procedure should be perused personally in some urgent cases & the resolution communicated to the supervisor concerned for on site implementation prior to the mistaken work is carried out.co.uk 4 5 Page 62 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . The document controller should have on his tips on the database any required document located immediately.

co. During this stage. These meetings also involve the contribution from the quality assurance & control engineering section on site for urgent decisions & acceptable to the construction department. these have to be conducted at any level of supervision to expedite the site works progress. Construction Method statements During the construction phases. For a collection of important queries. meetings shall be very long but impart efficiency for the decision-making & save time for the approvals. meeting is conducted to resolve the issues in hand directly between the two parties.uk 7 8 9 Page 63 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . These meetings more or less form part of the regular progress meetings until lot of queries have been accumulated necessitating separate meeting. when the design is submitted meetings are conducted for every discipline for a satisfactory response on the design questions. o 4093 c d the Client on the contents of technicalities offered by the Contractor as well as those at pre bid stage as replied by the Client based on the Contractor queries. This documents should contain full information about the activity under consideration giving how the sequence & technicalities shall be carried out & how the inspection should be conducted based on the requirement of the Inspection & Test Plans & quality check list as well as conduction of the necessary testing & laboratory involvement from time to time. clarifications & software related issues or formal presentation of PDS project document system. During contract stage. 6 During construction stage.5044. Engineering meetings cannot be confined to the aforesaid instances but according to the job requirement. suraj_engineer@yahoo. activity wise construction method statements are required to be issued to the supervisors on site to adhere to the statements for the smooth carrying out of the activity concerned. regularly programmed meetings are conducted for the engineering difficulties or other matter related therewith which require urgent attention. These statements should be approved by the Client prior to the commencement of the relevant activity. Day to day meetings are conducted on site between the area engineers of two parties to resolve the matters subject to the approval of the field engineering manager of the Client. Method statement should be prepared by the project or discipline engineer or quality engineer or office engineer depending on the availability on site.

performance. reinforcement assembly or placement. For the reference to the reader. electrical system. How the activity should be sequenced one after the other & write the statement lines & then recompile to a comprehensive statement. finishes activities. specialist gas fire suppression system. Contemplate on what the involved minor activities are. checked & approved by the site manager for further transmission to the Client for the final approval as IFC or AFC & circulated to the site as a document.5044. Just think of what is the solution of particular construction operation. Please use them for guidance only & create your own statements for particular requirement. cladding works. the statement should be prepared & submitted for approval. earthworks. The basics of the activity should be conferred with the relevant supervisors & quality personnel & then finalized to the specification & design requirement.uk 11 12 13 14 15 16 Page 64 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . pre-commissioning. structural steel erection at low as well as high levels.co. be prepared in advance. excavations. For example site preparation. These are based on the practical experience & are used on projects. But basics of the methods writing can be advised herein. aluminum works. concreting. o 4093 c d 10 All disciplines require method statement. road works. What are the sequences & materials to be used for temporary as well as permanent inclusions what are the other requirement for the accomplishment of the operation from the inception of the activity to the final outcome. These should therefore. camp construction. piping both below & above ground. No limit governs method statements numbers. suraj_engineer@yahoo. quality testing & many more. Agreement has to be made between the Client & the Contractor on the requirement. temporary facilities establishments. make a sequence thinking that you are available on works & carrying out the activity. a number of method statements have been appended only for knowledge exchange. There shall be a long list of method statement or procedures from different engineering disciplines. It is not practically possible to produce all methods in one go but quiet in advance of the relevant activity allowing time for approval. blinding concrete. formworks. maintenance. commissioning. loss prevention system. reinforcement fabrication. paving. The document should form an integrated approach for the job as professional. complete HVAC system. After having considered all these.

activities.5044. Control includes. lost time recoveries as well as look ahead projections. budget. These documents are produced involving all sections working for the project & reports are inter considered by all departments. o 4093 c d --------------------------------------Chapter 4 C su i n C to o t co & o r l nr t n s - Construction & controls are very interrelated sections for successful completion of any project.co. contract time & reputation. Planning engineers or the project control engineers work for such activities dedicated on the project & report from day to day & time to time basis. During tender stage also programming documentation giving complete details & milestones. manpower requirement. milestones. progress. manpower.uk 2 3 Page 65 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . which is considered as one of the competencies of the proposal. machinery requirement. Design may be over safe or optimum but real construction involves actual expenses. In case the details do not give full information about the proposed methods of execution for which it forms a part. Schedules. cost. the proposal may be liable for suraj_engineer@yahoo. The planning activities commence from the day of commencement to the final completion & documents are produced from level 1 to may be level 5 depending on the project or the contract specification requirement. Generally primavera or MS project software are used for the professional documentation for planning purpose. These are all integrated divisions. cost flow & all other requirement & running reviews of all these during the whole currency of the project from real progress. machines. cash flow etc are given for the inclusion with the Technical Proposal. time. quality assurance & engineering & safety. It should be the motto of any organization to apply good controls on the project to keep on line with the programme or planning an actual part of controls.Programming 1 Programming schedules indicating by GNAT bars or by CPM or PERT various graphical representations respecting the overall & detailed plans for the time. A well-designed project could be jeopardized during construction phase from budget viewpoint should it not be given due controls application properly. which should move in unison to achieve project target.

security. All arrangements for the accommodation for the personnel. documentation is carried out giving details about the applied work.uk 2 3 4 5 Page 66 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . The site is taken over & all transfer stations are established using available satellite records. water supply for drinking as well as for washing purpose. No excavation is allowed in projects until these permits are obtained. fire fighting. messing. full time supervisor. method statement etc & then application is considered for sanction. For the application of the work to start permit. Mobilization1 The very first step to get into the stage of physical establishment for construction. Similarly. Permit to work PTW is required prior to the commencement of any excavation in hot & cold work areas. sports courts. sanitary facilities. Fencing is erected & the establishment of the temporary camp & offices is effected according to the engineer approved plans & method statement. electrical & air conditioning. leisure areas. Applications are made for the record drawings from the statutory services authorities if so required. availability of the safety officers. The site offices should start functioning on or before the appointed date according to programme of mobilization. o 4093 c d rejection. suraj_engineer@yahoo. Applications are also made to the operating authorities for the issue of all record drawings if so required for the permits. swimming pool. It should be kept in view that some agreed percentage of payment should be released when the mobilization is completed & work can be commenced with. common rooms. official award letter. access to the camp. All provisions of the utilities should be made according to the contract. site offices establishment should also be constructed according to the site establishment approved plans & Permit to Work obtained before commencing for the site establishment offices. engineer & Contractor requirement. etc as required by the contract & the temporary facilities that Contractor or the engineer deem necessary should be provided.5044. Approvals are obtained from the authorities concerned & from the engineer or Client.co. parking. local shops. sewage treatment plant. Surveying department commences its works for the establishment objectives.

construction. warehousing. Every purchase department manager & the owner of company tries their best to procure acceptable material within reasonable & minimum cost. intranet. ventilation & air conditioning. mechanical & auto maintenance & repair workshops. standby generator.uk 2 Page 67 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . assistants & a well established site clinic. This is also expected in a similar fashion from the prospective sub Contractors. first aid. sanitary. This is the only item that may delay the completion of the project due to possible non-delivery in time.5044. safety. refreshments. doctor for immediate attention with nurse. electrical supply. telecommunication. drinking water dispensers. conferencing. Site offices require full fledged modern computerized facilities for fast interaction & communication. Material constitutes more than 60 t0 70 % budget for the contract & every prudent Contractor should intend to make as much saving as is possible out from this element of expenditure simultaneously keeping in line with the quality assurance & control procedures. ambulance. 7 8 9 Materials1 Without materials no project can be completed in time. There may be some delay to decide from which vendor or supplier the materials are to be procured. This deployment shall accelerate the procedure on the commencement of job in the beginning & time may be gained to keep in line with the programmes. water supply. planning & engineering as well as administration staff without any loss of time. internet. heat.co. vehicular & equipment parking areas. labour temporary shelters for lunch & tea etc as well as for rest pauses necessary under safety management for the prevention of heat stroke & environment attack during hot working hours. Site offices require full fledged stores. Running project may not be that difficult to push but starting & streamlining all departments operations demand efficiency & hard work. Smart & efficient project managers & engineers understand this aspect very well & keep very proficient at this stage as additional efforts are required to commence with the project. o 4093 c d 6 Mobilization also includes deployment of required manpower. making trial & again from a number of interested vendors both before & after the award of a contract. suraj_engineer@yahoo. machinery & the supervisory.

Human resources department should be efficient to deal with this matter so that particular delay is avoided due to nonavailability of the required planned manpower. the progress is not effected adversely. Contractor shall try to deploy manpower costing within the job budget. Workforce shall be time wise required respecting all disciplines & be kept on mobilizing in & demobilizing according to project requirement. Difficulty is to be faced when well-trained workforce is not available in time from the expected source. On considerable big size projects.5044. 4 5 Manpower. It has to be remembered that missing the approval. any demobilization can be effected though the approval shall not be withheld suraj_engineer@yahoo. no purchase order can be released by the procurement manager or project engineer/manager. Material approvals is a tedious & time consuming exercise which must be given due consideration & optimum time management for a possible successful completion of the contract. mobilization & demobilization programmes are prepared & approved by the engineer or the Client to ascertain that the job commence in time & after the demobilization. engineers specifications as well as conventional practice demand & updated standards & these should also be covered within budget cost other wise escalation shall take place should delay is allowed resulting in the delay on completion leading to imposition of liquidated damages on the contract. There shall be so many problems for deploying them & providing demanded facilities on the contract. Every submission required full manufacturer’s information. Similarly staff shall also be mobilized & demobilized according to contract requirement. of course market may fluctuate but there shall remain room for negotiations with the vendors or suppliers.co. In fact only after the approval from the Client is obtained. o 4093 c d 3 But the relevant purchase managers should not endeavor to spend unnecessary redundant time on this activity but make a decision in time to get to the site materials in planned time including all FAT as well as SAT & performance tests. It should also be taken note of that there are hundreds of permanent inclusion materials respecting which approvals are to be obtained.Workforce 1 Significant is this element in the absence of which nothing is feasible.uk 2 Page 68 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Actually it is suggested that major homework should have been carried out at the tendering time itself to avoid such delays.

5044. FEED stages to the performance stage. If possible. & then interviews. Elaborate & descriptive detailing is extremely necessary during designing. certain decisions could be taken at the FEED stage & the EPIC Contractor be directed to comply with the vendor of the equipment based on novation of the item. o 4093 c d unreasonably.uk Page 69 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Control of manpower constitutes in itself a separate mini discipline involving complete procedures from making requirement. forming recruitment strategy. This need should also be kept in view while working on the designs to avoid delay on account of providing input to the civil design team.co. vendor selection. short listing quotations. approvability. This is a long process. quotation invitations. short listing of selections & appointment on contract followed by mobilization to the job site. Technology decision for the project dictates the model & types of the equipment to be installed for the facility. suraj_engineer@yahoo. which must be preplanned to avoid any conflict with the site requirement. warranties applications & then the final decisions based on the quotation that fits within the budget & items be the best for the optimum performance according to the requirement of the contract. 2 3 Procurement1 Procurement means to supply to the site all materials & equipment & the process commences from the requirement scheduling. Decision pertaining the model dictates the foundation designs. The equipment installed must satisfy the design requirement failing which the facility shall be jeopardized of performance giving any possible halt to the processing & the Client or the operation authority shall make the designer or EPIC Contractor liable to compensate all damages incurred to it by the faulty commissioned equipment. financial viability. Equipment1 Equipment necessary for the inclusion on the project permanently requires considerable input from the Authorization. specification matches. Equipment are too expensive requiring making competent decisions for the inclusion as well as for the election of the vendor. approving the strategy. Frequent amendments/modifications have been experienced on the major projects during the day of concreting or one or two days before. approval & procurement stages. This type of bad practice should preferably be avoided. using agencies.

During tender stage itself. The process involved initially complete package submission meeting defined documentation procedures. This department involves itself for the complete operations front the estimations of the items quantities through the delivery to site & taking up the issues to the insurances in case of transportation damage. further scrutiny of the quotations regarding conformance to the specification & the project design criteria are done. That schedule should also be agreed by the engineer & adherence to the agreed dates have to be adhered until unforeseen suraj_engineer@yahoo. Later on subject to the condition that the work is awarded to the tender. Based on the quotations. & financial factors.uk 3 4 5 Page 70 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . the expected items are invited for quotations for specialized & important disciplines with negotiations done. rejection. further procedure continues & final & confirmed quantities are worked out based on the engineer’s approval of the proposed material or the machine which is separately applied prior to the placement of the procurement order. incorporation of the comments. o 4093 c d 2 Every company has established its own procedures meeting the guidelines of the international quality procedures ISO 9001 according to which full corporate management is involved for the procurement management practically effected by the procurement manager or engineer of the corporate part of the company management. Once the decision is made in favour of one of the suppliers. This is very time consuming process as submission. comments. A competent & experienced engineer should be involved to carry out all these procedures for technicalities are to be resolved during the whole exercise. Then a comparative statement is prepared giving full technical as well as financial with feasibility of timely manufacture & delivery & financial matters such as demand of the letter of credits or other financial support etc. Study pertaining each & every requirement should be conducted by the relevant disciplinary engineer & quotations accordingly invited.5044. re approval etc all are involved. further submission procedures should be started to obtain engineer & Client approval since procurement order cannot be placed without the Client or the engineer’s approval. After having obtained engineer’s approval.co. the requirement is processed for a procurement order by the management & all accounting procedures effected & delivery schedule confirmed. All are reflected to be examined by the management for making a decision promptly.

5044. Sooner the commencement. Relevant engineers supporting on site should be well experienced & proactive to take up the responsibility for the results orientation. There may be a case when due to some unavoidable circumstances.uk 2 3 Page 71 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h .co. o 4093 c d circumstances irrelevant to the general circumstances play any role. A well coordinated approach is necessary for there could be many instances requiring on site decision to resolve technicalities that must be immediately effected meeting the requirement & properly recorded as a part of field office engineering. This requires the availability of all the approved for construction drawings circulated under control to the relevant supervisors/engineers for the purpose to correctly prosecute the works according to the contract requirement. 6 The delivery should be made smoothly all in good condition to the site & the site manager should arrange complete examination by his team as well as approval of the delivery by the engineer concerned so that the delivered material or the equipment is including for the part percentage payment as agreed on the planning schedule. There should be no suraj_engineer@yahoo. Physical construction requires a concentrated as well as diverse attention of the quality assurance & control section or department on site. the project manager should immediately find an alternative portion to replace the prosecution so as to keep an equivalent proportion of the progress intact. some portion of the contract cannot be prosecuted. Every site manager or the project manager should endeavour his plans with the support of the schedule engineer to keep at least in line with the approved programme if not advanced. Physical Construction-Contract management Construction Project Management Physical construction 1 After having the mobilization been completed. It is definite that the civil construction takes the lead generally on all the projects. better the prospective to save the time and money. Civil engineering part of the contract is not that easy for it requires basic works on site involving trades persons & semi & unskilled workforce along with the materials in site. For EPIC case all design matters should also be properly coordinated to keep in line to facilitate the easy construction. time comes for the commencement of the permanent works for which the actual contract is meant for. For this attainment. all necessary resources availability should be properly coordinated.

It is no use should the equipment be rejected after delivery on site. extension of time claims. but from the beginning of the project & until post completion. 4 Every activity is inspected according to the Inspection & Test Plans based on a checklist & percentage witness etc. QA & QC should take into consideration proper inspection attendance there as well under the supervision or surveillance or witness of the engineer or the experts for the acceptance of the factory products as level I & completion of the parts in factory or manufacturing place as level II inspection prior to the equipment is shipped to the site location.co.5044. Requirement of complete knowledge of the relevant laws. Contract management shall be required to be applied & represented on site as well as in home office for the resolutions of many complexities. It is not just one discipline. procedures & coordination correspondence are extremely significant for the performance of Contract management. Contract management 1 It is very wide term on the Industrial contracts. Most of the jobs are based on the concreting constituting very important element of the contract & quality assurance should take proper attention for this onsite operation. co-ordinations & relevant contractual & general laws applications on the contracts. other discipline activities for example production of equipment. Hold points should be released when the activity is on that status. the pre engineered parts of the structure & other procurable items might be under manufacture demanding factory testing according to the procedures approved. Basically it is the main contract that requires well-established professional management but also covers various sub contracts as well as services contracts. simultaneously. on a foreign station or in a foreign land. contractual correspondences & many more legal affairs requiring resolutions on the contract or the sub contracts as well as services part of the low tier vendors. This term also covers a wide part of the documentations to be prepared for forming future arbitration basis as well as proceeding. o 4093 c d delay on this account for the approvals & constant inspection attendance should be ensured whenever necessary on a fast track project. It may involve costing effects. It should also be noted that whilst the civil engineering activities are prosecuted on site. construction. extras. additional contractual obligations. This term is very complex as its proper implementation necessitates the contracts manager to know & properly understand the engineering. claims.uk 2 Page 72 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . suraj_engineer@yahoo.

prior to the installation & commissioning & during performance & operation. safety & other meeting is a must. Integrated system test. got very leading & significant obligation to dispose off on a daily & hourly basis.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Factory Acceptance Test. m m start up. Commissioning Test. It is then conducted on delivery. o 4093 c d Construction project management. Co-ordinations with all sections of the site teams & home office teams as well as procurement are very significant. construction. monthly programmes as well as all discipline coordination is a must for the speeding of the operations. Authority has been invested with him to allow resources promotions & imparting training for the personnel of all categories as on job training. weekly. It is conducted in the factory during processing as well as after the finishing of the production. Sustained Performance Test  Factory Acceptance Test FAT  Verify quality & quantity visually according to documents  Demonstration of all system & diagnostic functions Page 73 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. The outcome of the construction depends on the efforts of the construction team. Job requires very dynamic & passionate person who commands all & gets respect from all sections & keeps good working relations with the Client as well as with home office. Coordination with all team members as well as the team members of the engineer Client is a must. What is going on site is direct responsibility for accountability. com issioning. Reporting all functions to the Client as well as to the home office & resolutions of all possible solutions is also one of the responsibilities. Attendance on the engineering. --------------------------------------Chapter 5 Testing.5044. Site Acceptance test.Pre Com issioning. Then also comes the duty to arrange & coordinate the materials as well as the other resources to be utilized on the project. Pre commissioning test. Daily. Project site manager or the construction manager or if project engineer be authorized for this responsibility. perform ance & m aintenance 1 The testing is carried out at various stages of given levels. Authorizations of the letters & correspondences produced by the contract as well as other departments for the project is also one of the duties.co.

all necessary systems & interfaces shall be operational prior to starting the test. After pre commissioning is complete.  Verify quality & quantity visually according to documents  Demonstration of all system & diagnostic functions  Demonstration of technical parameters  Functional test for all components  Power consumption  Module. o 4093 c d      2 Demonstration of technical parameters Functional test for all components Power consumption Module. adjust & balance the system for pre commissioning performance in order to ensure the conformance of the system to the requirements of the drawings & specifications. Where systems interface between each other. network & application level. Deficiencies to be observed. communication failure & recovery  Mechanical checks Site Acceptance test SAT SAT shall be based on selected tests from the commissioning tests & witnessed by Client & Authority. corrected & if so required. provide a letter certifying the installation is complete & fully operable. align. Commissioning Test CT It shall base on FAT & performed on site after the completion of installation & pre commissioning test.uk 3 4 5 Page 74 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . suraj_engineer@yahoo.co. SAT shall be performed at site after completion of commissioning tests. Prepare forms for systematic recording of acceptance test results. Integrated System Test IST To be performed of all sub systems or infrastructure used at physical. communication failure & recovery Mechanical checks Pre Commissioning Test PCT Upon completion of system installation.5044. including the names & titles of the witness to the preliminary tests. replacement of the malfunctioning of the damaged items with new ones & re-testing until satisfactory performance conditions are achieved.

uk Page 75 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . analysed & if so required. 6 Sustained performance test SPT Long-term stability & reliability of the system under normal operating conditions as well as its ability of automatic diagnosis of defects & alarming any problem in a timely manner. o 4093 c d Equipment meets the technical & functional specifications Specified equipment does not interfere with all other systems implemented & all operate without interference from each other in full operation or under fault conditions. the control of the equipment then shall be taken over by the client. replaced or repaired as agreed with the Engineer or Client. It is done after IST for 30 days or longer A failure is defined as any occurrence preventing full or partial utilization of the system. During this period training is also imparted to the Client personnel according to the provisions / requirement of the contract so that these personnel get used efficiently for the proper control about operation of new technologies. In case during the period of equipment performance as well as initial operation & maintenance. these are identified. The operation & maintenance period recommences until it is evident that no further defects exist on the deliveries. 2 Contractor shall deploy his operators for the purpose of initial operation duration & after successful completion of the initial operation.co.5044. suraj_engineer@yahoo. certain defects are discovered on the deliveries. During initial operation. the contractor shall operate the systems according to the functional requirement complying strictly to the equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Availability shall not be affected & SPT shall be temporarily suspended in case of any failure caused supplied equipment or services. EPIC Contractor shall design for approval by authority  Design of sustained performance test  Reliability of central equipment  Field equipment reliability  External interface input or output failure  System sustainability as identified by frequency of false alarms Operations & maintenance O & M 1 Every contract defines a particular duration of post practical or mechanical completion initial operation & maintenance to make sure & evidently prove efficient performance by the equipment / deliveries.

The contractor should be careful during initial operation & maintenance by keeping controlling eyes on all systems & discover any minor or major defects appearing on the operation & if detected any defect. re-operation commenced for the successful initial operation completion duration.co. 2 The Contractor shall have to arrange for all proceedings in all respects according to the requirement of the Third party certifying authority.uk 3 Page 76 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Instruction given by the third party shall immediately be implemented to accomplish the job. The third party shall. must be brought to the knowledge of the engineer & client for the agreement of the corrective steps to be taken & after correction. the document received shall be processed for presentation & examination by the engineer & the Client for this certificate/s has/have to be included as part of the mechanical completion certification. o 4093 c d 3 There could be included within the contract modalities any condition of damage compensation to the client applicable because of equipment performance test failure. which case requires the EPIC contractor to make compensation to the Client of the calculated claimable amount for the failure of the required deliveries performance of the technology. according to the provisions of the quality systems adopted or approved. inspect the deliverables in the factory as well as on site during procurement. No payment shall be made to the Contractor until the third party certifies that the delivered product is according to the project specification requirement as well as meets all defined acceptable requirements. pre-commissioning & commissioning & also during performance & maintenance. All provisions to be extended to the third party inspector shall be made available in due time so that the inspection be conducted smoothly. After having the certification over. how to effect the item inspection in the factory as well as on site in the presence of the engineer or engineer’s representative. The list of suraj_engineer@yahoo. Third Party Certifications TPC 1 On many specialists deliveries a clause is included that the product should be certified by a third party independently which shall be approved by the Client or the engineer prior to the commencement of its scope of the works. Third Party Certification services Contractor is to appoint a Third Party Certification Agency (TPC). This is very significant condition in the sense that compensation may amount to many times the cost of the works.5044.

1B or equivalent). For example certification of Level I may include: ANSI/ASME B31. Craneage and supports Level 2 . Switchgear.1C or equivalent. These items shall be fully traceable.3. It is to be ensured that the marked up drawings are supplied to Client for reference and traceability purposes.co. A significant environmental hazard. A limited environmental hazard. Any process system nonPage 77 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. components where failure could result in:  A limited loss of production.5044. the following: Material Traceability Level Any material under the following categories (Traceability Levels) shall require specific certification or documentation as given below: Level 1 . o 4093 c d      approved TPC is to be provided within the FEED documents. Level 3 . but not be limited to. A significant loss of production. 3.Full Material Traceability The TPC shall review the data books of manufacturers and witness all the tests in accordance with DIN 50049 3. Generators. The Third Party Certification (TPC) services shall be in accordance with DIN 50049.Material Traceability The material shall have a Certificate of Compliance (DIN 50049 3. which shall be compiled in a data book and delivered with the equipment package. Transformer.1C and the certificate to be provided by Third Party Certification Agency shall include the following as a minimum: Proof of identification of the material Tests report duly signed by Inspector Identification symbol of Agency or Inspector Certificate number and date of issue The different levels at which involvement of TPC are required shall include.Material Traceability The TPC shall ensure that the materials supplied to the Project can be traced back to Manufacturer’s Certificates (DIN 50049 3.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . structures and components where failure could result in: A significant hazard to personnel. Example of system / unit to be included in level 2. structures.1A or 3) Level 3 is applicable to material that is not in level 1 & 2. Level 2 certification is applicable to:  Critical system. Level 1 includes Critical System.

inspections. Only controlled copy shall be issued to the designated personnel for reference as well as official use. Project records All documents in whatever format produced. Document control shall immediately affix the superseded seal on the documents not to be used any further. Minor items e. The site personnel should ensure that the documents under use are approved for construction by making an enquiry from the document control centre. The document control shall regularly update the register of the documents showing these changes & revision references & circulate to the designated personnel. All contractual documents.g. Page 78 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. cable tray. Well established document centre of the Contractor as well as of the Engineer shall affect this requirement for all relevant incoming as well as outgoing documents. procedures & others. Issued for Construction documentsThese documents are meant for the construction purpose having due approval by the engineer & the Client. hand rails. etc. Materials not in levels 1 & 2 e. These documents are also given various sequence of revision depending on the changes effected thereto. o 4093 c d process wetted or non-pressure parts which are not in level 1 or 2. deliveries. no work shall be allowed on site. Instrument air. The certification type should always be considered consistent with the high criticality and type of equipment / material being designed. schematic drawings.5044. design drawings. specifications.co.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Lube oil. sacrificial spool pieces of low value and non-hydrocarbon duty. shall be kept in the centre for an easy reference / review for the authorized personnel. The component parts of an equipment package do not warrant the same level of traceability. All records shall be well maintained & made accessible to the relevant authorities under the direct control of the document controller. These documents shall be duly numbered for the purpose of efficient traceability. Produced water. Without an availability of these documents. procured or fabricated. approved for construction documents. Consideration needs to be given to the applicable international codes and standards to which the particular equipment is being built.g. Packages The traceability level for an equipment package can be found by using level 1. red line mark ups. floor plate. shall be controlled by master record copy in both hard as well as soft mode.

The Contractor shall submit these manuals after processing formally as documents for approval by the engineer.co. Every red line mark up shall be intimated to the engineer for the purpose of obtaining an approval for as built production. The items that need replacement because of defects shall have to be replaced immediately without any delay so as not to adversely affect the project Page 79 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. These shall also form part of the handing over dossiers.5044. These leads are given by the quality assurance & control department jointly with the construction & engineering. The respective vendors should provide all operation & maintenance manuals for the reference of the user describing fully to meet all normal as well as emergency requirement. As builtEvery project requires documentation for the works done on site for the final handover dossiers. The responsible facility operators should know explicitly how these machines or the equipment to be used. Those changes recorded as redline markups shall be properly studied by the discipline or the project engineers one by one to decided whether or not these changes should be reflected on the approved for construction documents. Separate documents references shall be used for the se documents for an easy reference as well as traceability. Operation & maintenance Manuals All equipment belonging to every discipline procured from any vendor shall be used on operation of the facility permanently under proper maintenance. These notes of snags are recorded & a time frame agreed to incorporate the correction to items that are correctable. o 4093 c d Red Lines Mark ups. These changes on the site shall be recorded on the drawings or the specifications temporarily as red line markings/markups to be used as records for producing as built records. which possibly might not have been included during the original design. All redline mark ups shall be incorporated on to the as built title drawings before the submission to the engineer as project dossiers. These shall be recorded in the document control as regular documents.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . joint inspections are carried out to enlist the minor defects as snags for all items one by one according to the approved checklists.basis for As Built documents Every operation on site should go smoothly when all details are available. There shall be instances due to the site requirement of actual conditions. that need immediate attention & effects to a certain extent the site for adjustments on the practical execution of the design after the approval by the engineer is granted. Punch List / SnagsBefore the mechanical completion as a part of the pre commissioning stage.

Snags1 Snags have been covered in aforesaid explanation but should be dealt with all according to site requirement & the item concerned. according to the procedures the repair be effected for re inspection & acceptance. Minor non-conformanceWhere a non-conformance has been recorded to repair minor defects. touch up repair may be agreed with the engineer & after agreement. Item should then be closely inspected from inside & outside according to the procedures specified on the Inspection & test check list. should these defects be repairable.5044. Visual defectsIt shall be easier to some extent for which prosecuted items may allow visual inspections for the purpose of full or part acceptance admissible within the quality assurance procedures. Whatever observation made. amounting to severe nature. After conducting the correction to these snags. Some snags may require replacement of the item in full that should immediately be effected to avoiding any delay on the performance of the system. o 4093 c d handover. Technical defectsWhere technical defects have been noted on records pertaining items. the repair be conducted & approved by re examination.uk Page 80 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h .co. In case defects amount to very minute nature which do not necessarily invite replacement action. inspections are made & final list is prepared for minor defects that may not effect the commissioning or the performance of the facility which may be taken up to be repaired during maintenance stage to the agreement of the parties concerned. These types of repairs should be immediately carried out to avoid unnecessary inclusion on the punch list. should be recorded & final interpretation punched for further action which shall decide the level of acceptance & suggest the further remedial action applicable. after agreement of the proposal with the engineer. that case invites items to be replaced immediately to avoid any delay on the start up. 2 Investigations / rectification / remedial measuresDuring the inspection many categories of the snags for punch list shall be observed & pointed out. All these should be recorded & some important snags noted which amount to sloppy quality assurance for which investigation must be suraj_engineer@yahoo.

binders. start-up. Mechanical Completion. All indices. All drawings and data shall be "as-built" suraj_engineer@yahoo. The Table of Contents of each Volume is to appear in all volumes. re-inspection & approval process repeated. Mechanical Catalogue should be bound in hard. the execution of the resolution. labels. commissioning.Pre commissioning & commissioning-site acceptance testperformance. Non conformance reports should be constituted. etc. durable. with the Job Title and Project Number embossed on the cover.5044. 3 Based on these reports of investigation & punch list reference. Precautionary measures as revealed by the investigation of the responsibility as established should also be included within the reports & on the close out report for future lessons & references. thereafter resolution recorded on these for ‘acceptance & implementation’ following which. o 4093 c d resorted immediately to establish the responsibility of neglect during supervision. Drawings should be reduced to A3 size and may be accordion-folded to A4 size.plant performance-Final documentation Final Project Dossiers shall be produced as per Engineering Standard compilation of Project Dossiers (Latest revision as on Effective Date Of Contract) and as described below: Mechanical catalogueGeneral 1 Contractor shall prepare the Mechanical Catalogue & make available 3 (three) months prior to being Ready for commissioning for the system / sub system / unit stage as a compilation of ‘engineering and vendor drawings’ and data for use during installation. stated should be in the English language along with electronic media format Data Books.uk 3 Page 81 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . 2 Contractor shall organise all the Mechanical Catalogue by unit and equipment category.co. Volume thickness of each book shall not exceed eight (8) centimeters. operation and maintenance & include all documents as builts up & others as necessary for installation & operation of the relevant system or sub system or unit . which consist of several volumes depending upon from case to case & be submitted in the approved format. Book pages are to be A4 size. Contents should be sectionalized and separated by properly labeled dividers. contents. performance testing.

Instrument lists-Major calculation notes for all disciplines. manufacturer. PFDs (process flow diagrams). The content of the Quality Assurance Record Book shall vary depending upon the type. Development Plan and Design Basis. One line diagrams. erection and test history of the equipment ordered and materials installed as appropriate. P&Ids (piping & instrumentation diagrams). instrumentation and others). Un-priced purchase orders Quality assurance record book General 1 Contractor shall prepare Quality Assurance Record Books consisting of a compilation of quality assurance / quality control documentation representative of the material.co. Vendors. fabrication. structural. erection and commissioning stages from multiple sources (Contractor.engineering documents.uk 2 3 4 Page 82 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . In view of the requirement for full traceability of materials and dimensional control. and their respective sub Contractors and vendors) shall be easily retrievable in order to provide evidence that equipment and materials used and assembled in the FACILITY comply with the Contract requirements at each step of the Work. Load lists. suraj_engineer@yahoo. general and particular specifications. electrical. Each book shall contain all documentation referenced in the inspection data sheet and all records of testing required. procurement. Isometrics. Contractor to note that some of the requirement stated herein may not be applicable to the Project. tanks and piping shop drawings marked up with welding identification and material certificate numbers. o 4093 c d Mechanical Catalogue Contents The Mechanical Catalogues shall include items such as given herein: Lists for items for example .5044. Design criteria. Electrical short circuit and load flow diagrams. Plot plans and layout drawings-Approved For Construction (AFC) drawings in all major disciplines (civil. Specifications and data sheets. The purpose of the Quality Assurance Record Book shall be to ensure that quality assurance and quality control documents originating at the engineering. piping. Instrument loop diagrams. Contractor shall include drawings such as vessels. ESD (electrical/electronic system diagrams). requisitions. fabrication. Electrical trouble shooting diagrams. Equipment lists. Vendor drawings and documents for all equipment and materials. Subcontractors. size and complexity of the equipment. Utilities summaries. Electrical relay co-ordination diagrams. line lists.

5044. o 4093 c d 5 6 The documents for the quality assurance dossier shall be kept in specific quality assurance files as soon as these are issued. There shall be several Quality Assurance Record Books each consisting of several volumes. The final Quality Assurance Record Book shall be issued together with the other documents to be included in the Final Documentation in required number of copies. Contractor shall submit the details of the format and contents of the Quality Assurance Record Book for approval prior to starting preparation.uk 3 Page 83 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . The Project Manager / Engineer shall be consulted as to what arrangement shall be most suitable. Contractor shall have all indices. All drawings and data shall be "as-built" 7 8 Contents of Quality Assurance Record Book 1 The Quality Assurance Record Book shall include but not be limited to the following items: Approved dossier index-Signed off copy of quality plan-Technical Certificates of compliance as well as non-conformance technical certificates for the record if any. Contractor shall organise the Quality Assurance Record Book by Unit and equipment category. stated in the English language. Volume thickness of each Volume shall not exceed eight (8) centimetres. Book pages are to be A4 size. binders with the Job Title and Project Number embossed on the cover. Contractor shall prepare electronic media format Data Books.co. Drawings should be reduced to A3 size and may be accordion-folded to A4 size. durable. NACE certificates-Typical material certificates-Fully traceable material mill certificates-Weld procedures and qualifications-Weld repair procedures-Welders qualifications-NDE proceduresNDE reports for examination of welds including X-ray films UT test sheets-NDE operative qualifications-Visual examination certificatesDimensional check report-Heat treatment Procedure-Heat treatment Chartssuraj_engineer@yahoo. The Table of Contents of each Volume is to appear in all volumes. Also. remain easily retrievable and available for consultation at all times during the course of the work. contents etc. 2 Where NACE compliance is a requirement. Contents should be sectionalized and separated by properly labeled dividers. The Quality Assurance Records Book shall be bound in hard. labels.

Maintenance and Other Manuals for the Client to use for operator training as well as for preparing the detailed operating procedures. Safety. drawing and certification to achieve a smooth hand-over from the Client project task force to the operating staff. Also all such documents from Vendors shall be computable to Client CAD format suraj_engineer@yahoo. For that purpose. Complete document packages for each Unit. other manuals and Data Books by unit. P& ID’s and single line diagrams prepared by Contractor shall be in a format for direct input in Client CAD (Computer Aided Design) system. Computerized records shall be utilized where appropriate. o 4093 c d As built drawings-Vessel nameplate details-Weight and centre of gravity detailsHydro test certificates-Pneumatic test certificates-Balancing reports-Over speed test reports-String test reports-Hazardous area test reports / certificatesFunctional tests. Contractor shall organize the Operating. control system and others as required by national standard or Client specifications. Client shall specify procedure for the coding.5044.co. electrical.uk 2 3 Page 84 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . System or Sub-System shall be available before transfer of responsibilities for Unit. System or Sub-System takes place. 4 The Pre-commissioning and Commissioning dossiers shall also be included in the Quality Assurance Record Book. a number of manuals shall need to be produced to allow the commissioning team to produce detailed procedures and instruction for operating and maintaining the FACILITY. either mechanical. Manuals and data book Introduction 1 Contractor shall prepare the Operating. System or Sub-System to be handed over to Client during the transfer of responsibilities from construction to commissioning to operation. System or Sub-System. The manuals are listed here in order that the Contractor may identify any information of an appropriate nature. It is important that all stages of the Work are properly recorded. format and final completion of documentation. which should be compiled and handed over to Client. Maintenance. PFD’s. whether witnessed or not (as applicable)-Crane SWL certificate-Electrical continuity / insulation resistance test-Instrument calibration certificates-General electrical / instrument/control/telecommunication-testing. The records and documents generated during the Work shall be included in Manuals by Unit.

The Manuals and Data Books shall be bound in hard. durable. Client might have identified the following manuals to be generated as a minimum: Each Operating. with the Job Title and Project Number embossed on the cover. Maintenance and Safety Manuals for Approval prior to starting preparation. Safety and Other Manuals as well as the format is defined somewhere in the documents. Manuals shall be written with regard to the overall construction and commissioning program. area classification plans. Contents should be sectionalized and separated by properly labeled dividers. It shall contain the operating parameters including safe working limits for all vessels and pipes. Contractor shall submit the details of the format and contents of the Operating.co. Operating Procedures Manual Page 85 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. stated in the English language. 4 Each Manual shall consist of several volumes. It shall contain plot plans. quality control. Contractor shall prepare electronic media format Data Books. Other Manuals shall be available in preliminary form three months prior to ready for commissioning for the relevant system or unit and be issued in the final form together with the other documents to be included in the Final Documentation at the time of applying for Certificate of Completion. The Table of Contents of each Volume is to appear in all volumes. o 4093 c d specified in TDMS specification. The required number of copies of the Operating. Volume thickness of each Volume shall not exceed eight (8) centimeters. Maintenance. Also. All drawings and data shall be "asbuilt" Facilities Manual It shall describe the overall FACILITY and contain the basic data which determines the methods of protecting. Safety. Maintenance.5044. operating and maintaining the FACILITY.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . operations and maintenance so that they are available at the right time for their proper utilisation. Book pages are to be A4 size. Drawings should be reduced to A3 size and may be accordion-folded to A4 size. together with escape routes and other items to be approved by Client. binders. The Project Manager / Engineer shall be consulted as to what arrangement shall be most suitable. Access Manual This manual shall show access and lay-down for maintenance of all items of equipment and be developed by the EPIC Contractor for further review and approval by Client.

drawings. fire. repair procedures and QA procedures etc. The final formal and content shall be decided by Client to reflect site policies. The manuals should contain the appropriate data to allow Client Maintenance to perform their function effectively as well as include vendor’s equipment description. Control systems. it shall form the basic of a detailed programme for the operation and maintenance activities of the facility. re-ordering procedures. pipe bursting. The manual should include Equipment data sheets / vendor documentation. Communications.co. Operating manual shall be categorized into Process Units. Training Manual This manual shall be produced by Contractor for approval by Client. maintenance and vendor manuals. Utility Units. system and subsystem where Page 86 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Pipelines. references.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Emergency Procedure ManualThis shall contain all the actions that need be taken in the response to an emergency incident on the site or in its vicinity such as acid spillage. The draft operating procedure manuals shall be produced well in advance of Equipment and FACILITY commissioning. Auxiliary Facilities. cause & effect charts.5044. accidents. start-up and shutdown procedures. etc. It shall describe the organisational response required to deal satisfactorily with such incident. Engineering Manuals These are record dossiers of all items of FACILITY and equipment to be supplied by the Contractor. emergency shut down procedures. It shall give a brief description of systems and the associated subsystems. The manual shall describe the FACILITY in sufficient detail to the level of a competent operator including but not limited to the following:FACILITY description. Safety. It is intended to be used for training purposes only for which. Maintenance Manuals These shall provide sufficient information to the Client Maintenance Department and be produced in a form which shall facilitate the setting up of a Maintenance Management System. PFD. detailed drawings. o 4093 c d This shall be the collection of detailed operating procedures relating to each FACILITY or system. P&ID. operating parameters. Unit capacities and limitations. spare lists. the required liaison with outside authorities & include any special procedures or instruction relating to process / utilities equipment with normal operating procedures. spare part lists. equipment list. specification.

description and specification number. Process Units Include Process flows (show oil and utility quantities for specified charge rates). calculate performance capacities. General-Detailed description of the equipment and auxiliaries-Detailed instructions for use-Detailed trouble shooting Section and details of self-diagnostic routine-Detailed dismantling instructions-Itemized spare parts lists with reference drawings-Recommended list of consumable-Maintenance schedule Data book 1 Data Books are intended to provide the information necessary for Client’s resident Technical Department or an outside Contractor or consultant to understand the processes involved. Utility Information.5044. Elevations and Coordinate References and government requirements. Process plot plan.co. those included in the Equipment Reference File should be so marked. Licensor’s documentation. Heat and material balances. Site conditions. etc. efficiencies and design modifications. b) one column wherein all drawings for which electronic format (CAD).uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . o 4093 c d appropriate. Tape / diskette) supplied to the Client are clearly indicated. Refer TDMS specification requirement . treating facilities.e. Maintenance procedures Maintenance procedures are to be split per main equipment or main equipment category. tower. Contractor with Client approval.. vessels. distribution and balances Page 87 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Equipment ScheduleOf all equipment by item number. Also Manufacturer's name. Drawing Index of all Client. Summary report on Soil conditions. Also. exchangers. Meteorological Data.Data Book(s) shall in general conform to the following: 2 Basic Engineering Data: General Information. Group equipment by category. etc. shall provide a database for recording of the index. cooling water. P& IDs by Unit. Contractor and Vendor drawings This index shall include: (a) One column wherein all drawings included in the Data Book are clearly indicated and. Process calculations index and Battery limit line Tables for Process and Utility lines. Water Systems Including sources. i. Operating and design parameters. Block flow diagrams.

special requirements (radio. walkie-talkie. drains. maximum emission allowances for C02. pressure. hydrants. NoiseInclude in-plant and community design noise level limit criteria. type of construction.5044. lube oil systems) piping drawings.- Equipment Data 1 Pump information to include pump list data sheets. systems plot plans. outline and dimensional drawings (including driver). flow sheets and tie-ins when provided. Safety Special requirements as related to operating units and equipment. etc. Electrical Systems Including all distribution facilities. systems plot plans.uk Page 88 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . and water treating data sheets. dew point).) and equipment layouts. performance curves. single-line diagrams of ‘generating and main distribution’ system. fire water systems design pumps. as required by local and other governmental regulations. All power System Studies to be submitted as a stand-alone dossier complete with suraj_engineer@yahoo. Design data for switchgear and motor controllers. and major equipment used in control. design basis abnormal load and peak demand tabulation of significant operating conditions. monitors. flare stack height data related to smoking / nonsmoking capabilities. where required the local and other governmental noise limit regulation for in-plant and community noise. plans. setting stack heights. Also.co. elevations and plot plans. mechanical seal arrangement drawings and auxiliary (vents. Air Quality Control Include design basis for air quality dispersal rates. o 4093 c d for normal and maximum design conditions. System description and data on telesignalling system Communications Include system description.- BuildingsInclude brief description. Systems plot plan (including substation locations). etc. hose and hose reels. etc. Also. fixed spray systems. P&IDs. S02. specifications. Air Systems FACILITY and instrument: Include design basis (quantities.

However. Contractor’s Scope of Work is to input / entry data into the SAP system in conformance with the Scope of Work and structure as indicated in the SAP document. Contractor shall compile the data in accordance with the SAP structure as per the Scope of Work.5044. Maintenance. process information and pertinent mechanical description Maintenance Facilities information to include list (type. Also. Back up of the control / DCS system configuration made for the plant or package shall be provided in CDs or DVDs in 4 (four) numbers.). drawings. Instrument information to include schedule. Between the SAP system consisting of SAP modules and the DCS equipment. so data exchange may be initiated by either suraj_engineer@yahoo. etc. special portable tools and special inspection equipment. specifications of lube oil and seal oil consoles. performance curves. plan and arrangement drawings of simple buildings used for maintenance and bulk materials storage. size) of permanently mounted shop tools. Line list information shall be provided as per specification. 3 Technical Data Management System (TDMS) Contractor shall develop and provide Final Documentation in accordance with TDMS specifications. lube and seal oil diagrams indicating instrumentation and control and outline drawings. o 4093 c d 2 drawings. listing data by category (temperature. the Contractor shall provide hardware and Software interface between SAP System and the DCS. piping arrangement. data.uk Page 89 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . an Open access module is required. The operation of SAP is included in the Scope of Work of Contractor. steam gland and sealing diagrams (when required).co. The SAP Open Access module shall extend the functionality of SQL plus to provide direct access to SAP modules from the APIs of DCS equipment. pressure flow. general arrangement (outline) and cross-sectional drawings. filters. Management and Maintenance Strategies for SAP System 1 The supply of the software is not included in the Scope of Work of this Contract. to include data sheets. etc. CDs etc. including access for operations and maintenance. Centrifugal & Reciprocating Compressors and Drivers information to include data sheets. electrical. Client shall install the SAP system software. major platform arrangements. Engineering Data Acquisition. Special Equipment such as mixers. The Open Access module shall be both a Client and server to SAP.

performance start up.maintenance & successful performance Hand Over1 Handing over the site refers to mechanical or physical handover to the client at practical completion. 2 All documents as explained in the foregoing are compiled according to the QA system to constitute a bunch of documents contractually for an approval by the engineer & the client for permanent use by the client. The registration and definition of these messages shall be handled by this module allowing applications to be developed without any changes to any of the already existing SAP configurations. All personnel meant for training the operative of the client should be engaged for imparting to them formal training courses according to the agreed conditions for explaining complete systems demonstrated properly so that no mistake may occur during operations. o 4093 c d SAP or any application program on DCS (like Setcim and Infoplus of Aspentech etc.5044. Immediately after the handover. in order to accommodate customised SAP systems.co.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . The works should have been completed in all respects so that these can be used for the intended purpose & production commences according to the plant designs & technology involved. the operations work & the maintenance period commences which continues up to an agreed period or duration according to the provisions within the contract. the SAP Open Access Module shall also allow user defined messages to be transmitted and received from SAP Advanced Business Application Program (ABAP) which be developed by the Contractor as per the Scope of Work defined. 2 This dual functionality shall allow bi-directional event driven information links to be developed between API (setcim) of DCS and SAP applications. Additionally. Recording the lessons learnt1 It should be the endeavour of a professional contractor to record all incidents during the contract execution which obstructed the progress on the contract & all Page 90 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo.). This module at a most basic level shall allow standard SAP PP-IP messages to be received and transmitted by SQL Plus. All punch list items as included within snags should be properly & efficiently attended to so that it does not take much of the maintenance period for the reinstatement conditions. A list of minor snags not effecting the performance should be prepared for repair in the maintenance period as agreed by the client & the engineer. Final Completion.

operation review & technical audit 1 Contractor shall arrange for technical safety. Company / Client at its sole discretion may appoint a third party to carry out such quality / HSE audits of the Work. Close Out-The close out reporting is very significant in essence as it is a final document speaking all history summary of the project which may be used to learn various lessons for future use by all parties involved & can form an operational research database for supervision analysis Discharge-After obtaining the final completion & maintaining certification. Contractor shall make available all records and all aspects of the Work at all times and at all places where Work is performed for detailed auditing by Company / Client or any third party appointed by Company / Client.These should also be recorded based on the regular records during the various progress stages. reliability. Suggestions-about the sub Contractors. operability and maintainability reviews which are required to be carried out by Company / Client at specific stages of Engineering.co.uk 2 Page 91 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . All problems faced or experienced by the contractor should also be recorded on documents giving base for incorporation solutions for future contracts. operability and maintainability of the FACILITY. These documents are termed as close out report part. o 4093 c d 2 3 4 instances evidencing the cooperation by the engineer & his staff.5044. Contractor shall make available for reference and Company / Client use at all suraj_engineer@yahoo. The client & the engineer should go through these records to amend its style of working on the future projects. Procurement and Construction during the Project development to check for safety. Technical safety. About the Client engineers-These records should also be based on the regular comments noted on the progress achievement during the contract period giving necessary suggestions about enhancing the client or engineers efficiencies & dealings in the interest of the future projects. In addition. Also a record should be made for the performance of the engineer or the client personnel & any required improvement. Contractor should also describe his mistakes or how otherwise the problems could have otherwise be tackled to minimize the loss of time & expenditures. discharge certification should be given by the client & the engineer relieving the contractor of the construction responsibilities provided the contractual warranties as well as liabilities remain in force as secured for the coverage of certain guaranteed items on the scope of work. In particular.

Contractor shall carry out Hazards Analysis. Page 92 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Examples of the required services are:  Land rental for Accommodation / office camp and lay down area. a good quality copy of the latest issue of all applicable codes. operability and maintainability reviews and provide copies of Contractor’s findings to Company / Client. -------------------------------------Chapter 6 P j cm ae et r et a gm o n n Various facilities at Construction Site Contractor shall be responsible to arrange to acquire all the service logistics required at Plant Industrial City for the performance of the Works.5044.  Gate pass of personnel and vehicles. specifications and qualified Contractor Personnel to assist Company / Client. o 4093 c d places where the Work is performed. Safety and Environment Review (PHSER). BA Certificate courses.  Fresh water etc All these facilities shall be managed by the contractor sufficient in advance so as to meet the schedule requirement. Additionally. All these points should be kept in notice to initiate the application quiet in advance to meet the schedule requirement. Contractor shall carry out safety. plant  H2S. It should be noted that the procedure for the lease of the planned land for the camping consumes considerable time by the municipality or the industrial city authorities as well as other authorities. Contractor shall also prepare Safety Audit and Inspection Manual to submit to Company / Client for approval. Contractor shall implement the review findings into his Scope of Work.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Also. The costs of such services shall be included in the Lump Sum Portion of the Contract Price. equipment. 3 Additionally. Contractor shall also provide a suitable venue for such reviews. Contractor shall also submit Safety Requirement Specification. the application procedures for the security gate passes based on its own regulation take certain hours for the issues. Safety Analysis and Project Health.co. drawings. standards. Company / Client shall have the right to attend such reviews. norms.

Contractor shall build. Charges and fees to be paid by Contractor to Plant for such accommodation if so preferred & available. provided that these space requirements are considered as reasonable and justified by Company / Client / Plant. telecommunication. Contractor may utilize accommodation facilities provided by Plant inside the fence of Plant area. operate and maintain his own accommodation facilities. o 4093 c d Construction Accommodation Camp and Other Construction Facilities Contractor shall choose from option 1 or 2 (below) for its accommodation camp.Accommodation facilities Outside the Fence of Plant Area. 2 Contractor shall submit office Accommodation and lay-down area requirements for Company / Client approval after Contract award. Plant and / or Company / Client. 3 General 1 Contractor shall take over construction preparation for the Temporary Facilities after obtaining approval from local authorities.Accommodation facilities Inside the Fence of Plant Area. etc. Contractor may elect to have his accommodation facilities outside the Plant area fence. Contractor notes that Plant accommodation facilities shall be subject to availability at the time of request and be provided to Contractor or other parties on the basis of first come first served.5044. operate and maintain up to Completion the suraj_engineer@yahoo. Contractor shall utilize an approved Plant designated area and construct.uk Page 93 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . fabrication area and office camps and obtain permit from Company / Client Plant and / or Government Agencies to build these temporary facilities at Plant Industrial City including permits for all utilities such as power. Option 1 . Notwithstanding the above. The approved temporary office camp and lay down areas shall be at no cost to Contractor. Option 2 .co. maintain and operate a suitable lay-down area. water. In such case Contractor shall obtain necessary approval from local authorities as mentioned in the foregoing. Other Construction Temporary Facilities 1 Contractor shall provide. In accordance with the latest Health. In the event that the Plant accommodation facilities are not available. Contractor shall utilise these Temporary Facilities for the purpose of the Project only. Environment and Safety standards for which Company / Client shall assist Contractor by issuing an introductory letter to the Authorities.

2 Contractor shall provide accommodation. Environment and Safety standards. Civil prefabrication work areas.  Radiography examination room. Testing laboratories. 6 Steel fabrication area. Toilets.5044. adequate storage and handling facilities. showers and change rooms. any other facilities required for the Work.  Reprography and communications (including phone. cleaning. Contractor shall be responsible for operation. Utilities such as power. First aid medical stations (minimum three (3) stations). water. trucks. laundry) in the camp and generally cater to all personnel (no accommodation to be provided to Company / Client personnel) assigned to Construction Site. maintenance and housekeeping of the Accommodation Camps and other facilities. 7 Contractor shall prepare details and obtain relevant approval of the facilities Page 94 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Equipment maintenance facilities. mechanical and E &I 5 Concrete batching facility. Craft work areas. Contractor shall close down and re-instate the Accommodation camp to its original state (as a minimum) and other facilities including all facilities provided to Company / Client.  Warehouses and lay-down area  Warehousing facilities shall include covered storage.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Lining storage area and work area. recreational facilities. catering and servicing (including safety. Labour canteen facilities. Grit blasting. Rigging loft. Roads. etc. operate and maintain throughout the duration of the Work all other required Construction Site facilities including but not limited to the following: 4 Office buildings for Contractor and Company / Client Personnel. air etc. medical aid.)  Pipe fabrication shop. housing. 3 After Completion. buses. paths and car parking for construction requirements. painting shop.  Office Buildings and Other Facilities  Contractor shall build. Explosives storage if required. Contractor Personnel are to be accommodated in camp facilities in accordance with the latest Health. Piping must be protected with pipe caps. o 4093 c d accommodation camp for Contractor Personnel and other related facilities. both civil. Guard houses. Fuelling stations for equipment. For the phases of Work up to Completion. entrance control and fencing. The camp design and construction is to conform to the design requirements to be developed by Contractor and approved by Company / Client during the engineering phase. air-conditioned storage and outdoor storage as appropriate. washing facilities.co. radio. fax.

tanks. Office buildings and other facilities – The office buildings and other facilities are to be located close to the Facility to be constructed. Wastes from accommodation camps. Fresh Water . o 4093 c d proposed.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . earth renewal and disposal.Accommodation Camp Fresh water at camps at Plant Industrial City shall be provided by Contractor. Contractor shall take all necessary remedial actions for proper compliance. Contractor shall provide for adequate water storage facilities for this purpose. testing of piping. Contractor shall arrange for temporary power and lighting arrangement in all work areas at Construction Site. aggregate materials washing. storage. vessels. transfer and distribution of all water required for office buildings as well as other facilities at Construction Site. Offices. Office buildings and other facilities Contractor shall provide for the collection. lay down areas fabrication shops. The temporary construction facilities provided by Contractor for the Camp. dirt transportation disposal. Requirements shall also include items such as concrete production. Construction debris Page 95 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. including what is required for the Work. personnel waste flushing and for compaction of Construction Site fill. offices and other facilities at construction site Effluents Contractor shall provide for the collection of all sewage and wastewater from both the accommodation camp and other facilities at the Construction Site to storage tanks and provide for the contents to be treated at the existing Plant Sewage Treatment Plant. drinking water. spills.accommodation camp Contractor shall arrange for power to be provided from Electrical Department through Plant or alternatively to arrange for his own power generation system. Company / Client shall not allow Contractor to utilise existing Company / Client facilities / utilities and Contractor arrange for its own power generation system. shall be subjected to the inspection of the State Environmental Supreme Council such as sewage disposal. Contractor is not compliant with the minimum requirements. In case. etc. Office Buildings and Other facilities at Construction Site Power.5044.co. Utilities For Accommodation Camp. etc.

 Contractor shall utilize the Plant sewage treatment plant for its domestic waste / sewage treatment for which Contractor shall be charged at the rate of ……. During Construction Work on the FACILITIES. suraj_engineer@yahoo.  Contractor to arrange for transportation of the sewage from his camp to the Plant sewage plant. Garbage and construction unclassified rubbish to be hauled to a Site within Nation approved by Company / Client and / or relevant body.uk Page 96 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Contractor and SubContractors. A temporary exchange with sufficient capacity to meet the anticipated heavy demand for telephone and facsimile circuits during this phase shall be provided. Waste disposal 1 All wastes generated from the Contractor’s Temporary Facilities shall be disposed off by Contractor at disposal sites within the Plant Area as approved by Company / Client. a governmental agency has total jurisdiction on communications for this Project. Scrap steel to be disposed of through local organisations. communications services shall be required for Accommodation Camps. Contractor shall seek TEL advice on their requirements to supply telecommunication equipment upon request.5044. Construction communications should be considered as a separate stand-alone part of the Project including power supply arrangements. o 4093 c d Construction debris may be disposed as follows: Clean construction rubble and excavated materials hauled elsewhere within Nation to a site approved by Company / Client and / or relevant body. 2 Communication Systems during Construction. Contractor shall adhere to Regulation for Disposal of dredging material given in Contract documents. Untreated sanitary waste and solid waste to be hauled to a treatment plant located to a site within Nation approved by Company / Client and / or relevant body. Telephone extensions and facsimile machines shall be required throughout duration of the Project for offices of Company / Client. Telecommunications (TEL). Contractor shall determine the exact requirements. Office buildings and other facilities at Construction site.co. Contractor shall adhere to Environmental Guidelines and Company / Client Environmental Protection Standards and apply to the relevant National public authorities for disposal of such construction debris. per cubic meter. Company / Client shall provide a letter of introduction for such application.

To facilitate Project import Material. Contractor to arrange authentication / legalisation of such documents.5044. Contractor shall clear all materials through National Customs for use at the Construction Site. Airfreight shall be through international airport at all stages. Contractor shall give preference to Plant Port while importing materials. 3 4 Disposal of temporary facilities and construction surplus Page 97 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. in accordance with the local regulations and following the requirements in the relevant section of the FEED Design Package. Contractor shall co-ordinate Construction Site communication system requirements through Tel. cargo berths etc. More channels and hand-portable / mobile units are anticipated during the construction phase than during normal operation. 2 Contractor shall carry out co-ordination of movement of ships. All communications / correspondence with the local tele-communications company (Tel) shall be in coordination with Company / Client. Contractor shall be responsible for payment of legalisation fees. Alternatively. Alternatively. Import of equipment and materials 1 All materials for the Work shall be subject to customs regulations and inspection. The Communication requirement for Company / Client Personnel is specified. separate hand-portable radio systems with base station repeaters shall be provided. The base station repeaters should be installed in the construction office and coverage of the work areas obtained by the use of directional antenna systems. Contractor shall review and understand these regulations. National customs shall reject any of these documents not ratified by a National Embassy / Consulate. Plant Port is a modern port and has necessary facilities like exclusive heavy load berth. o 4093 c d 3 For the use of individual groups working at Construction Site with no requirement for access to external circuits. Contractor to note that the Certificate of Origin must be certified by a Chamber of Commerce and ratified (legalised) by a National Embassy / Consulate. offloading and handling of equipment and materials delivered to the Construction Site. customs clearance etc.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . other Ports can also be considered if necessary. base equipment can be installed in suitable containers and located to provide optimum coverage.co. Custom duty. Company / Client may provide a letter of introduction for such applications.

uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Engineering Data Acquisition. 2 Contractor shall perform Reliability Study based on OREDA Reliability Data and statistical data from Plant which shall be requested by Contractor. Contractor shall be responsible to coordinate these activities with National Authorities. Management and Maintenance Strategies for SAP System  Contractor shall compile input and entry data into the SAP system in conformance with the Scope of Work and structure as indicated in the SAP document. Contractor shall implement in the detailed design the recommendations (e. System Reliability and Water Availability 1 Contractor shall ensure that the Facility is designed. 3 4 Project management. Company / Client shall provide a letter of introduction for such applications.7% shall be maintained and proven to Company / Client with the manifold design arrangement. Contractor shall be responsible for the disposal of all construction surplus (overbuy) immediately after completion of the Work subject to Company / Client approval.  Maintenance.g: Mean Time Between Failure [MTBF] requirements etc.co. constructed and commissioned to achieve an overall system reliability of not less than 99. the equipment and tools used and the vehicles are either to be re-exported or disposed of as the case may be. Contractor shall ensure that water availability is maintained at 100% at all time to all consumers. control and administration Project Management Contractor shall ensure that all parties involved in the Work properly co-ordinate Page 98 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. specified. and as directed by the National authorities. 2 Guarantee Period The Guarantee Period for the Work shall be 24 months from the Completion Date.5044. o 4093 c d 1 The Temporary Facilities installed.7%. Contractor shall ensure that the system reliability of 99.) Made in the reliability report given in documents It is a part of Contractor’s Scope of Work to monitor and establish design reliability and availability by data collection and analysis for a period of one year from performance test within the contract closure date.

 Provision of a project management team/s to manage the implementation of the Work. Preparation of a complete set of Project Administration Instructions / Manual for the Work to obtain approval in line with the requirements of Contract. contracting.uk 3 4 5 Page 99 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . construction. Installation. technical and schedule audits with Company / Client attendance and advising Company / Client of the results of such audits together with the appropriate action taken on any recommendation/s. Testing. Testing pre-commissioning and commissioning to ensure the Work is completed within Scheduled Completion Date according to the ‘specifications and drawings’ Implementation of a safety program throughout the execution of the work.5044. 2 Preparation and submission of organisation charts for Engineering.co. Implementation of a Quality Assurance Program throughout the execution of the Work and submission of periodic reports to Company / Client. Procurement. Procurement. Engineering. Pre-Commissioning. Design. The said audits shall be carried out at 30%. Pre-Commissioning and Commissioning (separately for each phase and location of the Work). Contractor shall give proper attention to the following: Project Control 1 Contractor responsibility includes the following as a minimum: Undertaking project management of the design. project control. Provision and implementation of Project control procedures for the Work shall be following the guidelines provided in Contract. Initial Operation and Maintenance of the FACILITY including the ‘management and supervision’ of all Subcontractors.g. In particular. Construction. engineering. Procurement and Construction progress. Installation. safety. Installation. Carrying out periodic quality. Construction. Accordingly. Co-ordination and control of work of each work group e. control and administration procedures. Commissioning start-up.  Provision of Contractor Personnel to fulfill contractual requirement for timely completion of the Work. suraj_engineer@yahoo. Contractor shall ‘initiate and implement’ appropriate project management. Testing. procurement services. o 4093 c d on all interfaces dealing promptly. 60% and 90% of the Engineering. Vendors and ancillary or temporary services that are necessary for the expeditious completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract.

Commissioning and ‘Initial Operation and Maintenance’. Pre-commissioning. Construction Site and Company / Client offices in Nation in accordance with Contract. Construction. These interfaces cover Engineering. Procurement Services (including supply). Pre-commissioning. Construction. finalise and obtain Company / Client’s approval of the project Document Distribution and Approval Matrices which be produced for each work phase i. Engineering. Construction.e.co. Commissioning and Initial Operation and Maintenance. management and discipline engineers. start-up. finalise and obtain Company / Client’s approval of the project Deliverable Register (s) which be produced separately for each work phase i. Contractor shall prepare. supervision and support services including but not limited to the following:  Construction Management and Interface Management  Construction supervision  Safety Management  Quality Control / Quality Assurance Construction engineering and technical control services  Material control and warehousing  Management of Subcontractor and Vendors  TPC and TPI Services  Disposal of construction surplus materials  Dismantling and disposal of construction aids and Temporary Facility except otherwise directed by Company / Client. o 4093 c d 6 Contractor shall prepare.’ Initial Operations & Maintenance’ activities. The matrices shall include Contractor’s internal distribution as well as Company / Client’s involved parties. 7 8 9 Construction Pre-Commissioning / Commissioning / Start-up and Initial Operation and Maintenance Management Contractor shall provide all Construction Management. Engineering. Commissioning.  Commissioning. Management and co-ordination of all external interfaces associated with the Work. Initial Operation & Maintenance management. Attending all management meetings with Company / Client at Contractor’s Design Office. Procurement.5044. Pre-Commissioning.e.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Page 100 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Reporting to Company / Client in accordance with guideline provided in Contract. Procurement.

Timely supply of One Year Operational Spare Parts. Start up and Initial Operations and Maintenance spare parts to the Construction Site.e. Within three (3) months of placement of purchase orders. expediting and collection of Company / Client comments in accordance with due date schedule. Timely supply of Pre-Commissioning. Pre-Commissioning. Centralised Document Control 1 Contractor shall provide and maintain the Master Document Control Centre for Contract for documents issued by or to the Contractor at Contractor’s Design Office. Expediting Vendors for providing completed SPIR forms within the stipulated period i. Construction Site offices and other operational centres through the life of the Contract. Adequate expediting of Vendors’ drawings / data for incorporation in detailed engineering and timely return of engineering comments and approvals of Vendors drawings /data. Testing. relevant hardware and systems at the above mentioned offices / centres Up to date PC based register of all documents issued by and to the Contractor. 4 Provide dedicated staff to carry out the necessary document control function Page 101 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Adequate expediting and inspection of Vendors equipment and materials.  Distribution of all Contractor generated documents duly sorted by function and classification to Company / Client advising due dates for Company / Client comments. Start-Up. Adequate provision of Vendors assistance for equipment during Construction.co. Timely supply of equipment and materials to be issued to Subcontractors for installation and Construction. 3 Issuing / obtaining Company / Client acceptance to proceed on all Document Transmittals in advance of distribution in accordance with the approved Document Distribution Matrix. Commissioning.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Commissioning. document control staff.5044.  Co-ordination. Initial Operation and Maintenance and Performance Test. Contractor’s primary responsibility shall include but not limited to the following provisions: 2 Centralised Document control facilities. Capital Spares and Laboratory Equipment when required to do so by Company / Client. o 4093 c d Co-ordination with Vendors and sub-contractors Contractor shall ensure the following: Timely supply of AFC drawings and information to be issued to SubContractors. Read / Sort / Print access of Contractor’s Master Document Control Database to Company / Client. Timely supply of Engineering documents and information to be issued to Vendors.

Pre-Commissioning. An effective system shall be implemented for planning. Contractor’s Closeout Report development and update shall be done on monthly basis from the Contract Effective Date to ensure authenticity of the report. Close-out Report. Application for gate passes can be submitted to Company / Client for approval once the person has a valid entry visa stamp of Nation. progress reporting. cost control and project administration. Document clerks as required by Company / Client Project Manager to supplement / support the deputed document control staff.5044. Commissioning. Project Administration Instruction Manual shall be submitted for approval within 30 (thirty) calendar days from the Effective Date. Final Project Documentation Contractor shall prepare and Handover to Company / Client the Final Project Documentations as per the Guidelines provided in relevant documents. Contractor shall submit the application for gate passes for Company / Client approval when all requisite formalities are completed Page 102 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Project Dossiers Closeout Report Contractor shall prepare Closeout Report in accordance with requirements and guidelines provided. Procurement. Quality Assurance Record Manual(s). Project Administration Contractor shall develop detailed Project Administration Instruction Manual applicable for Engineering. o 4093 c d pertaining to Company / Client specific requirements.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . scheduling. Construction. Provide additional staff viz. scheduling and reporting of progress. Services and facilities to be provided by company / client / contractor Facilities provided by Company / Client to Contractor Contractor Personnel shall be required to work at or visit Company / Client facilities at Plant and elsewhere whilst performing the WorK. Initial Operation and Maintenance covering all aspects of planning. Start-up.co. Contractor shall develop all Project Administration Instruction Manuals following the guidelines and any other requirement stipulated under the Contract in accordance with good professional practices. Mechanical Completion Manuals. The Final Project Documentations including the following as a minimum shall be approved by Company / Client. Testing. For this purpose each Contractor Personnel must posses a valid gate pass.

Services and facilities at Contractor Design Office 1 Contractor shall provide and maintain the following services and facilities for Company / Client personnel at Design Office where Engineering or Procurement Services are performed for their entire service duration: 2 Contractor shall ensure that Company / Client offices within Contractor’s Design Office shall be available for Company / Client access at all times i. specifications and schedule. 3 Offices and Related Services and Facilities (Indicative) Sample Only Starts a. d. Contractor shall ensure that Air Conditioning and heating to Company / Client offices during the hot and cold seasons shall be working efficiently at all times. Common working area would not be acceptable. Contractor to record that Company / Client staff shall not call his security staff to open the doors to Company / Client offices outside normal working hours. b.co. One managerial office of not less than twenty (20) square meters. inspections. One fully furnished and equipped conference room for the exclusive use of Page 103 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. e. c. seven (7) days a week for the full duration of their stay at Contractors’ Design Office.5044. o 4093 c d in all respects satisfying the requirements of the security authorities and deposit with the concerned department / security office to obtain the passes.e. all other aspects of the Work. certificates and attending any kind of training training. administration pool area adequate for at least four persons and locked Document Control Area. Secretarial / clerical. Services and Facilities by Contractor to Company / Client Contractor shall accept the presence of Company / Client’s representatives as well as any third party nominated by Company / Client at Worksite. Fifteen single occupancy offices of not less than twelve (12) square meters. in his facilities and at Subcontractors / Vendors’ premises for such purpose as Project co-ordination. Contractor shall be responsible for all costs relating to Contractor Personnel in obtaining passes.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . testing etc. Company / Client staff have uninterrupted and unhindered access 24 hours a day. review of drawings. Contractor Personnel shall carry the pass at all times when on Worksite. Three managerial offices of not less than sixteen (16) square meters. monitoring.

heating and/or air conditioning. n. lockable desks. Page 104 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. lockable filing cabinets. meeting tables. computer projector. but not limited to. i.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . etc. but not limited to.co. dual side copying. o 4093 c d f. One colour photocopier machine for exclusive use of Company/Client. carpeting. One high-speed multi-copy photocopying machine (A4 and A3 plain paper sizes) for the exclusive use of Company/Client. etc. as required. enlarging and reducing capabilities. Pantry with a person to serve tea / coffee. Shall be for the exclusive use of Company / Client o. reference tables. The office accommodation shall be supplied with all utilities and services (24 hours a day) such as. m. stick files. h. The offices furnishing supplied shall be of good quality and should be sufficient and include. Keys shall be provided so that Company / Client office can be accessed at all times. electricity. lighting. filing drawers. to the satisfaction of Company / Client. Company / Client of not less than forty (40) square meters with conference table for a minimum of twenty (20) persons with all presentation equipment such as overhead projector. wall mounted notice boards. p. j. toilet / washing facilities. One fully equipped archive office of not less than twenty-five (25) square meters with filing cabinets. fully stocked and maintained dedicated kitchen with hot and cold refreshments. Toilets with ablution for the exclusive use of Company / Client Muslim staff shall be maintained at EPIC Contractor’s Home Office. q. A4 and A3 volume paper trays and speed of not less than sixty (60) pages per minute. minimum fifty (50) pages feeder. but not limited to. chairs. Shaded car parking for twenty (20) cars within the basement of the office building which Company / Client staff shall be accommodated in. k. drafting boards and telecommunications as described hereinafter. sorting and stapling facilities with at least twenty (20) trays. etc. Photocopying machines specification shall include. white marker boards.5044. Two (2) paper shredding machines l. Contractor shall make available to Company / Client the use of other conference rooms and use of items of equipment such as television. writing boards. ventilation. user friendly console. video (VCR) and the like for meetings and / or presentation purposes. One Prayer Room of not less than thirty (30) square meters. g. Maintenance and daily cleaning of the offices and common areas shall also be provided. Office scanner suitable for electronic transfer of documentation.

Contractor shall provide all resumes and arrange for interviews by Company / Client of all secretaries / clerks. and equipped and familiar with the telecommunications and computer equipment. pens. Provision of coat hangers. Are to be provided as required to all Company / Client staff. as per the specification of those for Company / Client. stackable paper trays. etc. waste-paper bins and normal office stationery such as. and shall be segregated from Subcontractors.5044. This shall include.co. Offices provided by Contractor for Company / Client shall be in the same building. facsimile. but not limited to. paper guillotine etc. Page 105 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. staple extractors. Telecommunication Facilities a. t. o 4093 c d r. erasers. but not be limited to. All Secretaries/clerks shall be subject to Company / Client approval. Contractor shall be responsible for the security and safety of the office accommodation. scissors. All offices. complete with office space and furniture. (in addition to those provided to Company / Client elsewhere in the Contract. Secretarial and Document Controller offices to be of an open space style. markers. Two laser facsimile machines with A4 size paper and with at least 100 pages memory connected with two direct lines external to Contractor’s switchboard and with access to domestic and international network. and other Contractor’s Clients. archive office and conference rooms listed above shall be supplied with telecommunication facilities comprising telephones with speakers and microphones for conference calls with access to domestic and international networks through Contractor’s central switchboard. Secretarial/Clerical Assistance Two (2) secretaries / clerks fluent in English. etc. Diaries. All clerks shall be provided with their own computer workstations. Stationery and consumables to be used for equipment specified shall be supplied. scientific hand calculators. Lever arch files. paper clips. Shall be provided. administration pool. stationery and consumables for photocopier. hole punchers. A4 size writing pads. pencils. drawing pins. v. stapling machines. u. All managerial and Company / Client staff offices including document control and archive office shall be lockable. printers. b. as per the specification of Company / Client.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . note books. s. computer workstations. printers. as required. which Contractor intends to use for the execution of the Work.

Windows mouse and mouse pad. All Computer Workstations shall be supplied network and Internet ready. Network Software and card . f. 512 KB cache memory. o 4093 c d c. Software. 12 pages per minute. 256 MB RAM memory.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . All computer systems should be supplied ready to use. eighty (80) GB Hard Disk. built-in Windows XP key board (US standard) and built-in-mouse and external mouse. Two Notepad Computers with minimum 2. h. Windows and Winzip.co.5044. Scanning Page 106 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Adobe Acrobat Writer. Charges for telephone and. as specified here below: i. c. Antivirus. DVD/ CD ROM drive. Company / Client shall make use of the international calls only for business purpose. Microsoft Professional Office. integrated headphone/speakers and microphone jacks. c. Two A4 laser printers. Common Facilities a. Windows 98 key board (US Standard). One computer workstation for direct access to Company/Client intranet through the Internet complete with printer. All Notebook Computers shall be supplied network and Internet ready. DVD / CD ROM drive. 15” SVGA monitor (17” for engineers involved in design review). e.0 GHZ processor. five hundred twelve (512) MB RAM memory. Common facilities to be shared between as many workstations as listed in (a) & (b) above connected by a local area network and consist of: b. Computing Facilities a. 3. 512 KB cache memory. Use of A4 / A3 color laser printer and A3 color plotter.5” floppy drive. Contractor shall provide and install the following equipment and shall ensure proper maintenance support (hardware and software) through Contractor’s own computer support group: b. rechargeable battery with average of 3 hours life time plus a carrying case and universal power adapter. Fifteen Computer Workstations with minimum 3. eighty (80) GB Hard Disk.0 GHZ processor. One A4 and A3 laser printer. 15” TFT screen. as required. latest English versions for the above Computers (each).0 GHZ Centrino Processor 3. d. g. Planning Software CONTRACTOR intends to use for the WORK. 3. One A4 / A3 scanner. 12 pages per minute d. facsimile calls including connection and rental charges shall be to the account of Contractor.5” floppy drive. Software Back-up facilities. E-mail Software – Lotus Notes j.

Contractor shall install all cables. Contractor shall connect all computers to E-mail and Internet networks to enable communication between Company / Client personnel and Contractor personnel and communication with Company / Client management in National through the Internet Network or telephone modems. junction boxes and software for the installation of a local area network to service all the above computers (including secretary / clerks and Company / Client Assistant Engineers’ workstations) and common facilities. b. access may be permitted for short periods following approval by Company / Client. Contractor shall endeavour to use the same software applications as shall be used by Company / Client (defined above) for ease of data/reports between Contractor and Company / Client.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . residence visas. Governmental or administrative authorization visas. hospitals. of workstations used by Company / Client shall be blocked. There shall be unlimited megabyte size of the “Inbox”. Contractor shall ensure unlimited e-mail access for Company / Client staff at his Home and Site Offices. their family and any third party nominated by Company / Client in relation to.co. connections. However. but not limited to the following: c. Administrative Assistance a.5044. Arranging with removal firms for transport of personnel’s belongings. Contractor shall provide assistance for obtaining (in the country of Contractor Design office where Work is performed) necessary permits. Company / Client shall not accept limitation on the size of the “Inbox”. Messing Facilities Contractor shall provide access to its home office canteen of senior personnel for Company / Client Personnel and nominated third parties at costs equivalent to those for Contractor’s employees. Contractor shall provide the Page 107 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. d. Flash Memory Sticks of at least 2 GB. Any software related to all engineering disciplines that Contractor intends to use for the WORK through Contractor’s Network. domestic and international travel booking services and any other similar administrative matters for Company / Client personnel and their families and any third parties nominated by Company / Client. schools. Assisting personnel and their families to find leisure facilities. o 4093 c d Software. Contractor shall ensure that remote access by Contractor. accommodation for leasing and any similar matters. k. Contractor shall provide administrative assistance to Company / Client personnel. car rental.

Company / Client representative would issue specific instruction to Contractor authorizing permission and Contractor shall have to bear the cost upfront. o 4093 c d requisite guarantee if required.co. The shotdown Contract document copies shall be bound with good quality hard covers and shall be subject to Company / Client approval. f. b. Additionally. The focal point shall provide and be responsible for the following: d. Preparation and submission of training programs in accordance with the PCP for Company / Client review and approval. Full and Shot-down Copies of Contract Document Contractor shall provide thirty (10) shot-down copies of the Contract documents in A5 size for Company / Client use (drawing to be on A4 size folded to A5 size). Mail and Courier Services Contractor shall provide to Company / Client mail and courier services through Contractor’s mail office. e. Shot-down copies of Contract Document exclude the Technical Information Volumes. Co-ordination of all training activities and Page 108 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. However.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . c. Contractor shall provide cost for on-the-job-Training for five (5) Company / Client Assistant Engineers at his Design Office as provisional sum. Contractor shall assign a Lead Engineer as Contractor’s focal point concerning the training of Company / Client Assistant Engineers. residence formalities. Contractor shall provide (10) full size copies of the Contract documents including Appendix F documents. Company / Client would furnish Contractor with a copy of such payment remittance for his record. Training of Company / Client Personnel a.5044. Training of Company / Client Assistant Engineers at Contractor’s Home office. all costs related to Contractor’s overhead expenses for arranging and assisting with the above would be at Contractor’s account and deemed to be included under the Lump Sum Contract Price. All fees. Payments of hospitalization costs (or guaranteeing payment if acceptable to hospital authority) for Company / Client personnel (in the country of Contractor Design office where Work is performed) in case of an emergency hospital admittance and until such time payment is made directly by Company / Client to the hospital. g. etc. Company / Client would reimburse the approved documented cost at actual for all such expenditure through Variation to Contract. In case of the following items. charges and costs for visas. permits. Cost of the above-referred administrative assistance to Company / Client is included in lump sum Contract Price.

e. Reviewing and evaluations of the activities performed by Company / Client Assistant Engineers. Conducting technical meetings. l. Liaison with Company / Clientrepresentative or his delegate in all matters regarding the training of Company / Client Assistant Engineers. Contractor shall assign a Senior Engineer as a mentor for each Company / Client Assistant Engineer in accordance to their specific engineering discipline during the entire Engineering / Procurement phase. presentations and courses Page 109 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. The mentors shall be responsible for the following: g. Applicable engineering standards. codes and practices n. Assigning project related activities to Company / Client Assistant Engineers and providing sufficient guidance for them to be able to complete the assigned work at the expected level of competency. the following: m. engineering drawing and engineering document management. Providing seminars and classroom courses for Company / Client Assistant Engineers. Keeping track of training progress for all Company / Client Assistant Engineers. h. Supplier evaluation and selection q. k. Engineering design calculations. This shall include. but not limited to. equipment selection and specifications. p. i. o 4093 c d matters. Arranging vendor factory/shop visits as necessary. Preparation of specifications. j. data sheets. Reviewing the monthly reports prepared by the trainees and forwarding them to Company / Client Representative with their recommendations. Submitting schedule of activities planned for assignment in advance to Company / Client Representative or his delegates. Preparing quarterly progress reports in accordance with the format to be provided by Company / Client. f.5044.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Familiarization of Company / Client Assistant Engineers with Contractor’s working systems and facilities. Ensuring that training progress assessment reports are submitted in a timely manner. The training of Company / Client Assistant Engineers shall be planned in a way to enable their full appreciation of the overall engineering consideration with respect to their discipline areas during the evolution of the Detailed Engineering and Procurement Services works. Quality. operating philosophy.co. Familiarization with applicable computer software s. process simulations. o. safety and environmental r.

g. Access to Subcontractors’ / Vendors messing facilities. Use of Subcontractors’ / Vendors’ Computer workstations and printers. e. Commissioning and start-up procedures and philosophy Services and Facilities at SUBCONTRACTORS / Vendors Premises Contractor shall provide the following at Subcontractors & Vendors premises: Contractor shall provide through Subcontractors and Vendors the following services and facilities for Company / Client personnel assigned permanently and / or temporarily at Subcontractors’/ Vendors’ premises where any part of the Work is performed and/or manufactured: a. Construction procedures and philosophy u. Contractor shall provide training for Company/Client personnel through Vendors of the following equipment: a. F&G System. e. QA / QC regulation and packing while the team at the Construction Site shall cover all operation and maintenance of the equipment. b. Package Control (at site). The Training At Vendors’ Premises Shall Cover All Areas of design. CCTV System (at site).uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . o 4093 c d t. Over and above Contractor shall provide training for ten (10) Company / Client Operation staff at Construction Site. d. Page 110 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. b. Commissioning and start-up parts of the Work are performed up to the Contract Completion Date. Laboratory Instruments (at site) d. Electrical Switchgear. Services and Facilities at Construction Site h. Main Cooling Pumps including VSDS drives.5044. Use of private offices similar in specification to as mentioned above. c. inspection and testing. and the like) for all WORK related matters including international line access. Pre-Commissioning. DCS Equipment. Duration of training shall be for a minimum period of three (3) weeks in Vendors’ premises and four (4) weeks for Construction Site. operating. GRP Piping / Pipelines c. Analysers (at site). Course venues. The training shall be conducted at Vendors Premises for five (5) Company / Client personnel. Contractor shall provide and maintain the following services and facilities for Company / Client personnel and any third party nominated by Company / Client at Construction Site where Construction. Use of Subcontractors’ / Vendors photocopying machines. equipment. fax. stationery and documents shall be provided by Vendors at Vendors’ premises and Contractor at Construction Site. Use of Subcontractors’ / Vendors telecommunication facilities (telephone. f.co. manufacturing.

fully stocked and maintained kitchen with hot and cold refreshments with a person to serve tea and coffee (full time). A4 and A3 volume paper trays and speed of not less than sixty (60) pages per minute. minimum fifty (50) pages feeder. c. One managerial office of not less than twenty (20) square meters. toilet / washing facilities (prayer Page 111 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. electricity. as required. d. Three managerial offices of not less than sixteen (16) square meters. The office accommodation shall be supplied with all utilities and services such as. administration and document control pool area adequate for at least four persons and their furniture and equipment. The services and facilities shall include the following: a. but not limited to. o 4093 c d Offices and Related Services and Facilities Contractor shall provide temporary office building at Construction Site for the sole use of Company / Client.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . f. etc. j.5044. h. but not limited to. dual side copying. Photocopying machines specification shall include. i. Company / Client’s Construction Site office building shall be close to Contractor’s Construction Site office building. Two fully furnished and equipped conference rooms for the exclusive use of Company / Client of not less than forty (40) square meters with conference table for a minimum of twenty (20) persons with all presentation equipment such as overhead projector. One Prayer Room of not less then forty (40) square meters.h) Shaded car parking for thirty five (35) cars. heating and / or air conditioning. Two paper shredding machines k. Two high-speed multi-copy photocopying machine (A4 and A3 plain paper sizes) for the exclusive use of Company / Client. video tape player (VHS) and the like for meetings and / or presentation purposes. e. One fully equipped archive office of not less than forty (40) square meters with filing cabinets. Use of Contractor’s colour photocopier machines. enlarging and reducing capabilities. Contractor shall make available to Company / Client the use of items of equipment such as television. which shall accommodate the services and facilities detailed hereunder. filing drawers.co. Thirty five single occupancy offices of not less than twelve (12) square meters. user friendly console. ventilation. b. etc. Secretarial / clerical. One office scanner suitable for the electronic transfer of documents. g. lighting. computer projector. l. writing boards. as required. sorting and stapling facilities with at least twenty (20) trays.

etc. Are to be provided as required. as required. as per the specification of Company / Client. Contractor shall be responsible for the security and safety of the office accommodation. and equipped and familiar with the telecommunications and computer equipment. drawing pins. All Secretaries / clerks shall be subject to Company / Client approval. note books. m. (in addition to those provided to Company / Client elsewhere in the Contract). Contractor shall Page 112 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. This shall include but not limited to stationery and consumables for photocopier. Are to be provided as required to all Company / Client staff. markers. o. paper guillotine. meeting tables. complete with office space and furniture. Provision of coat hangers. printers. etc. as per the specification of those for Company / Client. p. o 4093 c d washing facilities shall be provided close to the prayer room). pencils. A4 size writing pads. reference tables. waste-paper bins and normal office stationery such as. etc. wall mounted notice boards and white marker boards. scissors. lockable filing cabinets. q. Roads to Company / Client Site offices shall be paved with asphalt concrete. paper clips. paper clips. Stationery and consumables to be used for equipment specified shall be supplied. pens. etc. Diaries. printers. chairs. n. Maintenance and daily cleaning of the offices and common areas shall also be provided. scientific hand calculators and telecommunications as described hereinafter. markers. scientific hand calculators. facsimile.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Construction traffic. hole punchers. drafting boards. rubbers. but not limited to.5044. but not limited to. r. scissors. Lever arch files.co. to the satisfaction of Company / Client. erasers. lockable desks. computer workstations. Lever arch files. diaries. carpeting or vinyl tiles. staple extractors. stapling machines. All clerks shall be provided with their own computer workstations. stackable paper trays. staple extractors. pencils. pens. All offices and archive office shall be lockable. drawing pins. stick files. trailers and trucks shall not use these paved roads to Company/Client offices Secretarial/Clerical assistance Two Secretaries / Clerks fluent in English. The offices furnishing supplied shall be of good quality and should be sufficient and include.

0 GHZ processor. Telecommunication Facilities a. Windows mouse and mouse pad. access may be permitted for short periods following approval by Company / Client.0 GHZ processor. two hundred fifty six (256 MB) RAM memory. of workstations used by Company / Client hall be blocked. 15” Active matrix colour SVGA. rechargeable battery with average of 3 hours life time plus a carrying case and universal power adapter. b. All computer workstations shall be supplied network and Internet ready. All offices. 3. Windows 98 key board (US Standard). b.co. c. eighty (80) GB Hard Disk. Contractor shall ensure that remote access by Contractor.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . o 4093 c d provide all resumes and arrange for interviews by Company / Client of all secretaries / clerks. Computing Facilities Contractor shall provide and install the following equipment at the temporary Construction Site office buildings and shall ensure proper maintenance support (hardware and software) through Contractor’s own computer support group: a.5” floppy drive.5044. integrated headphone / speakers and microphone jacks. DVD/ CD ROM drive. Twenty-five Computer Workstations with minimum 3.5” floppy drive. c. Two laser facsimile machines with A4 size paper and with at least 100 pages memory connected with two (2) direct lines external to Contractor’s switchboard and with access to domestic and international network. 512 KB cache memory. One Notepad Computer with minimum 3. All Notebook Computers shall be supplied network and Internet ready. eighty (80) GB Hard Disk. DVD / CD ROM drive. One office scanner suitable for the electronic transfer of documents. Page 113 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. 15” SVGA monitor (17” for engineers involved in design review). Contractor shall provide one General Helper person for general office routine. d. administration pool. archive offices and conference rooms listed above shall be supplied with telecommunication facilities comprising telephones with speakers and microphones for conference calls with access to domestic and international networks through Contractor’s central switchboard. Charges for telephone and facsimile calls including connection and rental charges shall be to the account of Contractor. However. five hundred twelve (512) MB RAM memory. 512 KB cache memory. built-in windows 98 key board (US standard) and built-in-mouse and external mouse. 3.

connections. Three A4 laser printers. Messing facilities Contractor shall provide all messing facilities (including food) for Company / Client personnel and Company / Client nominated third parties at the Construction Site as provided for Contractor’s management personnel. s. 6 Software. r. Use of Contractor’s A3 colour laser printer. Software Back-up facilities f. d. k. as specified here below: g. for the above Computer Workstations and Notebook Computers. 12 pages per minute. Microsoft Professional Office (one (1) copy per computer). c. Network Software and card (one (1) copy per computer). h. o 4093 c d Common facilities Common facilities to be shared between as many workstations as listed above connected by a local area network and consist of : a. as required. A1 and A3 color plotters. The food shall be of good quality and Page 114 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Latest English / Arabic software version of Windows and Microsoft Professional Office with a full set of manuals each (2 copies). One A4 / A3 scanner. m. A full set of manuals for each software application. junction boxes and software for the installation of a local area network to service all the above computers (including secretary/clerks workstations) and common facilities. 12 colour pages per minute. j. E-mail Software (one (1) copy per computer). Anti-virus (One copy per workstation or one multi-user server based copy) p. b. Contractor shall install all cables. i. Contractor shall endeavour to use the same software applications as shall be used by Company / Client (defined above) for ease of data/reports between Contractor And Company / Client. One A4 colour laser printer. e. Use of any software related to all engineering disciplines that Contractor intends to use for the Work through Contractor’s Network.co.5044. Planning Software Contractor intends to use for the Work (two (2) copies). All computer systems shall be supplied ready to use. n.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Contractor shall connect all computers to E-mail and Internet networks to enable communication between Company / Client personnel and Contractor personnel and communication with Company / Client management in National through the Internet Network or telephone modems. Windows XP or the latest (one (1) copy per computer). q. o. latest English versions in all cases. l.

Training of COMPANY / CLIENT Personnel 1. Contractor shall assign a Lead Engineer as Contractor’s focal point concerning the training of Company / Client Assistant Engineers. Contractor shall provide On-The-Job-Training for five (5) Company / Client Assistant Engineers.co. Familiarisation of Company / Client Assistant Engineers with Contractor’s working systems and facilities 12. Co-ordination of all training activities and matters. The menu shall be agreed with Company / Client. Contractor shall provide all services and facilities to Company / Client Assistant Engineers as per the specification of those for Company / Client. Contractor shall allow for a minimum of thirty (30) Company / Client personnel. 7. 4. The mentors shall be responsible for the following 11. It is a specific requirement that all meals shall generally be low in oils and fats. Ensuring that training progress assessment reports are submitted in a timely manner. 2. Contractor shall provide offices. o 4093 c d from a variety of international cuisines such as Mediterranean. The services provided to Company / Client’s Assistant Engineers shall be in addition to those listed elsewhere for Company / Client. Preparation and submission of training programs for Company / Client review and approval 5. European. Contractor Shall Assign A Senior Engineer As A Mentor For Each Company/Client Assistant Engineer in accordance to his specific engineering discipline during the entire Contract duration. vegetarian etc. The focal point shall provide and be responsible for the following. Assigning project related activities to Company/Client Assistant Engineers and providing sufficient guidance for them to be able to complete the assigned work at the expected level of competency. 10. 9. Reviewing the monthly reports prepared by the trainees and forward them to Page 115 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. 6.5044.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Keeping track of training progress for all Company / Client Assistant Engineers. 8. Oriental. 3. 13. Liaison with Company / Client representative or his delegate in all matters regarding the training of Company / Client Assistant Engineers. computing and telecommunication facilities for each Assistant Engineer.

16. Submitting a schedule of activities planned for assignment in advance to Company / Client Representative or his delegates.co.including meal and transportation costs shall be provided by Company / Client) 21. Company / Client intends to second its personnel to the Page 116 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . 28. 31. 15. Contractor shall submit a detailed training program for Company / Client review and approval three (3) months prior to start of Pre-Commissioning work. Safety and Environment Control 19.5044. Familiarisation with applicable computer software 20. Contractor shall provide a pool area with adequate furniture (in addition to what is specified for Company / Client elsewhere) to accommodate Company / Client operating personnel for the entire duration of Pre-Commissioning and Commissioning phases. Detailed below is the Scope of Work for this service: 32. Commissioning and start-up preparation work 27. presentation and courses 22. Construction Quality. The training of Company / Client Assistant Engineers shall be planned in a way to enable their full appreciation of the overall engineering. Conducting technical meetings. Welding. This shall include. Civil and Painting Inspection 23. Initial Operation and Maintenance phases of the Work. lodging . Contractor shall provide On-The-Job-Training for ten (10) Company / Client operating personnel during the Pre-Commissioning and Commissioning. precommissioning. the following: 17. Applicable Construction. construction. Construction and Commissioning operating and safety technical reviews 25. Contractor shall assign a focal point to administer the training of Company / Client operating personnel. Equipment Factory Acceptance Test (Travel. Preparing quarterly progress reports in accordance with the format provided by Company / Client. Option Price C calls for a Tax Consultancy Call off Service 30. Construction and Pre-Commissioning work 26. codes and practices 18. and commissioning work consideration with respect to their discipline area. Pre-Commissioning and Commissioning standards. but not limited to. The Engineering and/or Design part of various major projects undertaken by Company / Client in the State of National are carried out by Contractor’s in different countries. Material control and traceability 24. o 4093 c d Company / Client Representative with their recommendations 14. Tax Consultancy Services 29.

1. Pre-assignment/Pre-Departure Tax Services leading to information on preassignment tax planning opportunities and procedures that the assignees should be aware of while on assignment. estimated cost and necessary scheduling. Execution Programme when approved by Company / Client shall become part of the Contract and Contractor’s Tax Consultant shall execute the Work strictly in accordance with the Execution Programme. 6. 4. Company / Client wishes to engage the services of a Tax Consultant. if any. o 4093 c d offices of the Contractor and these personnel stay overseas for a period that makes them liable to tax in that country. Further details required. to the following: 35. Within 14 days of receipt of an ‘Instruction to Proceed’ the Contractor’s Tax Consultant shall provide to Company / Client: 7.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . The tax on the individual employees shall be paid by Company / Client. 8. On Assignment Tax Services in host countries. Company / Client shall issue an ‘Instruction to Proceed’ detailing the Work required from the Contractor’s Tax Consultant. Execution Programme detailing the arrangements and methods which the Contractor’s Tax Consultant proposes to adopt for the execution of the Work including tax planning required. Upon receipt of above information supplied by Company / Client. but is not limited. Based on input / feedback from the Contractor’s Tax Consultant. Liabilities of Company / Client towards compliance of tax laws. 34. by the Contractor’s Tax Consultant from Company / Client. Contractor’s Tax Consultant shall: Page 117 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Current relevant provisions of Personal tax laws of the country. their Staff Number and the likely period of stay. 33. The Scope of Work for the Contractor’s tax consultancy work includes. manpower and man-hours required. managed by Contractor. 5. time required. the Contractor’s Tax Consultant is required to provide: 2.co. 3.5044. who has world wide office infrastructure to advise Company / Client on all tax matters related to personal income tax and complete the necessary documentation. Company / Client shall advise Contractor’s Tax Consultant as soon as Company / Client personnel reach the foreign country for Project development and intend to stay for a duration long enough to attract tax liability with details like names of the employee.

uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . o 4093 c d 9. senior managers. 13. 7. Keep Company / Client informed from time to time of the potentialities and possibilities of Post Assessment Proceedings and recommend suitable preventive and / or corrective actions that may be required to be taken by Company / Client / its employees in host country. ensuring full compliance of tax laws of the country and file the returns with appropriate tax authorities within the specified time. 12. 17. Flat rate quoted is fully inclusive of all associated costs for employment of Page 118 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo.5044.co. managers/ consultants & support staff. 2. 16. Post Assessment Tax Services 1. Keep Company / Client fully informed of the progress made in the Work. Scrutinise the requirement of advance tax payments and estimated tax determination thereof and advise Company / Client accordingly. 6.Income Tax Clearance certificates for all the employees. lead consultants. tax credits. Any or all of the Work as mentioned above may be called upon for a particular country or a number of countries either simultaneously or at different points of time through issuance of an ‘Instruction to Proceed’. Eliminate / minimize the possibilities of post assessment proceedings like appeals. reassessment. etc. senior consultants. 3. 4. 5. The Contractor’s Tax Consultant shall put its best efforts to obtain for the benefit of Company / Client all lawful discounts. Arrive at the total tax payable and advise Company / Client. Contractor’s Tax Consultant is required to make every effort to avoid / mitigate such proceedings. Maintain liaison with local tax authorities. Clean Assessment Orders. Repatriation Tax Services involving execution of all tax related matters that are required to be complied with by Company / Client employees while making exit from the host country and re-enter the country of origin. 11. Payment of tax amount to tax authorities shall be based upon duly receipted acknowledgement of tax authorities in the host country. allowances and refunds from the tax authorities. The flat rate quoted by the Contractor shall include for partners. 14. The Contractor’s Tax Consultant shall provide necessary tax returns. Payment to Contractor shall be made on a flat rate per person per fiscal year basis against completion / progress made in the tax consultancy work. Have regular contact with Company / Client employees in those foreign countries. litigation. Complete the tax assessments within the specified time and endeavour to get: 15. 10.

4 or latest) or equivalent 3D Modeling.uk 2 Page 119 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . then these perceived technical deficiencies along with the proposed remedies or solutions should be clearly stated in the Contractor’s suraj_engineer@yahoo. Project Soft wares Contractor shall use the following application software in preparation of the project deliverables: a. or design modification. If the software used is of proprietary nature and not standard ones. Finite Element Analysis ANSYS. c. o 4093 c d personnel and all overheads and profit. Company / Client shall not provide any software to the Contractor. Contractor shall bid on the design and provide all process guarantee. Project planning Primavera Latest Revision.5044. COSMO or equivqlent. ABAQUS. Should there be any technical deficiencies to prevent Contractor from providing the process guarantees. Sample Only Ends --------------------------------------Chapter 7 D ta dE g e rin R q ire e ts e ile n in e g e u m n Process Engineering 1 The Contractor shall during bid stage verify the process engineering work performed by FEED consultant and provided in the bid documents and satisfy himself that it is a workable design. Company / Client personnel shall have access to Contractor’s pipenet Programme at any time. Draughting AUTOCAD 2004. Piping Stress Analysis Caesar II. a copy shall be provided to Company / Client for use in future Maintenance. Relief Valves. Word processing Microsoft Word 2000. (if chosen by Contractor) PDS / PDMS Pipeline simulation (dynamic / surge analysis) pipenet or internationally validated software. Processor Loading etc. Reliability Study RAMP (Ver 3. The Contractor shall provide pipenet Simulation Programme for Company / Client’s permanent use at the end of the project. Spreadsheet Micro soft excel 2000. Presentation Mocrosoft powerpoint 2000. Orifice Plates.co. Contractor shall specify the software used for sizing Control Valves. which shall be approved by Company / Client Electrical System Studies CYME software Structural Design STAAD PRO & STAAD -III b. Database Microsoft access 2000 or equivalent.

and validation. The relevant process documents included in this tender shall be updated.co. Contractor shall not reduce sizes of equipment items or lines nor shall he delete instrumentation or valves from the proposed process design without written approval from Company / Client. equipment data sheets. These shall be reviewed. Contractor shall be solely responsible for any increase in the size of equipment items. completed and amended by the Contractor to reflect further design suraj_engineer@yahoo. 3 After contract award and during detailed engineering. guidelines. Any proposed reduction or deletion of equipment items. checked.5044. o 4093 c d bid. the Contractor acknowledges that the FEED package does not define the plant in full detail and needs further development in order to achieve the desired objectives. The new system design shall meet 99. and contained in the FEED package. lines or instrumentation and valves shall be submitted for Company / Client review and approval. Contractor as part of the detail design shall optimise all the systems and update as necessary.7% reliability and 100% availability. in the Contractor interest to ensure that the Bid Documents comprising the basic process design package is well evaluated and accepted by him. it shall constitute acceptance of the process design by the Contractor as well as to provide all process guarantees. Contractor shall start from the Engineering documentation supplied by Company / Client as a result of FEED work or otherwise. codes and standards and acceptable practices. lines. Any modifications / revisions to the P& ID’s. piping lay out and any 4 Company / Client developed drawing / document shall be subject to review and approval by Company / Client. However. However Contractor shall be responsible for confirmation. but fails to address it as such in his bid. update of all process and process related documents and endorsement of all FEED findings. It is therefore. verification.uk 5 6 7 8 Page 120 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . instrumentation and valves and any necessary process modifications after contract award and during the detailed engineering phase.  In the event Contractor accepts the process design as proposed by Company / Client. The detail design and engineering shall be based on the design developed during the FEED. verified and updated by the Contractor as per design criteria.

Contractor shall optimize pipeline sizing that satisfies all the operating and maintenance scenarios. The Contractor shall perform. equipment / instrument data sheet. design development and actual equipment data. as the result of the optimisation.5044. Contractor shall demonstrate the routings used in simulations are in agreement with the latest available pipeline / piping layout documents and drawings. Based on the flow rate defined by Company / Client for individual consumers.  Any changes to the PFD. Contractor has to highlight consequences of not adhering to this requirement. The soft copy of the model shall be provided to Company / Client during the course of detailed engineering. Transient Analysis For the selected and approved cases only. as a minimum the following process engineering activities as part of scope of services:  Process basis of design and Process Design Philosophy  Contractor shall review and update the process basis of design and Process Design Philosophy to include any other additional data considered for detailed engineering.  Steady state hydraulic study Contractor shall carry out hydraulic modeling and study based on the final cooling water network for the whole project using latest PIPENET simulation software.co. o 4093 c d 9 detailing.  Contractor shall determine the allowable minimum water flow in the network and propose engineering and operation solutions to maintain higher flow in the network piping system. Contractor shall carry out thorough and detailed hydraulic surge analysis of the entire cooling water system to suraj_engineer@yahoo. then Contractor shall carry out new updated simulation.uk 10 11 12 Page 121 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . In case there are marked differences between routings used in simulations and actual layout during detailed engineering to an extent that they shall invalidate the hydraulic results and conclusions. must be approved by Company / Client before implementation by the Contractor. heat and material balance. P&IDs or FEED package in general. Contractor shall reconfirm Sea Water Demand figures and other design data with Company / Client before proceeding with the detailed design. performances and characteristics. The Contractor shall provide access to Pipenet Simulation program for the Company / Client process engineers and hand over to Company / Client soft copies of the simulation.

coast down.  Confirm the closure time for the valves. same shall be assumed in consultation with Company / Client. If data is not available. e. The Contractor shall also design for chlorine discharge monitoring system.  Confirm to restart procedures. Contractor shall obtain all the necessary data of the pumps and carryout detailed hydraulic surge analysis for the return cooling water network of recirculation system during EPIC phase. o 4093 c d determine any adverse effects on the system.co.  Confirm the shutdown procedures. 13 Contractor to note that during FEED.g. The soft copy of the model shall be provided to Company / Client during the course of detailed engineering.  Confirm the Start-Up procedures. Based on the hydraulic transient analysis. such as start up. undue stresses on connected equipment and on pipeline supports etc. Water hammer. transient analysis of the return cooling water network related to recirculation system has not been done due to nonavailability of data for the cooling water pumps of cooling towers.  Confirm the design requirement for vacuum breakers. this must be approved by Company / Client prior to start of work. If the Contractor intends to carry out the transient analysis by its own in-house expertise. Utility System Page 122 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Electro Chlorination system Contractor shall carry out a detailed hydraulic analysis and design for the chlorination system including the distribution systems and generate / update all necessary drawings / documents. Contractor shall carry out the aforementioned scope of work suitable for continuous operation and shock dosing modes.5044. Contractor shall determine and provide the required protection measures such as vacuum breakers and specify the required valves closure time.uk 14 15 16 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . The Contractor shall provide access to pipe net simulation program (transient state) for two (2) Company / Client process engineers. Dynamic simulation studies shall be conducted by Contractor for the following objectives:  Verify operability and controllability of the pumps under various transient conditions. emergencies and operational transients.

Shall be developed by the Contractor or obtained through the equipment supplier / vendor. Contractor shall then rectify / modify the design and the P& ID’s to Company / Client’s satisfaction and at no cost to Company / Client. finalising all line sizes. the former shall prevail. by the Contractor that may jeopardize or compromise the currently built in operating reliability and or flexibility shall be rejected. but not limited to.  Utility Flow Diagrams (ufds) Contractor shall perform all work necessary to verify.. Any auxiliary P& ID’s required. fully update and develop the Process. It is understood and accepted that suraj_engineer@yahoo. adding or correcting mechanical. utilities and electro chlorination P & IDs. Should there be a conflict between the P &IDs as developed and Company / Client specifications. Further. Further development of the diagrams shall include. electrical and instrument details resulting from the detailed engineering and adding vendor details. as required.  Process Flow Diagrams (PFD’s)  Contractor shall perform all work necessary to verify. including details of control valves / vacuum breakers etc. Piping and Instrument Diagrams (P&ID’s) Contractor shall review.co. plant air and service water. All valves including manual / gear operated Valves shall be tagged. correct or revise the Utility Flow Diagrams and heat and material balances to reflect the requirements of the process and utility design which shall be approved by Company / Client. during detailed engineering.uk 18 19 20 Page 123 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . correct or revise Process Flow Diagrams and heat and material balances to reflect any changes in the design made as a result of Contractor's work. Any proposed additions / modifications to the P & ID’s. o 4093 c d 17 Contractor shall verify the design and capacity of the utility systems such as instrument air.5044. the Contractor shall ensure that all HAZOP actions have been closed out. like for the pumps protection or Cooling of the Thyristors of Variable Speed Drives (utilising De-ionised water) etc. All the FEED “Holds” on the P & ID’s shall be investigated appropriately & reviewed by the Contractor. provided in the FEED Design Package. The Contractor shall implement and action the items identified in FEED HAZOP as a part of Contractor responsibility. The Contractor shall fully develop the detailed P & ID’s for Phase and ultimate Phase and update these drawings during the course of EPIC.

5044. o 4093 c d

P & ID’s may see many revisions during the detailed engineering stage and even during network construction. Every revision shall require Company / Client review and approval. The Contractor shall carry out all changes / revisions requested by Company / Client as part of the contract. Upon successful network commissioning, a full set of as built P & I D’s shall be prepared and submitted to Company / Client for review and final approval and acceptance. 21 Line List  Contractor shall review and fully update the Line List based on the results of detailed engineering.  Contractor shall develop and complete basic line designation tables (LDT’s) in their entirety during the detailed engineering phase. Contractor shall verify all line sizes as depicted on the P & ID’s during the bid stage. No reduction in any line sizes shall be permitted after contract award. Any increase in line size, required as a result of oversight on the part of the Contractor to check and verify during the bid stage, shall be to the Contractor’s account.  Process Data Sheets 22 Contractor shall perform the sizing of all the equipment and instruments and update / generate the process datasheets for all items including but not limited to the packages, equipment and instruments. Contractor shall provide process guarantees for the satisfactory performance of each equipment item provided in FEED package. Should the Contractor find that certain equipment items need to be modified and/or the size / capacity / duty needs to be increased; he shall clearly state this in the bid and provide the desired design. Failure to do so shall imply that the Contractor accepts the equipment sizes / capacities / duties as depicted by Company / Client on all process data sheets forming part of the bid document and shall provide all process guarantees.

Philosophies  Contractor shall review and update the following philosophy documents as necessary to incorporate the updates during detailed engineering.  Process design philosophy  Operating and control philosophy  The philosophies shall cover as a minimum the valving / isolation, maintenance, operations, blow down, design temperature / pressure and chlorine distribution.  Cause and Effect charts / PSFS  Contractor shall be responsible for modifying / creating all Cause and Effect
Page 124 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo.co.uk

IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h

5044. o 4093 c d

Charts and PSFS diagrams to include all the new facilities during the detailed design.  Utility / chemical summaries  Contractor shall review and update the utility / chemical summaries and alarm / trip settings documents. RAM study  Contractor shall carry out a reliability and availability study to confirm that the new system can meet 99.7% reliability and 100% availability. The study shall be carried out on the full system utilizing recognized international standards and practices.  Pre-commissioning, commissioning and start-up manuals  Contractor shall prepare detailed pre-commissioning, commissioning start-up manuals based on the pre-commissioning / commissioning philosophy defined in FEED package. Operating manual Contractor shall prepare detailed operation and maintenance manual covering operation procedures, startup, shutdown, maintenance procedures. The format and content of the operating manual shall be discussed and agreed with Company / Client. Performance test run 1 Contractor shall produce a detailed performance test run procedure and shall be approved by Company / Client. The objective is to demonstrate that the FACILITY is satisfactorily operating in accordance with the design parameters and achieves the product specification and quantity and other performance warranties as specified under the Contract. 2 The performance test shall be carried out within an agreed period between Contractor and Company / Client from the date of hand over of the network to Company / Client. The performance test shall be carried out in accordance with the approved procedure in order to determine whether the network performs in accordance with the design, the performance test shall be carried out by Company / Client. The duration of the test shall be a continuous 72 hrs. Contractor may be present to witness the performance test. Samples of water for chlorine content shall be taken by Company / Client operating personnel and analyzed in Company / Client laboratory. Contractor may choose to carry out his own analysis. In this case, Company / Client shall take another set of samples
Page 125 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo.co.uk

IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h

5044. o 4093 c d

3

for the Contractor. The results of the analysis obtained by Company / Client shall then be compared with the analysis results obtained by Company / Client shall then be analyzed once more. Should the difference still remain, then another two sets of samples shall be taken and the procedure repeated again. If at the end the differences still remain and in the event no agreement could be reached then a third party laboratory technician shall be brought to the site to carry out the analysis. This third party technician shall be acceptable to both Company / Client and the Contractor.

Other Requirements 1 Contractor to note that all equipment, instruments and lines have been provided with temporary tag nos. Specific for FEED phase. Contractor shall update all the necessary documents with new identification in line with Company / Client Standard after obtaining the correct sequence numbers from Company / Client. 2 Contractor shall undertake HAZOP using an Independent Third Party Chairman approved by Company / Client. The date (s) for the HAZOP shall be agreed with Company / Client. Contractor shall incorporate the findings of the HAZOP into the detailed design without any cost and / or schedule impact to Company / Client. 3 As part of Phase, Contractor has to provide cooling water supply connection to Power, which is defined in various FEED documents. But in order to meet the immediate requirements of Power, a temporary cooling water supply is being provided by others until such time the permanent supply from Phase development becomes available. This is to highlight to the Contractor the existence of a temporary connection for Power, and Contractor has to note this information before preparation of detailed drawings and to liaise with Company / Client in this regard for any further details. Contractor shall provide the following:  A DN200 tapping with manual operated Butterfly Valve on the line  A DN200 manual operated Butterfly valve on the same line Upstream of tapping. Tapping and valves shall be near the Pump House area.  The above requirement is as per Company / Client requirement to have interconnection with Phase. The interconnection shall be used in case of emergency and start up of Phase if Chlorination package of Phase is delayed.  As the above requirement is specific and not part of the FEED design, this is not reflected at any of other FEED documents / drawings.
Page 126 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo.co.uk

IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h

5044. o 4093 c d

 Process Deliverables List 4 The following documents shall be developed by the Contractor as a minimum. The Contractor shall provide a list of deliverables showing the documents and drawings that shall be produced under this Contract. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to develop any other documents that are required to complete the detailed design to Company / Client’s satisfaction. Updated Process Basis of Design Steady state Hydraulic calculation report for cooling water system reflecting all updates and amendments made by the Contractor Transient analysis report for cooling water system reflecting all updates and amendments made by the Contractor Steady state Hydraulic calculation report for chlorine system reflecting all updating and amendments made by the Contractor Process flow diagrams with heat and material balance diagrams Utility flow diagrams with heat and material balances, Process System Description, Utilities System Description, Hydrochlorination System Description, P&ids for process, utility and auxiliary systems, PSFS diagrams, Cause and Effects Charts, Process equipment data sheets, Process instruments data sheets, Line list, Operating and control philosophy, Process design philosophy, Alarm and trip settings, Utility and chemical summary, Performance test run procedure, Pre-commissioning and commissioning manuals, Operating manual and the Start-up / Shut-down procedures. Safety Integrity Level

    5

Mechanical Engineering 1 Contractor shall be responsible for but not limited to the following Contractor shall review / update / upgrade and validate FEED specifications and data sheets for equipment and prepare material requisition documents including Vendor data requirement list & schedule (VDRL) for the equipment in accordance with the Contract equipment list. 2 Contractor shall prepare detail engineering documents for specified modification works of Phase (e.g. Sun shelter at PH for Semi- Portal Cranes current collector and replacement of existing cable reel power line of said crane, etc. As specified in study; Existing Phase crane use as a common crane), and when required prepare specification, data sheets etc. For the equipment not covered specifically in FEED documents. 3 Contractor shall include for RAM Study to confirm requirement of additional EOT Cranes at Pump-house and Semi-portal Crane at Screen-Yard.
Page 127 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo.co.uk

IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h

5044. o 4093 c d

Contractor shall witness and approve all documents necessary during major testing such as mechanical run tests and Performance Tests. Also, Company/Client shall witness inspections and tests when required. 4 Contractor shall review and Validate Mechanical Handling Study Report (accessibility and maintainability) of all Project FACILITIES and relevant data sheets shall be updated for procurement. 5 Contractor shall design, supply and install all necessary facilities as recommended in the mechanical handling report such as A-Frame, manual chain Hoist etc. That are not covered in the FEED documents. Equipment List 6 Contractor shall complete / further develop the equipment list included in FEED.  Equipment Data Sheets  FEED document includes data sheets developed in accordance with process design criteria for all major equipment items. Prepared equipment data sheets identify the minimum design requirements. Contractor is responsible for review and update as required and preparing final detailed equipment data sheets for all equipment. Civil / Structural Engineering Contractor shall be responsible for but not limited to the following: Applicable for all Facilities 1 A preliminary site preparation drawing, along with soil survey report on borehole samples has been included. In addition, rough grades have been established along with a perimeter fence drawing, preliminary grading and drainage drawings, preliminary roadway drawings, road and utility crossing drawings, pipeline drawings, foundation drawings, structural steel drawings and other miscellaneous drawings showing lines only but no details. These drawings / documents are issued for information only. 2 The Contractor has to remove existing pavement in order to place new foundations. Contractor's work includes, but not limited to, the review and verification of Plot Plans to include any development resulting from supplier information, piping stress analysis, requirements for constructability, plant safety, operation and maintenance to suit completion of the FACILITY. Surveys 1 A Geo-technical report “Geo-technical Site Investigation” has been provided for
Page 128 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo.co.uk

IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h

5044. o 4093 c d

2

Building Area, Outfall Area and on Pipe Corridor's. The purpose of the report is to provide preliminary information on foundation recommendations. Contractor shall be responsible to plan and carry out any supplemental soil survey, to verify the data and to collect additional data at the area(s) where soil data is neither sufficient nor available. At the completion of the site preparation work, Contractor shall carry out site survey for setting out his work and to verify that the Construction Site preparation is done as per Project requirement in terms of extent and elevation of the developed area for all FACILITY. Contractor shall ensure that all existing survey monuments are preserved and properly protected. Survey monuments damaged by Contractor during the performance of the Work shall be repaired or replaced, by the Contractor at his cost. Contractor shall locate and install new permanent monuments at each corner of the facilities Construction Sites and other locations as needed for the Work to mark boundaries and establish additional horizontal and vertical controls for the construction work. Contractor shall record the locations of these monuments and benchmarks on the Contractor's topographical survey drawings together with their National National Grid references and National Height Datum (NHD) elevations. Contractor shall reference the FACILITY grid system for all new co-ordinates, and the National Height Datum for all elevations used for the Work. As a minimum, the accuracy of horizontal measurements shall meet the requirements of relevant Company / Client standards. The accuracy of running levels for the purpose of establishing grade elevations is expressed as: Maximum permissible error in mm = 8 times the square root of the distance of level run in kilometres or as specified in Company / Client standards. Topographical Survey Information and details pertaining to existing roads, storm drainage, etc. Shall be co-ordinated with Company / Client during the execution of the Project. However, Contractor shall survey the existing infrastructure to acquire the actual information and ensure consistency in design and construction. Contractor shall carryout a complete topographical survey of the work site and submit report with drawings to Company / Client.
suraj_engineer@yahoo.co.uk

3

4

5

6

7

8

Page 129 of 663

IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h

5044. o 4093 c d

9

Contractor shall contact the GIS Department for information pertaining to the transformation parameters from grid. Bathymetric Survey Bathymetric Survey shall be carried out by the Contractor for the sea bed profiles for the design of the Outfall Structure.

Civil, Structural and Building 1 Contractor shall carry out the following civil design and engineering for the Work included but not limited to the following: Construction Site preparation, final grading, paving. Excavation including de-watering. Foundation works and carrying out soil improvement, soil replacement and / or piling, as required. In the reclaimed land area, soil improvement or piling shall be considered for large equipment foundations, heavily loaded pipe sleepers and / or foundations sensitive to settlement. 2 Roads, paving, culverts, footpaths, road markings, signs, safety barriers and guard posts in compliance with Company / Client and other local Authority Standards, CS and National Traffic Manual, Design guidelines for road pavement and road crossings in Plant Industrial City. Flush kerb stones shall be installed at change of road construction and road direction while crash barriers (guard rails) shall be installed at culverts, ramps and change of road direction as a minimum. Company / Client shall not supply copies of CS standards. Contractor shall have to obtain his own copies from the Ministry of Municipal Affairs and Agriculture. Underground services, such as, sewers, drains, cable trenches, duct banks, pipe trenches, and other civil works associated with underground service installations including underground piping, cathodic protection, electrical cables and grounding, instrument cables, and heating systems. Seawater pipes shall be installed above and under ground. Design, cut and fill shall be for the full width of the pipe corridors, plus the two side maintenance tracks which are part of other corridors adjacent to the Cooling Water Corridors i.e. For Phases while the construction of pipe supports shall be for Phase only. Earth embankment / dikes and related concrete works, if required during construction to be executed by Contractor.
suraj_engineer@yahoo.co.uk

3

4

Page 130 of 663

IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h

5044. o 4093 c d

Structures in concrete, steel and masonry block, including but not limited to equipment and pipe supporting structures and foundations, culverts and bridges, pits, manholes, basins, ponds, receiving basin, discharge channel, outfall structure, earth retaining structures, piping anchors and thrust blocks, etc. Conformance to local law, regulations and practices. 5 Contractor shall design, supply, install and commission impressed current cathodic protection system to protect the reinforcing steel re-bar of the Pump house pit (above and below ground), Receiving Basin, Discharge Channel, Outfall structures and for all structure and foundations within water table or/and below ±0.0m NHD. Extent and type of the structure of wing wall to PH for the future phases shall be finalised by Contractor during detail design and subject to Company / Client approval. Contractor shall refer to PH walls. Actual dimensions including buttress walls of Receiving Basin shall be detailed by Contractor and finalised during detail design subject to Company / Client approval. Physical modeling of the Pump pits, Receiving Basin, Discharge Channel and Outfall Structures are to be carried out by the Contractor. Specialist recommends that the developed design for the intake pumping station be the subject of a physical model test by the Contractor in order to: Investigate detailed internal flow conditions Investigate potential vortex action at the pump chambers Investigate potential pre-swirl at the pump suctions Optimise required vortex suppression devices. Investigate performance in the vicinity of the pumps and to confirm pump chamber geometry etc. The proposed overall layout and dimensions for the screen chambers is considered satisfactory for FEED. However, that the required width of each screen chamber element should be subject to further review by Contractorfollowing identification of the actual screen vendor and actual screen dimensions. Landscaping Contractor shall carryout design for free bare land beautification including required irrigation pipeline at Common Seawater Facility.  Soft landscaping The soft landscaping is to be installed around the Building, comprising of grass area, planting beds, plants, trees (palm trees for Operation Building only), shrubs
suraj_engineer@yahoo.co.uk

     

6

7

Page 131 of 663

IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h

5044. o 4093 c d

and the like. This landscaping shall cover the following area:  Operation Building - Tag No..  Workshop / Warehouse Building - Tag No.  Workshop Building - Tag No. The required irrigation pipeline is also to be specified for watering of landscaping. The source of water supply is available from connection to PLANT Landscaping Water Network at CSF Main Road, which is presently under implementation.  Hard landscaping The area between the buildings and roadways should be kerbed and filled with 100mm depth of 20mm crushed and washed stone (i.e. Pebbles) to the available space between the buildings and road. Earthing pits and cable markers shall be minimum 50mm above the finished levels or shall be reinstalled appropriately. This landscaping shall cover, but not limited to, the following area:  Control Building (Extension) - Tag No.  Electro-chlorination Building - Tag No  Electrical Switch gear building for Chlorination -Tag No.  33kv Switchgear Building - Tag No.  VSDS Substation for PH - Tag No  VSDS Substation for PH - Tag No.  220kv Switch Gear Building -Tag No. Contractor to follow project specifications and Company / Client amendments while designing all Civil Works in addition to the Civil and Structural Design Basis and applicable codes and standards. Underground Facilities These shall include all civil work associated with electrical, instrument, telecommunication, fire fighting system and cathodic protection, including cable trenches of all types (concrete wall type, direct buried type, etc.) And duct banks and associated civil work for underground piping, and cables including the required pipe trenches, drainage systems including sewers, drains, catch basins, manholes for various purposes. Contractor shall follow project specifications and Company / Client amendments while designing Underground facilities in addition to applicable codes and standards. Steel Structure 1 While designing the steel structure, Contractor to follow the Project specifications, Civil and Structural Design Basis, codes and standards Contractor shall be responsible for providing all steel structures. Strict quality control,
Page 132 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo.co.uk

IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h

5044. o 4093 c d

2

3

4

5

supervision, inspection and testing during fabrication and erection shall be implemented for the production of steel structures. Only new material certified to the Project Specifications shall be used. Materials conforming to code equivalent to latest ASTM Standards, such as BS or JIS are acceptable for structural materials with prior Company/Client approval. The quality control including material, fabrication, welding, protective coating, transportation, handling and storage is outlined in Project Specifications and shall be strictly followed. With regard to the use of hot-dip galvanised steel structures, Company / Client is concerned with zinc embrittlement of stainless steel and high nickel alloys. Steel structure with a potential to be in contact with equipment containing stainless steel piping or equipment shall not be galvanised but be painted in accordance with Company / Client Painting Spec. In addition, Contractor's design shall make provisions to prevent contamination of these equipment and piping due to dripping of molten zinc from galvanised structural steel due to fire. Thus, wherever there is a potential for contamination due to molten zinc, Contractor shall either paint the overhead structure in-lieu of hot-dip galvanising, provide adequate protection shields or insulate/fireproof the structure. Operating stages and access on pipe racks, equipment supporting structures, shelters and equipment as well as stages and walkways on ground necessary to facilitate FACILITY operation and maintenance including structural platform shall be provided by Contractor, for Company / Client's approval. Contractor shall be responsible for determining the requirement, developing detail design, and providing small shelters such as those required for local panels and instrumentation, etc. These small shelters are not listed in the Building List. Contractor shall seek Company / Client approval for the scope of small shelters. Miscellaneous pipe racks and pipe supports which shall be required in process, and utility areas are not shown on the plot plans nor in the Building List. Contractor shall be responsible for developing layouts, detail design and providing these pipe racks and supports.

--------------------------------------Chapter 8
Bid g ei n ocp u i Ds Cne t l n g
Page 133 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo.co.uk

IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h

5044. o 4093 c d

D s nG n ra S e ific tio e ig e e l p c a n
Structural Design Basis Buildings, Process Structures, Pipe Racks, Miscellaneous Plant Structures, Vessels, Exchangers and General Introduction This specification gives the minimum criteria for structural engineering and design purpose necessary for structural engineering and design for the framework and foundations of all buildings, process structures, pipe racks and for the foundations for vertical vessels, horizontal vessels, heat exchangers, storage tanks, vibrating equipment, grade and elevated slabs and masonry structures. Miscellaneous plant structures such as pits, sumps and retaining walls etc. Codes And Standards The following Codes, Standards and Specifications form part of this specification. Only the latest codes shall apply to all requirements. Alternate Codes, Standards and Specifications meeting the requirements of the these Codes, Standards and Specifications may be used with approval by the Company. Steel grade material S 275 JR to BS EN 10025 and bolts to BS 4190 and BS 4395 may be used upon the Company approval. Steel grade 43A to BS 4360 may be used for small access platforms without valves, small pipe supports, handrail and ladders, subject to Company approval. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) ANSI A12.1 Safety Requirements for Floor and Wall Openings, Railings and Toeboards. ANSI A14.3 Safety Requirement for Fixed Ladders. ANSI A64.1 Requirements for Fixed Industrial Stairs American Society Of Civil Engineers (ASCE) ASCE 7 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and other Structures American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) AISC Specification for Structural Steel Buildings AISC Manual of Steel Construction AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges AISC Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts American Concrete Institute (ACI) ACI 301 Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings ACI 302.1R Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction ACI 318M Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete Commentary on Building
Page 134 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo.co.uk

IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h

5044. o 4093 c d

Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete ACI 325.3R Guide for Design of Foundations and Shoulders for Concrete Pavements ACI 336.2R Suggested Analysis and Design Procedures for Combined Footings and Mats ACI 350R Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures ACI 530 Building Code Requirements for Concrete Masonry Structures American Welding Society (AWS) AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code - Steel AWS D1.4 Structural Welding Reinforcing Steel American Petroleum Institute (API) API 650 Appendix E American Society For Non-Destructive Testing (ASNT) ASNT-TC-IA Recommended Practice Portland Cement Association (PCA) PCA IS 003D Rectangular Concrete Tanks PCA IS 072D Circular Concrete Tanks without Pre-stressing National Concrete Masonry Association (NCMA) NCMA TEK 59 Reinforced Concrete Masonry Construction. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) OSHA - CR29 American Association Of State Highways And Transportation Official (AASHTO) Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges American Society For Testing And Materials (ASTM) ASTM A6 Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes, Sheet Piling and Bars for Structural Use ASTM A36 Specification for Structural Steel ASTM A53 Specification for Pipe, Steel, Blank and Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless. ASTM A123 Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products ASTM A143 Recommended Practice for Safeguarding Against Embrittlement of Hot-Dip Galvanized Structural Steel Products and Procedures for Detecting Embrittlement ASTM A185 Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric Plain for Concrete Reinforcement ASTM A193 Specification for Alloy-Steel Bolting Material for High Temperature Service ASTM A307 Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength ASTM A325 Specification for High Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints (Including
Page 135 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo.co.uk

IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h

5044. o 4093 c d

Suitable Nuts and Plain Hardened Washers) ASTM A490 Specification for High-Strength Steel Bolts Classes 10.9 and 10.93 for Structural Steel Joints (Metric) ASTM A500 Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes ASTM A569M Specification for Steel with Carbon (0.15 Maximum Percent) Hot-RolledSheet and Strip Commercial Quality ASTM A786 Specification for Rolled Steel Floor Plates ASTM A830 Specification for Plates Carbon Steel Structural Quality Furnished to Chemical Composition Requirements ASTM C90 Specification for Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units ASTM C270 Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry ASTM F436 Specification for Hardened Steel Washers ASTM F959 Specification for Compressible-Washer-Type Direct Tension Indicator for use with Structural Fasteners Uniform Building Code (UBC) UBC Latest Edition BRITISH STANDARDS (BS) BS 4 Structural Steel Sections Part 1 Specification for Hot Rolled Sections BS 4190 Black hexagon bolts BS 4360 Weldable structural steels BS 4395 High Strength Friction Bolts and Associated Nuts and Washers for Structural Engineering BS 4449 Carbon Steel Bars for the Reinforcement of Concrete BS 4483 Steel Fabric for the Reinforcement of Concrete BS 4592 Grating BS 4848 Hot-Rolled Structural Steel Sections Part 2: Specification for Hot-Finished Hollow Sections BS 5950 Structural Use of Steelwork in Buildings BS 7419 Holding Down Bolts BS 8004 Foundations BS 8007 Design of Concrete Structures for Retaining Aqueous Liquids BS 8110 Structural Use of Concrete BS EN 20898 Mechanical Properties of Fasteners Part 1: Bolts, Screws and Studs BS EN 10025 Hot rolled products of now-alloy structural steels and their technical delivery conditions British Publications
Page 136 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo.co.uk

IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h

91 Early Age Thermal Crack Control in Concrete Quality Assurance / Quality Control Contractor’s proposed quality system shall fully satisfy all the elements of ISO 9001 “Quality Systems . “Quality Management and Quality System Elements .K.5044. quantities and units of measurement shown on drawings or used in specifications and calculations shall be in metric units while pipe size may be in inches.Model for Quality Assurance in Design / Development. Installation and Servicing” and ISO 9004-1987. Quality manual as well as project specific quality plan shall be submitted to Company for review. Page 137 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Design Requirements 1 Reference codes and standards All structural engineering design shall be within the parameters of the documents listed above and shall constitute part of this design basis. Implementation of the system shall be carried out in accordance with the Project Contract Agreement. comment and approval. Measurement All dimensions. Production.Guidelines”. o 4093 c d U.co. Concrete Society Technical Report No. Contractor’s Quality Manual and Project Specific Quality plan. The quality system shall provide for the planned and systematic control of all quality related activities performed during design. 2 3 Site Survey and Soils Report Company accepts no liability for the information contained in the Site Survey and the Soils Report (if any). Site survey All design shall be in accordance with the horizontal and vertical controls contained in the survey report prepared by the survey consultant. 34: Concrete Industrial Ground Floors Cement and Concrete Association Technical Report 550: Design of Floors on Ground British Cement Association Interim Note 11: The Design of Ground Supported Concrete Industrial Ground Floors CIRIA Special Publication 31: The CIRIA Guide to Concrete Construction in the Gulf Region CIRIA Report No.

Structural members may be shown as single lines. deflections) and shall include the upward reaction loads on the foundation (load per unit of area).uk 11 1 12 Page 138 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . reactions. If any computer programs are to be used for the detailed design. The sketch shall include the foundations & all other parts of structures in structural steel or in structural concrete. o 4093 c d Soils report All design shall be in accordance with the recommendations contained in the soils report prepared by the geotechnical consultant. 6 7 8 9 10 Stability Check The stability of the structure shall be checked for both factored and non-factored load combinations. shear and possibly torsion. Calculations The calculations shall give the design philosophy and all loads including the dead loads of the relevant structural components. such as suraj_engineer@yahoo. All applied loads shall be shown on the skethch excluding the dead loads.5044. a basic design shall be made consisting of:  Basic sketch  Loading Derivation  Calculation  Stability check  Main Structural members  Basic Sketch The sketch shall show the proposed structure (in perspective and / or a series of cross sections). these shall be identified during the basic design stage with all required documentation provided to demonstrate their adequacy & sufficiency. The calculation shall state the loads in the main structural members (axial loads. Structural details.co. 4 5 Basic Design and Drawing Concepts Design and calculations Prior to starting detailed design. Main Structural Members In the assessment of the sizes and dimensions of the main structural members the most critical load combination shall be considered. bending moments. The calculation shall take into account the soil investigation report.

A hand calculation to prove the validity of the computer analysis except if validated by QA / QC system. A1. Drawings and related documents 1 2 Drawings shall be of the standard metric sizes. for subjects not covered by applicable codes Loading tables with loads location diagrams If computer programs are used. 6. Or equivalent duly registered complying with international standards of EMF. 2.e. Levels shall be indicated in metres & all other dimensions in millimeters. in offsites the actual level shall be indicated. formulas. o 4093 c d 13 connections of steel beams and columns or details of reinforcing steel over the full length of a reinforced concrete beam shall be designed and detailed by the Designer. i. A4. Dimensions on the drawings shall be in the SI system unless otherwise specified. graphs / tables References to literature etc. Each drawing shall bear the following information in the title block. The calculation shall clearly indicate: The table of contents Design philosophy employed on engineering assumptions Applicable codes. A2. All headings and notes shall be in English. 3. A0. Loads and load combinations 1. 100. (Engineers Mobility Forum) (In Bharat India. Standard steel connection details may be designed by the Supplier but must checked by the Designer duly certified by a Professional Engineer.uk Page 139 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Users manual d. e.co. A3. Layout drawings shall show the highest point of grade as El. The Institution Of Engineers India represents EMF) Detailed Design The detailed design shall be based on the basic criteria as well as FEED. Logic and theory used b. These shall be suitably prepared to facilitate microfilming and incorporate a numbering and indication of revision system.00 and the reference of this level to the local datum level for Process Units. Analytical model of the structure used for computer analysis c. suraj_engineer@yahoo. the following information shall be supplied: a. 4. The preferred computer aided design system is the software used internationally as well as designer’s in house developed or other software approved by Company. 5.5044.

The list of reference drawings and related documents stating their title and number Page 140 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Structural concrete Plan drawing On this drawing. Dimensions are expressed in millimeters c. This mark "Released for Construction" can be given only by the Designer responsible for design and engineering. Polyethylene sheeting. o 4093 c d 3 4 5 6 Order number of the Company. The Contractor shall not disclose or issue to any third parties without obtaining written consent of the Company any documents. provided at his disposal by the Company or any documents prepared by him in connection with inquiries and orders for purposes other than the preparation of a quotation or carrying out these orders.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . The quality (or qualities) of concrete e. Concrete blinding (location. Catalytic cracking unit . Bar diameters are expressed in millimeters Furthermore. quality and thickness) h. the general notes shall list: d.co. etc. if applicable (location and quality) i. Revisions to drawings shall be identified with symbols adjacent to the alterations. Example: Order number . location and thickness) j. Name of plant . a brief description in tabular form of each revision shall be given and if applicable. The term “Latest Revision” shall not be used. Name of unit . Claim to all drawings prepared by the Contractor under any order placed by the Company shall be vested in the Company and the later shall have the right to use these drawings for any purpose for this project without any obligation to the Contractor. the authority and date of the revision shall be listed. Compressor building Portal frames Only drawings marked "Released for Construction (RFC)" or “Approved for Construction (AFC)” shall be used for execution of works every where.5044. the general information / data shall be shown as General Notes on the right-hand side or any other suitable location of the drawing. The general notes shall state that: a. drawings. The concrete cover on bars (type of construction. The quality (or qualities) of steel reinforcing bars f. Name of part of the unit . Drawings shall be submitted together with the relevant calculations including those required for submission to local authorities. The quality (or qualities) of cement to be used g. Levels are expressed in meters with reference to the highest point of grade b.

e. Scale of drawings Plan drawings shall be made to a scale of 1:50 and detail drawings to a scale of 1:20. Bending and weight lists These lists shall always be made by the Designer unless explicitly stated otherwise. Baseplate drawing This drawing shall show all dimensions and details of the base plate including anchor bolts which be taken into account in the design of the (concrete) foundation. c. The lists shall be prepared on the detailed drawings or on separate sheets. see No... The legend of the Contractor’s reinforcing bar call out Including an indication for which part(s) each quality is to be used. This detail drawing refers to Drawing No......... If instruction drawings are provided. .. the Contractor may use a reproducible of the instruction drawing(s). sheet 1 to . d.5044... see No..co.. The scale for details shall be at least 1:10. sheet 1 to .. For small and simple structures.. All members to be fireproofed shall be marked with an appropriate symbol or FP designation. Construction drawings These drawings shall clearly show all constructional details of the structure to be supplied. For the preparation of the general arrangement drawing.... 1 General arrangement drawings These drawing shall show the complete structure to be supplied.. The location of the various parts in the structure shall be indicated.. this drawing may be combined with the base plate drawing. o 4093 c d k. For general notes. the following information / data shall be listed: a..uk 2 3 Page 141 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . . this shall be indicated on the drawing. For bar bending list(s).... For small and simple structures.. all the dimensions shown on these drawings shall also appear on the Contractor’s drawings. b.. A fireproofing legend shall clearly identify the symbols and designations with the work to be performed.. suraj_engineer@yahoo.... Quantity of concrete (for each quality of concrete separately) f. . Structural steel Part of the information / data supplied by the Company may be in the form of one or more instruction drawings. see Drawing No.. .... this drawing may be combined with the general arrangement drawing. All main dimensions and the section to be used shall be included. When the need for a slight adjustment of the anchor bolts during erection is expected. Detail drawings On each of the detail drawings. For weight list(s)..

Grating shall normally be clipped or bolted and Page 142 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. general specifications and international codes. The plastic design method in the AISC Manual shall not be used in steel design.co. When using structural tees in compression. Compression bracing for steel structures shall normally be designed with wide flange and structural tee shapes. 3 Floor grating shall not be allowed to resist lateral loads in diaphragm action without investigated. Use of fixed base plates for certain type of pipe racks and buildings may be necessary because of deflection considerations. 4 Bills of material Bills of material shall show the weights of all large members from the viewpont of transportation and erection at site as well as the total weight of the structure. platform or walkway when necessary to resist lateral loads or to increase the lateral stiffness of the unit. Steel structures 1 Structural steel design shall be carried out in accordance with the relevant project. Where headroom.5044. The method of bracing selected for a structure should generally be used throughout the structure. o 4093 c d Scale of drawings Drawings shall be made to an appropriate scale. only pinned column bases shall be used in the design of steel structures.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . beam compression flanges should be considered to be fully braced when a concrete slab is cast to match the bottom face of the compression flanges on both sides or when chequered plate is bolted or welded to the compression flanges or when grating or metal deck is welded to the compression flanges. Steel structures shall be designed for the loads and load combinations allowed In this specification. wind and other lateral loads on a structure should be transferred to the foundations through moment resistant frames in one direction and vertical X-braced or K-braced frames in the other direction. In a floor system. Structures that resist lateral load with rigid frame systems in two directions should be avoided. Normally. For tension bracing. single angle or structural tees may be used. the design shall include bending induced by eccentrically loaded connections. access or equipment arrangement permit. Horizontal bracing shall be provided in the plane of a floor. Double angle bracing because of maintenance difficulties shall not permitted for either compression or tension locations. Braces for structures subject to vibration from equipment shall be designed as compression members. wind and other lateral loads on a steel structure shall preferably be transferred to the foundations through vertical X-bracing or K-bracing included on the transverse and longitudinal column lines of the structure. 2 As a second choice.

Reactions shall be shown on the engineering drawings or as per the calculation note provided by Designer. etc. Loads for bearing type connections shall be based on threads excluded from shear plane. o 4093 c d 4 5 6 therefore. A minimum of 2 M20 bolts shall be used for all connections. Connections for steel structures shall conform to the following requirements: Shop connections may be bolted or welded. additional vertical and / or horizontal bracing in the floor system shall be provided. In such cases. when approved by the Designer. Pockets for depressions which would hold water shall be provided drain holes or otherwise protected. beams and columns on major pipe racks. The forces in truss members and all main bracing shall be shown on the engineering drawings with plus signs indicating tension and minus signs indicating compression or as per the calculation note provided by Designer. All shear connections shall be designed and detailed by the Supplier and checked by the Designer.5044. welded field connections may be used.uk 7 8 Page 143 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . girts. Steel Structures shall be designed so that the surfaces of all parts be readily accessible for inspection. cleaning and painting.g.) shall be made with A307 bolts with the appropriate finish. However. The Designer will determine the type of connection to be used for each structure. These connections shall be designed as bearing type. Bar joist floor and roof systems are generally considered to be too light for heavy industrial plant work. shall be worked by the Designer duly shown on the engineering drawings. Field connections shall normally be bolted however. Connections will normally be designed by the Supplier and checked by the Designer in accordance with the project construction specifications and loads shown on the drawings. stair framing. etc. Bolted connections for primary members shall utilize high-strength bolts conforming to ASTM A325 or A490. Moment connections and special connections. inaccessible maintenance areas. Those connections subject to vibration or stress reversal shall be bearing type. Moment connections can be bolted or welded type depending on the type of structure and situation. Turn of the nut method or load-indicator washers shall be used for tightening all connections. Plant area shall have the primary structural connections continuously seal welded except high strength bolted field connections. bar joist systems may be used on a project.co. The minimum thickness of any structural steel plate or bar shall be 10 mm. however. Primary structural connections include horizontal and vertical vessel supports. when approved by the Designer. purlins. shall not be considered as adequate compression flange bracing. Bolted connections for secondary members (e. Gusset suraj_engineer@yahoo.

All welds shall be continuous. The Designer / Contractor Site Management shall approve the location of all construction joints on site agreement. Load combinations and load factors for all concrete design shall be adopted in accordance with ACI 318. Moving concentrated loads on elevated concrete beams and slabs shall be treated in accordance with applicable recommendations of the referenced AASHTO specifications. All bracing shall be arranged to minimize torsion and where practicable. E70xx welding electrodes shall be specified for all shop and field welding of structural steel. Slabs at grade for buildings and process areas shall be designed in accordance suraj_engineer@yahoo. Cross bars shall be twisted square 6 mm on each side and spaced not over 100 mm center to center.uk 4 Page 144 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h .5044. the members and connections shall be designed to resist any local bending due to the eccentricity of the force. When the condition cannot be achieved. Steel structures supporting equipment shall be fireproofed where required by risk & safety analysis. it is noticed that corroded steel plates and bolts limit the expected movement which may result in additional stresses. Construction joints in beams at column or pedestal faces should be avoided. The Designer should consider this point to include sequential additional stresses in their design consideration.co. 3 Construction joints in a concrete structure shall be located so as to least impair the integrity and unity of the structure. The working strength or limit state of serviceability design methods shall be used for the structural design of concrete members unless otherwise indicated. In practice. be arranged concentrically about the resultant line of force. Reinforced concrete structures and foundations 1 Cast-in-place or situ concrete structures shall be designed in accordance with ACI 318 except as indicated otherwise in this specification. hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123 and A143 for corrosive environment. o 4093 c d 9 plates shall not be thinner than the members to be connected and shall have a thickness of at least 10 mm. 2 Cast-in-place or situ concrete structures shall be designed for the loads and load combinations required according to codes & description elsewhere in project documents. Welded steel grating for platform covering shall be 30 mm x 6 mm bearing bars at 30 mm on center. shall be arranged so that their centroid lies on the resultant of the forces those members intended to resist. The design and details of cast-in-place concrete structures shall consider the monolithic nature of hardened concrete. The connections wherever possible.

In such cases. The frictional resistance provided by the grade slab shall equal at least 1. Foundations for structures shall be sized and stability determinations made using service loads only. Foundations shall be proportioned so as to minimize general and differential settlements. combined footings and mats should be designed assuming linear soil pressure distribution. a coefficient of friction of 0. and pits shall be designed in accordance with the latest referenced PCA bulletins and / or BS8007. For all liquid retaining structures. In order to reduce the overturning moment on individual footings of buildings and process structures.co. Concrete process treatment structures shall be designed in accordance with ACI 350 R. Where the rigidity of the foundation is questionable.1 for buoyancy shall be used ignoring soil cohesion. Where seasonal changes in soil moisture content occur extremely. Bolts shall be hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123 and A143.2 R contains suggested design procedures. individual foundations shall normally be used for major equipment. The design of such structures shall include the effects of ground water pressures and buoyancy. sumps. if approved by the Designer. special details may be required to suraj_engineer@yahoo.uk Page 145 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . the grade slab thickness and joint details shall be properly designed. Load factors shall not be included in these design operations. A corrosion allowance of 3 mm shall be required for all anchor bolts. the engineering drawings shall specify the kind of fill material and the degree of compaction required for the fill material. Spread footings. If this design approach is used. special precautions shall be taken for water tightness. an analysis considering the interaction between flexibility of the foundation and the subgrade soil reaction should be considered. ACI 336.15 times the applied column base shears. If combined foundations are appropriate. this method of analysis may be in order. For mats particularly. Foundation design in addition to the above applicable criteria shall meet the following requirements: Foundations shall be designed in accordance with the project geotechnical (soils) report. the transfer of column base shears into the concrete grade slab should be considered. For design purposes. Unless there is a conflict with the project soils report.5044. o 4093 c d 5 7 8 9 10 11 with the publications ‘Concrete pavements for heavy storage areas’ Underground structures such as basements. All joints shall be fully detailed by Designer. however.2 may be assumed between the concrete slab and the membrane. undisturbed soil. A minimum factor of safety of 1. may be placed on well-compacted earth fill. Some seal slabs. the centroid of the bearing area should coincide with the resultant of the applied operating load (excluding live load). rectangular tanks. All foundations shall be placed on sealed blinding concrete on firm.

o 4093 c d minimize foundation movements. 14 The stability ratio (SR) based on service loads for buildings. include buoyancy).5 for cohesive soils = 2.co.5 when determined as follows: SR = D (P) / 2M = D / 2e Where: D = Diameter or width of footing. process structures and other framed structures shall not be less than 1.5 for cohesionless material Where: Resisting Moment = Moment due to dead load of wall and soil overburden (include buoyancy) Overturning Moment= Moment due to lateral loads c Resisting moment and overturning moment shall be taken about the toe of the retaining wall and bottom of footing. Control of foundation movements is especially critical for masonry structures. 12 The stability ratio (SR) based on service loads for isolated spread footings shall not be less than 1. shall at least be equal to 1. This factor of safety must be maintained when 70 percent of dead load is combined with no reduction of wind load for uplift. The stability ratio (SR) of retaining walls based on service loads shall not be less than the following.5 Page 146 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. For sustained loading: SR = Resisting Moment / Overturning Moment = 3. a.25. The Designer shall determine design parameters to control such movements.5 when determined as follows. For sustained loading combined with temporary loading: SR = Resisting Moment / Overturning Moment = 2. There may be more than one axis of rotation.0 for cohesionless material b. SR = Resisting Moment / Overturning Moment Where Resisting Moment = Moment due to dead load of foundation and structure (include buoyancy).uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h .5044. P = Minimum gravity load at bottom of footing (exclude equipment and live loads.0 for cohesive soils = 1. M = Maximum overturning moment at bottom of footing. e = Eccentricity = M / P 13 The uplift factor of safety based on service loads shall not be less than 1. the sliding resistance of foundations especially retaining walls. For all service load conditions. Overturning Moment = Moment due to lateral loads 15 The overturning and resisting moments shall be computed about the most critical axis of rotation of the foundation block at the soil / concrete interface.

other harmful elements and to provide the concrete to develop a refined pore structure enhancing impermeability. General 1 The Region has been defined as being in an Ultra Hot Climate together with the extremely heavy concentration of chlorides in both the ground and atmosphere together with high humidity that result in the rapid degradation of Reinforced Concrete structures. The Contractor shall Page 147 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. it is recommended that a minimum factor of safety of 2. Keep standard bottom of footing elevations where possible. The degradation of concrete arises also from the use of salt contaminated materials.co.0 shall be provided. In this case. water. Factors to increase durability while designing shall be considered in concrete such as thermal insulation coating measures as recommended in the “CIRIA Guide to Concrete in The Gulf Region”. 3 Coatings shall be applied to all buried and exposed concrete surfaces as an essential protection against attack from chlorides. Quality of concrete is achieved by good engineering and detailing proper materials and proportioning good construction techniques and concrete curing. One of the main characteristics influencing the durability of concrete is its permeability to the ingress of chlorides. o 4093 c d times the applied lateral loads.5044. Consideration shall be given to interferences with underground soil systems. oxygen. only that pressure acting on the key face shall be considered. Failure of the R. The effects of buoyancy on the concrete and soil weights shall be considered. wind blown chloride contaminated dust and other deleterious substances. Stability calculations shall include the weight of the foundation concrete and the soil immediately above the footing(s). Coatings shall have crack bridging properties on flexural members. The degradation of the concrete is principally caused by reinforcement corrosion due to the ingress of chlorides and other aggressive salts. Passive earth pressures shall not be included in stability calculations except in the design of retaining walls with keys. carbon dioxide.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h .C member then becomes imminent. Sliding resistance shall be developed by either friction between the footing and membrane or by passive resistance of shear keys extending below the bottom of the footing in the case of retaining walls. Foundation bottom level shall be defined taking into consideration geotechnical (soil) report and other factors to be clearly noted on the drawings. 2 The durability and quality of the concrete itself is of paramount importance. the consequential increased volume of rust produced commonly breaks off the cover on the reinforcement. d In cases where sliding resistance is developed by a combination of friction and passive resistance. Steel plates shall not be embedded in concrete.

Crack width shall be = 0.Table 5. Crack widths shall be = 0. Reinforcement 1 Use smaller diameter re-bar at closer centers.5044.10 for all liquid retaining structures.BS 8007 .5.e.35% of the applicable gross crosssuraj_engineer@yahoo. Crack prevention 1 Crack widths shall be controlled by an expeditious use of combinations of reinforcement sizes. This shall be not less than 30° C. it will be necessary to use reduced allowable stresses in the reinforcement. steady state loading. 2 The calculation shall be based on the long term.Option 1. In order to reduce flexural cracking to acceptance limits. Seasonal temperature fall (T2) shall be considered where continuous construction is used .BS 8007. o 4093 c d develop a detail that allows attachment of the plates to inserts embedded in the concrete. 4 Calculation of crack widths shall not use ‘deemed to satisfy’ options of BS 8007. submerged and exposed concrete. do not calculate crack widths on PC and minimum reinforcement ratios. Crack widths apply at the surface of the concrete i. reinforcement shall not be less than 0.1 . 6 The minimum fall in temperature between hydration peak and ambient (T1) shall not be less than 31° C for walls and 21° C for ground slabs. For sections = 500 mm thick and for the outside 300 mm of large sections.e.uk Page 148 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h .15 mm for all buried.30 mm for all concrete located in an air conditioned and sealed environment. Crack widths shall be calculated using the applicable formula in BS 8007. the full depth of cover shall be utilized in the calculation. 5 Methods of calculating crack widths in relation to temperature and moisture effects are given in Appendix A . 3 Calculation of crack widths shall consider both load (flexural) and restraint (due to thermal and shrinkage effects) induced cracking.co. Crack widths shall be limited as follows. i. Crack width shall be = 0. spacing and cover. The minimum external restraint factor (R) shall be 0. A detail shall also be developed to ensure an effective seal from exterior moisture is achieved around the perimeter of the plates at the point of intersection between concrete and plate. For durability it is not necessary to consider peak loadings although this may affect coating selection for the requirement for crack bridging and flexural performance.

co.. Where any individual structural element falls within two or more categories then the most stringent criteria shall apply for the entire element. Concrete exposed to weather (all above grade structures not enclosed by a temperature and humidity controlled building) 60 c. o 4093 c d 2 3 4 5 6 sectional area of the concrete section.e. In addition. Maximum spacing of reinforcement shall be 150 mm in any direction. laps to be staggered. All concrete sections with a thickness of 250 mm or more. cover shall be as determined Page 149 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. g. a. Required covers shall not be reduced by provision of protective coatings. reinforcing bars shall be placed on both faces over the full section. Place reinforcement nearest to the surface where it is the greatest restrained length which means horizontal wall reinforcement will be on the outside of the vertical reinforcement. All reinforcement shall be fully detailed by the Designer on bar bending schedules BBS for fabrication.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . All concrete cover shall conform strictly with values given above unless noted otherwise on design documents or in the applicable standards.5044. f. Horizontal re-bar in walls and faces of large elements shall be on the outside of the vertical reinforcement for more effective crack control. membranes or by membrane protective screed. Reinforcement shall be adequately detailed to eliminate congested areas i. Use fabric reinforcement where possible (‘nested’ where necessary) as this gives better crack control. Concrete not exposed to weather and located within a temperature and humidity controlled building 50 d. Ensure additional diagonal reinforcement is placed at each re-entrant opening to prevent cracks emanating from corners. Do not bunch reinforcement or use in vertical or horizontal pairs. Minimum Concrete Cover (mm) Concrete cast against or permanently exposed to earth (all below grade structures) and all marine facilities over or in contact with water 75 b. If fire resistance of more than 2 hours is required. e. Concrete Cover Adequate cover to the outside of all reinforcement is essential for resistance to corrosion for all types of sections & situations whatsoever. minimum reinforcement shall be placed in the other two faces. h.

Top of pedestal shall project a minimum of 100 mm from the edge of the column base plate grout. d. Shear keys shall not be used on pedestals / plinths. Anchor Bolts For small diameters.e. notches in the middle of bay lengths shall be avoided. Stress Raisers Complicated plan shapes which produce stress shall be avoided. wall junctions and counterforts in the middle of bay lengths shall be avoided. Top surfaces shall be designed with falls to encourage run-off drainage. Minimum pedestal heights excluding grout above top of adjacent paving shall be as follows: Structural Steel columns: 150 mm to 200 mm Equipment (general): 100 mm to 300 mm Equipment (pumps): 100 mm to 300 mm Grout is to be sloped 1:1 away from the bottom outside corner of the column base plate grout. Locate joints adjacent to these stress producers if possible. b. Concrete shall have a minimum compressive strength as given in Specification for Concrete Externals Features 1 Features which collect sand and dust that can form with rain or dew into a corrosive pollutant shall be avoided i. box-outs. Tops of all pedestal heads shall be sloped 1:20 away from the base plate grout. ledges and exposed aggregate finishes. Dimensions of the concrete columns or foundations are designed taking into account loads applied to & not by reference to geometric dimensions of base plate.5 in BS 8110 Part 1 for the particular element under consideration. Where Page 150 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. i. o 4093 c d in Table 3.  Casting-in pipes. 4 5   Large and sudden changes of cross-section i. decorative patterns with holes and pockets. gutters. Locate joints adjacent to these stress producers or cast in two separate sections. 2 3 a. c.co. Chemical type anchors or cast-in anchors are preferred. Concrete Grades j.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h .e.5044.  Provide appropriate extra reinforcement where stress producers are unavoidable.

g. the hole must be properly cleaned according to Manufacturer’s instructions. the method used for design and construction shall be by the alternate ‘long strip method’ using a combination of transverse contraction joints (induced or formed).K. Paving 1 For ground slab paving construction. o 4093 c d chemical anchors are used. back up design calculations and justification shall be given for approval. For situations where shear keys are required. shear keys shall not be used. Concrete Society Technical Report suraj_engineer@yahoo.uk 2 Page 151 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Such open sections shall not be more than 1. Pits and Tanks 1 As a minimum requirement. Tech.5. Concrete Industrial Ground Floors by U. Monolithic construction with the supporting wall shall not be considered in such design. Report 550. Adjacent longitudinal strips shall be cast with longitudinal tied joints between each strip. The recommendations for slab design and construction shall be complied with the provisions in the following publications:Design of Floors on Ground by Cement and Concrete Assoc. these sections are subject to extremely high daytime temperatures and lower night temperatures. the structure is liquid retaining. aluminum). detailed and shown on the drawings by the Designer or Subcontractor for Construction with approval of Contractor.5044. Consideration shall be given to the use of insulation or reflective coatings (e.co.Section 5 ‘Design. Where continuous construction is necessary. All such structures (other than blast resistant structures) shall have an isolated roof slab on a sliding bearing (slip strip or equal approved). Minimum edge distance measured to outside of tube shall be 100 mm or 4 times the bolt diameter whichever is greater. the recommendations of BS 8007 . Detailing and Workmanship of Joints’ shall be adhered to regardless whether or not. Shear Keys For standard conventional structures. 2 3 All construction joints shall be designed. the method of ‘Temporary Open Sections’ as specified in BS 8007 C1.0 m containing the “Lapped’ section of reinforcement. Anchor bolts shall be designed for combined tension and shear as per BS5950.5 shall be used. Unless roofs are insulated. The use of sequential bay wall construction shall not be permitted.

The location of all joints shall be shown on the drawings with accompanying details of each joint type. Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction by ACI 302. shall not be placed higher than the bottom of plate level and sloped outward at a 1:1 slope away from the bottom of the base plate to prevent water accumulation near the base plate as well as to prevent cracking of the grout as a result of corrosion around base plate edge.5044. pipe supports. Process Structures. Vessels.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . etc. Grout material used below base plates for machinery. pipe racks. o 4093 c d 3 #34. Pipe Racks. All grouting shall be in accordance with the defined project specifications as well as proprietary standards. pumps. Concrete Masonry Structures The design of concrete masonry structures shall conform to ACI 530 and the UBC.co. Isolation joints are to be provided around all equipment foundations and pedestals. Miscellaneous Plant Structures. The Design of Ground Supported Concrete Industrial Ground Floors by British Cement Assoc. Exchangers and Tanks The following loads shall be considered: Dead Load Page 152 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Contractor shall develop a detail to ensure an effective seal from exterior moisture is achieved around the perimeter of the base plates at the point of intersection between grout and base plates.1R. Concrete masonry structures shall be designed for the loads and load combinations specified Grouting 1 All grout materials and application procedures shall be approved by the Designer and the Manufacturer. Interim Note 11. Sand-cement grout shall not be used for any project. Epoxy-based non-shrink grout shall be evaluated by Contractor and the Manufacturer for each application for temperature creep as well as strength and applied in accordance with Manufacturer's specification. 2 Fireproofing Fireproofing zones Only specific structures and equipment located within a Fire Proofing Zone (FPZ) shall be fireproofed as described in Specification for Fireproofing Loads Buildings.

Active and passive coefficients for lateral pressures shall be obtained from the project soils report. valves. insulation. Soil Load (Include as part of Dead Load) Operating (Product) Load Test Load Live Load a. Weight of equipment shall be extracted from the Manufacturer’s data sheets and include auxiliary machinery. instrumentation. and all other similar items. Operating (Product) Load (Live Load) The load shall be defined as the gravity load imposed by liquid. Equipment and piping should be considered empty of product load when calculating dead load. pipes. accessories. partitions. ladders.co. Surge Load (Include as part of Live Load)  Truck Load  Wind Load  Earthquake Load  Crane / Impact Load  Dynamic Load  Thermal Load  Erection Dead Load  Maintenance Load  Miscellaneous / Differential Settlement Load  Earth / Hydrostatic Load and Buoyancy  Blast Load  Future Load  The above loads are defined as follows. o 4093 c d a. roofs. foundations. Sand Load (Include as part of Live Load) b. tanks. Unusual loading that Page 153 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. solid or viscous materials in vessels. electrical and lighting conduits. platforms.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . switchgear.  Dead Load Dead load is defined as the weight of all permanent construction including walls. For heavy industrial work. stairways and fixed service equipment. The gravity weight of soil overburden shall be considered as dead load a. fireproofing. this would include equipment. vessels & internals. ceilings. equipment or piping during operation. Soil Load (Dead Load) Soil loads shall consist of lateral earth pressures.5044. floors. piping.

moveable equipment.0 Bulk storage 40. Types of Structures Load (kN/m2)  Walkways (not used as operating) 2.0  Floor Grating and Slabs 10.uk Page 154 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Lunchrooms.0 Mechanical. tools and other items placed on the structure but not permanently attached to it. control room.0 (or 3. Test Load (Live Load) The test load shall be defined as the gravity load imposed by any method necessary to test vessels. For industrial design.5  Compressor and generator platforms.0  Roof (min) 1. Halls 4.0 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Uniform loads and concentrated loads do not occur simultaneously.0 Canteens.25  Heavy Storage 12. electrical equipment room.0 kN point load)  Operating platforms (other than compressor and generator platforms 5.75  Light Storage 6. Unless specified otherwise. guards houses. is supported by one structure.0*  For floor grating and slabs being subjected to a concentrated load from either the installation or removal of equipment        Office first aid buildings. electrical.0 kN point load)  Trench covers (non vehicular) 5. Live Load Live load is defined as the weight superimposed by the use and occupancy of the building or other structure but not permanently attached to it. tanks. When more than one vessel etc. instrument workshop building 20.5044. Stairs. live load can be defined as the load produced by personnel. computer room.co.0 (or 3.0 Battery rooms 10. the structure need only be designed on the basis that one vessel will be tested at any one time and that the others will either be empty or still in operation. o 4093 c d occurs during regeneration or upset conditions shall also be considered. equipment or piping.0 Library 5.0 (or 5.0 kN point load)  Sand on roof (min.  Floor framing (Determine from use but never less than) 5. use the minimum live load values given in the table below.) 0. laboratory room locker room 3.

5044. the value of the importance factor of (I)=1.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h .8 qh (D1+D2+D3+D4) Where Page 155 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. crackers etc. the magnitude and direction of the load will be given in the equipment specification. culverts and other underground facilities shall be designed for the maximum expected loading condition caused by transportation of heavy equipment Wind Load (Live Load) The design wind loads shall be calculated based on a basic wind speed of 145 km per hour at a height of 10 m above the ground for terrain exposure C and a mean recurrence interval of 50 year. A 0. For overhead pipe tracks 4m wide or less.co. Sand Load (Live Load) Sand load shall be additive to live loads only when the area under consideration is used as a ‘work area’.9 kN at any one point.8. Truck loading shall be HS20 or HS20-44 wheel loading as defined by the AASHTO specifications. hydroformers. buildings and equipment and their parts.0 kN point load)  Handrailing ** ** 0. lateral and impact effects of truck loading. Truck Load (Live Load) Structures accessible to trucks shall be designed to withstand the gravity. a. portions and appurtenances for the project. or a horizontal force of 0. o 4093 c d  Stairs and Ramps 2. At least one road leading to the main process area(s) shall be designated as a heavy equipment route. It shall be checked where applicable whether maintenance and / or construction equipment loads are governing over HS20 wheel loading.75 kN per linear meter applied horizontally at the top of railing. Pressure coefficient Cf = 0. The project process engineer shall furnish a list of equipment having surge loads and the designer make allowance for such loadings in relevant calculations.0 (or 3. Surge Load (Live Load) Surge loads may occur in some vessels or equipment such as fluid cokers. The Designer shall develop specific wind load calculation criteria and procedures using ASCE 7 for various types of structures and equipment for the project. For this exposure and recurrence.1.75 kN/m2 load shall be used in the design of flat roofs. the wind load on the four largest pipes shall be taken into account. Pipe racks 4 m wide or less: Wp = 0.8 qh (D1+D2+D3) or pipe racks wider than 4 m: Wp = 0. The effect of sand accumulating behind walls and upstands shall be considered in the design of the walls and roof (treat similar to snow loading). b. The following tabulated velocity pressures shall be used for calculating design wind forces for the design of all structures. the wind load on the three largest pipes shall be taken into account. For overhead pipe tracks of over 4m wide. In such cases. Bridges.

Exposure C Height Zone Above Grade (m) Z Velocity Pressure in Kg/m2 qz Gust Response Factors Gh and Gz 0-6 107 1.5044.15 36-45 183 1. Wind loads shall be separately computed for all supported equipment.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Use Cf = 0. One such procedure for determining gust response factor is described in ASCE Page 156 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo.21 18-24 151 1.145 km / hr 50 year mean recurrence. ladders. Calculations shall be based on a rational analysis that incorporates the dynamic properties of the main wind force resisting system.10 90-120 241 1.25 12-15 134 1.12 60-90 219 1.17 30-36 173 1.1.14 45-60 198 1. ladders and platforms. and stairs except for vessels where ‘projected area increase factors’ have already been accounted for these items. The ‘shape increase factors’ may be used to modify the projected areas of vertical and horizontal vessels (including insulation if any) to allow for attachments such as manholes. piping. b.18 24-30 164 1.co.08 a. nozzles.29 6-9 114 1.8.22 15-18 142 1. ladders and platforms. structures and vertical vessels having a height exceeding five times the least horizontal dimension or a fundamental natural frequency less than 1.0 hertz shall be calculated. I = 1. nozzles. Gust response factors G for main wind resisting systems of flexible buildings. Increase factors may be used to modify the projected areas of vertical and horizontal vessels (including insulation if any) to allow for attachments such as manholes. c. o 4093 c d Wp = Unit design wind load on piping qh = Velocity pressure determined at piping elevation h Dn = Diameter of pipe Reference ASCE 7-1993 V . piping.26 9-12 125 1.

Pendant operated traveling crane support girders & and their connections 10% p. Reciprocating machinery or power driven units 50% s. For main wind force resisting systems and walls. o 4093 c d d. the live load shall be increased sufficiently. Monorails. Dynamic Loads (Live Load) Each structure shall be designed to withstand the effects of vibration and impact to which it may be subjected. davits 50% q. e.B. 25% 20% 1 10%2 o. t. No reduction shall be made for the shielding effect of vessels or structures adjacent to the structure being designed. If not otherwise specified.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . u. Cab operated traveling crane support girders & and their connections n. cab and hooks. Earthquake load shall be applicable according to project Location & in conformance to Uniform Building Code (U. Earthquake Load (Live Load) g. a. use Gh evaluated at the height h (top) of the structure. The longitudinal force shall if not otherwise specified be taken as 10% of the maximum wheel loads of the crane applied at the top of the rail. Category k. For components and cladding. For supports of elevators (dead and live load) 100% m. Each structure and foundation supporting a compressor.) 1997-Division III-Seimic zone Tabulation Section 1653. Page 157 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. the live load increase shall be following: j. trolley beams. f. Apply one-half of the load at the top of each rail acting in either direction normal to the runway rails. the variable gust response factor Gz is used. An exception is in the various structural specifications for equipment. h. Light machinery. Hangers supporting floors and balconies 33% a. crane trolley. Vertical Load Horizontal Load l. use Gz evaluated at centroid height z above ground.C. Live load on crane support girders shall be taken as the maximum wheel loads. b. Crane / Impact Load (Live Load) i. shaft or motor driven 20% r. For structures carrying live loads that induce impact.5044. Increase the sum of the weights of the rated capacity of hoist.co.

y. w. pump or other machinery having significant dynamic unbalance shall be designed to resist the peak loads specified by the manufacturer. Graphite-to-graphite 0. Centrifugal pump foundations for pumps less than 750 kW do not require a dynamic analysis.35 dd. Provisions shall be made for thermal forces arising from assumed differential settlements of foundations and from restrained dimensional changes due to temperature changes. Surface Friction Coefficient cc. Design atmospheric temperature ranges from a minimum of 5 deg C to a maximum of 58 deg C. Steel-to-concrete 0. the temperature drop of 1.08 gg.7 N/mm2 0. aa. In the case of a tall and slender structure.5044. The following friction coefficients shall be used for calculating frictional restraint due to temperature change or lateral loading on sliding surfaces: bb. there may be a need to investigate the dynamic effects of wind gusts. the foundation to pump assembly weight ratio shall not be less than 3 to 1.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h .08 for bearing Stresses from 0. Another source of thermal loads in a redundant structure is the expansion or contraction of the entire structure or individual structural components. x. Foundations for reciprocating machinery. Teflon / PTFE or an approved equal) shall be used if the vessel operating condition weight is greater than 45 kN at the sliding end. o 4093 c d turbine. respectively Bearing stress greater than 0.15 Page 158 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. For preliminary design.co. 0.7 N/mm2. Steel-to-steel (corroded) 0.17 to 0.08 hh. centrifugal machinery and centrifugal pumps over 750 kW require a three dimensional dynamic analysis.9 deg C / mm from the bottom of shell to bottom of saddle may be assumed. Thermal loads and displacements caused by operating conditions shall be based on the design temperature of the item of equipment rather than the operating temperature. Vibration amplitudes of the supporting structure or foundation shall v. However. ASCE 7 mentions thermal loads however.0 N/mm2 to 0. The primary source of thermal loads in an industrial plant is the expansion or contraction of vessels and piping. the ASCE thermal comments are not geared to heavy industrial work. Low friction slide plates (Fluorogold. Thermal loads shall be defined as forces caused by changes in temperature. A straight line variation of 0. be kept within acceptable limits for dynamic forces that occur during normal machine operation.50 ee. Thermal Load (Live Load) z.17 to 0. Teflon-to-teflon ff.

For pipe anchor forces transferred by longitudinal girders to structural anchors (bracing) an arbitrary force of 5% of the total pipe load per layer shall be taken into account unless design calculations dictate a higher force. c. 7 or more 0. Friction Coefficient ll. Number of Lines on Support kk. The erection dead load is the weight of the equipment at time of erection plus the weight of the foundation. For computing friction loads due to the effects of pipe expansion in pipe racks. b.3 mm. rr. if considering only larger lines and ignoring smaller lines results in greater loads. Erection Dead Load a. Anchor and guide forces shall be obtained from the Designers Piping Engineering Department. pp. 1 – 3 0.1 oo. 4 . o 4093 c d ii. All possible loading conditions during erection shall be considered and for any member of a structure. Structural Steel Pipe Supports shall be designed in accordance with Industry Standard Structural Design Methods.5044. These forces and associated friction coefficients shall be used instead of considering all the lines. These forces shall be distributed to the foundations. Heavy equipment lowered onto a supporting structure can introduce extreme Page 159 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. and overburden soil. the most unfavorable be considered. Foundations and structures which are subject to temperature effects shall be designed for the various loading conditions and also for any temperature difference which may occur in parts of structural members. pedestal. qq. b.6 0.2 nn. The foundation weight is the combined weight of the footing. A concrete pipe rack beam shall be designed for an arbitrary horizontal pipe anchor force of 15 kN acting at midspan unless design calculations dictate a higher force and more locations.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . use the following friction coefficients: jj. The pipe anchor force shall not be distributed to the foundations.co. a. For a given support.

manufacturer’s information and allowed for in the design calculations accordingly. walls.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . The force required to remove the tube bundle from a shell and tube heat exchanger shall be assumed to act along the horizontal centerline of the exchanger with a value of 2 times the weight of the bundle but not less than 10 kN. repair or painting of equipment. Blast resilient buildings shall be designed and Page 160 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Outward pressures on liquid retaining structures shall also be considered. the exact positioning (lining out and leveling) can also introduce extreme point loads.5044.co. Earth / Hydrostatic Load and Buoyancy (Live Load) b. fire decks shall be designed to carry the full construction loads imposed by the props supporting the structure immediately above. Earth and hydrostatic water pressures on retaining walls and underground structures shall be determined. Maintenance loads are temporary forces caused by the dismantling. roof. Miscellaneous loads shall be defined as loads that do not fit into the categories listed in this section. Maintenance Loads (Live Load) a. o 4093 c d point loads on structural members exceeding any operating or test load. bracing and connections shall be designed in such a manner that large plastic deformations of the major frame members as well as external wall panels will be allowed to occur without causing partial or total building collapse. Beams and floor slabs in multistory structures e. b. d.g. Blast Load (Live Load) Negligible Blast Buildings located more than 610 m away from the potential explosive sources do not require special provisions with regard to explosion resistance. The buoyancy load is equal to the weight of the volume of displaced water. Miscellaneous Loads (Live Load) a. The above should be interpreted on the basis of contractor’s practical experience. The building structural frame. Blast Resilient Buildings within the 200 m to 610 m distance from potential explosive sources shall be designed to the same loading conditions as specified for buildings beyond the 610 m zone and in accordance with the following design concepts: 1. After placing of equipment. A note shall be added on the relevant construction drawings to inform the field engineer of the adopted design philosophy.

For steel structures. Blast loads on the roof slab is dependent on the span between supports.co. 7. 3. Loose lightweight concrete roof slabs or asbestos cement sheeting shall not be used. Materials with a brittle behavior such as masonry shall not be used in such a way that provides strength. refer to Specification for Architectural Design Basis (Not included) Blast Resistant Buildings within 200 m distance from the potential explosive sources may be designed to withstand the anticipated blast effect. 2. For additional architectural construction requirements. o 4093 c d detailed in accordance with ACI 318. The calculated blast loads shall not be less than the following equivalent static loads acting inward or outward perpendicular to the surface: 1.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h .  50 kN/m2 for span of 3m  45 kN/m2 for span of 4m  40 N/m2 for span of 5m  35 kN/m2 for span of 6m  30 kN/m2 for span of 7m  25 kN/m2 for span of 8m and over Page 161 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. 5. The building frame shall comprise of reinforced concrete or structural steel. 6. External Walls 100 kN/m2 except loads on doors and windows which may be assumed to be 30 kN/m2. The building roofs shall be constructed of monolithic reinforced concrete or a properly designed carbon steel roofing system. The blast loads or pressures to be used for the design of various structural elements shall be calculated in accordance with an acceptable method taking into account the dynamic response. Chapter 21. 2. 4. Gravel as a protection of roofing finish or loose tiles for walkways on top of the roof finish shall not be used. reinforced masonry with concrete filled cells or properly designed carbon steel cladding system. The building walls shall be constructed as reinforced concrete.5044. “Special Provisions for Seismic Design”. structural steel bracing in roof and walls shall be provided. Walls for these buildings shall not be used as mainframe members or to provide structural stability and / or structural strength.

Maximum spacing of bars shall be 150 mm center to center. structures and members of structures as well as their support and fixing points shall be designed for various loading combinations given in the following tables: Load Description Abbr.6% in the case of steel bars with a yield strength of 410 N/mm2 and a minimum elongation of 14%. the roof and not in combination with above-mentioned loads. Page 162 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. a distribution reinforcement of at least 20% of that in the main direction shall be applied. Shear reinforcement shall be applied in beams only being a combination of stirrups and horizontal sidebars: web reinforcement. special attention shall be paid to ensure continuity and a minimum of local stress concentration. These loads act with applicable dead loads. Structures shall be detailed in accordance to ACI 318.5044. When the actual shear stress (V) is less than 1. Future Load (Dead or Live Loads) Future loads including pipe rack extensions and building expansions shall be considered when so directed by the Company. Pre-stressed concrete shall not be used. Chapter 21 “Special Provisions for Seismic Design”.5 N/mm2 (Vc2): web reinforcement shall be required for (V-Vc1) N/mm 2. Suction on walls and roof shall be 50% of the above-mentioned static loads and it is to be assumed that these loads will act simultaneously on one wall. Load Combinations Piles.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Adequate lapping of reinforcement is required. It is preferable for the wall and roof thicknesses to be between the limits of 250 and 400 mm in order to facilitate the placing of the required reinforcing bars.co.3 N/mm 2 (Vc1) but less than 4. In the other direction on both sides. When the actual shear stress (V) is more than 1. Chapter 21 for Blast Resistant structures: The concrete walls and slabs shall be reinforced each side in the main direction with a minimum of 0. o 4093 c d It is to be assumed that the blast loads will act simultaneously on and over one wall and the roof. Wind or earthquake loads shall not be combined with blast loads. In general. The following provisions shall supersede ACI 318.3 N/mm 2 (Vc1): no web reinforcement is required. Where: V = Actual shear stress Vc1 = Concrete shear stress lower limit Vc2 = Concrete shear stress upper limit At least 50% of the bottom main reinforcement shall extend over the face of the support providing a good anchorage between the supports.

3 for this loading condition. Concrete bund walls shall be designed for accidental load condition when the bund is completely filled with water to the crest.5044. Load Combinations A through G: Primary Operation Test Erection Earthquake Maintenance Blast Loads without wind with wind ABCDEFG DL x x x x x X x DLempty x x1 x x x X x Test x LL x x x x x X Crane x x x X LLop x x 1 x LLmove x x x X WL x x 3.co. The factor of safety shall not be less than 1.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . o 4093 c d Weight of Structure DL Empty Weight of Vessels and Equipment DLempty Operating Load LLop Hydrostatic Test Load Test Live Load LL Moving / Truck Load LLmove Wind Load WL Earthquake Load EQ N/A Crane / Impact Load CR Dynamic Load DY Thermal Load TL Erection Load ER Maintenance Load ML Differential Settlement DS Earth / Water Pressure HY Blast Load BL Loads shall be combined as specified below.4 x 4 EQ N/A DY x x x2 X TL x x X ER x Page 163 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Only the hydrostatic fluid acting in the outward direction and gravity loading need to be considered.

4. o 4093 c d ML x DS x x x X x HY x x x x X x BL x 1. they shall be zero.co.0.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . due regard shall be given to the different load factors for the various load combinations and the adverse or beneficial effects of the basic load cases. Upon the approval of Company. higher strength concrete may be used. Reinforcing Steel Requirement to prevent ‘stray current corrosion’ of steel in concrete (due to Page 164 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Cast-in-Place or situ Concrete Cast-in-Place or situ Concrete shall have a minimum compressive strength in accordance with Specification for Concrete Supply. 6. When considering these effects. Blast condition shall be taken into account for the blast resistant design of buildings where applicable.5044. the actual projected area of the scaffold members together with the correct shape factor and drag coefficient should be used. The effect of wind forces acting on temporary scaffolding erected during construction or later for maintenance which will be transferred to the vessel or column shall be considered. In the ultimate limit state design. Where imposed loads (live loads) have a beneficial effect.5 m on each side of the vessel or column with 50% closed surface and shape factor 1. Only if the structure supports rotating equipment that will be in operation while a vessel is being tested with water. As an initial approximation. Structural steel shapes and plates shall conform to ASTM A36 or to BS 4 or BS 4848 or BS EN 10025. 3. fabricating and erecting structural steel and miscellaneous steel shall be in accordance with Design General Specifications. Precast concrete shall be carried out only with approval of Company. 5. Only 50% wind load shall be taken into account. The most unfavorable load combination shall be taken into account. 2. Structural Materials The general types of material to be used are defined below :  Structural Steel  The furnishing. the overall width of the scaffolding itself can be taken as 1.

When determining allowable mortar stress. Concrete Masonry Mortar shall be Type M mortar (f’c = 17. ASTM A193 Grade B-7 shall be used. The grating size and method of attachment shall be indicated in the project specifications.  Paint (only) for these high strength bolts may be used upon approval of the Designer.  Welded wire fabric shall conform to BS 4848. Grating and fixing material (clips) shall be hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123 and A143. The electrode material shall be E70XX.  Welding shall conform to the AWS D1. o 4093 c d implementation of impressed current Cathodic Protection to the nearby underground installation) is to be in accordance with Specification– Material Selection and Corrosion Monitoring Philosophy  Reinforcing steel shall conform to BS 4449 Grade 460. Anchor Bolts Anchor bolts shall conform to ASTM A36. In special cases where A36 anchor bolts are not sufficient.5044.  Reinforcing is not required to be electrically continuous for any future cathodic protection of concrete structures.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h .1. Bolts The following bolts shall be used for all connections unless higher strength bolts are required and noted on the drawings: Bolts 20 mm and larger shall be high strength Page 165 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo.3 N / mm2) conforming to ASTM C270.3 N/mm2) conforming to ASTM C9O. Plate material shall conform to ASTM A36.1. All welding electrodes shall meet filler metal requirements given in AWS D1. Minimum size bolts for structural columns and typical equipment shall be 20 mm. Anchor bolts shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123 and ASTM 143.  Concrete blocks shall be Grade A. hollow-unit concrete blocks (f’c = 9. 16 mm bolts may be used for small pumps and handrails.  Handrail  All handrail shall conform to ASTM A36. Epoxy coatings shall not be used. Floor Plate Chequered floor plate shall be four-way raised pattern steel plate with a thickness of 10 mm. Grating Grating shall conform to ASTM A569 or BS 4592.  Reinforcing steel shall conform to BS 4449 Grade 460.co. Epoxy coating shall not be applicable where Cathodic Protection CP is provided. assume no inspection.

co. Masonry The allowable stresses specified in ACI 530 and UBC shall be used for masonry design. Contractor is to develop a detail which effectively seals the junction of embedded items and concrete for Company approval. Bolts 16 mm and smaller shall be in accordance with ASTM A307. Anchorage of low temperature equipment (-50C) on steel structures shall use ASTM A320. Permissible bearing stress under base plates shall be as given in ACI 318 Code. concrete and masonry shall apply for all design with the following exceptions: The increase in allowable stresses for all structural elements and their Page 166 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. 2. bolt size shall be as follows:  For main members: 20 mm (min)  For railings and ladders: 16 mm (refer to applicable standards)  For ladder cages: 12 mm (refer to applicable standards)  For stair treads: 8 mm (refer to applicable standards)  High strength bolts shall be installed in accordance with AISC. Neither probability factors nor allowable stress increases shall be used for anchor bolt design. Unless noted otherwise on the drawing. Allowable Stresses Structural Steel Allowable stresses specified in AISC specifications shall be used for the design of structural steel. The allowable stress for anchor bolt shall conform to AISC and ACI Specifications. The calculated bolt diameter required to resist specified design loads shall be increased 3 mm to provide an allowance for corrosion.L7 bolts.5044. o 4093 c d ASTM A325M or A490M. Anchor Bolts and Base Plate Bearing 1.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Stress Increase The allowable stresses specified in the applicable codes given above for structural steel. Grouting All grout materials and application procedures shall be used in accordance with Specification for Grouting. Embedded Items All embedded items shall be ASTM A36 material and be hot-dip galvanized. Cast-in-Place Concrete The allowable stresses specified in ACI 318M shall be used in the design of concrete.

The functional requirements of the structure may impose stricter limits. equipment or building components and support deflections. etc. Systems should be reviewed for possible incompatible deflection behavior in piping.5044.co. o 4093 c d connections: 20% .if equipment supported H / 200 H = Height . pipe racks. Beam Deflections (Based on Live Loads Only) Maximum allowable deflection for beams supporting floor systems and equipment shall be as follows: Max deflection = L / 500 L = Span Maximum allowable deflection for beams supporting brittle finishes such as plaster ceilings shall be as follows: Max deflection = L / 360 L = Span Maximum allowable deflection for purlins supporting roof system shall be as follows Max deflection = L / 400 L = Span Maximum allowable deflection for cantilever beams shall be as follows: Max deflection = L / 400 L = Overhang Length Maximum allowable deflection for beams supporting steel platforms.Test without Wind Load 33% .uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h .If equipment not supported Maximum allowable sway for pipe racks shall be as follows: Max deflection = H / 200 H = Height Page 167 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Max deflection = L / 300 L = Span Crane Runways Max deflection = L / 300 L = Span Overhead Traveling Max deflection = L / 600 L = Span Monorails Max deflection = L / 400 L = Span Lateral Sway Maximum allowable sway of buildings or structures shall be as follows: Max deflection = H / 300 H = Height . staircases.Including Wind Test Load Factor for Concrete Design Deflection and Vibration Allowable Deflections The following sections give normally permissible deflection limits for steel and concrete structures.

none of the natural frequencies of the structure should be within a band of the operating frequency of the supported machinery.5 times the operating frequency are within the allowable values even assuming that. structures or services. a computer analysis shall be required. 2 As a general rule. o 4093 c d Maximum allowable deflection for wall stanchions shall be as follows: Max deflection = H / 300 H = Height h = height of story or height of structure These limits apply to sway between stories and to the structure as a whole. 6 The maximum vibration amplitude of the equipment shall not exceed the lower of the following values: a. modifications may be made.co. The response analysis will indicate anticipated amplitudes of vibration. 5 Resonance condition requires a detailed three dimensional dynamic analysis. Grating = L / 250 (Maximum span 1. 4 It shall be demonstrated that the amplitudes at the natural frequencies between 0.5044. velocity. The band recommended to be avoided is 1. b. and acceleration as well as magnitudes of forces in structural members. The final design should be such that vibrations will be neither intolerable nor troublesome to personnel and not cause damage to the machine or structure or adjacent foundations.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Once a model analysis has been conducted. 3 All natural frequencies below 2 times the operating frequency for reciprocating equipment and below 1. From the above information.35 and 1. due to differences between the actual structure and the assumed model. To find structural natural frequencies.6 meter) Vibration Superstructure Vibration 1 The primary source of vibration in superstructures is harmonic unbalanced forces generated by rotating or reciprocating equipment.707 below operating frequency.5 times the operating frequency for rotating equipment shall be calculated. The amplitude (single amplitude) which causes the effective velocity of vibration to exceed: 2 mm / s at the location of the machine bearing housings Page 168 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. The maximum allowable values stated by the manufacturer of the equipment. a harmonic response analysis shall be performed. In this case a reasonable amount of damping should be estimated. the adequacy of the design can be evaluated and if necessary. resonance does occur.414 above operating frequency and 0.

3 The primary differences are that these foundations are often rigid blocks and that soil behavior must be considered. 4 The dynamic amplitudes of any part of the foundation including any reciprocating compressor shall be less than 80 µm (80 x 10^-3 mm) single amplitude. Foundation Vibration The Designer shall determine which vibrating equipment is to be analyzed by dynamic analysis. The effective velocity is defined as the square root of the average of the square of the velocity. o 4093 c d c. machine information.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . dynamic analysis aids. a computer analysis should be utilized along with the concept of elastic half-space theory. For flexible foundations or foundations with many machines. centrifugal machinery and centrifugal pumps 750 kW or over. the exciting forces shall be taken as the maximum values that according to the Manufacturer of the equipment will occur during the lifetime of the equipment. example solutions. 2 Generally the same considerations for superstructure vibration also apply to foundation vibration. When the exciting force is not given by the Manufacturer.co. Foundation vibration generally involves a grade foundation designed to support one or more reciprocating or rotating machines.71 times the peak value of the velocity. In the case of a pure sinusoidal function the effective velocity is 0. velocity being a function of time. Dynamic Analysis 1 For foundations for reciprocating machinery. 2. published response criteria. a three dimensional dynamic analysis must be performed. The depth of a steel beam supporting large open floor areas free of partitions or other sources of damping should not be less than 1/20 of the span to minimize perceptible transient vibration due to pedestrian traffic. soil information.5044.5 mm / s at any location of the structure The dynamic amplitude of any part of the foundation including any reciprocating compressor shall be less than 80 µm single amplitude (80 x 10^-3mm). and a comprehensive list of references. Rigid foundations supporting only one major machine can readily be analyzed using hand calculations and the concept of elastic half-space theory. it shall be determined from Q(kN) = [Rotor Speed (rpm)/6000] x Rotor Weight (kN) 5 The dynamic calculations shall be based on a mechanical model wherein the weights and elasticity of both structure as well as foundation and the weight of Page 169 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. For the dynamic analysis. The Designer shall prepare an instruction for foundation vibration analysis which contains current state-of-the-art approaches.

The natural frequency of the supporting structure shall not coincide with any resonant frequency of the equipment. due to differences between the actual structure and the assumed model.5044. In this case. o 4093 c d 6 7 8 9 10 the equipment to be represented in an appropriate way. (equipment weight less than 5000 kN). dry surfaced 0. The static deformation for rotating equipment foundations shall be calculated and shown to be within the limits stated by the Manufacturer of the equipment. resonance does occur. In the design of equipment foundations subject to vibratory loading where dynamic analysis is not performed. Structures. Layout and Drawing Coefficients of Static Friction Coefficients of static friction for various material combinations are listed as follows: Steel to steel Smooth.35 and 1. and ducting. Elastic deformation caused by soil settlement. It shall be demonstrated that the amplitude of the natural frequencies between 0. Shrinkage and creep of concrete. the mass ratio concept is commonly used.5 times the operating frequency for rotating equipment shall be calculated. Platforms and Supports shall be in a accordance with the table in Specification for Design. piping. Elastic deformation caused by changing vapor pressure in condensers. foundations shall be proportioned as indicated below: Rotating equipment mass ratio = weight of concrete / weight of machine > 3 Reciprocating equipment mass ratio = weight of concrete / weight of machine > 6 Miscellaneous Design Data Clearances and accessibility Minimum clearances for Equipment. a reasonable amount of damping should be estimated. Temperature effects caused by radiation and convection of heat or cold generated by machinery.5 times the operating frequency are within the allowable values even assuming that. All natural frequencies below 2 times the operating frequency for reciprocating equipment and below 1.3 Page 170 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. The calculations shall include but not be limited to the following causes of deformation. Non-Dynamic Analysis For installations that do not warrant a dynamic analysis.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h .co.

The manual shall contain the following information: Design Basis A brief description of the basis of design of all foundations. fine to medium sand 0. coarse sand 0. silty or clay gravel 0.45 Clean fine sand. structures and buildings.30 Very stiff and hard residual or pre-consolidated clay 0. gravel-sand mixtures. nonplastic silt 0. Routine forms for inspection are to be established. o 4093 c d Oxidizing steel 0.40 Medium stiff and stiff clay and silty clay 0.30 Membrane sheet 0.5 Steel to concrete or grout 0.7 Clean gravel.20 Engineering Maintenance Manual The Designer shall prepare a detailed maintenance manual for use by the operators.5 Fluorogold.55 Clean fine to medium sand.co. Teflon / PTFE and other similar materials as per Manufacturer's recommendations Concrete to foundation materials Clean sound rock 0. Inspection Recommendations for the routine inspection of works to enable the early detection of potentially dangerous deterioration including guidelines regarding the symptoms to be looked for such as locations and types of cracking which could be found in reinforced concrete structures etc. painting details etc. steel grades. silty medium to coarse sand. Materials A detailed listing of all materials used (both generic types and Manufacturers' details) in the works including concrete mix constituents.5044. concrete surface coatings. silty or clayey. Maintenance and Repair Procedures Page 171 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. to enable the Company to obtain compatible materials for future maintenance.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . including reference to the detailed calculations for each to enable them to be retrieved if necessary.35 Fine sandy silt.

new tanks and critical foundations shall be required to be monitored for future maintenance. 3. List of tanks and critical foundations / structures proposed for monitoring. The Contractor is required to provide the following: 1. Page 172 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Permanent bench marks to allow for future check surveys. cracking of small foundations plinths due to reinforcement corrosion etc. shall be developed by the Company. 5. o 4093 c d Details of recommended repair procedures for common types of failure such as breakdown or mechanical damage to concrete surface coatings.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Operational Requirements Concrete asset management system (CAMS) In view of the continuous deterioration of reinforced concrete structures in plants. A computerized form filled with the first readings of the monitoring points surveyed at the completion of the Project.5044. if any. 4. As a result of this ongoing program. Corrosion monitoring system for critical concrete structures Some critical concrete structures due to operational requirements cannot be shut down for inspection. Monitoring devices (non-corrosive material) embedded in the concrete foundations and fixed on the tanks as required. a computerized database system shall be developed by the Company to carry out periodical inspections and monitor the evaluation of disorder. rotating equipment foundations etc. A new technology exists which allows for installation of metal sensors into concrete structures in order to monitor the corrosion risk at regular intervals.co. 2. Data related to new structures / foundations is required to be entered by the Contractor in the system in accordance with the existing procedure. Plot plans showing locations of the monitoring points and the permanent bench marks. Existing settlement check survey program An existing computerized monitoring system for tanks and critical foundations carrying large loads. Finishing Material Manual Additional list of all finishing materials used in the project buildings including material catalogs and sources to enable the Company to obtain such material or equal for future maintenance. In this way protective measures can be taken before excessive damage occurs and without the need of a shutdown for inspection.

The clear height of room from finished floor level to finished ceiling levels shall be minimum 3500mm. The corridors connecting the rooms within the buildings shall be wide enough to allow possible movement of equipment. Contractor shall design all buildings to adequate dimensions (lengths.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . quantities and units of measurement shown on drawings or used in specifications and calculation sketches shall be given in metric units except pipe size which shall be given in the English units of inches. The space between equipment and walls shall be wide enough for a technician to walk around with tools. However the following minimum criteria shall be followed. The internal doors shall be 1100mm wide x 2100mm high. Below ground culverts 2. Units Of Measurement All dimensions. Outfall structures 3. instruments. The external doors of the building shall be minimum 2400mm wide x 3000mm high plus a 300mm transom. etc. Contractor then is responsible to install the agreed system to structures. Below ground tanks such as sulfur pits 5. Contractor shall follow the requirement of space between equipment and walls as per Company / Client Electrical Specification All Civil/Buildings works shall be of construction type as indicated below. Pump Pits (Sub-Structure) shall be of reinforced concrete complete with impressed current cathodic protection Receiving Basin shall be of reinforced concrete complete with impressed current cathodic protection Outfall Structure shall be of reinforced concrete complete with impressed current Page 173 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Brine tanks 4. (Refer to Company / Client Electrical Specification) and carry out the necessary inspection/maintenance works.5044. Refer to “Basic Engineering Design Data”. widths and heights) to accommodate the necessary requirements inside. Reinforced concrete or pre-stressed pipes Contractor is required to propose to Company the corrosion monitoring system to be used and to propose to Company the critical structures which should be equipped with the system. o 4093 c d The following structures are given as an example of the types of structures to consider for installation of the sensors: 1. The HVAC system shall be Direct Expansion (DX) Split System ducted and adequately sized for the heat load inside the buildings.co.

complete with translucent sheets and lightning protection. Contractor to design all LLCC’s for Phases and to construct only Phase LLCC’s. including cathodic protection to the reinforcement. Control Building (Extension) . Operation Building . o 4093 c d cathodic protection Discharge Channel shall be of reinforced concrete complete with impressed current cathodic protection. Transformer Pens – Transformers shall be supported on reinforced concrete foundations in a room having two sides as a minimum covered with firewalls and front side with fence provided with gates. extra cover to the reinforcement. VSDS Substation for PH. VSDS Substation for PH. Workshop Building .Reinforced concrete frame with block work panels. water proofing system. Contractor shall allow for 3m high perimeter block wall and panels for offices and other rooms. Corrosion Inhibitor shall Page 174 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo.Reinforced concrete frame with block work panels. 220 kv GIS Building – Reinforced concrete frame with block work panels. Electro-chlorination and Electrical Switchgear Building -Reinforced concrete with block work panel and storage area shall be structural steel framing and metallic roofing and siding complete with protection against lightning. Local Lot Control Buildings .uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . All concrete exposed to seawater or saline ground water shall be provided with additional protection as appropriate.Reinforced concrete frame with block work panels.Reinforced concrete frame with block work panels.5044. Bottom slab of discharge channel shall be constructed with reinforced concrete.Reinforced concrete frame with block work panels.Reinforced concrete frames with block work panels.Reinforced concrete frame with block work panels. 33kv Electrical Switch Gear Building for PH. Top of transformer pen has to be covered with metal sheeting.Structural framing with metallic roofing complete with translucent sheets and lightning protection. Foundation for Analyser houses. Gate Houses .co. Metal sheeting shall be protected with lightning protection rods to avoid puncturing.Structural framing with metallic roofing. Electro chlorination building shall be fully covered structure steel building with metal sheeting and provided with transulent sheet for lighting. Warehouse/Workshop Building . Contractor shall allow for 3m high perimeter block wall and panels for offices and other rooms. Pump Houses -steel frames with profiled metal sheet cladding with hot rolled steel section for all structural members. use of admixtures in the concrete and protective paint on the surface of the concrete.

Battery room twin fans shall be eexcl IIC. The fan shall have a minimum of 2 belts each. Electric heating coils and steam humidification sections shall be provided in the AHU’s. discharge channel. Adequately sized hinged access doors shall be provided to access each section of the AHU / CU.5044. pantry and Battery room exhaust. The list of required buildings and their conceptual drawings with finishing material schedule are provided. The fan shall be of 100 % capacity. The duty / standby condensing units shall be located on operation building roof. Treated air shall be supplied by 100 % capacity duty / standby air handling units mixing fresh air and re-circulating air. corrosion inhibitor and the course aggregate shall be of Gabro type. outfall structure and to all structure foundations within water table or and below ± 0. Contractor shall import rock for outfall structure. Twin duty / standby auto changeover fans shall be used for toilets. non sparking type. Contractor shall examine the drawings in detail and shall modify the drawings as necessary to accommodate final equipment selection and operational requirement. These building drawings are conceptual and have been developed based on preliminary building requirements and equipment sizing developed during the Front End Engineering Design. The quarry shall be subject to Company / Client approval. The specification for DX Condensing Units / AHU's shall be as per the Company / Client specification and other standards. Receiving Basins. Each AHU shall have a centrifugal fan chamber with back draft and volume control / shut off dampers. o 4093 c d be added to the structural concrete mix at the minimum rate of 10 lt / m3 for Pump Pits. HVAC and Plumbing HVAC Sample Only HVAC system design and sizing shall be by Contractor in accordance with Project Specifications and all auxiliary systems and equipment shall be provided by Contractor. Air Handling units shall be located in HVAC plant room. T6. microsilica.0m NHD.co. In the Page 175 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Material Specifications The selection of material is based on Project Specifications and any deviations shall be subject to Company / Client's approval. Operation building HVAC System The operation building shall be air conditioned by duty / standby Direct Expansion (DX) split units to ensure 100% redundancy. Concrete as Specified in project specification shall have fly ash.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h .

VSDS Substation Building PH and 33 kv Electrical Switchgear building shall be air conditioned by independent HVAC system for each building. All fresh air intakes shall have sand trap louvers / Prefilters and motorised shut off dampers.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Each sub building shall be air conditioned by duty / standby Direct Expansion (DX) split units to ensure 100% redundancy.co. Twin duty / standby auto-change over fans shall be used for Battery room exhaust. Twin duty / standby auto-change over fans shall be used for Battery room exhaust. In the battery room loss of both fans shall inhibit boost charging of batteries. The specification for DX Condensing Units / AHU’s shall be as per the Company / Client specification and other standards. Air Handling units shall be located in HVAC plant room. T6. The fan shall be of 100 % capacity. The VSDS Substation Building PH. In the battery room loss of both fans shall inhibit boost charging of batteries. The fan shall be of 100 % capacity. Adequately sized hinged access doors shall be provided to access each section of the AHU / CU. Treated air shall be supplied by 100 % capacity duty / standby air handling units mixing fresh air and re-circulating air. Electro Chlorination Building HVAC System. T6. Each building shall be air conditioned by duty / standby Direct Expansion (DX) split units to ensure 100% redundancy. Air Handling units shall be located in HVAC plant room. non-sparking type. The duty / standby condensing units shall be located on respective building roof. The fan shall have a minimum of 2 belts each. Page 176 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo.5044. The fan shall have a minimum of 2 belts each. PH and 33 Kv switchgear Building HVAC system. Battery room twin fans shall be eexd IIC. o 4093 c d battery room loss of both fans shall inhibit boost charging of batteries. All fresh air intakes shall have sand trap louvers / Prefilters and motorised shut off dampers. Each AHU shall have a centrifugal fan chamber with back draft and volume control / shut off dampers. Battery room twin fans shall be eexd IIC. Electric heating coils and steam humidification sections shall be provided in the AHU’s. The specification for DX Condensing Units / AHUSs shall be as per the Company/Client specification and other standards. The duty / standby condensing units shall be located on electro chlorination building roof. The exhaust air outlet shall be fitted with weather louver. The exhaust air outlet shall be fitted with weather louver. Each AHU shall have a centrifugal fan chamber with back draft and volume control / shut off dampers. non-sparking type. Electric heating coils and steam humidification sections shall be provided in the AHU’s. Treated air shall be supplied by 100 % capacity duty / standby air handling units mixing fresh air and re-circulating air.VSDS Substation building PH. Adequately sized hinged access doors shall be provided to access each section of the AHU / CU. The chlorination cells building and electrical substation building within Electro Chlorination Building shall be air conditioned by independent HVAC systems.

Each AHU shall have a centrifugal fan chamber with back draft and volume control / shut off dampers. Treated air shall be supplied by 100 % capacity duty / standby air handling units mixing fresh air and re-circulating air. T6. Electric heating coils and steam humidification sections shall be provided in the AHU’s. Page 177 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. For Construction of the Control Room Extension. Air Handling units shall be located in HVAC plant room.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h .co. The Local Lot Control Centres Buildings shall be air conditioned independently by duty / standby Direct Expansion (DX) split units to ensure 100% redundancy. The exhaust air outlet shall be fitted with weather louver. Adequately sized hinged access doors shall be provided to access each section of the AHU / CU. The duty / standby condensing units shall be located on control building (extension) roof. the existing HVAC condensing units shall be either relocated and connected to Ground floor existing AHU’s or secured to allow the construction of First floor works without any disturbance to the function of ground floor HVAC system.5044. Local Lot Control centres HVAC System. The control building (extension) shall be air conditioned independently by duty / standby Direct Expansion (DX) split units to ensure 100% redundancy. Air Handling units shall be located in HVAC plant room. The exhaust air outlet shall be fitted with weather louver. The specification for DX Condensing Units / AHU’s shall be as per the Company / Client specification and other standards. Twin duty / standby autochange over fans shall be used for toilets. o 4093 c d All fresh air intakes shall have sand trap louvers / Prefilters and motorised shut off dampers. The conversion of existing two rooms in to Laboratory in existing control room is foreseen during the FEED design. The fan shall have a minimum of 2 belts each. Treated air shall be supplied by 100 % capacity duty / standby air handling units mixing fresh air and recirculating air. Upon completion of first floor construction the new condensing units for existing ground floor along with first floor shall be installed on the first floor roof and connected to the respective AHU’s. All fresh air intakes shall have sand trap louvers / Pre-filters and motorised shut off dampers. pantry and Battery room exhaust. The fan shall be of 100 % capacity. Contractor shall re-balance the complete Existing HVAC system for Ground Floor to accommodate the ventilation and cooling requirement of laboratories. The duty / standby condensing units shall be located on respective building roof. non-sparking type. Battery room twin fans shall be eexd IIC. Control building (extension) HVAC System. In the battery room loss of both fans shall inhibit boost charging of batteries.

Twin duty / standby auto-change over fans shall be used for Chemical / sensitive materials store (s) Pantry and Toilets room exhaust. The specification for Package Units / AHU’s shall be as per the Company / Client specification and other standards. Workshop area shall be ventilated by 100 % capacity duty / standby exhaust fans Page 178 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Adequately sized hinged access doors shall be provided to access each section of the Package unit. Workshop / Warehouse building HVAC System All Offices and Electrical room in workshop / warehouse building shall be treated with wall mounted split units.co. Wall opening at low level shall be with sand trap louvers and G4 pre filters. The fan shall have a minimum of 2 belts each. Twin duty / standby auto-change over fan shall be used for Battery room exhaust. The Package unit supply air fan shall be of 100 % capacity. The duty / standby Package units shall be located outside workshop / warehouse building on ground. Battery room twin fans shall be eexd IIC. T6. In the battery room loss of both fans shall inhibit boost charging of batteries. non-sparking type.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Air-cooled condensing units shall be located on external walls. Vendors’ standard Indoor units shall be suitable for wall mounting.5044. The AHU fan shall be of 100 % capacity. Electric heating coils and steam humidification sections shall be provided in the AHU’s. T6. Adequately sized hinged access doors shall be provided to access each section of the AHU / CU. Chemical / sensitive materials store (s) twin fans shall be eexd IIC. o 4093 c d The specification for DX Condensing Units / AHU’s shall be as per the Company / Client specification and other standards. non-sparking type. Warehouse storage area for Mechanical items and Electrical Cables shall be ventilated by 100 % capacity duty / standby exhaust fans installed on roof and air intake through wall opening at low levels. All fresh air intakes shall have sand trap louvers / Prefilters and motorised shut off dampers. Chemical / sensitive materials store (s) within warehouse shall be air conditioned independently by duty / standby Direct Expansion (DX) Package units to ensure 100% redundancy. Each Package unit shall have a centrifugal fan chamber with backdraft and volume control / shut off dampers. Electric heating coils and steam humidification sections shall be provided in the Package units air handling section. Total 100 % treated fresh air shall be supplied by 100 % capacity duty / standby Package units. The fan shall have a minimum of 2 belts each. Each AHU shall have a centrifugal fan chamber with backdraft and volume control / shut off dampers. The exhaust air outlet shall be fitted with weather louver.

Adequately sized hinged access doors shall be provided to access each section of the AHU / CU. Vendors’ standard Indoor units shall be suitable for wall mounting. Each AHU shall have a centrifugal fan chamber with backdraft and volume control / shut off dampers. Air Handling units shall be located in HVAC plant room. instrument workshop. Twin duty / standby auto-change over fan shall be used for Toilets. Wall opening at low level shall be with sand trap louvers and G4 pre filters. The duty / standby condensing units shall be located outside workshop building on ground. HVAC room and corridor shall be air conditioned independently by duty / standby Direct Expansion (DX) split units to ensure 100% redundancy. Electric heating coils and steam humidification sections shall be provided in the AHU’s. All fresh air intakes shall have sand trap louvers / Prefilters and motorised shut off dampers. Treated air shall be supplied by 100 % capacity duty / standby air handling units mixing fresh air and re-circulating air.co. Treated air shall be supplied by 100 % capacity duty / standby air handling units mixing fresh air and recirculating air. tool room. 220 kv switchgear and control buildings HVAC System The 220 kv Switchgear and Control building shall be air conditioned by independent HVAC system for each building. electrical workshop.e Four 50 % capacity fans) installed on roof and air intake through wall opening at low levels. Workshop area shall be ventilated by 100 % capacity duty / standby exhaust fans (i. spares parts room. The specification for DX Condensing Units / AHU’s shall be as per the Company / Client specification and other standards. Air-cooled condensing units shall be located on external walls or on gate house roof. Gate house HVAC System Gate House Building (s) offices shall be air conditioned with cassette type ceiling mounted split units. Pantry rooms and Locker rooms exhaust. Wall opening at low level shall be with sand trap louvers and G4 pre filters. Workshop building HVAC System Offices area within workshop building including electrical room. Each building shall be air conditioned by duty / standby Direct Expansion (DX) split units to ensure 100% redundancy. The AHU fan shall be of 100 % capacity.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . The duty / Page 179 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. o 4093 c d installed on roof and air intake through wall opening at low levels. Twin duty / standby auto-change over fans shall be used for Toilet exhaust. The fan shall have a minimum of 2 belts each. Air Handling units shall be located in HVAC plant room. The exhaust air outlet shall be fitted with weather louver.5044.

All fresh air intakes shall have sand trap louvers / Prefilters and motorised shut off dampers. The Battery room chemical waste sewer shall be provided with floor drain and be piped to a local storage system for truck removal.co. furnish. supply and installation of eyewash. non-sparking type. Each AHU shall have a centrifugal fan chamber with backdraft and volume control / shut off dampers. o 4093 c d standby condensing units shall be located on respective building roof. However. In the battery room loss of both fans shall inhibit boost charging of batteries. Twin duty / standby auto-change over fans shall be used for Battery room exhaust.5044. cutting for road / utility crossings for cooling water pipe work. The fan shall be of 100 % capacity. is acceptable Page 180 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Plumbing facilities including number of equipment and fixtures. The fan shall have a minimum of 2 belts each. These plumbing drawings are conceptual and have been developed based on preliminary building requirements and sizing developed during the Front End Engineering Design. T6. Electric heating coils and steam humidification sections shall be provided in the AHU’s. Contractor shall allow for the design. The exhaust air outlet shall be fitted with weather louver.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Adequately sized hinged access doors shall be provided to access each section of the AHU / CU. Contractor shall examine the drawings in detail and modify the drawings as necessary to accommodate final sanitary equipment selection and operational requirement. and their capacities shall be developed by Contractor in accordance with Project Specification. Plumbing For all Buildings Contractor shall design. install and place in satisfactory operation a chemical waste sewer system with utilities for wash down of the Battery room. Roads In principle no road cutting is allowed in the State. complete with plumbing and drainage works for all Battery rooms and electro-chlorination area. identified within the Scope of Work. Battery room twin fans shall be eexd IIC. The specification for DX Condensing Units / AHU’s shall be as per the Company / Client specification and other standards. The list of required buildings and their conceptual drawings with plumbing arrangement are provided.

Also note that 5. Marking road edges. For consumer utility crossing involving any combination shall be designed and built by Contractor. Rising pipes should be installed on structural steel pipe racks. The water can be re-routed to the sea.co. so as not to disrupt traffic at any time. warehouse area. Road and utility crossing by indicated approximate sizes and elevation to NHD shall be prepared by Contractor. bridges. Overhead steel pipe to be painted with sign warning and clearance.5m minimum clearance is required between roads whether existing or / and new and bottom of structures supporting pipes in utility crossings. all building and equipment areas should be accessible. including temporary facilities. For all other crossings.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . traffic signs & information in both local language and English Handling Devices Structures. construction camp. road marking. Road design and construction shall be according to National Highway Design. All pipe crossings for existing roads and corridors shall be made through micro tunneling or cut & cover method depending on the availability of the micro tunneling equipment. Flush kerb-stones shall be allowed for at change of road construction and change of road direction. In case of heavy rainfall. Contractor shall design all the pipe bridges and utility crossings required for Page 181 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Considerations for final grading and surface drainage shall allow excess water to flow into open drainage and shall include the following: The open ditch system should be connected to the storm water basin. Contractor shall design and construct road crossings by way of horizontal drilling without cutting the main asphalted road and without disturbing the traffic. For these crossings. change of road direction and along embankments such as ramps. o 4093 c d to Company / Client. bottom slab and sofit of top slab and pipe shall be 600mm. Minimum requirement of clearance between walls. procure and construct approved road diversions. other areas as necessary to be paved. Crash barriers along culvert. Road markings / road signs to be provided in both local language and English. Contractor to design. site offices for Company / Client and Contractor. Parking.5044. Contractor shall reinstate roads / tracks / ground to its original specification / condition. Road levels shall be higher than the adjacent graded level (as a minimum 500mm above FGL) Detailed engineering should be developed by the Contractor for the following: Construction lay down. Access road to Company/Client site offices shall be asphalted. Roads.

co. o 4093 c d Phase and construct only Phase bridges. Contractor shall examine the drawings in detail and shall modify the drawings as necessary to accommodate final pipe sizes and routing. Power Supply for Local Lot Control Centers located at the Consumer premises receive and distribute Power at 415V. the existing 11kv network shall be augmented by providing 11kv RMU units and 11kv / 433V Package substations and power supplies to llccs shall be distributed at 415V. The Contractor shall provide the following systems / facilities as a minimum. by providing 11kv RMU units and 11kv / 433V Package substations and distributed at 415V. At Receiving basin and Outfall areas. Existing two circuits of 220kv cables shall be cut and terminated to the 220kv switchgear as Page 182 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. These drawings are conceptual and have been developed based on preliminary requirements and sizing developed during the Front End Engineering Design. and the same to be modified based on the one constructed at Phase for Pump House Electrical Engineering The Phase of the project shall derive power at 220kv from a new 220kv substation. as further detailed below.5044. Pipe Bridge Crossing Over Existing and New Discharge Channel Contractor shall design and construct series of concrete support frames to support pipelines over the new and existing discharge channels. The corridor crossing occurs just up stream of the road bridge. power supplies for Local Lot Control Centers shall be derived from the existing 11kv network. each end user shall construct their own steel truss bridges for carrying pipes. however the SOW provided is based on the preliminary requirement of Company / Client. Contractor to construct the foundation for the Pipe Bridges. 165/220 MVA transformers (located near the new 33kv switchgear building) shall be provided. A 220kv Substation consisting of double bus switchgear shall be provided. The required conceptual drawings Pipe Bridge are provided. Minimum clearance shall be as indicated on FEED drawings (6m). At intermediate locations.5kv. 220 kv System Two 220kv / 34. Oil Spill Control Equipment Contractor to design and construct Oil Spill Control Equipment based on the SOW (Scope of work) provided.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h .

New 220kv cables shall be provided from the 220kv switchgear to feed the two existing 220 / 33kv transformers. Page 183 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. One 33kv. 11kv System 11kv / 433V Package substations (consisting of RMU’s. 11kv XLPE Cables with their termination kits and associated items for modifications / additions in the 11KV network. new 220kv cables shall be provided for the two new 220 / 34. Harmonic filters connected to new 33kv switchgear and to existing 33kv switchgear. Two 33kv / 6. 11kv / 433V transformers. 1250A rated tie feeder connecting existing 33 kv switchgear (feeder allotted from the expansion portion) to the new 33kv switchgear.6 kv bus ducts connecting the transformers to the 6. o 4093 c d incoming cables. The GIS shall have provision for additional two 220kv feeder bays to receive power from a future Electrical department substation.9kv Transformers with higher MVA capacity transformers (located near existing 33kv Electrical Switchgear building-2). Also.6kv metal clad draw-out type switchgear with insulated (solid insulation) bus bars and vacuum circuit breakers shall be provided and located in new Electro Chlorination building.6kv switchgear. LV Switchboard. Two 33kv / 6. etc. Replacement of two existing 33kv / 6.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h .co.6kv System New 6. 33kv System New 33kv double bus switchgear with Gas Insulated bus bars and vacuum circuit breakers shall be provided and located in 33kv Switchgear building.9kv Transformers (located near VSDS Substation for PH area. Receiving basin and Outfall area. This shall include 33kv gas insulated bus ducts connecting the transformers to the 33kv switchgear.9kv Transformers (located near Electro Chlorination building). Expansion of existing double bus Siemens make 33kv switchgear (gas insulated) located in existing 33kv Electrical Switchgear building-1 to cater to Phase loads located in Phase area. This shall include 6.6 kv bus ducts connecting the transformers to the 6.) For deriving Power supply for llccs in MOV corridor area. This shall include 6. 33kv XLPE Cables along with termination kits and associated items for feeding vsds transformers and various other loads. New 6.6kv metal clad draw-out type switchgear with insulated (solid insulation) bus bars and vacuum circuit breakers shall be provided and located in VSDS Substation for PH building.6kv switchgear.5kv transformers.5044. 6.

6kv / 433V Transformers (located near VSDS Substation for PH building).6kv / 433V Transformers (located near 220kv GIS Building) Two 6. New 415V Switchgear–MCC located in vsds building for PH.6kv / 433V Transformers (located near new Electro-Chlorination building).6kv / 433V Transformers (located near VSDS Substation for PH building). This shall consist of an emergency section feeding emergency loads. This shall consist of an emergency section for feeding emergency loads and shall include 415V bus ducts connecting the transformers to the 415V switchgear. Two 6. This shall consist of an emergency section for feeding emergency loads and shall include 415V bus ducts connecting the transformers to the 415V switchgear. o 4093 c d Expansion of existing 6. This shall also include 415V bus ducts connecting the transformers to the 415V switchgear. This shall consist of an emergency section fed from an emergency diesel generator and shall include 415V bus ducts connecting the transformers to the 415V switchgear. Two 6. New 415V Switchgear–MCC assembly located in Operation Building. Two 6. This shall consist of an emergency section for feeding emergency loads and shall include 415 bus ducts connecting transformers to 415 V switchgear.5044. Modifications to existing 415V Switchgear–MCC located in 33kv Electrical Switchgear building No-2 to add manual synchronizing for Load testing of the existing emergency generator. New 415V Switchgear–MCC assembly located at existing Electro chlorination building to feed the loads of Power consumer. New 415V Power distribution centres for sub-distribution of 415V Power supply (Normal Page 184 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. New 415V Switchgear–MCC assembly located in 220kv GIS Building.6kv / 433V Transformers (located at operation building).uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Four 6. 415 V System New 415V Switchgear–MCC assembly located in VSDS Substation for PH building. New 415V Switchgear–MCC located in new Electro Chlorination building.6kv switchgear (Schneider make) located in existing 33kv Electrical Switchgear building-2 to cater to Phase loads located in Phase area.co. Modifications to existing 415V Switchgear–MCC located in Electro chlorination building to provide power feeders to Power – MCC indicated above. This shall consist of an emergency section fed from an emergency diesel generator and shall also include 415V bus ducts connecting the transformers to the 415V switchgear. New 415V Switchgear–MCC assembly located in VSDS Substation for PH building.6kv XLPE Cables with their termination kits and associated items for feeding various loads. 6.

6kv switchgear LV Compartment for new and modified switchgear. UPS with battery banks for each LLCC building located in End-User premises.co. Control and annunciator panels shall be provided for new switchgear and located in new 33kv Electrical Switchgear building.6kv System Relays control and annunciation system shall be mounted on the 6. Control. 110V DC System New 110V DC UPS system shall be provided at the following locations: UPS with battery banks for Phase located in VSDS Substation for PH building. UPS with battery banks for Phase located in Electro Chlorination building. 230V AC UPS System New 230V. UPS system shall be provided at the following locations: UPS with battery banks for Phase equipment located in Phase-I area and located at extension portion of Control Building. 415V System Page 185 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. UPS with battery banks for Phase located in 33kv switchgear building.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . UPS with battery banks for 220kv GIS located in 220kv GIS building. interlocking and alarm systems for Phase-II equipment as detailed below: 220kv System Separate Relay panels. Separate Relay. 6. MOV Corridor. New 415V Switchgear–MCC located in each. 50Hz. Control and annunciator panels shall be provided and located in 220kv GIS building. control and annunciation system shall be mounted on the 11kv rmus LV Compartment / 415V switchgear compartment as applicable. protection. Control and annunciator panels for extension of existing 33kv switchgear shall be provided and located in existing 33kv Electrical Switchgear building. Protection and Alarm Systems The Contractor shall provide control. UPS with battery banks for Phase located in VSDS Substation for PH building. 11kv / 433V Package substations Relays. Receiving basin and Outfall area. 33kv System Separate Relay.5044. UPS with battery banks for 220kv GIS located in 220kv GIS building. o 4093 c d and emergency as applicable) at various load centres.

fault history and analysis. signals (status and analog signals). fault disturbance recording. control and annunciation system shall be mounted on the 415V switchgear LV Compartment as applicable.5044. Substation Control and Monitoring Systems (SCMS) and Power Management Systems (PMS) The Contractor shall provide the following: SCMS System FOR 220kv System Separate SCMS system shall be provided for 220kv GIS. PMS System PMS shall be provided for overall control and monitoring of the Phase electrical system The PMS shall be linked to Gateways of the SCMS of 220kv and 33kv systems. fault history and analysis. 33kv SCMS and Power Management system (PMS). One Human machine interface (HMI) with necessary software and graphical interface shall be provided for the 220kv GIS. This shall include all necessary Control. This shall include all necessary Control. shall be provided.co. all necessary Control. signals shall be enabled in the PMS. fault history and analysis. signals (status and analog signals). alarms and alarm processing. This shall have necessary gateways for Electrical department. signals shall be enabled in the PMS.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . event recording. The PMS shall be linked to the existing PMS and all control signals shall be enabled in the new PMS. event recording. alarms and alarm processing. This shall log all transformer signals from transformer monitoring devices. This shall have necessary gateways for Electrical department and PMS.6kv. SCMS System FOR NEW 33kv System Separate SCMS system shall be provided for the new 33kv GIS. fault disturbance recording. Transformer Monitoring System Separate transformer monitoring system (equivalent to GE Faraday TMCS) shall be provided. o 4093 c d Relays. One Human machine interface (HMI) with necessary software and graphical interface shall be provided for the 33kv GIS. The PMS shall be linked to the data acquisition and control system of the new VSDS and all control. The PMS shall be linked to the data acquisition and control system of the existing VSDS and all control. Page 186 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. The PMS shall be linked to the Transformer monitoring system and all signals and data shall be available at the PMS. fault disturbance recording. alarms and alarm processing. For 6. signals (status and analog signals). event recording.

bus ties and feeders ties.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . The metering scheme shall be subject to approval by Electrical department. shall be provided. Tariff Metering Systems Tariff metering system shall be provided on the Incoming feeders of new 33kv switchgear. Contractor shall perform the studies using CYME software to plot ground potential contours for 33kv and 220kv GIS installations to substantiate that the touch and step voltages are within tolerable limits.co. Earthing Systems The Contractor shall provide earthing system for all installations in Phase. The floodlights shall be with high pressure (HPSV) lamps. o 4093 c d For 415V system. alarms and alarm processing. Both electronic and hard copies shall be submitted to Company / Client as a part of final documentation. Lightning Protection System Lightning protection shall be provided for all the buildings and tanks associated with Phase. Additional lighting to be provided to enhance the lighting (Photo cell controlled) to 150 lux at the Outer edge of Stilling basin. Stilling basin. Existing as well as new metering signals are to be transmitted to NCC Lighting Systems The Contractor shall provide lighting systems as detailed below: Indoor lighting systems for all buildings in Phase. fault disturbance recording. This shall also include the Control building extension. The lighting level at the fence shall be 150 lux. The poles shall be located inside the perimeter fence. event recording. This shall be located in the Control building. Power System Studies Page 187 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Both electronic and hard copies shall be submitted to Company / Client a part of the final documentation. Security Lighting (Photo cell controlled) system shall be provided for the intake plant overall perimeter fence. fault history and analysis.5044. The Contractor shall provide calculations to establish the design of the system. Building external lighting (Photo-cell controlled) shall also be provided. Earthing studies and calculations shall be carried out to establish the parameters of the earthing system design. One (1) Human machine interface (HMI) with necessary software and graphical interface shall be provided for the PMS. Control shall be provided for Incomers. This shall consist of pole-mounted floodlights. signals (status and analog signals). Outdoor Areas Lighting systems (Photo-cell controlled) for the intake area of Phase. This shall consist of insulated earthing cables and stainless steel earth rods. This shall have a gateway facility to DCS.

Protection co-ordination studies. These shall include protection settings at all llccs. number and rating of surge arresters/surge suppressors in the system. which shall be on PSCD EMTP software. Contractor shall perform extensive site verification tests to prove that limits imposed have not been exceeded. Load flow studies Load Flow studies shall be performed to validate the chosen equipment ratings (continuous). the Contractor shall install necessary filters to mitigate the harmonic levels to the specified limits. Insulation co-ordination studies The studies shall establish that the insulation levels of equipment are adequate for probable surges in the system with a safety margin. Fault level details shall be co-ordinated with Company / Client during detail design. and for Control. The VSDS vendor documentation shall also the CYME software package for analysis and reporting.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Motor Starting Substation Earthing LV Power and Control Cables XLPE insulated Copper Cables shall be provided as required to distribute LV Power. Short circuit studies Short circuit studies shall be performed to validate the chosen equipment (short time) ratings. All the studies shall be carried out on Windows based CYME package except Insulation coordination study.co. protection and annunciation requirements.5044. This shall include motor starting studies. Establish the relay settings for all protection relays. o 4093 c d Following studies covering the entire plant network shall be conducted. Following successful plant completion. The studies shall be conducted in accordance to Company / Client specification and harmonic requirements. Other Specialized software may be used for insulation co-ordination studies but this shall be subject to prior approval of Company / Client. The studies shall also establish the location. The actual fault levels at the 220kv + PLANT substation shall be made available during detail design. Page 188 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Harmonic studies As harmonic levels are in excess of the stipulation mentioned in the specifications. The studies shall be contracted to a Company / Client approved study Consultant. Both electronic and hard copies shall be submitted to Company / Client as part of the final documentation.

installation and commissioning of all 220kv equipment (including control and signalling to PLANT substation) shall require co-ordination/approval of Company / Client. Each group shall be connected to individual bus-section. raceways.co. The Contractor shall size and verify the rating based on various loads connected to the emergency bus. An emergency diesel engine driven generator with a minimum rating of 350kva shall be provided to cater to the loads of Phase-II emergency loads located in Phase area. Co-Ordination with PLANT and Electrical Department The design. PLANT and Electrical department. As detailed in the cable layout drawings. o 4093 c d The Contractor shall route the cables in concrete troughs. Bulk Materials The Contractor shall provide as required Push button stations. Contractor shall take the responsibility / lead in obtaining approval for the interface facilities with PLANT and Electrical department. under ground trenches. etc. Emergency Diesel Generator An emergency diesel engine driven generator with a minimum rating of 630kva shall be provided to cater to the loads of Phase emergency loads and located in VSDS Substation for PH. junction boxes.5044. Company / Client shall facilitate the coordination and interface by a letter of introduction. Provision for expansion shall be made for connecting any additional signals (future). etc. This shall be located in VSDS Sub-station for PH. conduits.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . As required for each system. connect and configure the signals for monitoring and controlling the FACILITY pertaining to this Project only. This shall be further split into two groups. One set to cater to the requirements of new 33kv network and connected to the new Page 189 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Harmonic Filters Harmonic filters shall be provided based on the power system study requirements. trays. Twenty percent (20%) of the spares shall be connected and configured as spares as detailed in the specification provided. Contractor shall engineer. local control panels. This shall consist of : One set to cater to the requirements of existing 33kv network and connected to the existing 33kv switchgear (in the modified portion). receptacles (415V and 230V). Scope at Remote PLANT Substation and NCC The Contractor shall provide the necessary facilities at the remote end for telesignalling. The Contractor shall size and verify the rating based on various loads connected to the emergency bus.

in the existing 33 kv switchgear room. Tele-protection System and RTU The existing tele-protection system (SWT-3000). Telephone and hotline telephone facility at the new 220 kv substation shall be provided. to cater for the new and expansion of the tele-signaling and telecommunication requirements or a new SDH equipment shall be provided. dedicated optical fibre cables. including map work. The first submission shall be within four months of award date and tabulation shall be Page 190 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. The filters shall require a minimum of manual intervention and shall be designed for minimum energy losses. o 4093 c d 33kv switchgear.co. The design shall be based on a design life of 30 years for all equipment.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . A new dual redundant tele-protection system shall be provided for the new incoming cables in the new 33 kv switchgear room and the new 220 kv switchgear room. shall be expanded to be made dual redundant. This estimate shall be in tabular as well as graphical format. network display. Miscellaneous Requirements Reactive Power compensation equipment shall be provided if necessary based on the power system study requirements. Necessary software and hardware modifications. Contractor shall provide the following: Estimated annual load build-up for the Project based on available data on flow requirements and utilities. existing 33kv. including software upgrades. In order to coordinate with others. This shall be further split into two groups.. etc. The network shall be configured such that the functions of any one redundant tele-protection unit that has failed shall by automatically assumed by another tele-protection unit within the network. The existing RTU and existing C30 Controller located in existing 33kv switchgear room shall be expanded to cater for additional feeders. A new SDH node. new 33 kv and the new 220kv are to be integrated into a network via redundant. and additions shall be provided at NCC for the new substation. The existing SDH and associated equipment at PLANT and NCC shall be expanded. The tele-protection systems at PLANT. The existing tele-protection system in PLANT shall be expanded to be made dual redundant. PDH and PCM multiplex and supervisory system at the new 220 kv substation connected to PLANT via redundant optical fiber cables shall be provided. The harmonic filter package shall be for the Phase (existing). Fibre Optic cables for all networked equipment. Tele-signal Transfer The existing communications system shall be extended and expanded in order to provide voice and data links from the new 220 kv substation to the NCC. Each group shall be connected to individual bus-section.5044.

Contractor shall perform additional survey as required for detailed engineering to confirm the pipeline routings. Additional specifications. collection of data for detailed engineering. utility piping. cooling water supply and return headers. as required during detail engineering. The design of duct banks shall be suitable for a 30-Ton axle load. Any modifications from the FEED specification shall be specifically highlighted and shall be subject to Company / Client approval. Pipelines and Distribution Contractor to note that the terminology ‘Piping’ or ‘Pipelines’ anywhere in this document refers to complete piping systems (both ‘on plot’ and ‘off-plot’) including Pumping Station piping. These shall be stand alone. fouling/interface with other facilities. piping from / to end users battery limits. shall be prepared by the Contractor. Survey Requirements Topographic and Geotechnical Survey for all cooling water corridors have been performed as part of FEED engineering and the survey report is included. Priority shall be given to finalising the load Schedules / load Data for all end-user llccs so that early coordination of LV power supplies can be undertaken with the respective end users. validate and endorse all FEED documents. tie-ins. General Requirements Contractor shall check. Page 191 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Manifolds. Any change in the Basis of Design shall be specifically highlighted and shall be subject to Company / Client approval. Detailed Engineering Contractor shall perform detailed engineering for piping including but not limited to the following activities: Basis of Design The FEED Basis of Design for Piping shall be expanded as required for detailed engineering. Where new roads or maintenance tracks cross-buried cables. road and utility crossings and pipe supports. o 4093 c d regularly revised every six months with the development of the Project.5044. Contractor shall bring to the notice of Company / Client in writing any contradictions / conflicts in the FEED documentation provided. All detail engineering deliverables shall fully comply with the requirements of all relevant Company / Client standards / specifications and FEED documents.co. Specifications All FEED specifications shall be developed to detailed engineering status. package piping. etc.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . installation of piping. self contained and Project specific. drawings and data during detail engineering as a part of his scope of work. fire water piping. Contractor shall install duct banks to safeguard the buried assets.

ABAQUS or ANSYS Soft wares. Information on Process conditions and parameters. Piping of all sizes shall be modeled. CAESAR-II latest version shall be used for flexibility analysis. Key & Area Plot plans. The 3D model shall further include modeling of pipe supports for DN 50 and above Page 192 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Plot Plans. Equipment Layouts / Plot Plans. Using COSMO. Complete Bill of Materials. Perform Mechanical Handling studies and prepare a report for Company / Client review.5044. reducers etc. 3-D Model Prepare a 3D PDS model for the entire facilities. Review and update all existing piping engineering calculations that have impact on the Project as appropriate and carry out new calculations wherever required. All drawings shall be produced from 3D CAD model and in AUTOCAD electronic format and shall conform to Company / Client draughting standard requirements.co.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Pipe supports to be shown on the Isometric drawings only for DN 50 and above piping. Contractor shall perform detailed flexibility analysis of all relevant piping based on final pipe routing and design conditions. Carryout Surge Analysis for the Fire Water (Fresh Water) System GRE Piping. Finite Element analysis for Critical Components. Develop piping general arrangement drawings for the entire facilities. Prepare Key Plans. Stress analysis of FRP piping shall be carried out by the FRP pipe supplier utilizing specific properties of the supplied pipes. Fire Water / Fresh Water Routing & gads. Contractor shall reconfirm selected material and wall thickness for all piping as part of detailed engineering activities. For engineering and construction covering all pipe work. Information on reference drawing Studies. o 4093 c d Drawings Review the piping drawings included in APPENDIX and produce complete piping General Arrangement Drawings (GAD’s). Incorporate any changes required as a result of maintainability and operability study. Verify that pipe routings indicated in FEED documentation have not been compromised or fouling with by on going works / projects. Sections. and manifold Tees. Overall Pipe Routing Plans. stress relieved. which shall show the facilities subdivided into geographic construction areas and sectors and their corresponding documentation. Information on type and thickness of insulation. Information on whether line is stress analysed. Piping standards. Contractor shall perform detailed support design and develop new project specific support standard / drawings and lists based on detailed engineering for all piping. supports. etc. Calculations. Information on pipe supports. etc. Prepare Piping Isometrics for all piping having the following information as a minimum: Complete line from start to end with all components with full dimensions. Prepare a list and drawings on special supports.

Mechanical Handling study report. Requisitions for all piping bulk items. Tie-ins. This shall be used by Company / Client for further engineering during ultimate phase or future phase Vendor Data Review. Piping Wall Thickness calculations Reports. Piping Basis of Design. Construction. drawings and data and incorporate requirements in design and engineering. Tie-in schedule and details. etc. Piping / Pipeline Deliverables Electronic copies in native format (generic) and hard copies shall be supplied in final documentation for all disciplines. Flanges. etc. Piping Stress Analysis calculation reports.5044. Specification for Fabrication. inspection and testing of piping. Installation. specialities. installation. Critical Line List for Piping Stress analysis. Erection. check and comment on all applicable Vendor calculations. valves.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . GRP Piping. MTO and Requisitions. Valve Data sheets. Technical Bid Evaluation Reports. As Built Documentation Prepare and submit final “As-Built” documentation. Review. Piping Isometrics (AFC). Special Pipe Support Drawings. Fittings. Inspection and Testing of Piping. Overall Pipe Routings Reports / Calculations notes etc. etc. Valves.co. electrical and instrumentation items / cable trays. Prepare Technical Evaluation Summary reports for all piping items. Standard Pipe Support drawings. Specification for Hydrostatic Pressure Testing of Piping. Intelligent model to be submitted to Company / Client. Perform and prepare Material Take-offs and summaries for piping and support materials including bulk material. Plot Plans (Overall & Unit). erection. Technical Specifications for Pipes. gaskets. Piping Material Specification (Piping Classes). o 4093 c d piping. (Plot Plans / gads / Pipe Routings) Key Plans. Surge Analysis report for the Fire Water (Fresh Water) System GRE Piping. As listed. Prepare material / purchase requisitions (RFQ’s) for all piping and support materials. As-built drawings (for all above referenced drawings / documents) Specific Requirements Page 193 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Prepare all documentation for fabrication. Piping General Arrangement Drawings (key Plan & Plans & Sections / details). Rubber Expansion Joints. Specification for flexibility/stress analysis. Process / Piping specialties specifications and data sheets. MTO for piping and support materials. civil and structural information. Valve Schedule. updated to include as-built status of installed facilities. Specification for Pipe Supports. Bolts & Nuts. Prepare Piping Tie-in schedule and details as per P& I D’s and other Project documents. Coordinate between different GRP Vendors. Support Schedule. all equipment. 3D – PDS Model (Generic and Intelligent).

calibration at site. Responsibility extends to all required detailed design. Specification for package Instrument Installation Contractor shall make a detailed site visit to study and familiarize the existing Instrumentation & Control system already implemented for Phase Site visit report shall be submitted to Company / Client. Detailed Design shall include. anchors. Instrumentation & Controls Contractor shall be responsible for but not limited to the following: General Contractor shall be fully responsible for the design and provision of instrumentation. o 4093 c d Design. but not be limited to the items listed below: Instrumentation Data base Contractor shall develop a Master database of Instruments in ‘intools’. Phase related items would be a separate project in future. This database shall cover the details of all the tagged instruments and their signals as per the Company / Client Drafting & Numbering system. The basis for this list shall be P&ID. Flow / Surge calculations for the system as may be appropriate. logistics. Supply of fabricated spools. Supply of piping components such as pipes. All systems shall be supplied. Detailed design and supply for FRP (GRE / GRP / GRV) Piping are of specialist nature and hence shall be subcontracted to the Specialist GRP and FRP pipe manufacturer respectively. Static and Dynamic stress calculations and analysis.5044. Fabrication and Installation of FRP Piping. etc. Further. and associated control systems for the Project.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . flanges. material supply. Refer Instrumentation & Control Basis of Design. which may affect FRP pipework or support throughout construction. For FRP piping system. Instrument scope shall include. Design of jointing system based on the design. configured and tested in accordance with the relevant Project Specifications. Update and issue of design and installation drawings. The Instrumentation and Control system to be implemented for Phase shall only be considered for the Project. Review of all proposed field design changes. and design data for anchor blocks. engineering. Supply of FRP Piping and spool fabrication. packaging. factory inspection and testing. General Instrumentation Specification. the FRP vendor shall furnish Installation. inspection and testing procedures for FRP piping and shall supervise the site installation activities in order to ensure single point responsibility of design. Page 194 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. installation. supply and installation. but not limited to the following: All thickness calculations for pipes and piping components. Design and location of supports. Supply of pipe supports such as saddles etc.co. fittings. hook-up and field verification.

Instrument specifications & Data sheets Contractor shall generate a stand-alone specification and / or data sheet for every Instrument and Control system. Termination diagrams.g. Instrument Loop diagrams. Page 195 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo.5044. cable block diagrams. Input to various disciplines / participation in various studies Instrumentation shall provide inputs to the various disciplines associated with the Project. The Specification shall cover minimum requirements such as the selection of type. Constructability review etc. Index module.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . The data sheets shall cover complete details of individual instruments. Hook-up Diagrams. Handling. Storage. cable routing layouts. The enquiries shall be floated to the Company / Client approved Suppliers only. Transportation and Maintenance & Operations etc. Air supply distribution. one license of ‘INTOOLS’ shall be made available for Company / Client use during project stage and the same license. Calculations. wiring. Material. A detailed Technical evaluation shall be carried out and the Technical Bid Analysis shall be submitted to Company / Client.).co. All the relevant documents shall be updated to reflect the make. requirements pertaining to Manufacturing. Bill of Materials. QA / QC. Procurement Contractor shall prepare detailed Scope of supply (which includes Documentation requirement etc. Shall be utilized. These drawings shall include but not limited to the instrument equipment layout in building. o 4093 c d This database shall be dynamic until the ‘As built’ stage of the project. complete database with associated information shall be handed over to Company / Client at the end of the project. These documents shall be regularly updated until the “As built” stage. Proper co-ordination among all the Project team members is expected. Inspection. model number of the individual instrument and submitted along with the technical section of the Purchase Order. Painting. MCT schedules. Hazop.g. Installation drawings and Documents Contractor shall develop detailed instrumentation installation related drawings to facilitate the easy construction of the Instrument & Control System. location layouts. Contractor shall develop a detailed Specification for the Installation of Instrumentation & Control System. hook-ups etc. Material Requisitions for each type of Instrument and Control system. All the features of the intools e.) During course of the detail engineering. Instrumentation shall participate in various studies (e. Loop diagrams etc. Data sheet module. As a minimum. cable schedule.

Logic Diagrams etc. Layout of individual Graphic pages.5044.O. Depending on the final architecture and the routing of the Fiber Optic cable. Control System architecture and various equipment layouts of the buildings. o 4093 c d Vendor Drawing approval Contractor shall carry out detailed review and approval of all the Vendor drawings and documents.co. It should be noted that the plant would continue to run during implementation of this Project. network. A separate method statement shall be prepared for the pre-commissioning of the Control system. Contractor shall develop Control philosophy and all relevant documents for the System Supplier like Functional Design Specification. and various packages etc. Inspection & Testing Inspection and testing shall be conducted as defined in the relevant Project specification. Machine Monitoring systems. It is intended that the Operator stations implemented for Phase shall be continued to be in use for Phase and all the future phases of the Project including Phase. Control / Logic Narratives. Refer Specification for Control system. I / O lists (Hardwired & softwired). Graphic specification. There are two options for Phase. Distributed Control System (DCS) The Control system for Phase is EMERSON make Delta – V system.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . End users’ systems. Contractor shall submit detailed Method statement for proper and uninterrupted transition of the new system. Vendor Data Books shall be submitted in format explained in the relevant Project specification. a sequential start-up is expected. VSDS. Switchgears. Either this system can be extended to cater for the expansions including phase or an independent third party Distributed Control System integrated with the existing DCS through ‘OPC’ open system connectivity. Contractor shall finalize the hardware required for the Project and ensure smooth integration. Presently only one additional operator station is planned to be added. Due care shall be taken to define and implement the communication links to various subsystems like HVAC. F&G Systems. The DCS shall have redundant F. Loop typicals.O. Specification for Machine Monitoring system. redundant network Page 196 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Fire & Gas System The Fire and Gas System to be used for Phase shall work on a F.

The Phase seawater pumping & distribution project has a ‘Cerberus’ make Fire & Gas system having one operator station in CCR and one in PLANT control in existing main gate house. either existing telecommunication F. comprehensive and automatic means of detecting. All the interfaces between the various systems shall be properly defined. The system shall also be connected to activate deluge of 220 kv / 33 kv transformers on detection of fire. Also this system is communicating over multi-mode fibers and not on Single mode fibers. 2. for the F&G panels in Phase building. Contractor shall develop Control strategy for individual packages where instrumentation and Control system shall be involved. In this option. alarming and indicating the presence of fire and combustible gas hazards. Refer Specification for F&G System and F&G System block diagram Instrumentation on Package Equipment. The Fire & Gas detection and alarm systems for each building shall have a F&G panel. Also the fire panel at each location shall communicate serially to the DCS over redundant link. The system shall close the inlet dampers in the control room and other buildings when toxic gas is detected. Repeat signals shall be connected to the panels in PLANT Control at existing main gate house and Fire station within the PLANT . Communicate all the Phase alarms and signals to the existing F&G Operator stations located in CCR and PLANT control at main Gate House. following two options are envisaged: 1. Every unmanned Building shall have HSSD System.O. The Fire and Gas system shall provide a fast. network (single mode) shall be used or new connections shall be made to the F&G panels at nearest building that is being built in Phase of the project. All such F&G panels shall be connected to a new Master F&G control panel to be located in the existing Control room.5044. which shall communicate with the Operator station. In order to integrate Phase systems. The manned building shall have smoke detection and other associated detection system specified in the relevant Project specification. which shall also have alarm panels as defined in the relevant specification. the PLANT Control located at the Main Gate House (known in Phase as Fire / Incident Control Room) and Fire Station. Two new Gatehouses are planned in the Project. The system has hardwired contacts to the respective DCS subcontrollers. Refer Specification for Package Equipment Instrumentation.co. The Master Fire panel shall be located in the CCR.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Replace the Phase system completely and bring Phase and Phase systems on to a single platform. Flowmeters Contractor shall implement water Metering System at discharge main header and each Page 197 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. o 4093 c d of single mode fibres.

5044.5%. Alternatively. test and commission the laboratory instruments as per the specification for Laboratory Instrumentation Doc. outfall and at every consumer. The temperature points shall be distributed in a semi-circular fashion at a distance of 100 meter from the discharge point. design. Other Field Instrumentation Contractor shall ensure that all the field instruments are procured from the Suppliers listed in Company / Client supplier’s list. Dual beam multi-path ultrasonic flow meters shall be used in line and shall have accuracy equal to or less than 0. Analyzers Analysers installed in Analyser House / shelter shall be utilised for environmental monitoring at the intake. The ultra-sonic meters shall be clamp-on type. Control and On-Off Valves All the Control and On-Off valves for the Project shall have Motorized actuators (with the exception of any pneumatic valves having independent Instrument Air system for Electro chlorination package). supply. Contractor shall develop the network and implement for the Project. Each CCV shall have an independent hydraulic system and control panel. The actuators shall be intelligent type and shall communicate on single pair cable forming a network. There is a special requirement to measure the seawater temperature one meter below the surface at outfall. The laboratory layout shows only indicative minimum requirements and Contractor shall suggest any requirement of additional equipment. install.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . A sensor attached to a floating buoy is a preferred arrangement. The cables for these temperature sensors shall be sleeved with a pipe and precast concrete blocks. o 4093 c d consumer’s intake. A master station shall be located in the CCR / LLCC for certain number of movs based on Manufacturer’s recommendation. Laboratory Contractor shall design a laboratory. and Laboratory Layout Drg. The Combined Check Valves (ccvs) shall have electro-hydraulic actuators.co. Access shall be provided for sensors inspection / replacement. etc. Instrument air required for the laboratory shall be tapped and arranged from the existing Instrument Air compressor located near Electro chlorination package of Phase Page 198 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Contractor may suggest any other alternatives for consideration by Company / Client. The output signal from DCS to the Control valves (fvs and ccvs) shall be hardwired. The mounting arrangement shall be such that there shall not be any loss of signals. remote wireless sensors and transmitters can be considered. space. Also all the Instruments shall completely comply with all the Project documents.

-Following documents shall be generated by individual suppliers. all the pipes are not laid in the defined Pipeline corridor and second route of the F.-MCT Layouts for CCR and llccs.-F&G Detector Layout.O.-Installation MTO. However Company / Client approval shall be taken in advance and shall be properly reflected in all the documents.-Functional Design Specification / Control Narrative. Orifice Plates.-Vendor Data Manual. the ‘redundancy’ shall be implemented.-Equipment Layouts in the Buildings.-F&G. Contractor shall be allowed to commission the system on non-redundant F.-Instrument Grounding Layout.-Instrumentation Index (Database). shutdown or operation of equipment. Power supplies. network temporarily as a special case. Instrumentation Deliverables All documents and drawings shall be continuously updated until “as-built” revisions. wherever applicable. -I/O allocations.-Technical Bid Evaluation and Recommendation.-Material Requisitions.-Instrument Junction Box wiring diagrams.-Laboratory Layout. The F. Controller allocations.-Specification of Individual Instrument. F&G.-Instrument Loop Diagrams. etc). O. Cables shall run on either side of the Cooling Water Pipelines.-Panel GA Drawings.-Logic Description.-Flow chart derived from the Cause and Effect Matrix (developed under Process discipline) or the narratives for trip.-Instrument Hook-ups.-Loop diagrams showing terminal numbers and all elements of the loop.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Network It is intended that a complete redundant Fiber Optic Network shall be utilised for the following: DCS.-Power Requirement Calculations and distribution drawings.5044.-Instrument Location Layouts.-Data sheet of Every Instrument.-System Architecture Diagrams.-MODBUS address mapping details. In case.-Noise Calculations. The cable shall be supported over the cable trays laid over the Pipe sleepers on the above ground portion. These shall be duly approved by Contractor and submitted to Company / Client.-Interface wiring diagrams. Instrument Air consumption. The cables shall be buried where the Pipeline is also buried.O.-MCT Schedule.-Instrument Cable Block Diagrams. o 4093 c d F.co.Page 199 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo.-Sizing Calculations for Valves.-Instrument Cable Schedule.-I / O Lists. cable is not available due to this.-Panel Dimensional Drawings.-MOV.-System Specifications (DCS.-Telecommunication.-Cable Routing Layouts. -Instrumentation and Control Basis of Design.-Logic Diagrams and sequence charts. Once the second route is available. Following is a minimum list of Instrumentation documents to be generated by Contractor or enhance the FEED documents where applicable for the implementation of Phase Site Visit report.-Calculation of Instrument Air Consumption.O.

5044. o 4093 c d

Panel Wiring Diagrams;-Calibration Procedure;-Calibration reports;-Operation Manual;Maintenance Manual;-Spare Part Manual (The manual shall include the complete Bill of Materials. All the parts that have individual part numbers shall be listed in the manual);FAT and SAT procedures and completed dossier where applicable, for systems and packages.-Contractor shall detail the FAT and SAT already included in the Instrument Specification documents. Instrumentation softwares required Contractor shall specify all the proposed software to be used for the Project. Following is the list of preferred software: Database – intools; Flow Orifice Sizing – instrucalc / intools; Control Valve / Safety Relief Valve Sizing – instucalc / conval / intools; Drawings – autocad. Telecommunication System The Contractor shall be responsible for the complete design and provision of telecommunication facilities for the project. The responsibility extends to all required detailed design, material supply, engineering, factory inspection and testing, packaging, logistics, installation, hook-up, Integration and field verification. All systems shall be supplied, configured and tested in accordance with all the relevant Project Documents. General The Contractor shall provide telecommunication facilities for the existing Central Control Room (CCR), other new buildings in the Intake Area and Local Lot Control Centres (llccs) being covered in Phase of the Project. Refer: Telecommunication Basis of Design, Document No., System Diagram - Overall Telecommunication System, Drawing No., Block Diagram – Overall Telecommunication System, Drawing No and Equipment List – Telecommunication System, Document No. The Contractor shall interface with existing telecommunication facilities in the existing buildings as stated in the relevant documents. The Contractor is required to make himself fully aware of all relevant standards and regulations, such as the following, on which the design and installation of the Telecommunication System shall be based: Tel Publications. IEEE wire regulations for Electrical Installations, ITU International Telecommunication Union, C Electromagnetic Radiations Compatibility, Company / Client Standards, Project Documentation. The Contractor shall note that the Company / Client Standard, SD-ITN-001, Cable Infrastructure Standards of the IT Department is vendor limited, in some cases, and therefore shall not be issued to vendors.
Page 200 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo.co.uk

IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h

5044. o 4093 c d

The Contractor shall ensure that the entire Telecommunication Works shall be carried out through a qualified Telecommunication Systems Integrator. The Contractor and Systems Integrator shall attend liaison, review and progress meetings, in National, on a monthly basis during the design phase and weekly site meetings during the construction phase. The monthly meetings during the design phase to be for a period of 3 days and shall include site visits. Company / Client, at it’s discretion, may choose to conduct certain monthly meetings via teleconference. The weekly meeting during the construction phase to be for a limited period, as required, and shall include a joint inspection of the work taking place at that time. The Contractor shall study and revalidate the FEED both as a desktop exercise and via a number of site visits to be conducted during the initial stage of the Project to familiarize and study the Telecommunication System implemented, as well as the changes being implemented, within PLANT. The Contractor shall make four (4) site visits for a period of two (2) full days each visit. The Contractor shall suggest any enhancements, with rational, to the FEED following the FEED verification, in the form of a report, for the approval of company / client. The Contractor shall submit, for the approval of Company / Client, Site Visit Reports for each site visit. The Contractor shall provide load analysis on any of the existing power supplies that shall be directly utilised as a part of this project and provide a report with rational and recommendations, having considered all alternatives. All systems shall be provided fully assembled, supplied, configured and tested in accordance with the relevant project specifications. Also, the Contractor shall be responsible for interfacing the new systems with existing telecommunication systems; any upgrade work required on the hardware / software of the existing system for this purpose shall be carried out by the Contractor. The Contractor shall obtain prior approval from Company / Client of his detailed design before proceeding with any purchase of equipment and any installation work. The Contractor shall participate in a formal design review, in National, six (6) weeks prior to purchase of equipment and include appropriate Company / Client comments in the design.

Page 201 of 663

suraj_engineer@yahoo.co.uk

IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h

5044. o 4093 c d

The Contractor shall obtain Tel “Type” approval as required. The Contractor shall ensure adequate co-ordination between the Telecommunications System Integrator and all other disciplines / activities on site takes place in order to ensure an efficient installation. The Contractor shall make provision and ensure common infrastructure like the routing of the Fiber Optic cables shall include the llccs / Buildings planned to be implemented in the future phases e.g. By provisioning a coiled FOC length near Phase llccs. The Contractor shall be aware that there is telecommunications effort associated with the new and existing electrical sub-stations and the existing Electrical department network by virtue of tele-signalling transferring systems and tele-protection systems and that this effort is detailed in Clause Electrical Engineering. The Contractor shall be aware that at the present time the Optical Transmission System in the Plant Industrial City Telecommunication network comprises redundant SDH nodes at STM-1 (Alcatel SDH 1650 SMC) configured in a single ring on main and standby cables and that other interfacing contracts, being performed by others, shall initially retain the single ring, identified as PAB, POB, NTB, MGH, E2, RB, LNG 2, Fire Station # 3, IPP, W6, CB and PAB and then reconfigure the single ring into three (3) rings of STM-1 namely Port Ring, Eastern Ring and Western Ring. The Scope of Work in Phase is to implement a spur link from Fire Station # to LLCC MOV Corridor H and integrate with the Western Ring and also provide telecommunication system facilities and connectivity to various llccs as stated in the Telecommunication Facility Requirements and Connectivity Table – Document No The Contractor shall make him self aware of the status of the various concurrent interfacing contracts and establish any impact to the Scope of Work. The following interfacing contracts are identified at this time: (i) add a SDH/PDH node at the Fire Station # 3. This new node shall be connected to the network via 2 x 24 core Single Mode Fibre Optic cable routed to the existing LNG 2 LLCC which is the closest node to Fire Station # and to LLCC in order to form a logical ring i.e the Western Ring. (ii) add a PDH node at the metering station located close to the IPP LLCC. This PDH node is being connected to the network with a copper cable to the IPP node. (iii) move the SDH STM-1 from the Port Administration Building (PAB) to the new
Page 202 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo.co.uk

IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h

5044. o 4093 c d

control building for Berth 1A and 1B (LPB-1). A new SDH STM-4 node Alcatel 1660, shall be installed in PAB together with additional Cross Connect Alcatel 1515 CXC and PDH multiplexer 1511 BA This shall form another logical ring, the Port Ring. (iv) provide telecommunications facilities for LNG 1 from the existing sub plant (S) and for W 4 from Fire station. The Contractor shall perform the following Scope of Work: Interfacing to existing Telecommunication Systems at various levels including linking through fiber optic network and upgrading / re-configuring (re-programming) of the existing ALCATEL system for the additional facilities. Supply of a compatible telecommunication system which shall interface, tie-in to the existing system / network and continue to have a closed loop configuration or multiple loop configuration for the existing STM-1 ring network and two new spur link locations, Fire Station # and MOV Corridor H. Supply of hardware and the software upgrades, as required, for the existing SDH system in order that the new terminal equipment shall be interfaced with the existing equipment. Supply of two (2) redundant Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy (PDH) equipments with multiplexers and associated Network Management System (NMS). Supply of Fibre Optic cable and accessories up to subscriber connectivity and software configuration and upgrade. Supply of a Telephone System comprising a copper cable distribution and necessary IDF, junction boxes, patch panels etc; excluding the PABX which shall be supplied by others, together with a number of Telephones, Fax Machines, Audio Multiplexers etc. And a Hotline Telephone System operating between the CCR and the Consumer Control Rooms. Expansion of, and reconfiguration of, an existing Public Address / General Alarm System including supply of all necessary hardware and software. Connectivity to any other required utilities. Providing technical input required to support other disciplines. Providing documents and drawings, including “as-built” revisions. Interface with, and obtain approvals from, Tel. This shall include the design for the
Page 203 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo.co.uk

IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h

5044. o 4093 c d

Telephone System infrastructure as well as any “Type” approvals as necessary. Provision of all data sheets for telecommunication systems, subsystems and equipment. Evaluate and confirm the adequacy of all the existing systems to accommodate the new systems, sub systems and equipment. Upgrade the PC based Telecommunication Supervisory System to include the new PDH nodes. Upgrade the Network Management System to include the new telecommunication equipments. Commission and Hand Over all systems, sub systems and equipment fully integrated. Telecommunication System Specifications & Data sheets The Contractor shall generate a stand-alone detailed specification and / or data sheet for each telecommunication system, sub system and equipment, These documents shall be regularly be updated until the “as built” stage. The specification shall cover complete details of the selection of type, material, requirements pertaining to manufacturing, QA / QC, inspection, painting, storage, handling, transportation and Operations & Maintenance etc. The Contractor shall use the telecommunications specifications in Appendix as an initial basis to develop the detailed engineering and the specifications. The design and specifications shall be submitted to Company / Client for approval. The Contractor shall ensure that every element in the system shall have an associated Mean Time Between Failure (MTBF) of better than 20,000 hours and that each subsystem shall have a Mean Time To Repair (MTTR) of better than two (2) hours, assuming the appropriate spare part is available. The Availability of the system shall be 99.999 % Scope of Work and Supply Fibre Optic Cable & Accessories For details of the guideline specification, refer Specification for Fibre Optic Cable and Accessories, Doc. No., Main Cable Routing Drawing, Doc. No. and Fibre Optic Cable Allocation Drawing, Doc. No. A duplicated (main and standby) Single Mode Fibre Optic Fire Retardant Armoured Cable Network with Accessories shall be laid in order to provide the transmission
Page 204 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo.co.uk

IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h

5044. o 4093 c d

medium to facilitate Instrumentation, Telecommunication, Fire & Gas, Electrical and Security systems as indicated below: 2 x 36 core cables shall be laid in two (2) separate physical routes for embracing all llccs to be constructed to/from the CCR in CB in a loop configuration. 2 x 12 core cables shall be laid within the Intake Area to accommodate Instrumentation requirements e.g DCS at various buildings and Pump houses to/from the CCR in CB. 2 x 24 core cables shall be laid between substations in the Intake Area to accommodate Electrical requirements e.g Tele-protection and Tele-signal transferring. 4 x 6 core non-duplicated cables shall be laid to / from the Telecom Room in CB and the four (4) hubs situated within the Intake Area to cater for the CCTV system. The cables shall also be laid between the hub and it’s associated CCTV cameras. Optical Patch Cords / Connectors and Fibre Patch Panels shall be supplied to support the above. Optical Transmission System For details of the guideline specification, refer Specification for Optical Transmission System, Doc. No. and System Diagram - Optical Transmission System Doc.. A redundant PDH spur optical link is to be implemented between Fire Station and MOV Corridor H. Each of the FO transmitting stations shall be equipped with at least two (2) optical receivers and two (2) optical transmall necessary hardware and software modifications shall be made in the existing SDH STM-1 Western Ring in order to ensure that phase II telecommunications facilities are seamlessly connected. The existing SDH equipment shall be upgraded to provide CCTV Camera(s) signal transport from the Intake Area, LNG 2 and RB to CCTV monitors at CCR CB and to monitors and system management and recording facilities at CR Plant situated at the Main Gate House (MGH). An independent dual optical fibre single audio channel based telephone connection shall be provided to four (4) llccs from a PABX, to be implanted by others, in the Telecom Equipment Room at CB on audio multiplexer systems. PCM Multiplexes and Channel Interface PCM Multiplexers shall be provided in order to provide the required telecommunication facilities associated with Corridor H and shall be equipped with common equipment DCDC converter (from -48VDC), equipment controller board, alarm board, 25Hz generator with the following user interfaces: 2W FXO channels, -2W FXS channels,
Page 205 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo.co.uk

IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h

5044. o 4093 c d

The terminal equipment shall be of Alcatel make, type PCM 1511BA. Cross Connect Equipment The existing equipment (duplicated Alcatel 1515 CXC connected in series) shall be reconfigured, as necessary, in order to complete the system requirements. Network Management System (NMS) The existing Alcatel 1320/1353 CT/CX Network Management System (NMS) for control and monitoring of all PDH / SDH nodes shall be upgraded with hardware for the new sites and the latest version software and reconfigured as necessary to include the new PDH nodes and other routing channels to provide connectivity across the new llccs. In addition the software shall be made available on two existing desktop personal computers in CCR CB and PAB and additionally on two laptop personal computers, to be provided, for maintenance personnel at site(s). Telecommunication Equipment Supervisory System For details of the guideline specification, refer Specifications for Telecommunication Supervisory System, Doc No The existing Hitachi make Telecommunication Equipment Supervisory System which operates on a separate LAN and provides alarm monitoring of the entire Telecommunication System shall be upgraded with hardware for the new sites and the latest version software and reconfigured as necessary to include the new PDH nodes. Further a Laptop PC shall be provided, equipped with the appropriate software and hardware accessories for programming fault detection and engineering purposes. The Remote Supervisory Unit(s) shall be modular consisting of one or more modules. Each module shall include 32 x volts less contact shall be poared from the 48V DC supply. PA / GA System For details of the guideline specification, refer Specification for Public Address and General Alarm System, Doc. No. and PAGA Field Location Layout Drawing No. The existing PA / GA equipment is NOVA 2001 and manufactured by GAI-TRONICS of Italy. In order to ensure adequate acoustical coverage shall be available in the Intake Area an acoustical analysis shall be conducted including site investigation and measurement, together with desktop calculations. The analysis shall take into account existing and future ambient noise levels. The analysis shall be performed, utilising a procedure to be approved by Company / Client, within three (3) months of the Effective Date. The results
Page 206 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo.co.uk

IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h

5044. o 4093 c d

of the analysis shall be used to optimize the quantities and locations which shall to be included in a report to included coverage drawings, with rational and recommendations, to be submitted for the approval of Company / Client. The report shall also contain recommendations with rational on the existing Phase coverage. The coverage in the Intake Area shall be verified, by measurement, as conforming to the acoustic analysis as part of the commissioning procedure. The existing system shall be extended and upgraded as necessary, both hardware and software, in order to provide coverage at the new llccs and buildings in the Intake Area. The system shall be re-configured and re-zoned for the new and existing sites to meet the operational needs of Company / Client. Further a Laptop PC shall be provided, equipped with the appropriate software and hardware accessories for programming fault detection and engineering purposes. Hotline Telephone System For details of the guideline specification, refer Specification for Hotline Telephone System Doc. No. and System Diagram - Hotline System Drawing No. Hotline Telephones shall be installed between the CCR in the CB to two (2) new customer sites associated with llccs LNG-1 and LNG-2. Provision of the Hotline Telephone service shall include the telephones and the PCM FXO / FXS circuits. The existing Hotline Console at CCR shall be upgraded to accommodate the new handsets and indicators, refer Hotline Console Layout Drawing No. In the event that the customers sites are not available at the time of commissioning then commissioning shall take place in the applicable LLCC. Telephone & Data System For details of the guideline specification, refer Specification for Telephone System Doc. No.. A PABX, Ericsson model MD 110, exists at PAB and all telephone users at existing llccs and in the Intake Area operate as remote subscribers via FXS/FXO circuits on the SDH Optical Transmission System. In 2nd quarter 2006 a PABX shall be provided, by others, at CB therefore all new llccs shall operate as remote subscribers from the PABX at CB and all users in the Intake Area shall operate as direct subscribers. The PABX at CB shall have sufficient capacity and be equipped for all new subscribers in the Intake Area and remote subscribers at llccs The active components of the Data Network shall be supplied by others and the LAN shall be commissioned by others.
Page 207 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo.co.uk

IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h

5044. o 4093 c d

All cables, structured cabling, idfs, junction boxes, interfaces, interconnections etc to effect a comprehensive infrastructure shall form part of this Scope of Work. Telephones, Fax Machines and Audio Mux For details of the guideline specification, refer Specification for Telephones and Fax Machines Doc. No.. All telephone shall have RJ-45 connectors and the types of telephones installed shall be different for different areas and functions, as tentatively defined on drawings and relevant documents. Refer: Equipment List – Telecommunication Equipment, Document No. for quantities. All Fax Machines shall have RJ-45 connectors and be installed in locations tentatively defined on drawings and documents and shall be model L-360 or later version from Canon or equivalent. Four (4) Audio Mux with FXO / FSX capability are required to provide individual telephone communications, over dual optical fibre, between the PABX at CB and llccs. Earthing All telecommunication equipment shall be connected to the telecom earth at existing stations and a separate telecom clean earth of less than one (1) ohm at each new location. Power Supplies A fully redundant nominal - 48VDC battery / charger system with 8 hours autonomy shall be provided and used to supply all telecommunications related equipment at LLCC MOV Corridor H. The battery / charger system shall be designed in accordance with Data Sheet, DC UPS, Document No. in order to supply power to the telecommunication equipment and shall have 50% spare capacity. A fully redundant nominal -48VDC battery / charger system with nominal 8 hours autonomy shall be provided, by others, and used to supply all telecommunications related equipment at Fire Station. The PDH and associated equipment at Fire Station shall connect to this existing supply. A fully redundant nominal -48VDC battery / charger system with nominal 8 hours autonomy exists at each node in the SDH / PDH Optical Transmission System and can
Page 208 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo.co.uk

IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h

5044. o 4093 c d

be utilized for like equipment. Each new site shall contain a 230 V AC UPS which shall be utilised for any new PA / GA equipment. Testing Testing shall take place in order to demonstrate the specifications of the equipment, sub system and system have been achieved and as stated in the applicable system specifications. Training Training shall be provided as stated in the applicable system specifications in Appendix and is to take place at site. The training shall be as per manufacturer’s standard syllabus and shall be conducted by the manufacturer. Documentation Documentation shall be provided for the design, purchase, installation, “as built” and O&M phases and as stated in the applicable system specifications in Appendix. Security System The Contractor shall be responsible for the complete design and provision of the Security System for the project. The responsibility extends to all required detailed design, material supply, engineering, factory inspection and testing, packaging, logistics, installation, hook-up, Integration and field verification. General The Security System for the Plant Industrial City shall be highly confidential. The details shall not be reproduced or / and copied. The Contractor shall provide a Security System for the Intake Area, along the Pipeline Corridor and at the Receiving Basin (RB). Refer Specification for Security Control System, Document No., Closed Circuit Television System Diagram, Drawing No., Card Access Control System Diagram, Drawing No., Field Location Layout Security System, Drawing No. and Equipment Layout Security System, Drawing No.. The Contractor is required to make himself fully aware of all relevant standards and regulations, including Company / Client standards, base his design and installation on those standards and regulations. The Contractor shall note that the Company / Client Standard, Cable Infrastructure Standards of the IT Department is vendor limited, in some cases, and therefore shall not be issued to vendors. The Contractor shall ensure that the entire Security Works shall be carried out through a qualified Security & Telecommunications Systems Integrator. The Contractor and
Page 209 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo.co.uk

IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h

5044. o 4093 c d

Systems Integrator shall attend liaison, review and progress meetings, in National, on a monthly basis during the design phase and weekly site meetings during the construction phase. The monthly meetings during the design phase to be for a period of 3 days and shall include site visits. Company / Client, at it’s discretion, may choose to conduct certain monthly meetings via teleconference. The weekly meeting during the construction phase to be for a limited period, as required, and shall include a joint inspection of the work taking place at that time. Company / Client shall agree to combine the Telecommunications meetings with those of Security in the event the same System Integrator is chosen. The Contractor shall study and revalidate the FEED both as a desktop exercise and via a number of site visits to be conducted during the initial stage of the Project to familiarize and study the Telecommunication System implemented, as well as the changes being implemented, within Plant city. The Contractor shall make four (4) site visits for a period of two (2) full days each visit. Company / Client shall agree to combine the Telecommunications site visits with those of Security in the event the same System Integrator is chosen. The Contractor shall suggest any enhancements, with rational, to the FEED following the FEED verification, in the form of a report, for the approval of Company / Client. The Contractor shall submit, for the approval of Company / Client, Site Visit Reports for each site visit. The Contractor shall provide load analysis on any of the existing power supplies that shall be directly utilised as part this project and provide a report with rational and recommendations, having considered all alternatives. The Contractor shall be aware that the existing CCTV System at Plant is in the process of being upgraded to a an IP Ethernet based network and this is due for completion. The coverage of the existing and upgraded system does not include the location areas that form part of this Scope of Work. All systems shall be provided fully assembled, supplied, configured and tested in accordance with the relevant project specifications. Also, the Contractor shall be responsible for interfacing the new systems with existing telecommunication systems; any upgrade work required on the hardware / software of the existing system for this purpose shall be carried out by the Contractor. The Contractor shall obtain prior approval from Company / Client of his detailed design before proceeding with any purchase of equipment and any installation work. The
Page 210 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo.co.uk

IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h

5044. o 4093 c d

Contractor shall participate in a formal design review, in National, six (6) weeks prior to purchase of equipment and include appropriate Company / Client comments in the design. The Contractor shall ensure adequate co-ordination between the Security System Integrator and all other disciplines / activities on site takes place in order to ensure an efficient installation. The Contractor shall perform the following Scope of Work: Provide a new CCTV system consisting of cameras, hubs/switches and monitors interfacing to an upgraded existing CCTV System. Provide a Card Access Control System (CACS) at Gate House # and Gate House # to automate inbound / outbound vehicle & personnel movements. Provide security fencing and lighting around the intake facility. Security System Specifications & Data sheets The Contractor shall generate a stand-alone detailed specification and / or data sheet for each of the security system, sub system and equipment. These documents shall be regularly updated until the “as built” stage. The specification shall cover complete details of the selection of type, material, requirements pertaining to manufacturing, QA / QC, inspection, painting, storage, handling, transportation and Operations & Maintenance etc. The Contractor shall use the Specification for Security Control System, Document No. as an initial basis of the specifications to be developed. The specifications shall be submitted to Company / Client for approval. The Contractor shall ensure that every element in the system shall have an associated Mean Time Between Failure (MTBF) of better than 20,000 hours and that each subsystem shall have a Mean Time To Repair (MTTR) of better than two (2) hours, assuming the appropriate spare part is available. The Availability of the system shall be 99.999 % Scope of Work and Supply Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) System The CCTV System shall include PTZ (Pan / Tilt / Zoom) cameras at the Intake Area, Pipeline Corridor and Receiving Basin (RB) together with fixed cameras, with alarm capability, to accommodate the provision of motion detection facilities around the perimeter of the Intake Area. All cameras shall be IP.
Page 211 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo.co.uk

IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h

5044. o 4093 c d

Company / Client is in the process of evaluating whether to proceed with motion detection or not in the Intake Area and consequently Security Field Layout Drawing No. show layouts with and without motion detection. There shall be a combination of fixed focus cameras and PTZ dome type cameras around the fence of the Intake Area to provide a system capable of motion detection. Only PTZ dome type cameras shall be utilised for a system with no motion detection. In both systems additional PTZ cameras for enhanced monitoring within the Intake Area shall be installed. Refer Equipment List – Telecommunication Equipment, Document No. for quantities. The Contractor shall state in Appendix B the price reduction should motion detection not be implemented. There shall be two (2) PTZ dome type cameras installed at each the Pipeline Corridor and RB. Three (3) new monitors shall be installed in the CCR in the existing CB. Signals from all the cameras in the Intake area shall be available on these monitors. These signals shall also be monitored at the four (4) new monitors located in the PLANT CR at Main Gate House (MGH) via the existing upgraded CCTV network. System control shall be from the existing upgraded CCTV system. The signals from the CCTV cameras at the Pipeline Corridor and the Receiving Basin (RB) shall be monitored / controlled by the existing upgraded CCTV system from PLANT CR at MGH. The existing SDH Optical Transmission System shall be upgraded with Ethernet Modules to provide CCTV Camera(s) signal transport from the Intake area, LNG2 and Receiving Basin (RB) to CCTV monitors at CCR CB and CR PLANT at the Main Gate House and to the existing Network Video Recording System at PLANT CR at MGH which shall be upgraded to accommodate the additional data to be received. The existing upgraded CCTV System Management shall be further upgraded, including software configuration, in order to connect and activate the peripherals e.g cameras and monitors, as required to ensure a seamless integration of the CCTV System at the Intake Area, Pipeline Corridor and RB. Card Access Control System (CACS). The CACS shall be a stand-alone system installed in Gate Houses of the Intake area. Separate controllers shall be installed in each Gate House, integrated together in order to provide redundancy for each Gate House. The Access Control system shall have following facilities: Card Readers to enable in-bound and out-bound vehicle and personnel traffic. Vehicle gates; Turnstile gates; Automatic opening and closure of vehicle gates and turnstiles,
Page 212 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo.co.uk

IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h

Drawing A new firewater (fresh water) system is to be provided at the intake area. fabrication. Appendix and Company / Client Corporate Philosophy for Fire and Safety Company / Client-PHL-S-001 and other related documents. purchase. installation testing and commissioning of the Fire Protection.co. Document No. Safety. Firewater Systems The existing firewater (seawater) system is to be extended to all end user plots at Plant Industrial City. o 4093 c d Controlled access by pre-programmed access card(s) or by security personnel access control. Fire & Gas and Safety Systems described in the project specifications. The card readers shall be compatible to the existing CACS being used at the Main Gate. installation.5044. The illumination level at the fence shall be 150 Lux with overlapping fields facing towards the fence so that failure of one lamp shall not create any dark area on the fence. The existing collection pit shall Page 213 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. The power transformers (220 / 33 kv) located at the intake area. Documentation Documentation shall be provided for the design. Recording of time and date of in-bound and out-bound movement. both existing and new (to be installed) are to be provided with deluge protection. The flood lights with high pressure HPSV lamps shall be used for the same. procurement. The poles shall be located inside the perimeter fence. This shall consist of pole mounted floodlights. security lighting system shall be provided for the Intake Area perimeter fence. Loss Control Philosophies and Drawings in the EPIC package. Refer: Perimeter Security Lighting Layout.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . “as built” and O&M phases and as stated in Specification for Security Control. Testing Testing shall take place in order to demonstrate the specifications of the equipment. Security Lighting A photocell controlled. The training shall be as per manufacturer’s standard syllabus and shall be conducted by the manufacturer. Fire Protection and Loss Prevention General Contractor shall be responsible for but not limited to the following: The Scope of Work includes the design. sub system and system have been achieved Training Training shall be provided as stated in the applicable system Specification for Security Control and is to take place at site.

Fire water distribution layouts (seawater & fresh water network systems) including the deluge system. Fixed and portable. while self contained eye wash stations are to be located at all battery rooms and analyser houses.5044. Page 214 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . All the buildings. o 4093 c d therefore have to be enlarged. hose reels. Contractor shall obtain the necessary permits from Supreme Council and obtain import licence for these detectors Company / Client shall issue recommendation letter to concerned authorities if requested by Contractor Interface these fire alarm systems with the DCS system to alarm at the Main Control Room. water spray nozzles and other specialised fire protection systems). The individual smoke detectors shall be ionisation type. existing PLANT Fire / Incident Control Room at the Main Gatehouse and a Fire Station # . storage. diesel engine driven and jockey pumps). Contractor shall verify the project Specifications and drawings for the following systems and develop as required and implement them. Location of this PLANT Fire / Incident Control Room is within the Security building located at the main entrance of the Plant Industrial City. and FMEA / FTA Study shall be updated by the Contractor. Fire protection of Analyser Houses Fire and gas detection and alarm system Fire and Gas cause & Effect Charts Contractor shall verify the project specifications on Fire and Safety System and Fire Alarm and Gas Detection System and develop them as required and utilise HSSD (High Sensitivity Smoke Detection) system. chlorination units etc. existing gate house and in the new Fire Station #3. Presently all the existing data & displays of Phase are made available at PLANT Fire / Incident Control room at the main gatehouse through Telephone link. including safety showers and face/eye wash stations are to be located at the electro chlorination plant and 33 kv Switchgear Building. Fixed and portable personnel safety equipment. manual and mobile fire fighting equipment (including hydrants. including Operational Safety Study. Main Control Room. Shall have fire and smoke detection and alarm systems which shall be interfaced to the DCS at respective locations and eventually to CCR. Sub-stations. All the information from Phase system shall be available on the operator desk in the existing control room.co. Fire protection system including: Fire water (Fresh Water) supply. LLCC’s. And Fire pumps (electric motor driven. Safety studies and calculation reports performed during FEED.

o 4093 c d Contractor shall carry out. Mechanical Equipment Contractor shall be responsible for but not limited to the following. Lifting Equipment (for maintenance service). as part of the detailed engineering work any / all modifications in the network design as requested and required by Company / Client. data sheets and drawings and update / develop as required to implement them. testing and commissioning of the equipment installed at: Mechanical Cleaning Plant. A third party independent chairman shall be the team leader and the HAZOP shall be carried out as per Company / Client. installation. detection and safety items shown as a minimum. Fire Protection. The Scope of Work includes the review and update of FEED specification and data sheets (as required for detail engineering development). Main Cooling Water Pump Packages (Novated items).5044. All activities of procurement shall be carried out during detail engineering including development of Material Requisition / VDRL dossier. Equipments installed at plant facilities are listed in Equipment List of Project Phase. to comply with any portion of the study actions. finalise and provide the number and types of fire protection. a complete and detailed HAZOP Study during detailed engineering phase. Utility Services. avoiding interference with underground facilities.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h .co. Contractor shall verify the FEED Specifications. Contractor shall verify. Contractor shall include in his work scope for development of equipment specification Page 215 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. HAZOP review shall also be carried out for Vendor Packages. Contractor shall be responsible for developing and establishing the fire protection system. design and provide the Fire Protection. in consultation with Company / Client. taking into account appropriate firewater disposal in the event of a fire in accordance with project Specification. Contractor shall verify storm water sewer systems. Contractor shall develop escape route drawings for the buildings. fabrication. Contractor in a report issued to Company / Client for review and approval shall detail the findings and the actions of the study. Detection and Safety Systems as developed during FEED. Guidelines on the number and types of fire fighting equipment are given in the Company / Client Corporate Philosophy for Fire & Safety (Company / Client) and its references. Electro Chlorination Plant. Contractor shall incorporate. Detection and Safety System Contractor shall update.

Prepare all “as-built” data sheets and drawings.co. a weir. Page 216 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. All necessary co-ordination with Vendors and/or Sub. For other identical pump models. Any further topping up requirements shall be accomplished by supply of deionised water by Contractor till Contract Completion. to verify the intake sump and consequently the screening equipment. Main Cooling Water Pump Packages Contractor shall take full responsibility of owning novated Main Cooling Seawater Pump Packages (including electrical motor and VSDS system items) for Phase in accordance with Contract and ensuring guaranteed pump performance. Participate and witness all required Factory and / or site inspection and testing. when not included (missing or detail engineering development) in Equipment List of Project Phase. further procurement engineering up to commissioning shall be the Contractor’s responsibility and scope shall include the following: Expedite. This may include provision for additional splitter. commissioning and start-up of pumps.5044. Deionised Water for VSDS The first fill of deionised water used for the VSDS cooling system shall be provided by Pump Packages supplier. considering intake screening equipment. Carry out the String test at Vendor’s shop for the first two Main Cooling Water Pump Packages including pumps. flow stabilizing device. The items included in above pumps package shall be as per Purchase Order dossier. Contractor shall take full responsibility to design and construct the sump pit in accordance with above results. ensure TPC is made available for the items of these packages. The sump model tests shall be carried out in the presence of Company / Client and Pump Vendor. review and approve Vendor’s data sheets and drawings. Carry out pre-commissioning. drivers. o 4093 c d and procurement engineering documentation. Organizing / conducting sump (pit) model tests at specified sub-Contractor works to demonstrate pump hydraulic performance with all required functional flexibility. vsdss and associated auxiliaries.Contractors for timely delivery of contracted scope. to finalize the intake sump (and consequently the pumps house dimensions).uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . as required. required performance tests shall be carried out at pump vendor works using electrical test setup established for previous string test. Findings of Sump model test report conducted by sub-Contractor shall be endorsed and implemented by the Contractor. as recommended in sump model test report. Organizing / conducting pump physical model tests at Pump Vendor works to demonstrate pump selection / performance. etc.

Coarse screening shall be performed at Fixed Bar Screens installed at Screen Yard upstream of pumps houses. Prepare all “as-built” data sheets and drawings. Mechanical Cleaning Plant Contractor shall procure these items in accordance with project specifications / data sheet included in FEED dossier (and covered in Equipment List) after review.co. Lifting Equipment Pump Houses and Screen-Yard Cranes (Common crane and additional cranes): In Phase of the project extending of existing 60T / 40T capacity EOT Crane at pumpPage 217 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . o 4093 c d Electro-Chlorination Plant Verify and confirm Chlorination package sizing and selection. verification and detailed engineering and design. Common traversing trash rake (grab bucket cleaner) and debris collection system shall be installed as covered in applicable specifications / data sheets. Carry out pre-commissioning. Co-ordination with Vendors and Subcontractors. Expedite review and approve Vendor’s data sheets and drawings. commissioning and start-up of the packages. Participate and witness all required inspection and testing. Prepare and update the package data sheets and specifications. Contractor shall provide the falling object protection for drum screens. Utility services include Instrument Air Compressor – Dryer Packages. Screen bar material shall be to accomplish detachment / retarding of marine shells clinging to bars.5044. Rotary Drum Screens are to be installed for finer (mesh opening 3 x 3 mm) screening before seawater (service fluid) is fed for further pumping and construction materials requirements are covered in applicable specifications / data sheets. Receiving Basin) and pumps for draining of piping sections / manifolds. Prepare material requisition packages. Carry out bid evaluation and vendor recommendation. verification and detailed engineering and design. Design approval of Company / Client shall be required. Portable Submersible Pumps (for emptying compartments of Pump Sump Pits. Utility Services Contractor shall procure these items in accordance with project specifications / data sheets included in FEED dossier (and covered in Equipment List) after review.

Mobile equipment viz. To assist transportation and handling of materials are not covered in equipment list / material handling studies. And supply the same. o 4093 c d house and 10T capacity Semi-Portal Crane at screen-yard is envisaged. Being construction / operation aids these mobile facilities are envisaged to be directly purchased by Company / Client.co. Contractor shall procure these items in accordance with project specifications / data sheets included in FEED dossier after review. only guiding specification / data shall be provided by Contractor as per detail engineering developments. procedures. Noise Control Contractor shall be responsible for but not limited to the following: General Requirements (Refer to Company / Client Corporate Philosophy for Fire & Safety Company / Client-Environment Protection Law National) Contractor shall comply with all rules.5044. Fork Lifts etc. This new facility requirement is addressed in Material Handling Study Report and FEED dossier Equipment List covers the required equipment to be installed for servicing of manifold area items. Contractor shall prepare procurement-engineering dossier when required for procurement of off-the-shelf items such as manual chain-hoist with trolley on monorail beam etc. Other Handling / Lifting Facility: Contractor shall procure and supply all material handling items covered in Equipment List as stated in Material Handling Study Report. Manifold Area Cranes: Phase II of project facilities envisages Craneage to handle ccvs and Isolation Valves installed at manifold area. verification and detailed engineering and design. guidelines. Common crane study report included in FEED dossier provides details of modification to be implemented. which shall be updated during detailed engineering stage after review and verification. Contractor shall carryout RAM study and confirm requirement of additional Cranes at pump house and Screen Yard. The “Environmental Guidelines & Environmental Protection Criteria for Plant Industrial City Page 218 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Besides this. Mobile Crane. an additional crane requirement at above two locations is subject to RAM study recommendation.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . programmes and policies in the “Environmental Guidelines & Environmental Protection Criteria for Plant Industrial City during the execution of the WORK. regulations.

In general. and power. Contractor shall recommend such alternative or additional acoustical design features or treatment as needed to meet the requirements. Engineering Evaluations Contractor shall verify or finalise the engineering evaluations to ensure that the environmental control systems as designed shall comply with the required regulations. Noise control treatments proposed. Vendor’s shop test reports. Equipment sound power levels used in the model.Summary Report".5-decibel (dba) increments. These reports shall contain the following: Equipment list. Page 219 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. at fence line. The final calculation shall be based on the vendor quoted and tested equipment sound levels. Contractor shall conduct a co-ordinated overall noise control program. to ensure compliance with the FACILITY sound level provisions. speed. The final report shall be called the "Noise Control Design Basis . Environmental Control Contractor shall be responsible for but not limited to the following: General Design Requirements Contractor shall finalise the design documents incorporating design data including emission data obtained from the Vendor’s. Vendor sound level reports. Contractor shall be responsible for compliance with the local Environmental Control Regulation and Project Specifications provided in the Contract. In addition.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . These calculations shall be included in an initial and final report. the FACILITY should be designed to meet the ambient air quality and water quality guidelines of the National regulations as specified in the Project Specifications. Equipment sound levels at one meter. Estimated industrial community sound level at Company / Client determined locations. which shall be submitted for Company / Client approval. Contractor shall be responsible for identifying any necessary reduction of equipment sound level limits specified in Company / Client specification. o 4093 c d The initial calculation shall be based on equipment meeting the sound level and sound power level limits of Company / Client Specification. Estimated sound level contours including in-plant areas. Equipment physical data such as size. Contractor shall ensure that the sound pressure level of cooling water pumps shall not exceed the values specified in Contract by applying any attenuation devices.5044. including cost effectiveness comparisons.co. and at inner edge of perimeter infrastructure road in 2. Equipment location.

Twenty percent (20%) of the spares shall be connected and configured as spares as detailed in the specification provided under Appendix. earthing system. Provision for expansion shall be made for connecting any additional signals (future). all transformers shall be designed with suitable bushing / terminal enclosures or bus-ducts. connect and configure the signals for monitoring and controlling the FACILITY pertaining to this Project only. Company / Client shall have access to the simulation models while the simulation work is being done by the Contractor. Due to the marine / dusty / humid environment at Plant area. Cathodic Protection Systems shall cover the following: Seawater screen equipments-Bar screens-Drum screens-Stop log guides-Stop logsFacility Foundations-Pump house pit concrete re-bars-Receiving basin concrete rebars-Outfall structure concrete re-bars including discharge channels-All building foundations-All structure pipe supports/ foundations within the water table or / and below + /. Contractor shall undertake Hydraulic Model studies and submit results during the detail design stage. Contractor to co-ordinate with PLANT and Electrical authority through Company / Client.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . detail engineering. Contractor shall comply with the following when preparing the hydraulic model: “Marine Works” in particular “Physical model requirement” Page 220 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. supply of material.co. commissioning and start up of cathodic protection systems. concrete rebars of facility foundations and pipe support foundations adjacent to the Intake Area. An impressed current cathodic protection technique shall be utilized / applied to provide the corrosion protection for seawater screen equipments. spreadsheets & Manuals used for the analysis. installation supervision. design. to avoid pollution and random tripping.5044.0.0 m -Earthing Systems -Pump houses-Building area at Intake-Receiving basin-Manifold areas-LLCCs-Detail Design Specifics Contractor shall incorporate the specific following requirements into the detailed design Scope of Work. Contractor shall submit to Company / Client Hydraulic Models of Phase along with licensed Software programme. o 4093 c d Cathodic Protection System Contractor shall be responsible for the pre-design survey. Sacrificial anode cathodic protection technique shall be utilized / applied for the protection of pipe support foundations in areas remote from Intake Are. Contractor shall engineer.

Allow for surveying and relocating sand dunes within the pipe corridors. control building. Number. surface and spill water to the surface water drainage. Design and install chain link fences around building and local Control room areas as a minimum. mainly pipeline routing / layout. m3/hr. Allow for all concrete. where appropriate. Design and construct roads as access to substations. Allow to clean up the beach twice at start and at completion of works (at intake and outfall areas) for a distance of 500m extending both sides of intake and outfall areas. e. Allow for temporary access roads during construction such as diversion roads. o 4093 c d Ensure that minimum flow of seawater is 300000. Excavation may require blasting. Water shall be collected by a network of concrete paved ditches and discharged into the sea. type and location are subject to Company / Client formal approval. Allow for cut and fill complete with compaction to 100% of Maximum Dry Density (MDD) as specified for the full widths and lengths of pipe corridors.g. Such roads shall be subject to Company / Client formal approval. Contractor shall carry out site grading of pipe corridors to allow the flow of rain. Total distance of 3000m. intake and Page 221 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. i. Building “X” has to be minimum 500m2 to accommodate all personnel and equipment in accordance with the best international standards. Allow for the design and installation of access over Cooling Water Piping. pump house and other buildings as shown in the Plot Plan. Covered car parking is required for the operation building and as shown on the drawing attached in Appendix Contractor is to allow for the design and construction of 10% extra for each building. in accordance with the Uniform Building Code for Zone 1. Therefore.5044. Protection to ditches and warning signs shall be allowed for. All pipes shall be installed above finished grade on pipe supports / saddles (complete with inserts) as the design shall dictate.co. Contractor shall develop and optimise pipe corridors to take all Phase pipes. Allow for grading area completely around intake structure by cut / fill and compact to receive Phase structures. chlorination building. Allow for the design and construction of surface water drainage to cater for rain and spill water. “V” or trapezoid concrete paved ditches shall be designed and constructed. whether mixed and placed in Marine works and/or other structures to comply with project specifications.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Excavation in rock & varying materials and backfilling shall be carried out in Phase. Contractor shall have to design and construct building “X” to be 550 m2. Allow for seismic loading.e.

etc. FMEA. At the Consumer Lots / Interfaces. The work shall be carried out by a third party consultant or by the Contractor itself provided it has the in-house capability to the satisfaction of Company / Client. All the local Control Rooms at the consumer lot interface as well as other electrical installations shall have separate battery rooms and space for telecommunication equipment. OPTAN etc.co.e. Protection settings shall include 11kv source circuit breaker upto down stream LV circuits of LLCCS. Hydraulic Studies by HRW. “Vendor”.5044. The Contractor shall implement any approved recommendation or findings of studies carried out during FEED such as RAM. SYSOP. check protection settings etc.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . the terms “seller”. The PLANT 11kv network is not part of the CCWP Phase I installation. existing consumers have generally agreed to provide the required LV power supplies up to the battery limit. existing ‘As-Built’ drawings shall be updated to reflect the new works. protection settings. Calculations (using CYME) & report of load flow. as performed by Contractor. Verify that the new loads when added shall not affect operations. Perform load survey. therefore all works involving tapping into the existing 11kv network of PLANT shall involve the following: Collection of ‘As-Builts” drawings and CYME calculations if any. from PLANT and verify that they are suitable for the proposed modifications i. SAFOP. Sample Only Ends --------------------------------------Chapter 9 Pc e e r umt or n General Contractor shall perform the procurement and expediting of all materials and equipment necessary for the performance of the WORK in a timely manner and in accordance with the Execution Programme. Design of elevated floor slabs of substations shall be as per Drg. For the purpose of this Contract. soft copy of CYME calculations shall be handed over as part of final documentation . o 4093 c d outfall areas. On completion of the proposed works. Also. Shall be submitted to Company / Client for review. “Supplier” and “SubPage 222 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. The Contractor shall carry out a complete study on ‘Material’ for the entire Phase project and produce a report for Company / Client’s approval during the early stages of the project.

12 Transportation of all materials to Site including packing to sea freight/air freight standard as required. commissioning.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . 8 Adherence to any standardisation requirements from Company / Client. start-up and performance testing (as necessary). 13 Storage. 15 Preparation and issue to Company / Client of completed spare parts interchange ability record (SPIR) forms within 3 months of placement of Purchase Orders. 20 Payment to Vendors Efficient use of materials. 10 Provision of the best possible warranties and guarantees from vendors for Company / Client’s benefit 11 Inspection and testing of all procured materials by TPC. 18 Procurement of 1-year operations spare parts (If required to do so by Company / Client). 14 Identification of spare parts requirements. 2 Preparation of all materials take off. Operations & Maintenance Manuals etc.co. preservation and handling at Site. 3 Issue closeout report highlighting vendor performance. Contractor shall be responsible for the performance of the following activities. Page 223 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. 1 Identification of material procurement requirements and preparation of a procedure for Company / Client approval. pre-commissioning.5044. 19 Customs clearance including payment of customs duty and payment of legalisation fees. o 4093 c d Contractor” shall be interchangeable in meaning and context. taking due account of Company / Client list of approved Vendor 7 Consideration of minimum maintenance philosophy. 16 Procurement of pre-commissioning. 3 Preparation of requisitions 4 Preparation of Purchase Orders 5 Purchasing and Expediting 6 All vendors selection / evaluation. 2 Obtaining all necessary certification and “as built” drawings and data from vendors including Quality Assurance Record Manuals. 9 Consideration of quality related to Contractor’s warranties and guarantees. commissioning and start-up spare parts. 1 Vendor support and assistance during construction. 17 Procurement of insurance spares (If specified to do so by Company / Client).

The Contractor shall consider that the items listed in the Material Requisition shall be ordered by Company / Client on Ex-Works packed and loaded on truck / trailer basis. equipment. Company / Client intends to award the purchase orders for the above critical long lead items prior to Contract award.5044. variable speed system.co. Upon award of Contract Company / Client shall assign the purchase orders to the Contractor through a novation agreement. The Contractor shall take over full responsibility for the successful design and supply of the long lead items to meet the project engineering design requirements and schedule. o 4093 c d Long Lead Items Novated to Contractor 1 Sample Only During the FEED Phase of the Project. which shall be supplied by multiple Vendors. GRP flanges. Contractor shall endorse the purchase order requisitions and specifications. A copy of the Material Requisition package for both the above long lead items is enclosed with this tender document in Appendix. packages and systems that have a longer delivery time are identified as under:  Main Cooling Seawater Pumps  Main Seawater GRP Piping 2 The main cooling seawater pump scope of supply includes pumps. etc. Contractor shall review and verify the purchase order requisitions in all aspects and if necessary shall carry out all required additions or amendments to purchase order requisitions to cover up any omissions / errors / suraj_engineer@yahoo.uk 4 5 6 7 8 9 Page 224 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . GRP fittings. 3 Scope of supply for main seawater GRP piping includes GRP pipes. in order to maintain the project schedule. variable speed motors. GRP piping is split into 11 packages. transformers etc. Quotations when received shall be reviewed for technical compliance with the enquiry and requisitions. Contractor shall be the single point responsible party for the long lead items in all respects. Complete purchase requisitions including specifications have been developed and issued to potential suppliers.

Review bids received from vendors and prepare technical and non-priced bid tabulations advising the selected vendor and the ranking of the others. including quantity and unit prices thereof. One Year Operational Spare Parts. Purchasing Contractor shall be responsible for the following purchasing activities as a minimum: 1 Prepare RFQ specifications and documents for all equipment and materials in accordance with the Project specifications. Commissioning.co. o 4093 c d shortcomings/deficiencies as deemed necessary for the successful design. One Year Operational Spare Parts. requirement of Pre-Commissioning. supply and commissioning of all long lead items with prior approval of Company / Client. Procurement of those items which are not listed in approved List shall be subject to Company / Client approval and shall be carried out on a world-wide competitive basis except when technical regulations or specifications require otherwise. Vendor site support services and Final Documentation have been reviewed by Company / Client and included properly in the enquiry document. availability of Vendors’ recommended Pre-Commissioning. Technical bid tabulation and Vendor’s technical proposals / clarifications shall also be provided to Company / Client for approval if Vendor is technically acceptable. suraj_engineer@yahoo. Review all equipment/ material selection and verify their suitability and operability for the service intended. Company / Client review and approval shall be sought prior to placement of purchase orders for all major / critical equipment/items. present work load and suitability of the vendors are satisfactory to meet project objectives. 2001 edition and requirement of Company / Client QA/QC procedure Conduct purchasing in accordance with Company / Client approved vendors.uk 3 4 Page 225 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Ensure that the terms and conditions of purchase. assess and ensure that the financial status. Rfqs shall be subjected to Company / Client Approval. Contractor shall abide by the National regulations regarding the countries of origin. 2 RFQ shall specify the Quality Program of Vendor(s) which shall comply with the requirements of ISO 9000 series.5044. Before placement of purchase orders. and Subcontractor List. Commissioning. SPIR forms.

Contractor shall ensure that Critical Equipment such as Main Cooling Water Pumps. Provide copies of non-priced purchase orders or any revision thereto to Company / Client. installation. suraj_engineer@yahoo. Motor Operated Valves. inspection and commissioning for the piping system supplied by the particular manufacturer. Prepare purchase orders. Switchgears.5044. to carry out detail pipeline engineering. drawings. Review and approval of Vendor’s drawings and documents (core drawings / specification to be submitted to Company / Client prior to approval by Contractor).e. shop inspection and testing requirements). Purchase requisitions. All the activities related to novated items above.uk 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Page 226 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . QA / QC. Issue status reports on purchasing activities to Company / Client in accordance with Appendix D. manufacturing. Mechanical Cleaning Equipment.co. Chlorination Plant. VSDS. Control Valves etc. not prototype. All Vendor’s drawings and documentation shall be in accordance with Company / Client Engineering Standard for draughting Contractor shall engage the services of Glass Reinforced Polyester (GRP) pipeline manufacturer / designer. as a single point responsible party. fabrication. o 4093 c d 5 Contractor shall submit to Company / Client lists and prices of 1 Year Operational Spare Parts with the technical and non-priced bid tabulation. complete with all attachments (i. Contractor shall ensure that Purchase Orders are placed with only reliable Vendors/Suppliers approved by Company / Client. Purchase all project equipment and materials as per the specifications and in accordance with the requirements of Execution Programme. Shall be of proven type equipment. specifications. jointing. spare parts requirements. Vendors’ and Suppliers’ assistance requirements.

Any actual or potential deviations or slippage from these requirements shall be immediately transmitted to Company / Client in writing. personnel and documentation from RFQ to delivery at Construction Site for Vendors’ items including the materials on suborders. the following: Contractor shall expedite and take all appropriate actions to obtain all technical data and other documentation. associated documents and vendors’ assistance. 2 Contractor shall not limit his expediting activities to only the progress reporting. The system shall be able to identify those items of the equipment and materials which are critical or are potentially critical from Execution Programme point of view and require special attention to ensure timely delivery. Contractor shall expedite all the replacement materials. including completed SPIR forms and Final Documentation.5044.uk Page 227 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . o 4093 c d Expediting 1 In accordance with execution program. and shall be responsible for ensuring that all equipment and materials suraj_engineer@yahoo. but not be limited to. Contractor shall submit weekly Material Status Report to Company / Client. Contractor shall take appropriate remedial action with Vendors who are behind schedule. Contractor shall maintain a system to monitor progress on all the purchase orders and prepare and issue a detailed schedule to Company / Client in accordance with Appendix. 3 4 5 6 Inspection and Testing 1 Contractor shall execute inspection activities for all equipment and materials in accordance with the following requirements: 2 Contractor shall carry out all inspection and testing required for all equipment and materials. technical assistance. Contractor’s expediting activities shall include. All expediting efforts shall be directed towards achieving or improving the equipment and material delivery dates while maintaining the purchase order design specification. conditions and Schedule Completion Date. Contractor shall promptly recommend appropriate alternative remedial action to Company / Client and implement the same. Vendor’s data. During the Guarantee Period.co. from the vendors and their sub-vendors in a timely manner. along with an action plan to achieve it. Contractor shall perform expediting of equipment. materials.

inspection visits and test witnessing. Contractor shall prepare a document establishing criticality rating system of all equipment and identify the level of surveillance inspection required for Company / Client’s review and approval and shall form part of its overall quality management system and plan. Contractor shall suraj_engineer@yahoo. Provision shall be made at all times for Company / Client to have the option of participating in pre-inspection meetings.uk 4 5 6 7 8 Page 228 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . reduced load tests and / or no load string tests shall be as specified in the Contract. Inspection reports shall be issued to Company / Client within three (3) calendar days of the inspection visit. Contractor shall be responsible for all quality assurance activities including Vendor(s) and / or sub-vendors inspection. or alternative procedures designed to ensure an equally high standard of inspection. o 4093 c d are strictly in accordance with the specifications as defined in the Purchase Order.5044. Contractor shall note that FAT shall be witnessed by Company / Client Engineers and all the services and facilities to Company / Client Engineers shall be provided by Contractor in accordance with relevant Section of Appendix (not included). 3 Contractor shall specify identifiable requirements based on Company / Client' class of inspection' for each material requisition. Contractor shall submit to Company / Client written reports on expediting and inspection carried out in sufficient detail for Company / Client to monitor the effectiveness of inspection. The minimum Company / Client’s requirements are listed below: Inspection shall be performed by qualified Third Party inspectors employed by Contractor. where necessary at the source of Vendor(s) and / or subvendors materials.co. The minimum requirement of Company / Client is specified. Shop inspection shall be carried out by Contractor at both the point of manufacture and. Contractor shall provide twenty-one (21) days notice to Company / Client for FAT. Contractor shall prepare anticipated weekly testing programs providing Company / Client sufficient advance notice for their participation (at least fourteen (14) days). Full load tests.

type Test Certificate where required.co. performance test Certificates. Reviewing the high criticality rating of equipment and packages before the placement of purchase orders. for statutory. Storage and Damage Reports (OS & DRS) may be required. The list of Company / Client approved TPC Subcontractors is provided in Exhibit of Appendix. Contractor shall prepare a Certification Matrix in accordance with the requirement of Exhibit of Appendix for Company / Client Review / approval. Reviewing Vendor’s data requirements lists and identifying those documents suraj_engineer@yahoo. insurance. o 4093 c d prepare and provide to Company / Client an inspection co-ordination procedure to be developed in accordance with the Contract. 10 Certification Contractor shall be responsible for arranging and co-ordinating the use of TPC services where required for equipment and materials in the country of origin. Contractor shall be responsible for checking all material on arrival at site and the issuance of any Overage. Attending kick-off meetings and pre-inspection meetings to specify and ensure that the entire Quality requirements have been met. 9 Contractor shall compile all fabrication and manufacturing data folders containing mill test certificates.5044. and all other relevant inspection data and submit the same upon delivery of equipment and /or material to Construction Site. Ensuring that type of certification required by Company / Client is compliant with the requirements. The TPC scope shall include but not limited to the following: 1 2 Checking Project equipment and bulk material list.uk 3 4 5 Page 229 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Minimum requirement of TPC services is provided in Exhibit of Appendix Such requirement shall in no way relieve Contractor of his responsibilities under the Contract. machinery test certificates. or any other reasons. The TPC shall function independently and report simultaneously to Company / Client and Contractor.

Taking responsibility for authentication of shipping documents (including Certificate of Origin) by National Embassy / Consulate. Reviewing and certifying Vendors quality plans and specifications for the procurement certification level. airworthy packing. Develop plans and procedures for freight forwarding. Reviewing the documentation prepared by Vendors as part of the Final Documentation. marking and loading. Such work shall include: Preparation of seaworthy / documentation specifications. Conducting monitoring visits to Vendors to review procedures for generating certification.co.uk 6 Page 230 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . marking. handling and customs clearance of equipment and materials to ensure that all freight is consigned to suraj_engineer@yahoo. o 4093 c d required for certification purpose.5044. 6 Checking that the standards requested by Company / Client have been implemented for a wide range of products and the minimal approach has been adopted. marking and transport of equipment from the source of supply determined in the purchase order to the Construction Site. shipping and 3 4 5 Inspection and certification as the case may be of packing. 2 Contractor shall be responsible for organising and co-ordinating packing. Insuring that all special requirements for equipment in sour service have been complied with. 7 8 9 10 Shipment and Freight forwarding 1 Contractor shall be responsible for sanctioning the release of completed equipment and materials for shipment after satisfactory completion of final inspections and certification and shall execute forwarding activities for all equipment / material (including long lead equipment items).

maintain and issue a monthly shipping progress report and monthly shipping forecast in a format approved by Company / Client. legalising/authorisation of Certificate of origin and other shipping documents. Prepare. Details of these charges are given in Appendix. Inland Transportation and Customs clearance Contractor is fully responsible for arranging inland transportation. cargo berths etc. 7 Organise and ensure timely shipment of materials and equipment to Construction Site. o 4093 c d arrive at the Construction Site on time. 2 Fragile equipment sensitive to the weather conditions (such as instruments) shall be stored in totally enclosed. Contractor shall comply with Plant Port Regulations given in Appendix. legalisation fees and transportation of all equipment / material to the Construction Site Storing and Material traceability 1 All equipment and materials shall be carefully handled and stored in adesignated area at Construction Site.5044. Contractor shall give preference to Plant Port while importing materials. Plant Port is a modern port and has necessary FACILITY like exclusive heavy load berth. 8 9 10 11 12 Sea / Air shipment. customs clearance including payment of customs duty. Contractor shall provide its own craneage facilities for all loading and offloading operations at the heavy load and dry dock berths at Plant Port. sea/air freight. Arrange for the importation of all materials and equipment purchased. voyage insurance. suraj_engineer@yahoo.co.uk Page 231 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Contractor shall be charged by PLANT for the use of the port facilities. When installed. To facilitate Project import materials. for receiving and off-loading at Construction Site including organizing and securing approval from relevant authorities for shipment and transportation of heavy and bulky equipments and materials. they shall be protected from the sun or from sand ingress by temporary shelters or plastic sheets. heated and/or air-conditioned rooms.

Commissioning and Initial Operation and Maintenance spare parts. ex-work Unit Price including seaworthy packing. o 4093 c d 3 Handling. 2 Contractor shall develop a procedure for the proper receipt. chemicals and lubricants. For this purpose. Commissioning and Initial Operation &Maintenance Spare Parts and others 1 Contractor shall procure and supply Pre-Commissioning. All Materials including spare parts shall be subjected to an appropriate traceability procedure so as to ensure easy retrieval of materials and related documentation for each item in all circumstances. The Contractor shall provide list of all spares prior to their usage for site suraj_engineer@yahoo. Contractor to ensure that while submitting their quotation.5044. Company / Client shall not approve any purchase order to be placed unless accompanied by One Year Operational Spare Parts and Capital spares list and prices. 4 Spare Parts 1 While floating RFQ. Initial Spare Parts – spare parts to safe guard the operation of equipment during the start up / running –in and first year of operation. Contractor shall provide experienced personnel for warehouse management and goods inward / outward control utilising PC based software allowing status progress at all times. storage and handling of the spare parts and provide all the supplies and services in accordance with the same. preservation and storage of equipment and materials shall be carried out in conformance with Vendors' instructions and Company / Client specifications. number of Units recommended. 3 Pre-Commissioning. stacking.uk 3 Page 232 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . special tools and handling gear for each equipment as necessary up to Completion. Contractor shall instruct the Vendors to indicate the requirement of Spare Parts as shown below: 2 Commissioning Spare Parts – spares for pre-commissioning and commissioning. Vendors shall provide description of the Spare Part items.co. Spare Parts for Normal Operation – spares for day-to-day maintenance for the period of one year following the initial operation.

The Contractor shall record all spares used during the site activities and update the list on a monthly basis. Contractor shall establish that the Vendors / Suppliers proposed have previous experience of supplying similar type of equipment / materials to such projects. 2 For procurement of equipment and material for which no vendor list has been provided by Company / Client.co. When specifications call for a particular brand or type. The Prices quoted by Vendors are to be kept firm throughout the duration of the Contract and no escalation in this regard shall be entertained by Company / Client.5044. Company / Client may procure One Year Operational Spare Parts and Capital Spares through Contractor for which Contractor shall be reimbursed in accordance with the provisions of Appendix of the Contract. It shall be noted that One year Operational spare parts are required to maintain the FACILITY immediately after Completion Date. Shall be undertaken expeditiously by Contractor. Spare Parts for Normal Operation One Year Operational Spare Parts as such do not form part of Contractor supplied items under the Lump Sum Contract Price. any proposed substitutions suraj_engineer@yahoo. Company / Client approved vendors and Sub-Cont 1 Contractor shall ensure that it procures equipment and materials only from Company / Client approved Vendors (Ref Exhibit of Appendix not included). Company / Client may instruct Contractor to procure the One Year Operational Spare Parts. Contractor shall provide all relevant information for the vendor proposed for Company / Client to determine the suitability of vendor and its ability to comply with the pertinent requirements of the Contract. SPIR Forms SPIR procedure and a sample SPIR form are enclosed in Appendix. Consequently completion of the SPIR form with all related drawings. Contractor shall propose suitable Vendors. 4 The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that the spares provided (type and quantity) match with the requirements of the equipment.uk Page 233 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . 3 4 Any deviation to the Company / Client approved vendor list shall be avoided. Following review of the SPIR. Contractor shall obtain through the successful Vendors a completed SPIR form duly filled in within three (3) months of placement of Purchase Orders. etc. o 4093 c d activities.

5044. 2. Records in the form of correspondence / confirmation from vendor demonstrating inability of the listed Company / Client approved vendors to supply the equipment / materials. Records demonstrating that the vendor has appropriate and relevant industry experience and in particular experience for supplying similar item. timely delivery and performance of the vendors’ equipment.co. specifications. and all applicable engineering and technical standards and codes. o 4093 c d shall be subject to prior approval by Company / Client. Company / Client may instruct Contractor to undertake registration of some Vendor’s / Supplier’s with Company / Client Materials Department before approval of Vendor / Supplier. Contractor shall plan construction in such a way that the FACILITY Page 234 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . 5 Notwithstanding the foregoing. Contractor shall be fully responsible for the procurement. materials and services. Should Contractor propose the use of non-recommended vendors. Once the pre-qualification documents have been reviewed. Contractor shall carry out all construction work in accordance with procedures and methods prepared during detail engineering for all construction trades in accordance with the Project specifications. it shall present the following information to Company / Client in the form of Prequalification document for review and approval prior to placing related Purchase Order(s): Financial records demonstrating the commercial stability of the proposed vendor for the last three (3) years. All details of the FACILITY shall comply with Approved For Construction drawings. Records demonstrating that the vendor has services support for its products or services in National (preferred) or in the Middle East. 6 7 8 ---------------------------------Chapter 10 C t cn or t n uo s i Introduction 1.

Provision of personnel small tools 9. auxiliaries. timely and reliable manner. storage. from the commencement of the Work to its completion. develop and maintain the overall functional organisation and corresponding resources. where and as necessary by providing additional means. o 4093 c d can be built. Establishing Construction Site safety rules and providing a Safety Manager. Subcontractor shall fully adapt his organisation for each specific phase of the Work to fulfil all Subcontract requirements and accordingly shall mobilise. gas.5044. Provision. erection. During construction of the FACILITY. testing and control equipment. tools. General Construction Requirements The FACILITY for the Project shall be provided and constructed in a safe. Provision of safety equipment and tools for personnel and works 8. In order to ensure the proper performance of the Work in accordance with the Subcontract Schedule. scaffolding. necessary for the performance of the Work in particular for handling. but are not limited to: 6. etc. Contractor construction work shall include. testing. Contractor shall comply with Company / Client safety and work permit procedures. In particular. transportation. Provision of maintenance and running of construction equipment 7. All construction equipment. 5. including when. protection. the following: 1. Provision of mechanical equipment and material necessary for working in water free conditions..uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Commissioned and Started-Up in sequence. prefabrication. These include. Pre-Commissioned.co. but not limited to. and shall enforce a set of Approved safety rules and precautions for Work at Construction Sites. Obtaining all approvals. temporary works. consumables. and permits for the Work as per Company / Client regulations. lubricants. whatever the volume or flow 10. to achieve the Scheduled Completion Date. warehousing. Temporary Facilities and other facilities required for construction: 4. Officers and staff for the Work. 3. and personnel (including management and supervision). Page 235 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. 2. The latest construction techniques and equipment shall be used to provide an effective construction approach. Providing construction personnel. distribution and disposal of consumables (oil. Contractor shall Commission the utilities well in advance for the purpose of Start-Up of the FACILITY.

Programme. taking into account the interfaces with TEL. Verification / checking the conformity of the Work and provide records 19. Monthly status of material taken over by Contractor Page 236 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Provision of materials and apparatus for the technological laboratory to test materials. weekly. 22. 24. MMAA and other parties involved.) And auxiliary materials (planks. Providing detailed manpower and construction facilities deployment charts.) 11. lodging and transportation for construction personnel from Contractor. to be submitted for approval to Company / Client 17. 7. Supplies status reports. Physical progress reports 5. tarpaulins etc. Work schedules 4. Providing schedule and progress reporting in accordance with the requirements of the Contract: 1. flash) 2. unpriced copy of purchase orders. o 4093 c d etc. Construction equipment status reports 6. Provision of scaffolding and protection material 12. Preparing detailed schedules for the Work in accordance with the Execution 23. Contractor must be able to prove at all times that the quality of the Supply incorporated in the Work complies with the quality specified in the Contract. timbers. Providing accommodation. monthly. 21. Safety equipment 14. Subcontractors and Vendors. certificate of origin of all equipment and materials to be provided by the Contractor. which shall be submitted for Company / Client approval.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h .5044. regular monitoring of this schedule and making appropriate adjustments to obtain most efficient usage.co. In addition Contractor shall ensure: 16. HSE report 3. Preparing construction procedures for the Work. Progress reports (daily. Execution and recording of all test and inspection for equipment / materials and Work 18. Electrical authorirty. 15. welders and provision of materials and apparatus to test all completed works 13. Managing and co-ordinating and supervising the work of Subcontractors and Vendors to ensure Work is performed on schedule and in accordance with the quality and safety requirements. Issuance of construction method statement as per Company / Client request (for critical works) 20. Preparation of the Inspection and Test Plan (ITP) in compliance with the above and the Contract conditions.

including all complementary works. etc. but is not limited to: Contractor and Subcontractor’s site facilities such as office. This shall include. raw and potable water and sewer networks. Inside the allocated areas. tests and control Contractor and Subcontractor office facilities Company / Client office facilities Contractor and Subcontractor warehouse All site utilities for Contractor needs to include. Raw) 4. o 4093 c d 8. Maintaining construction records in formats to be submitted for Company / Client approval. Updating of the list of work items drawings 9. etc. storage area.5044. civil. It includes. Potable water Supply cost (for Contractor use) 5. Air supply 11. etc. Nitrogen supply for Works including cost (for Contractor use) 10. Inside the allocated areas. warehouse. 10. but not limited to: 1. Power supply cost (for Contractor use) 3. rubbish and trash 13. Air supply costs (for Contractor use) 12. Treatment of the raw water for hydro tests 8. concrete or bituminous mix production plant. Fuels and lubricants for the temporary facilities and construction equipment 14. electrical. and their retention at Construction Site for the required duration. power supply. Including all complementary works. dismantling and removal of all temporary Site facilities. Potable or raw water supply cost (for construction works use except for piping hydro test) 6. Nitrogen supply for pre-commissioning works 9. sanitary building. Disposal of all sewer and wastewater. Water supply (Potable. Providing all Temporary Facilities required for the Work: Erection. Such scaffolding and safety equipment must be left in place as long as necessary to allow inspection. Ensuring timely mobilisation of Vendors' representatives and/or any specialists. Raw water supply cost (for piping or equipment hydro test) 7. workshop. Power supply 2. but Page 237 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo.co. maintenance. shelter. Lighting of the works areas Temporary works to prevent personnel from injuries and/or properties from damage Scaffolding and safety equipment necessary for the Works.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Providing QA / QC and inspection services for the Work. 15. civil. Providing a quality assurance plan and developing quality control procedures. 16.

mechanical. shutdown and started up in a satisfactory manner. Provide housekeeping personnel for the Work on the basis of one cleaner per 25 persons. The nominative organisation charts down to but excluding Foremen level and corresponding CV's 5. o 4093 c d not limited to civil. Maintaining and operating an adequate system of control of availability of drawings and specifications at their latest revision at all places where the Work is performed. welding. Managing field queries. structural. Mobilize in a timely manner the construction management team to Construction Site in National. maintained. Preparing a complete set of data sheets. Construction equipment (type and quantity) 8. 17. track. Scaffolding plan.co.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . channels and secondary roads to original conditions and specification. piping. Contractor shall mobilise a Third Party Inspection Agency (TPI) to perform the following: NDT and interpretation-Civil Lab Testing-Load Tests 18. Detailed construction execution plan. Contractor shall mobilise adequate level of Inspectors.5044. Contractor should in particular submit: 1. 22. The Site temporary facilities detailed layout drawing and description 10. Personnel per category and nationality and split between the different disciplines and significant activities within each discipline as required in the Particular Exhibits 7. Allocation of Site temporary facilities and storage areas to Contractor 9. The list of resources assigned to the Work: 6. 24. including resources. Any other required Personnel and QA / QC Inspectors shall be provided by Contractor. 19. finished materials) detailed layout 11. 20. QA / QC Procedures and Equipment shall be subject to Company / Client’s approval. specifications and as-built drawings. technical solution proposed material specification and scaffolding management (HSE) procedure 4. taking into account the Site constraints 2. instrument and painting inspectors. electrical. Assisting Company / Client with technical safety reviews to confirm that the FACILITY can be operated. 21. Preparing rigging studies as required. Maintaining and operating an adequate material control procedure at all places where the Work is performed. Page 238 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. field changes and revision of drawings. The Site storage areas (raw materials. 23. Mobilisation plan 3. 12. Reinstate existing roads.

site layout. 15. Arrange for protection of turtle eggs during construction. steel structures. Contractor shall be responsible for the following: 1. dust. 18. Contractor shall do whatever is necessary to take care of rock. Protection and preventive maintenance of the Material handed over to or supply by Contractor as per the state of art and the supplier’s recommendations. Daily collecting and removal of any materials used within the works areas such as iron scrap. equipment or goods located nearby 8. and duct) within the battery limits. Contractor is aware that there are buried services (pipe. Daily cleaning of Site and of all tracks and roads used by Contractor and located in the vicinity of the Site. Make good to the original condition at Contractor's cost of the parts damaged by 4. and that hand excavation shall be required in certain areas during construction unless confirmed in writing by Company / Client. Contractor shall dismantle and remove X nos. painting. 17. Housekeeping of the areas allocated to Contractor 12.) 5. Any precaution and measure to avoid damage caused by traffic. facilities and equipment on the Site 7. if required. Protection of all tracks and roads used by Contractor and subcontractor and located in the vicinity of the Site 3. Temporary Cofferdam and take ownership of sheet piles and deliver the pre-cast units to Plant Port as directed by Company / Client. Contractor or his representatives (Concrete.) 2. cable. Installation. location and set-up of temporary Site facilities etc. piping. etc. o 4093 c d 13. instruments. structures. piping. Contractor shall be responsible for the following: 9. 14.5044.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . obstructions or/and unsuitable materials present within the Construction Site. buildings. Disposal of refuse and debris in the relevant authorised dumps 11. for Page 239 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. debris etc 10. This also includes spraying of water. Contractor to protect personnel. noise and any other cause that may affect the personnel. dismantling and removal of all temporary protection devices used by 6.co. 16. Respect of Site constraints (safety. and that co-ordination with Company / Client / Plant (for asbuilt drawings) shall be required during detail design. Contractor shall within 30 calendar days from Contract Effective Date supply and install its own dewatering system in the cofferdam constructed by other Contractor. units in operation.

excavation and blasting. Regulations for disposal of Dredged Materials within Plant Industrial City 7. Contractor shall accept the Construction Site work "as it is". Destruction of temporary paving and concrete works including removal. roads. including additional temporary fencing. Safety and Environment Plan in conformance with Company / Client requirements Construction Site Preparation and Construction Site Access 1. provide the complete required infrastructure. Health. Company / Client Lifting Equipment regulations 5. Consolidated Permit to Work system in PlantIndustrial City. Electrical Safety Instructions 2. ditching. temporary boundary fencing. sewers. dispose of ground and rain water. and shall complete the excavation work as required.5044. 3. be ultimately responsible for finalization of any Construction Site preparation work required. if required. Returning the Site to a suitable condition at Completion of the Work Work Permits Procedures and Regulations Contractor shall comply with Company / Client Work Permit Procedures and Regulations appended in Appendix and with Electrical Authority / Plant Work Procedures. but the ultimate responsibility for the final contours shall be with Contractor. Contours are provided. The Construction Site preparation shall include Construction Site clearance. o 4093 c d stabilising the dust. and more generally.co. general earth works. leveling to grade selected. Site preparations and transport of quarried construction materials shall be carried out in an environmentally acceptable manner so as not to impact the surroundings. security gates for the FACILITY. The following Company / Client Regulations shall also apply: 1. 4.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . when working at Plant and at NCC. Plant Security guidelines 3. Construction Facilities Page 240 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. opening of roads on Construction Site. 2. rough grading. transportation to an authorised dump and levelling of the concerned areas 13. Plant Mutual Aid programme 6.

fabrication yard etc. 8. 5. Providing adequate safety management and personnel. lay down. Contractor shall provide office facilities to Company / Client as specified in Appendix. Providing security gates and surveillance at various Sites. safety procedures. 6. for all personnel assigned to the Construction Site. Providing safety and fire prevention procedures at Construction Site. 9. rigging and scaffolding to function safely and reliably.5044. Contractor shall obtain permission from Plant for access to areas close to Construction Sites for offices. safety plans. 3.co. the following: 1. 2. 4.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Generally. 3. 7. and ensuring that these procedures together with Company / Client's requirements are promulgated and enforced. safety organization charts. Providing evacuation and first aid facilities in accordance with the local regulations. 2. o 4093 c d 1. but not limited to. Ensuring safety regulations and keeping safety records. The scope of safety shall include. All utilities required in all areas during the execution of Work shall be the responsibility of Contractor. providing one safety officer for every 50 persons. Regularly verifying adequacy of Subcontractors' craneage. Reporting to Company / Client on status of planning and implementation of activities to ensure safe construction and operation installations. Supervising all personnel assigned at Construction Site to ensure that they abide by the safety program. Issuing safety reports to Company / Client as specified in Appendix .` Page 241 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. safety instructions and safety talks. Safety and Security Contractor shall take sole responsibility for safety (including fire prevention) of the Work.

transportation. gravity pipe networks. testing of all material and equipment in units and in technical rooms / control rooms including loop testing from control systems such as DCS. test and control. testing of all material and equipment in units and in substations including testing and energisation. 10. ventilation and air conditioning including installation. Storage facilities including detailed design. Insulation Works of piping and equipment including supply and erection of all type of insulation and associated tests and controls. erection and all associated tests and control. prefabrication and erection work including all test and control and flushing operation. erection and all associated tests and controls. 7.co. 8. 12. Hoisting. fabrication. mechanical assembly of all equipment and material including erection work. Heating. Instrumentation Work including the installation. drainage. 3. piping and equipment. transportation. Electrical Work including the installation. paving building construction including detailed design and supply / erection of secondary works and HVAC systems and all related test and control. 6. Above Ground Piping Work Prefabrication and Erection including material management. erection of fabrication tank. connection testing of all material and equipment. to each local instrument. Painting Works of piping. 4. 5. alignment. The construction work includes but is not limited to the activities described here after. Underground Piping. supply. pressurized underground piping erection. GRP Piping Prefabrication and erection including material management.5044. prefabrication and erection works including all tests and control and flushing operation. Fire water tank. PLC. all concrete works such as foundation. 9. Those descriptions are not exhaustive and are given solely for Contractor guidance and shall be read and continued within the context of present scope of work document. assembly and all Page 242 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. fabrication. Site Preparation and Road.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . 11. connection. road. site preparation including fencing works. Piling. steel structure and equipment including supply and application on field (or on shop for piping elementary components) of paint on but not limited to steel structure. connection. site construction. supply. 2. Civil works and Building Works including earthworks. Steel Structure Fabrication and Erection Works including detailed design. structure. o 4093 c d Extent Of Construction Scope Of Work 1. 13.

Introduction 16. jointing.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . inspection & repair. drawings.co. Contractor shall obtain all necessary permits and consents in compliance with the requirements. Pipeline construction scope shall compose of all works in relation to Piping / Pipeline construction as outlined below and as defined by the FEED Specifications. supports. non-destructive / destructive testing. lowering. hydrostatic testing. vents. flanges. crossings of pipelines / utilities / roads.  Installation of all Pump House Piping for Pump Houses. Contractor shall allow the Governmental Authorities and Third Party service owners all possible access to inspect and witness Page 243 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo.  Installation of Piping (above ground / buried) for fresh water firewater system. trenching. Contractor shall be responsible for contacting and obtaining necessary permissions from all relevant Governmental Authorities and Third Parties before construction works commence. sumps. firewater system (above ground / buried) to cover all new plots / facilities. 2. but not limited to the following activities. Contractor shall verify the location of any existing installations and services to the satisfaction of Company / Client and applicable service owners. Pipeline construction-pipeline routing 15. etc. 1. spectacles. o 4093 c d associated field tests. fittings.  Installation of GRP piping manifolds at Pump Houses. inspection holes.  Installation of the extension of seawater. ROW preparation. Pipeline construction activities shall include. valves. backfilling. welding. manholes. Contractor shall be responsible for identifying all disciplines in the extent of work requested for piping / pipeline construction activities.5044. Contractor shall make due allowance in its schedule and management of its Construction activities for other ongoing Third Party activities at Construction Site and the surrounding area.  Installation of all Piping for packages including electro chlorination unit.  Installation of cooling water return pipelines (above ground / buried) from end user battery limits to receiving basin. any temporary supports. joints. Note that ‘Installation’ includes all pipe. drains. anchors. documents.  Installation of all utility Piping in Intake Area. pits. 14. 3.  Installation of cooling water supply pipelines (above ground / buried) from Pump House to end user battery limits.

All material handling. All prefabrication of piping systems 3. if applicable 7. 5.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Contractor shall be responsible for verification and confirmation of all FEED deliverables. draining and drying of piping systems. All welding 6. All non destructive testing 8. If Contractor wishes to provide testing facilities on Construction Site to carry out such destructive testing. Page 244 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. the facilities shall be certified in accordance with relevant international standards and also approved. Pipeline Routing Plans including sections and details. preliminary plot plans and preliminary main routing plans included in the Contract. Contractor shall meet all its obligations in this respect in a timely manner such that there is no delay in the Works. handling and storage (in addition to all other construction activities) of all items included in the novated purchase orders by Company / Client to Contractor. 2. including tie-ins and crossings 4. 4.5044. All hydro testing. Contractor shall utilize only approved certified testing laboratories for all destructive testing to be carried out on the Works under construction. 1. 3. Contractor shall comply with all Company / Client instructions with respect to these particular items and its delivery to Site.co. 4. All prefabrication and installation of supports including material supply 5. All erection of piping systems. o 4093 c d Works execution in the vicinity of their installation(s) and shall conduct such works in accordance with their requirements. The following drawings form part of Appendix of this document. Survey Drawings for the cooling water and firewater route corridors. craneage and scaffolding 2. Contractor shall initially locate existing pipelines and other facilities and shall place barriers to prevent his personnel or equipment from working over and damaging existing pipelines and other utilities. 6. 7. transportation. 1. Plot Plan. All heat treatment. 5. construction cleaning. General Contractor’s scope of work shall include but not limited to the following: Installation of the piping systems generally indicated on the P&ID’s. Contractor shall note that Works include at least the receipt.

o 4093 c d 9. 9.5044. Bolt tensioning 15. Provision and installation of locking devices. 4. 10. All reinstatement 11. Provide all pipe spools and pipe fittings necessary for hydro test 16. Second alignment after final connection of piping 7. Contractor shall prefabricate piping in quality controlled conditions (offsite) to the maximum extent possible. All chemical cleaning. All prefabrication. Tagging of all spools with isometric number and storage it in a safe designated area at erection site. hydro test (including supply and disposal of test water) and NDT works and send it to painting yard for blasting and painting. 8. conservation.co. caps. grease. etc. alternatively. Provide support structure 6. Scope of installation works 3. All nitrogen or air testing 12. Providing all weather protection measures when and as required 14. receipt inspection. 5. 2. etc. to lock open certain valves where necessary Scope of Modification Works 1. storage. Loading and off-loading) of prefabricated elements from the prefabrication shop to the worksites. Installation at a definite location of equipment for the project. handling and administration of all materials at Contractor’s prefabrication shop location. in workshops or other designated locations. Provision and installation of services items such as temporary blinds. if applicable. the activities to include setting. grease. 2. 3. Transport (incl. Transport. Prefabrication of Piping Contractor shall perform a site survey and ensure spooling of correct dimensions suitable for erection at site and determination of field welds. The scope of prefabrication work shall include but not be limited to : 1. Performing initial fill of lube oil. All works necessary for implementation of the modifications at the various sites or. first alignment and tightening and tensioning of equipment foundation bolts. 4.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Page 245 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Provision of protection against mechanical damage and damage from weather conditions. Installation of all Equipments / Packages / etc. Performing all inspections and tests 13.

Surface protection. documenting. establishing procedures. re-stamping. Access to existing facilities shall not be interrupted. Installation of piping system 9. At all locations where pipes are located adjacent to plant roadways and at all locations where new facilities are being constructed or modified. obtaining approvals from Company / Client. 6. Pipe protection At each location where pipes cross roadways at an elevated level inside the plant areas. etc. Temporary access to existing facilities/roads shall always be maintained. 10. 14. Erect rack structure.5044. 2. permanent ‘armco’ type barrier protection shall be provided. 8. Construction Supervision 4. All erecting. pipe clamps. Erection of piping 6. 12. installation and dismantling of temporary supports. Coordination with all GRP vendors / suppliers at site 5. Access to existing facilities shall not be interrupted. All other necessary activities such as marking. Arrange meetings with other Contractors (interface) to avoid fouling with existing facilities. priming. permanent bunting poles with warning signs shall be erected. 1. Supply. 7.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . gaskets and locking devices Page 246 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Installation of GRE / GRP piping 3. erection and installation of U-bolts. and / or other restraining devices necessary for the Work. On/off loading and storage 8. Arrange and provide all testing and drying facilities 13. testing and re-instating of the piping systems. Temporary access to existing facilities/roads shall always be maintained. 15.co. 16. touch up etc. Insertion of all sealing rings. inspections. Fabrication. 11. Future corridors reserved for other facilities shall not be encroached. Prepare workpacks and identify piping spools for erection. 7. supports etc and align 9. painting. o 4093 c d 5. Future corridors reserved for other facilities shall not be encroached. All bolt tensioning required according to pipe specifications. Installation of temporary strainers and removal after flushing. including supporting (both temporary & permanent).

sheeting. 15. 2. Acceptance of anchor bolts 12. materials. water. Contractor shall also arrange for permits from the various local authorities. Acceptance of each system as ready for hydro test 14. Contractor shall take special precautions when working parallel and within five meters of any existing pipes or below overhead lines. stabilization and maintenance of the trenches. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to protect any existing facilities encountered during the performance of his Work. including the supply and installation of temporary crossings over the excavation if required. telephone or power lines. Contractor shall give Company / Client ample notice (at least two weeks in advance) for each work permit and follow Company / Client standard practice.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . All Work in the existing facilities areas shall be carried out adhering to the Company / Client Work Permit Procedures. protection. Welding and Radiographic Inspection Contractor shall carry out welding and radiography inspection in accordance with the following: 1. sewer. electrical. Contractor shall perform all required trenching and excavation by machine or by hand. Where excavation is required within three (3) meters of any gas. and equipment necessary to develop and submit to Company / Client for approval all required welding procedure qualifications. o 4093 c d 10. Contractor shall provide all services. Guarantee of successful hydro test 16. Trenching Contractor shall carry out pipe trenching in accordance with the following: 1.co.5044. for production welding for the Page 247 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Acceptance of trenching backfill and compaction 13. oil. Hydro test of spools / joints and double bell couplers prior to system hydro test. 3. Make up of all laminated / bonded joints and coupled connections 11. The above acceptance shall be signed by the Site Representative of the GRE / GRP Manufacturer prior to Contractor proceeding with the subsequent stage of construction in each case. welder qualifications. dewatering. including rock hammer and blasting where required and provide all necessary shoring.

until they are handed-over to the Company / Client at the completion of the Work. road. tracks. All detours shall be paved. Track and Existing Pipeline Crossings Contractor shall carry out pipe. installation of the scraper traps. Where road crossings are performed by ‘open-cut’ method. Road. 3. Contractor shall maintain traffic flow and movement of personnel during installation of the road crossings. to avoid any delay. Pipeline Cleaning Page 248 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. and crossings on existing pipeline and other facilities as required in accordance with approved drawings and in full compliance of all local road requirements and regulations in National. If discrepancies exist. 3. 4. 2. After completion of the crossing. track and existing pipelines crossings according to the following: 1. Contractor shall notify Company / Client immediately in a timely manner of its corrective action for approval. 2. All radiograph films and test results shall be protected and stored by Contractor in a dry. packed in good condition for permanent storage. detours shall be provided. Weld maps shall be prepared and maintained by Contractor and turned over to Company / Client at the completion of the Work. Contractor shall check all controlling dimensions and pipe roundness prior to installation. installation of the mainline valves and all other welding activities. Ten percent (10%) radiographic examination of all welds shall be performed using X-Rays.co. Contractor shall re-instate the roads and the surrounding area including detours to their original condition and to the satisfaction of Company / Client 4. Contractor shall obtain Company / Client approval for the design of detours. o 4093 c d mainline.5044. Contractor shall construct all roads.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . 5. however detailed NDT requirements shall be reviewed during the execution of the Work on case by case basis depending upon criticality and nature of services. 10% Radiography shall be taken as basis. secure place.

Contractor shall plan and schedule tie-in activities to take place during planned plant shutdown periods or. Contractor shall produce an isometric drawing with complete material list for each tie-in. 9. gaskets and bolts for the tie-in Works. Marking of tie-in locations at site for Company / Client Approval. Contractor shall ensure all materials are available for the tie-in Work prior to submission of the request to commence the tie-in works.5044. 8. Contractor shall ensure that internals of pipeline are thoroughly cleaned and inspected prior to hydrostatic testing in accordance with approved project procedures. 10. Contractor shall confirm the adequacy of these tie-ins. including cutting and beveling. materials. Page 249 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Tie-Ins during Shutdowns 1. Procedure-Method Statement-Work execution plan-Material for permanent incorporation-Consumable requirement-Safety consideration-Hazard identification-Operational Impact 5. to minimise any plant shutdown required. and consumables necessary for performing all tie-ins. 2. Contractor shall furnish all equipment. 3. Provisions of all spades.co. Preparation of a detailed tie-in index and schedule 2. 6. Contractor shall tag (physically mark on site) each tie-in location after it is confirmed. if necessary 6. where there is not possible. o 4093 c d 5. Obtaining approval from Company / Client for all tie-in locations. 3. Non-destructive testing (NDT) of the tie-in location prior to and on completion of the works. Repair of coating on the existing system. for Company / Client review and approval. Removal of piping. Prefabrication of tie-in piping 7.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Tie-Ins General Requirements1. 4. personnel. Hydrotesting and drying of the relevant part of the existing and new piping system. 5. Contractor shall submit a procedure and method statement for each of the tie-in activities. including but not limited to: 4. supplies. Hydrostatic Pressure Testing Contractor shall perform hydrostatic pressure testing of all piping in accordance with approved project specifications and procedures. Connection of tie-in piping.

excavated material stockpiles. Daily cleaning of the Construction Site shall be performed. Without in any way limiting or detracting from the effect of any other Clause hereof. This includes Construction Site. anchorage wharves. Contractor is to subject full details of any of his operations that may cause any interference to shipping to Company / Client’s representative for approval at least 7 days before the event and is to make such modifications as Company / Client’s Page 250 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. o 4093 c d Final Cleanup 1. The Project area and all other areas affected during construction shall be maintained clean and free of environmental pollutants. 3.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . dolphins and approaches there to. Contractor’s operations must be conducted in such a manner that they do not interfere with nor endanger either the use of working of the waterways. to achieve the Mechanical Completion in accordance with the Execution Programme in readiness for the Precommissioning activities. At the completion of the Work. and preparation of as-built drawings and final report.co. interference testing. the construction areas shall be restored as close as possible to their original condition. 2. as well as any other areas disturbed by Contractor during construction. Navigation 1. Mechanical Completion Contractor shall plan. existing structures affected. causeways. Cathodic Protection Contractor shall install cathodic protection system where necessary as indicated in Cathodic Protection Specification and Scope of Work document and provide post installation testing. Contractor shall conform to the Byelaws and Regulations concerning navigation and shall obey the orders of any authorized and competent officer or agent of the Government or the Port Authority in reference thereof. in conjunction with Company / Client. 2. Mechanical completion activities are linked in Exhibit of Appendix . staging and storage areas.5044. whether belonging to Company / Client or to persons or any water borne traffic except by prior arrangements with Company / Client representative and the Port Authority. jetties.

Page 251 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Review of layout in relation to design guidelines.8-0. the maximum velocity leaving the screen units shall be approximately 0.5044. 7. In the worst case (i. The minimum water level of -0. HRW Hydraulic Study Notes Conclusions Contractor shall consider HRW studies conclusions as given below.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . This is a little high relative to HR Wallingford's experience of other installations and it would be appropriate to confirm with relevant screen vendors that a maximum approach velocity of some 0.95m NHD corresponds to a head loss of only 0.g.e for PH-) at maximum flow. All crafts shall be fitted with VHF radios. the velocity in the double-entry channels at the drum screens shall be typically 0. Flow modification measures (e.m3 / hr from Pumping Station . as confirmed by the CFD model. Approach flow patterns are direct and well-behaved. 1. The water levels at the pumping station entrance and the approach flow patterns considered in the analysis took account of the flow into Pumping Station. In the worst case (when one screen train is out-of-service).07m in the channel. 8. comprising -------m3 / hr from Pumping Station ------. etc. 6. Baffles or columns) are likely to be required in the forebay to ensure satisfactory flow patterns under adverse combinations of screens and pumps in operation.86m / s.co. Normal movement of craft within the harbour shall be notified to Marine Operations. The study has considered the most recent estimates of the design flow rates. o 4093 c d representative may require in order keeping such interference to the minimum.8m / s. Design flow conditions at the entrance / inlet to the pumping station 4. The typical maximum approach flow velocities to the bar screens are considered to be within acceptable limits in relation to potential turbulence levels at the bar screens.9m / s is acceptable in the channels approaching the drum screens. This is considered a little high in relation to the size of the forebay area. 3. This Technical Note has described a design review and a computational fluid dynamic model study of the proposed Plant CCWS pumping stations 2.m3 / hr from Pumping Station and -----------. 5.

corner fillets and curtain wall arrangements are considered appropriate vortex suppression devices / methods. 15. 16.5044. The proposed “standardised” distance from the rear wall of a pump bay to the pump centre line of 2. it is considered that these features should be included in the pump bays. Overall dimensions and internal structures 12. It would be recommended. however.following identification of the actual screen vendor and actual screen dimensions. the splitter / benching. that the required width of each screen chamber element should be subject to further review / detailed design during EPC .following final confirmation of the actual pump vendor and actual bell mouth diameters.2m is in accordance with standard guidelines. The proposed overall layout and dimensions for the screen chambers is considered satisfactory for FEED. On the basis of "standard best practice". the proposed 5m width for each pump chamber is considered satisfactory for FEED.50m NHD) are considered satisfactory in relation to the required submergence conditions for minimisation of free-surface vortices. It would be recommended. 13. o 4093 c d 9. 17.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . that the required width of each pump bay should be subject to further review / detailed design during EPC . Submergence of pumps 10.7m). 11. Taking this into account. In general terms. Page 252 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. which is satisfactory with respect to the pumps for PH and PH but short relative to standard guidelines in the case of PH#. however. the initially designed pump chamber width of 5. 14. as they shall help serve to inhibit severe surface and sub-surface vortex formations. The Initial Design for the pump bays provides for a “standardised” pump bay length of 10m. In the case of PH#.co. Free passage of air must be allowed at the top of the pump bays and other semienclosed areas of the pumping stations. Preliminary enquiries with pump manufacturers have indicated that a pump chamber width of 5m would be acceptable (even based upon a bell mouth diameter of 2.0m is smaller than standard guidelines would suggest. The available submergence and proposed elevation for the pump bay invert (9.

subject to provision of the dissipating structures described above and optimised during EPC. locally approaching 0. significant oblique flow with local velocities approaching 1m / s was observed in the pump forebays. the simulations take account of the effect of the flow into PH.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h .co. 22. This would enable final optimisation of the internal layout. and confirmation of Page 253 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. and the intake channel model demonstrated well-behaved approach flow to PH and PH. Revisions to the design have been proposed. To confirm and extend the conclusions of the CFD model study. These show significantly improved flow patterns in the pump chambers. 23. Therefore. The roof slab is expected to be clear of the water surface even for extreme water level/wave conditions (notwithstanding possible transient water levels in the Intake Channel that might result from pump start-up or trip scenarios). although the pumping station computational model does not explicitly simulate PH. in which columns are introduced at the entrance to the pump chambers to dissipate the asymmetric jets.5044. The calculated water level at the entrance to the pumping station takes account of the flow into the Phase I pumping station (PH. Physical model study 27.8m / s and there was rotation at the pumps. Computational fluid dynamics (CFD) model tests 21. With the original design. Flow in the pump chambers under these conditions was asymmetric. 26. 24. 20. Further simulations have been carried out to show the effects on the flow patterns. The possible improvements identified for testing in the CFD model resulted from the short pump chambers in PH and the restricted distance between the drum screen chambers and the pump chambers. but there is scope for further improvement in the forebays. 19. o 4093 c d 18. Simulations have been undertaken for a variety of operational conditions in the planned Plant CCWS pumping station. it is recommended that a physical model study be carried out during the EPC phase. The CFD model studies indicate that the overall pumping station dimensions are adequate. 25. and under adverse combinations of pumps and screens in operation.

5. manufacturers instructions. the compliance with project drawings and specifications. Pre-commissioning shall generally include the following and should be defined and followed up by PC status Index: 2. codes. the quality of installation. testing of cable continuity. motors. such as pressure gauges. recognised industry standards and good practice. cables. 6. hydro testing and de-watering shall be supported by specific reports. and cover activities such as calibration of instruments. Typical examples of such tests are: electrical motor uncoupled runs. instrument loop tests. pressure testing of piping systems. o 4093 c d satisfactory performance under the final design operating conditions. 4. 3.co. For Physical modelling scope of work Refer to Appendix. Static. setting of safety valves. to ensure the quality of a number of critical components. Pre-commissioning shall be organised by sub-system following an approved Page 254 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo.5044. de-energized tests and test start of specific equipment. carried out on each part or item of equipment or component.(Hydraulic Study Report) --------------------------------------Chapter 11 P. Leak testing (at 1. and electrical breakers operation. machinery alignment.1 times the design pressure) is required to ensure that all inline components / isolated portions of piping during hydro testing are installed. Systematic conformity checks in accordance with check list. cleaning. Energising of the electrical networks shall be part of this activity.om i ng C rc e mson( ) is i P Introduction 1. to visually verify the condition of the equipment. 7. Piping and vessels flushing. safety rules. This cold testing work shall concern all disciplines.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Dynamic verifications that each elementary electrical and instrument function in the FACILITY is designed to achieve and shall perform properly.

g. Contractor responsibility of Pre-Commissioning consists of. The Pre-Commissioning tests shall be carried out in accordance with the relevant specifications and reported on Pre-Commissioning Test Sheets. 3. o 4093 c d sequence to be prepared by Contractor. together with the preparation of the FACILITY breakdown in Systems and sub-systems and the FACILITY start up sequence mentioned under the Work Unit description for commissioning. and shall include the preparation of the documentation. The conformity checks defined above shall be carried out in accordance with. Page 255 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. A typical sample of such Pre-Commissioning Test Sheets is attached in Exhibit to this Appendix . Pre-Commissioning Test Sheets 1. records-Carry out PC activities. and reported on Pre-Commissioning Check Lists. but not limited to the following: Prepare plans. and-No-load motor runs-PC documents as follows: Check list-Test sheet-Status index-Punch list-Dossier Pre-Commissioning Check Lists 1. Pre-Commissioning Check Lists shall define the Scope of Work that must be systematically performed on each selected item of equipment and shall also be used as a log to record the checks made. mentioned hereafter. Pre-commissioning preparation shall start at the engineering stage together with Commissioning and Start-Up preparation. Specific reports and drawings shall support all other Pre-Commissioning activities such as piping and vessels flushing and cleaning. e. 2. Conformity check-Main activities of PC are: -Flushing/air blowing. 3. One Pre-Commissioning Check List shall be filled in for each sub-system and type of equipment or package.co. -Hydrotesting. equipment-Co-ordinate activities of Vendor(s)-Maintain all documents.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . The Pre-Commissioning methods and procedures shall be defined and followed up in a reference document entitled Pre-Commissioning Status Index. One Pre-Commissioning Test Sheet shall be filled in for each test performed. A typical sample of such PreCommissioning Check Lists is attached in Exhibit 03 to this Appendix A. 8. 2.5044. Pre-Commissioning Status Index 1. procedures-Prepare safety audit-Provide PC spares-Provide PC tools.

damaged or missing equipment. 4. to the Ready for Pre-Commissioning Dossiers Contractor shall compile documentation pertaining to the Pre-Commissioning activities in a dossier arranged by sub-system. in view of the required continuity of the completion activities. This section deals primarily with Commissioning.co. Pre-Commissioning punch lists shall be attached Commissioning Certificate for each sub-system. However. pumps and the like). missing documents and any deviation from the design drawings and specifications. i. Commissioning and Start-Up. Commissioning Introduction 1. Pressure gauges. The Pre-Commissioning Status Index shall be an exhaustive list. o 4093 c d 2. The Pre-Commissioning Status Index shall summarise for each subsystem the corresponding pre-commissioning checks and tests to be performed for each item of equipment or materials (i. arranged per sub-system. Pre-Commissioning. malfunctions. for all equipment and materials subject to Pre-Commissioning operations. Pre-Commissioning punch lists shall be established for each sub-system being Pre-Commissioned. Each Pre-Commissioning task shall be recorded on the Pre-Commissioning Status Index.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . for the purpose of recording all discrepancies. discipline and type of equipment. Pre-Commissioning Punch Lists 1. The Pre-Commissioning dossiers shall include the following: Ready For Commissioning Certificates-Punch lists-Systems descriptions and marked up drawings-Specific procedures-Pre-Commissioning Status Index-Pre-Commissioning Check Lists-Pre-Commissioning Test Sheets-Marked up AFC drawings latest statusVendors’' shop test reports-Vendors' documentation needed for commissioning. which shall contain all information required to demonstrate that a sub-system has reached the Ready for Commissioning status.5044.e.e. 3. electrical cables. this section also deals with interfaces between Page 256 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. 2.

operation and maintenance of the utility systems. Actual run in and on line tests during a significant period of the main process equipment in closed loop wherever applicable. Instrumentation: Loop check. 9. Providing a team of suitable experienced and qualified personnel for Commissioning as per approved plans. Chemical loading / filling. i. All operations shall be organised by sub-system and reported on that basis. Electrical: Operational Tests on all power system equipment. Pipelines and Piping system: Operational Tests and leak tests 2. irrespective of the amount of testing that may have taken place at manufacturers' shops.e. tests on cathodic protection system etc 4. General Commissioning shall generally include the following 1. 2. Checking. tests on lighting system. 8. Telecommunication: Functional tests. Equipment packages shall be subject to Commissioning operations at Construction Site. 2. Preparing interface and Commissioning coordination procedure 3. Contractor shall execute all activities required for Commissioning the FACILITY. Coordinating activities of vendors and any Subcontractors participating in the Page 257 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. startup. 3. o 4093 c d such activities. all motor runs.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Contractor shall execute all activities required to Commission the FACILITY and shall ensure that before each functional system of the FACILITY is started that the common activities have been performed in accordance with the requirement of the Contract.5044.co. Providing necessary Commissioning spare parts and ensuring their availability at Construction Site at least three (3) months prior to Commissioning of each relevant facility 5. Checking. and of the utilities systems. 6. tests on earthing system. and all verifications required to demonstrate that the process facilities are in the Ready for Start Up. Contractor's responsibilities for Commissioning shall include but not limited to the following: 1. Logic check and Operational Tests of DCS / F&G systems. 10. Preparing safety audits and maintaining record of all approved safety audit items 4. schedules and procedures. 5. putting in operation and operating the utilities Systems required for Commissioning the process and other facilities. 7.

Operational Tests shall consist of bringing a given system into operation under conditions as close as possible to normal. Wherever applicable. Typical sub-systems to be subjected to an Operational Test are: fire water pumps. Following successful Operational Test for any System or Sub-System. Contractor shall issue for Company / Client approval Ready for Start-Up Certificate for such System or Sub-System. DCS system. the Vendors' performance guarantees shall be verified during such Operational Tests. 11. 3. overloading and the like. 4. Developing all required software items 7. Maintaining records of all changes for updating the operating manual towards the end of Work 9. Gathering and completing the Commissioning dossier of the complete systems Operational Tests 1. o 4093 c d work 6. Page 258 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. 6. 2. electrical and instrumentation test gear and small tools necessary to carry out calibration and testing. Providing mechanical. Included shall be testing the automated devices. Contractor shall Start-Up the FACILITY.5044. overheating. normal and shutdown sequences in operation. vibrations. 5. Upon Company / Client approval of all Systems and Sub-System in the FACILITY.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . air compressors. Each Operational Test shall be conducted in accordance with a specific Operational Test procedure to be established and approved at the Commissioning preparation stage. Maintaining all documentation and records of Completion Activities on microcomputer 8. controls. Providing fresh clean water suitable for testing 10. Wherever applicable and as approved at the Commissioning preparation stage. Such faults may be due to watertight performance defects.co. and process pumps in recycle mode (under air or nitrogen whenever possible). provided the Basic Functions of the sub-system have been successfully functionally tested. with a view to revealing mechanical or electrical faults likely to occur during prolonged normal operation of equipment. each sub-system shall be the subject of an Operational Test.

Instrument Air Compressor / Drier Package.-Set points of relays. Rotary Equipment: Main Cooling Water Pumps-Fire Fighting Pumps Mechanical Packages: Chlorination System-Fire Fighting System -Hoisting / Lifting Equipment-Pipeline Metering Packages-Drum Screens and Trash Rake Machines. Vendor support and assistance shall be required as necessary for the following.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . protective devices-Record of site modifications in drawings-Statutory authority reports / certificates-Marked-up drawings-System Description-Commissioning Procedures Completion Activities Start-Up all Facility 1. Control and Instrumentation: DCS systems-Pipeline / Piping-GRP Vendor Support / Supervision-F&G systemsCooling Water Pumps control systems-Flow metering stations-Telecommunication systems-Process Stream Analyzers-Laboratory Instruments. Commissioning Dossiers The Commissioning Dossiers shall include the following: Ready for Commissioning Certificate-Punch lists-All Functional Test Sheets-All calibration sheets and records-Vendor factory tests reports. Upon completion of all remaining commissioning activities of the FACILITY. Contractor shall carry out the Start-Up of the entire FACILITY in accordance with Page 259 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. o 4093 c d Vendor’s Assistance Contractor shall provide all required Vendors’ support and assistance by mobilizing Vendors’ representative and specialists to Construction Site.-Stoplog guide ways installation Process Items: FRP Piping Systems-Cooling Water System Valves Electrical: HV switchgear-220kv Cables-LV Switchgear and MCC-Transformers Variable speed drives and Motors-UPS / Battery system-Emergency Diesel GeneratorCathodic Protection-Substation Control and supervisory system.co.5044.

2. 4. When ready for the 72-Hour Performance Test. 3. Page 260 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Contractor shall assure that the FACILITY is operating at steady and stable conditions.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . 5. Contractor to ensure that the water supply to PLANT and other consumers is in no way disturbed or interrupted during the test. Contractor shall give Company / Client 48 hours prior notice to carry out the 72-Hour Performance Test. Upon completion of FACILITY Start-up. Contractor shall carry out the Performance Test in accordance with the approved Procedure for a continuous 72 hours. Upon Company / Client approval. Equipment. Contractor shall liaise with and mobilize any Vendor and work in close coordination with Company / Client to assure a timely successful Start-up of the FACILITY. Company / Client shall issue Contractor a successful 72-Hour Performance Test certificate. Rigging. Once satisfied of the 72-Hour Performance Test results. In case not all consumers are available to receive their nominated flow Rate.co. specification and Cooling Water quality. Tools. 3. as such Contractor shall produce / develop a 72-Hour Performance Test Procedure approved by Company / Client to cater for this situation and demonstrate that the performance test can be carried out with the absence of certain consumers. The Start-up activities shall be planned in accordance with the Execution Programme and shall confirm the design intent of the Project in terms of all design parameters. o 4093 c d procedures to be developed by Contractor and approved by Company / Client. Contractor to note that not all consumers are available at the time of the test to receive their designated flow rate.5044. Contractor shall provide all Personnel. Temporary Facilities. 2. 72-Hour Performance Test 1. 6. Contractor shall present all results of the test to Company / Client after the Test for Company / Client approval. whilst maintaining flow rate to all consumers including IPP. Consumables and any other utilities as required to undertake the FACILITY Start-up.

o 4093 c d Contractor Shall Design.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Contractor shall design. operating parameters related to each equipment for the purpose of good records. The Operation and Maintenance of the FACILITY shall be undertaken by Contractor in accordance with the operation manuals and Vendor’s Instructions. Contractor shall study and define the optimum manpower requirement to operate and maintain the Plant FACILITY. temperature increase. 10. 8.hour Performance Test shall be carried out satisfactorily by Contractor on or before the date stated in Appendix . consumables. procure and install Temporary Facilities. as if all consumers are actually there for the purpose to carry out and to demonstrate the 72-hour performance test. 7. This study shall be the basis for Company / Client to Page 261 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. 11. Initial Operation and Maintenance 1. pressure drop. inlet & outlet. Contractor shall mobilize all operating and maintenance personnel and Vendor representatives as required for the operation and maintenance of all the FACILITY on 24 hour basis. Contractor shall have the consumer interface system connections to all consumers. The Initial Operation and Maintenance shall start after the 72 hour Performance Test and up to and including the Completion Date. Such Temporary Facilities can be based on plain Carbon Steel. chemical shall be provided by Contractor during the Initial Operation and Maintenance of the FACILITY.co. fills. All flow rates to consumers shall be measured including those needing Temporary Facilities for the 72-hour performance test. 3. consumer interface.5044. and log all interventions. Supply and Install Any Temporary Facilities to simulate that particular consumer in terms of flow rate. Mechanically Completed and ready to be connected to each consumer. 9. This study shall be based on the various equipment manufacturers’ data. 2. Contractor shall set-up a procedure and an Operation management system for the operation and maintenance of all project equipment with a view to record. lubricants. which shall be subject to Company / Client approval. These control systems shall be co-ordinated with Company / Client Operations. information and specific details of the FACILITY such as a FACILITY layout. The 72. criticality of consumer needs should also be considered. All spares.

4. 2. 4. Punch List Items clearance. --------------------------------------Chapter 12 The following statements have been included exactly as are produced during job by me for certain international bids to support technically as a part of Technical Bid ECI N A X U PN ET L O (PROJECT IMPLEMENTATION STRATEGY) Pc s u i gP k e r e Bd s a a os i n l cg Sample Only Engineering Design a) Building Engineering Design Management necessitates an integrated approach to formulate an overall philosophy.co. Contractor shall proceed with the FACILITY Hand-Over to Company / Client Operation in a progressive and co-ordinated manner so as to allow a smooth hand-over by the scheduled completion date after all training has been conducted by Contractor to Company / Client personnel. 5. 3. Contractor shall ensure that Project is completed on or before the scheduled completion date. Project Completion / Handover 1. Contractor shall complete all remaining Works under the Contract such as. Training and any other Works as specified in the Contract. Final Documentation. able to achieve an intellectual product covering & Page 262 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Contractor shall maintain a continuous steady flow to PLANT and other consumers during the entire Initial Operation and Maintenance period. Material reconciliation. Upon Completion the Facility shall be considered as Handed over to Company/Client in accordance with the Contract. o 4093 c d set up its own operation and maintenance team.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h .5044.

The target achievement of this fast track EPC project shall be kept in consideration by all discipline designers to release the necessary documents on planned line. Structured Page 263 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Production of all architectural. Act as CONTRACTOR Design & Engineering representative for the relevant Buildings contract scope 9. (Topographic survey shall be performed by CONTRACTOR) 3. design calculations etc. small power & lighting.5044. 2. Compilation of any outstanding data deemed necessary for the completion of the detailed engineering design 7. a preliminary selection shall be made. To accomplish this part of the package to the best possible standards. o 4093 c d incorporating a wide range of performance & serviceability requirements that shall completely meet intended functions of the proposed building adequately satisfying architectural. intrusive surveys and investigations as may be necessary for the engineering designs. Perform all studies.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h .co. Production of all architectural & structural detailed designs for Bechtel approval according to contract & sub contract requirement. Fire Fighting & Fire & Gas Detection/Loss prevention. Engineering Services Sub Contractor hereinafter called ‘Firm’ b) The scope of the Firm shall include but not be limited to carrying out the following engineering services’ operations for all buildings included within Process Buildings Package 1. 8. CONTRACTOR shall invite certain (possibly 3) reputed & leading architectural engineering Firms as Engineering Services sub contractor. Based on the merits of each offer as well as applying the competency criteria. 5. Civil & Architectural scope from its inception to completion as & when required c) Building services : conceptual drawings only for plumbing & sanitary. 1. HVAC. structural & allied services schematic designs 4. a formal appointment shall be made by executing an engineering services agreement. Undertaking additional surveys. structural & allied services requirements. Secure all governmental and local Authority permits and approvals if so necessary Compilation of any outstanding data deemed necessary for the completion of the detailed engineering design 6. After obtaining Bechtel approval respecting this Firm. Soil Investigations as required accomplishing the design 2.

All the design documents shall be given appropriate numbering reference to meet traceability requirement. All engineering design products shall be managed conforming international standards included on the contract documents for the technicalities as well as document controls. (CONTRACTOR services subcontractors shall be responsible for the detailed designs and engineering for their relevant scope based on the conceptual drawings and other basic documents issued by Firm) to obtain necessarily approvals from Bechtel 3.5044. Liaison. Firm shall issue its whole drawings / documents production schedule immediately after the award & commence its design work keeping in line to the programme 4. CONTRACTOR operates its own system of centralized document control. Abu Dhabi and / or Habshan as CONTRACTOR’s Design & Engineering representative during the course of the contract from its inception to completion as & when required 5. o 4093 c d Cabling System 1. which shall be used fully complying in accordance to Bechtel & Client Company Procedures by reformation. Firm shall produce & issue the scheduled documents at various stages of works for reviewing.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . co-ordinate & lead CONTRACTOR services subcontractors’ design & engineering efforts 2. Any delay on this account shall not be acceptable to CONTRACTOR management 10. All other remaining functional descriptions shall be conducted by CONTRACTOR personnel both in the head office as well as on site office depending on function wise technical nature 7. 8. All field interfaces shall be conducted from site offices in collaboration with CONTRACTOR field engineers 6. Immediately. after the issue of the control documents to the site team. Engineering coordination with the Firm shall be conducted from CONTRACTOR head office. if so required 9. Represent CONTRACTOR at Bechtel offices / officials at UK. Firm shall comply with the agreed documentation system & conduct its operation in all respects accordingly. field/design engineers shall conduct over review of design & construction ability & consequently relevant design engineer raise technical queries to remedy any Page 264 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo.co. approval & AFC etc efficiently keeping in line with the project construction plan on various phases.

meeting the architectural requirement maintaining the basic design principles that the whole structural skeleton behaves as an integral unit with its centre of gravity passing through or within the permissible vicinity of the resultant of all the applied forces considered avoiding any eccentricity and that settlement of the soil is within permissible limits. technically evaluate bids and review of vendor / lower tier subcontractor documentation shall be done by purchase manager in collaboration with project manager. At the very first stage of the commencement of the detailed designs. These calculations shall be done & certified by a Chartered Engineer of Firm for structural adequacy & structural intended performance. direct loads such as dead load. distribution of loading & all other parameters shall be adopted & calculated adhering to the international standards. Necessary structural shop drawings shall be produced by CONTRACTOR own engineering personnel in head as well as on site offices. After considering all direct & indirect imposed loadings according to the relevant codes. loadings. live load. Generated model in 3D may be made available for the presentation to Bechtel & Company to explain & justify the adopted philosophy if so required. which shall also be processed into document control system for Bechtel & issued to the concerned parties after getting duly approved for construction 14. which should immediately be resolved by the Firm & duly informed to Bechtel.5044. All such documents shall be processed through the documentation system facilitating most convenient trace ability for consultancy & reference 11. Buildings services schematic drawings shall be issued to sub contractors for further development of shop & working drawings for Bechtel approval & issued to the concerned parties after getting duly approved for construction 13. the effected design drawings shall be revised & reissued for construction duly incorporated with the solutions & circulated through documents control regularly to all concerned personnel. o 4093 c d discrepancies among these documents if so discovered. Preparation of requisitions for enquiry and award. material requisitions and bills of material.In accordance to the provision of electrical loadings design criteria as indicated on the Bechtel/Company documents. Page 265 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. a most critical case of resulting stresses shall be considered to be adopted for the dimensioning & further details of various vertical & horizontal members forming the framing skeleton. Extent of computer application for these activities. Electrical . design model shall be generated using Firm software. test load/application & also considering various analysis. drawings.co. issue and control of calculations. blast load / effect. 12. d) Detailed Engineering Design: Preparation. seismic shear (though not applicable in Abu Dhabi geographical location) / wind load. e) Services Designs Designs of the services shall be carried out discipline wise. Calculations shall be done trying various options of loadings in 2D & 3 D & included with the design proposal for approval. All these procedures have been incorporated on the company procurement procedures document. specifications. Firm shall formulate positioning of all framing members vertically & horizontally befitting coordinates as well as level controls.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Consequent upon the resolution of discrepancies. Loadings shall include.

disciplinary performance as well as meeting international & conventional standards.co. The bill of quantities shall not constitute part of contract documents but serve guidance.Loss Prevention & others On the similar pattern as described in the foregoing. All these details shall be included on the drawings documents for approval All designs shall be generated using appropriate computer software package f) Specialised discipline.5044. o 4093 c d IEE as well as UAE authorities regulations & schematic drawings produced meeting the architectural schematic drawings requirement Similarly all loads from the HVAC disciplines as well as from the other remaining disciplines shall be included. g) Specifications / Supplement Specifications It is intended to adhere to Company specifications provided by Bechtel within the documents to every extent possible. however. Bill of Quantities shall be generated discipline wise & building wise which document should be utilised for the purpose of Material Approval Proposal. supplement specifications shall be drawn & proposed for approval wherever necessary for producing better product or the materials for which no specification is defined. This shall be done in close interface with all disciplines coordinated by the Services design coordinator / Design Project Engineer or Manager.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . h) Co-ordination Procedure The following entitled co-ordinations shall be conducted during various stages of the design & execution that have been outlined below Coordination between CONTRACTOR & Bechtel head office This part shall be conducted by regular interaction among CONTRACTOR representatives Head Office based in Musaffa & Bechtel UK office to help resolve all pre & post award issue of Engineering services & monitoring project controls Coordination between CONTRACTOR & Bechtel site office This part shall be conducted by regular interaction among CONTRACTOR & Bechtel site representatives to help resolve all pre & post award issue of Engineering services & monitoring project controls Coordination between CONTRACTOR & Firm This part shall be conducted by frequent interaction between CONTRACTOR & Firm representatives of all disciplines for the resolution of all designs issues. From the foregoing approved documents. detailed designs shall be calculated meeting all requirements of the contract specification. approval of all documents & resolution of all engineering issues on site Page 266 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. to meet some particular requirement. Issue of requisitions of the approved materials to the procurement manager. All bills shall be generated using appropriate computer software package. issue of all documents. complying local bodies statutory provisions. These shall be drawn in collaboration with Firm & CONTRACTOR design team keeping in view an overall approach to documented specification criteria as well as conventional engineering & construction practice in similar circumstances.

This coordination is ongoing on daily basis & frequent interaction among all corporate managers as well as supporting professionals help the resolutions of all current & forthcoming issues. All Page 267 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. return approved or commented original to CONTRACTOR for further necessary CONTRACTOR action. All documentation shall be carried out adhering to the CONTRACTOR documentation system after tuning that in line to Bechtel & Company requirement j) CAD Procedure It is intended to use standard CAD software for the production of design & drawings. whenever any document is received. coordinated & made available on site prior to its requirement to avoid any problem of execution CONTRACTOR internal Coordination among various sections CONTRACTOR in Head office organized with all corporate sections necessary to meet the requirement of this project shall operate as an integral functional team keeping on resolving regularly & as required all issues of project designs & follow up in all respects. i) Review and Approval of Documents This requires effecting an instant action on the part of CONTRACTOR that. After its submission to Bechtel.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h .co. it shall be identified. Management meetings are conducted regularly for making decisions to avoid any pending identified problems CONTRACTOR internal Coordination among various sections on site Similarly on site all project sections managers & supporting professionals shall coordinate to resolve all types of problems to avoid any pending identified problems & notify to corporate management for immediate resolutions should the solution not be possible from site. Bechtel shall process it through its system & after obtaining company approval. it must be reviewed by its design team located at Head Office/Site office as the case may be prior to formally submitting to Bechtel. o 4093 c d Coordination between CONTRACTOR / Firm & Bechtel This shall resolve all issues respecting engineering designs particularly during design stage as well as generally during construction phases for efficient decisions making to help smooth execution of all activities Coordination between CONTRACTOR / Firm & Bechtel on site This shall resolve all issues respecting engineering designs during construction phases on site for efficient decisions making to help smooth execution of involved activities Coordination between CONTRACTOR Site & Firm This is essential to keep on fast track the availability of complete design information for all ongoing as well as planned activities & should the information be pending.5044.

Review and Distribution Procedure All vendors shall be issued schedule of document numbers to be printed on the documents adequately in advance of documents preparation. All approved procedures of documents shall also apply to vendors' designs. The Firm shall then work on the revision. some changes are imminent due to arising of new requirement. changes. Should any change be required. Also included the hardware & software details which are functional in proposed Engineering sub contractor/Firm office k) Engineering Reporting and Change Control The status of design progress shall be submitted to Bechtel on a weekly basis during progress meeting. l) Document Control Procedure CONTRACTOR operates its centralized DCC in head office that shall be tuned to Bechtel / Company documentation system & extended to site office to meet the project requirement. it should be an endeavour of the CONTRACTOR that all changes are recorded on contract Page 268 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. The details of all available software & hardware have been given in attachment.co. But in practice. It is therefore.e. the design shall be revised & revised document issued following the documentation & approval procedures.built drawings. m) Vendor Print Numbering. Should there be no change on the Released for construction drawings i.5044. CONTRACTOR document control system is enclosed for reference. that shall be affirmatively considered subject to cost impact resolution & then the change incorporation request issued by CONTRACTOR to Firm. an important & significant part of documentation as well as also a contractual obligation on the part of CONTRACTOR & Bechtel which should be affected smoothly & regularly throughout the duration of project. effects of disciplinary interfaces to bring the work to proper use functions etc. to produce physical structures. there shall be no purpose of As . During the whole currency of the contract. Should there be no such adverse consideration. n) As-built Drawings As built drawings serve the purpose of telling the user about the building records that should be used for the purpose of maintenance / or for whatever purpose possible. its calculations & advise to CONTRACTOR & Bechtel of any adverse effect on the structural adequacy / performance or if any amendment to be applied to already worked element / member.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . o 4093 c d standard system of designing shall be adopted at every workstation available in Firm offices. the construction has been carried out all in accordance with the approved documents provisions.

ITPs for all disciplinary activities shall be produced for Bechtel & Company approval from site office in due course. all necessary Page 269 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. These Red Lines mark up shall form the basis of producing all As Built documents on the project. Production of all these documents shall be the responsibility of CONTRACTOR Quality Manager / Engineer. These ITPs formats shall be issued for Bechtel & Company approval according to the procedures laid down on Project Quality plan. Inspection & Test Plans All necessary Inspection & Test Plans shall be originated by the Quality Engineer in collaboration with Engineering in head office & Engineering in site team. Surveyor shall present all such changes on the corresponding documents to be recorded as Red Line Mark ups.co. Generally. Every ITP shall be allotted a document number along with a numbered checklist. All these As Built shall form part of hand over dossiers. The details of these plans shall be submitted separately. o 4093 c d documents as Red Lines mark up & issued to Bechtel for approval. construction. The site design engineers shall keep an eye on this activity & record changes regularly as red line mark up & process the documentation to fulfil the contractual obligation to this extent possible. planning & charting out at various levels shall be carried out by the Planning Engineer. the design engineers as well as land surveyors to coordinate on site to comply with this obligation efficiently. It is not the drawings only that are to be recorded but also all changes whatsoever for any document on record.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Check list shall form the basis of inspection requirements. Further based on these periods. All defined tests shall be conducted by Bechtel/Company approved laboratory located on site. Based on the project design. Analysis. It is expected of the site engineers.5044. To achieve as aforesaid. commissioning and maintenance durations. For those items the tests shall be conducted by any Bechtel / Company nominated laboratory. Complete details about the quality management system have been included on the respective Quality Procedures document. it is extremely important that complete project should be analyzed from whole to one & all necessary resources to be used should be known prior to commencement of physical works. Should as built records be maintained regularly. this part of the dossiers shall be comfortably produced. All survey changes or variations shall also be recorded on the drawings based on the pre pour & post pour records taken from survey section. 2. Project Controls Project Control management requires the formation of strategies those can be utilized optimally to achieve the target in minimum cost with best quality product 1. for which facilities are not available on site.

procurement manager shall process the requisitioned approved item based on the budget quantities following in line the procedures applicable for temporary materials. deficiency of resources. processed through the document centre after Project manager approval. An alternative source shall be located for the rejected proposal. material controller & relevant engineer shall check the quality & quantity of the delivery. the management shall approve or reject the proposal. 2. The relevant reporting shall project the real quantum of planned & actual physical works. record his comments based on the comparative statement as well as recommendations for the considerations by the Management. Every effort should be made to keep the progress in line with plan. immediate recovery shall be planed. numbered & coded by the material controller & approved by the construction manager for transmission to head office procurement manager for further action. A copy of the approval shall be provided to the project manager for follow up the delivery. checked. Purchase manager shall then invite the inquiries from various sources of material.5044. requisitions shall be raised from site by the relevant engineer. The plans shall be monitored regularly. materials. Purchase order shall be made on the approved proposal. Cost controller shall further check the budgetary provision applicable & give clearance to the purchase manager for procurement. o 4093 c d resources shall be arranged & mobilized by human resources. samples if applicable. on a weekly basis. negotiate & prepare a comparative statement & based on the merits of responses / quotations. For permanent works. After obtaining Bechtel / Company approval on the request. monthly bases & no delay allowed & if any. resources available. and technical managers in collaboration with Project Manager. 3. for temporary materials & consumables.co. According to the site requirement & provisions made on the plan. After the material is delivered to site. material procurement status.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Any deficiency in quantity. quality or Page 270 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. materials delivered & expected time of arrival etc & all necessary measures required to keep the construction on line & valuation worked accordingly. 3. Procurement Note-The term Material herein includes equipment also 1. as the project construction progresses. After reviewing the proposal. proposed material shall be submitted for Bechtel/Company approval on requisite Material Approval request form along with brochures.

uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . issues & balance in stores shall be reported to the construction & project manager who shall act further depending on the project requirement. o 4093 c d any damage observed. 7.co. 5. Regularly the status of all receipts. Procurement Manager shall track various stages of material production & transportation or shipment to the site/delivery & if so noticed that an expectation exists for the delay in delivery. shall immediately be notified to the procurement manager through construction manager. Proper protection shall be made for all stored materials inside covered area or out side. The selected samples of delivered materials shall be sent to an approved laboratory for technical tests for the purpose of certification of compliance. Elaborate details have been given on the CONTRACTOR procurement procedures document Page 271 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. an issue to site may be undertaken thereafter. Delivery information shall be circulated to the concerned personnel & quality manager himself shall or delegate an inspector or the relevant inspector shall check the adequacy of quality & if necessary according to ITP provision. 9. After inspections & approvals. 4. After the acceptance of the material by the concerned authority only. shall invite the Bechtel/Company engineer to inspect / examine the delivery. Any deficiency noticed shall be immediately reported to the procurement manager. Separate area shall be located for the materials requiring certain temperature of storage. a store issue shall be affected & recorded on the required issue documentation. Stores shall be well constructed & shaded.5044. Necessary protection by removable membranes such as polythene or tarpaulins shall be used to protect material from the ingress of moistures or from effect of dust. Materials shall be stored in proper designated areas complying with the manufacturer’s instructions. 10. All entries of the incoming deliveries shall be recorded into the register & verified by the store keeper & material controller that it complies with the details on deliveries documents. Generally. shall apply all efforts to expedite the delivery on appointed date. delivered materials shall be recorded in stores receipt documents. Materials which remain unaffected by exposition to weather may be stored open duly protected under proper watch & ward. 8. Storage of all materials delivered shall be done complying to the set & approved procedures making sure that all inventories can be verified any time & that any material can be traced any time easily. 6. all consumables shall be stored in shade provided with proper lock & key arrangement. Post placement of purchase order.

5044. Elaborate details have been given on the CONTRACTOR procurement procedures document 15. International and local transportation and customs clearance 12. If so required by Bechtel / Company.co. commissioning spares. shall also follow the foregoing procedures with the addition that necessary Letter of credits shall be opened by CONTRACTOR adequately in advance of the required date of delivery adhering to schedule date. Tests & Examinations shall be conducted similarly as aforesaid. If so required. a date & time appointed for the inspection to the convenience of all parties concerned & required inspection at source conducted to the satisfaction of Bechtel or Page 272 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. This provision shall be followed & spares delivered according to contract & Company requirement by CONTRACTOR / its services sub contractors. (at cost and extra over Lump Sum Subcontract Price) 18.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . arrangement shall be made by CONTRACTOR after meeting with the vendor or manufacturer. Most probably. These shall be processed applying the same methods of procurement & delivery received by CONTRACTOR / its services or specialist sub contractors. Recommendation for two-year operating spares for approval by Company in accordance with the G-SPIR format requirements 16. o 4093 c d 11. Elaborate details have been given on the CONTRACTOR procurement procedures document 17. 13. insurance spares and special tools 14. CONTRACTOR procurement manager shall arrange all port clearances immediately of shipment arrival & material shipped to work site. Process to replace the damaged material shall be carried out at once to avoid any delay. Elaborate details have been given on the CONTRACTOR procurement procedures document. Source inspection 20. Procurement and provision of two-years operating spares. so that the delivery is shipped in time from original source. Materials & equipment that have to be imported from overseas. Procurement and provision of construction spares. CONTRACTOR shall apply in time for any statutory road permit for the efficient transportation of the material by suitable vehicles. the spares shall form part of the order package. Similarly this provision shall be effected & spares delivered according to Bechtel/Company instruction to CONTRACTOR subject to the approval of the procurement cost prior to the purchase order placement by CONTRACTOR 19. Any claims of insurances for the damaged material shall be made immediately after inspections.

Every effort shall be attempted by Procurement Manager to chart out the available ‘local & GCC sources’ & prepare a database to be used whenever any applicable procurement arises. The mobilization plan shall be closely coordinated with the construction plan to ensure mobilization activities properly lead into and provide a smooth transition into initial construction activities. technical bid summaries and award recommendations 22. labour. o 4093 c d Company. CONTRACTOR vendors shall also comply with this requirement.5044.co. preparation and preconstruction activities necessary to ensure the timely availability of drawings.uk Page 273 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . CONTRACTOR honor & respect with due regards to the provisions of UAE & GCC policies for the materials & professional services which need be availed out of the local & GCC sources subject to the compliance with the quality requirement. bidders lists. 4. CONTRACTOR. personnel. Pre Mobilization Planning A thorough and logical mobilization plan is essential for the successful start-up of construction activities. This procedure is already followed by CONTRACTOR. Compliance with Company’s criteria and procedures for selection of vendors including but not limited to compliance with local registration requirements and approval of purchase requisitions. Representatives from Bechtel and/or Company. We shall adhere to Company requirements. This preliminary mobilization plan shall be further developed after contract award and concluded within a week of the contract award. 3. This plan is already under preparation at this stage. accommodation and temporary suraj_engineer@yahoo. A time scale bar chart diagram shall be prepared with early and late activity bars detailing the main activities to achieve full mobilization of staff. Involvement by the UAE in particular and GCC in general with respect to the provision of local materials and services shall be encouraged 23. temporary facilities and materials at the job site to properly support the construction efforts. construction equipment and camp/site facilities shall be prepared at the commencement of the contract. 21. 2. 1. construction equipment. Mobilization plans for staff & labour. services sub contractor & vendor shall constitute an inspection at source team. Proper record of inspection shall be made. This plan must detail all planning.

o 4093 c d facilities established during the bid stage (as conceived in pre-mobilization planning) would be studied and re-evaluated in the light of any changes. Review construction equipment needs subcontractors mobilization plans are in place. 4. All procurement for the project shall be done from the corporate procurement section located in CONTRACTOR Head Office at Mussaffa. Construction personnel shall be mobilized to the project site office to provide input and direction to the project team.  Access to the job site  Locations of temporary facilities  Company requirements for properly validated licenses and certificates to be held by construction personnel  Transport plans  Loss prevention and safety requirements  Arrangements for first-aid facilities  Arrangements for drinking water and construction water  Arrangements for electricity supply  Arrangements for storage fuels and lubricants  Arrangements for sanitary & its disposal facilities  Final arrangements for security interface with Bechtel & Company Work Centres Contractor Head Office Upon notification of contract award. Successful project execution requires construction experts to be active from the onset of the project. The following items shall be reviewed and confirmed. and ensure that timely Review field procedures and method statements defining standards. histograms and craft mixes.co. The only activity to continue from Head Office after mobilization period is procurement. Abu Dhabi. update these requirements by means of staffing schedules. All necessary adjustment measures shall be implemented. Additional site visits shall be conducted immediately after the project kick off to confirm data collected during bidding stage.uk Page 274 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . 3. Finalize construction schedule requirements and subsequent approval from Contractor 2. suraj_engineer@yahoo. and ensure subcontractors manning levels are compatible. The following specific activities must be addressed early to be fully effective: 1. the key personnel to the site Management Team shall be assigned.5044. Review manpower requirements for both non-manual and manual personnel. reconfirm assumptions and establish additional information required to permit smooth and timely mobilization. which may have occurred since the day of preparation.

 Mobilization shall commence with the following activities: suraj_engineer@yahoo. consumables. The following major activities shall be carried out at site offices. o 4093 c d policies and procedures required for the execution of the works and ensure they constitute “Project Specific” status. CONTRACTOR Site Office Actual ‘on site management’ would be from offices based on the site next to Contractor and Company’s office. Overview temporary facility requirements. 8. Review Construction Quality plan in line with the guidelines of ISO 9000 and check Established QC parameters by discipline. project execution. 5. Review environmental. Ensure Lessons Learned & Practices from previous projects are well understood & should be applied effectively from the onset of the works itself to achieve professional products. 7. establishing contracts. Safety and security operations etc.5044. including indirects such as tools. permits. 6. CONTRACTOR Site Office is fully supported by CONTRACTOR Head Office at Musaffa. Existing teams responsible for the execution of the those two mentioned packages already have substantial cadre of experienced professional well versed in mobilization of temporary facilities.co. gases and the like and check subcontractors compliance. safety and Health (ES&H) and site security plans to ensure compliance with the client’s specifications and guidelines.uk Safety Regulation Enforcement Quality Assurance Enforcement and Procedures Construction Method Statements Construction Planning Site Documents Control Field Engineering & Design Controls Material Requisitions Materials Control and Tracking Materials Storage Work Procedures Physical Construction Site Administration Page 275 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h .             Mobilization Mobilization shall be coordinated from the CONTRACTOR Head Office at Abu Dhabi with input from CONTRACTOR personnel already mobilized for the execution of Site Preparation Package and Temporary Facilities for Contractor and Company. QA / QC planning. Actively pursue preliminary site activities such as approvals. 9.

balance of the CONTRACTOR construction staff shall be mobilized to the site along with construction equipment. As soon as practicable. 4. It is the responsibility of the supervisor / site engineer to ensure the efficient utilization of his material. At the start of the construction. 6. water shall be trucked from nearby Desalination plant. necessary operational crews shall be formed and controlled over to meet the planned progress target to be physically achieved satisfactorily. Shortly after contract award. Work shall be carried out under continual supervision and inspection over performance.co. storage and other items necessary to commence the work in accordance with the construction schedule. Progress shall be monitored on the basis of actual installed quantities compared to scheduled quantities. During the installation of the temporary facilities existing CONTRACTOR site offices shall be utilized to supervise the site activities required for the temporary facilities installation.5044.  Third party independent concrete testing laboratory credentials submission for approval. dedicated work crews shall be allocated for each discipline supervised by foremen and general foremen who in turn shall report to the discipline supervisors / site engineers. For construction areas. Based on the construction schedule requirements. warehouse and workshop facilities at location A4. For ‘construction operation water’ requirement. 7. Page 276 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. 2. unless an alternative arrangement is made available. o 4093 c d  Kick off meeting to commence the sub contract  Commencement of the required land surveys to establish various horizontal & vertical controls bench marks  Incept of the engineering designs at the Firm office  Soil Investigation by an approved laboratory  Construction of temporary facilities  Obtaining various permits from Authorities and conclusion of arrangements with local committees where necessary. site surveying shall begin utilizing the Total Station System to establish accurate control points for the performance of the work. lay-down area. warehousing. re-bar fabrication. 3. consumables. tools and equipment. workforce. Temporary facilities at the job site shall include Generator Yard and Construction water storage tank. 5.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . an emphasis shall be given on the critical requirements of the construction schedule. 8. the plans and specification for the site temporary construction facilities shall be finalized and released for installation. carpentry yard. On completion of the site offices at Habshan. 1. tools.

Company procedures shall be apply for prequalification and award of the subcontracts. to be responsible for the complete architectural. Detailed services designs shall be prepared by CONTRACTOR services sub contractors 2. 3.co. Lower tier sub contracts shall be allowed for the execution of single operations such as supply of ready mix concrete. Wherever required vendor specialist shall be made available for conduct of testing and inspections. Contractor and Company (as required by QC Plan and ITP) shall be advised of the tests for witness. supported by his store assistant shall be responsible for the custody of the material prior to issue. 2. Ready Mixed Concrete is envisaged supplied from an established RMC supplier. Firm shall also represent CONTRACTOR regularly during the project currency 1. However.5044. 6. Site ‘construction and temporary facilities electricity requirements’ shall be met by installing suitable size and suitable numbers of generators. The construction manager shall be responsible to provide Page 277 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. without reservations. machines. Material tracking from source to the place of installation shall be conducted by the computerized system. roofing finishes etc 3. o 4093 c d 9. Prior to conduct any testing. Testing And Inspection A field inspection and testing program shall be organized to be in line with CONTRACTOR Quality manual & Approved Project plan under overall responsibility of the QA / QC Manager. structural design drawings & documents productions as well as for the services schematic designs drawings production. in the mean time. Subcontract Strategy Building Engineering services shall be utilized by appointing a consulting firm. Material Management Once material has arrived at site. 5. 1. an establishment with proven track record duly approved for supplying concrete by GASCO. In case any minor or specialized work is necessary to be sub contracted on lower tier.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . CONTRACTOR shall carry out broadly all civil engineering works employing its own resources of manpower. we are also seriously considering installing our own concrete batching plant. within 10 kms of the site. material management shall come under the purview and custody of the site store staff. The storekeeper. 4. equipment etc.

conditions/packing  Instruction of holding. All questionable delivery commitments shall be expedited on a daily. Preparation of Purchase Requisition shall be made based on take-offs quantities calculated from the approved drawings documents. Samples and technical information shall be submitted to Contractor. Musafa. 4. vendor documentation requirements etc. manuals etc  Spare parts requirements  Special Instructions to vendors 1. Quality required.co.  Required delivery dates for all major items.5044. a purchase order shall be raised and entered in the computer register system. The procurement department shall maintain a follow-up system so that contact suppliers and / or manufactures may be made on continuous basis. Procurement The Central procurement department located at the Al Jaber Energy Services.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . specifications. Upon receipt of Purchase Requisition. weekly and monthly basis as required to ensure prompt delivery in accordance with the requirements. Once the final approval from the client is obtained. etc / or detailed outline of the material required. with the inclusion of following information. Purchase requisition shall completely. data sheets. A technical evaluation shall be done in house to verify the conformity with specifications. indicating cost and budget allocation. Abu Dhabi. 5. UAE office shall be responsible for all purchases adhering to the following procedure. 2. identify all applicable drawings. applicable specifications. purchase order shall be raised. marking  Drawings. 3. o 4093 c d the technical oversight and direction for the control of materials at the construction site area. Page 278 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. design & other drawings.  Delivery points of major items  Inspection of the goods at the point of origin issue  Certification of test data and/or compliance / warranty  Method of shipment (if goods imported).  Quantity of each item required with comprehensive breakdown  Adequate information concerning nomenclature description. kitting consolidation. Material approvals. More information has already been elaborated in the foregoing.

Auto Electricians.      General Construction Heavy Lifting and Transport Services. In normal cases a foreman shall supervise four charge hands. Guards. These schedules shall define the monthly manpower levels. 4. 2. Page 279 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . The scheduled shall also be indicative of manpower mobilization. 5. CONTRACTOR has been operating under since 1995. A charge hand shall be trained and supervised by a foreman. 2.co. Where a special process is conducted.5044. Trading Industrial Plant Construction. All the personnel on site shall be employees of Contractor. The planning department shall produce a histogram schedule of the resources by category. Manpower Resourcing And Mobilization 1. The charge hand shall then supervise approximately ten labours. The recruitment of manpower shall ensure that background in the relevant job skill has been achieved. All of the required personnel to execute the work are already in UAE and working on other sites. Water boys etc and other ancillary staff shall be deployed for the unhindered progress of the work. Broadly all the activities of the above divisions and companies can be divided into: 1. o 4093 c d Organization Corporate Organization The Contractor is an umbrella organization which has got numerous divisions within in itself and which is also the parent company for various subsidiaries. The standard Contractor site supervision is based upon the principle of training. this ratio may be revised accordingly. These sites are due for demobilisation in the coming months. The Contractor is a registered company specifically set-up to target the energy sectors and its clients. Site Organization Proposed site organisation and responsibilities of the key personnel are enclosed. Sufficient numbers of site supporting staffs which consists of Mechanics. 3. The training in quality awareness shall be an ongoing process through the quality department and the foreman. Electricians. All supervisory staff shall be highly experienced and qualified drawn from on-going projects wherever possible. Training is a requirement of the Contractor quality management system and foreman and charge hands shall conduct training of the manpower in their respective roles and functions.

head office & Company. raised flooring application.uk Page 280 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . The report shall be regularly provided to the planning engineer. pre-qualification of bidders.co. Based on the project schedule the planning department shall generate the construction equipment schedules. Subcontracting Develop and manage a lower tier subcontracting plan and subcontractor list CONTRACTOR plans to carry out most of the civil activities itself but selected items shall be sub contracted on the lower tier such as ready mix concrete. This activity shall be affected by the project manager based on the construction manager report. These workforces are at all times working on various projects in multi discipline fields. painting application. 9. The Contractor is one of the largest equipment rental companies in the GCC with over 5000 fleet where modern repair and machine facilities enable them to maintain a first class fleet of equipment. o 4093 c d The Contractor contains at all times a vast pool of manpower in all Disciplines.5044. recommendation and award. It has been our company policy to weed out the old equipment on a periodical basis and keep the equipment fleet very young. 7. issue of ITBs. We have one of the youngest fleets of equipment in the GCC based on size. suraj_engineer@yahoo. roofing application. a detailed contract scope works programme for the whole project shall be developed including all disciplines separately based on already approved outline preliminary programme appended under the coordination of our Construction Manager and Planning Engineer The Method Statements related to various project activities shall be submitted for contractor’s approval prior to commencement of any activity during the execution stage. These operations shall be manager & controlled by the Construction Manager on site & reported to the Project manager 2. bid evaluation. 10. Perform all lower tier subcontracting activities including specification of packages of Work to be subcontracted. suspended ceiling installation etc. doors & windows manufacturing. Monitoring and reporting of all lower tier-subcontracting activities. 6. Equipment Resourcing And Mobilization 8. Construction Method Statement– Process Buildings Following the award of the project. All relevant information shall be provided by the Project Manager to the purchase manager who should act immediately to conduct the required functions & the lower tier deal finalized after obtaining Company recommendation by the Project manager a) Management of lower tier subcontractors and their activities 1.

which shall be extended for the use of workers transportation. As included earlier somewhere else that UAE national policy shall fully be honored subject to making no compromise to the quality requirement 4. Full responsibility for co-ordination with any Third Party Inspectorate 7. utilities etc. the arrangements shall be made for the employed high tier & low tier sub contractors on this package 2. temporary facilities and services. commissioning. Messing shall be resolved by employing catering sub contractors so that all personnel & workers take good food. o 4093 c d 3. All these issues have been elaborated earlier somewhere else b) Provision of Construction Camp. vendor support. All these shall be fully undertaken by CONTRACTOR based on the site requirement. Similarly. tools. supervision. inspection.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . CONTRACTOR aggress to extend its full cooperation to meet any Third Party Inspections. and construction equipment.co. sanitation. 3. All safety & emergency precautionary measures shall be undertaken to the contract requirement. Already a camp exists on site & further extension shall be made to meet the contract requirement. transport to Jobsite. Project manager & Construction manager shall be responsible to affect this part of the contract. messing. All activities for the buildings part have been described on the method statement appended 4. and Provisional Acceptance. All testing facilities required at Jobsite 5. CONTRACTOR shall supply an independent testing laboratory equipped with all equipment necessary for involved tests for this package properly managed by qualified personnel meeting all QA testing & certification requirement. 1. utilities and consumables. Page 281 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. safety and quality management. Pre commissioning.5044. for SUBCONTRACTOR’s personnel. CONTRACTOR operates its own system of transport. Involvement by the UAE in particular and GCC in general with respect to the provision of local services shall be encouraged. All utilities shall be provided to maintain the good house keeping of the camp. Construction including providing labour. All activities necessary for Mechanical Completion. 6.

CONTRACTOR have decided to apply RCC in situ construction for all intended buildings accepting the Company direction on drawings for which a confirmation was communicated to Company on May 7. It is known from the contract documents that 15 buildings for various intending use as Sub station+Bottle Store. Instrument Equipment Shelter+Bottle Store and Operator Shelter have been defined to be constructed 2. 2005. which shall be integrated by grade beams/walls to form an unit for compaction Page 282 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Sub Structurse shall also be constructed of RCC in situ. Supply of these shall be managed by the Purchase Manager while the Project manager shall manage on site. New Control Building. RCC framings shall meet the design criteria of blast resistant & resilient structure productions meaningfully. Safety manager shall be responsible for the operations of all such activities & report to the Construction/Project Manager regularly SPECIFIC CONSTRUCTION METHOD STATEMENT– BUILDINGS PACKAGE Sample Only 1.co. Safety manager shall be responsible for the operations of all such activities & report to the Construction/Project Manager regularly Provision of medical and fire-fighting services at Jobsite and for temporary works Medical male nurse shall be employed on job site First Aid centre. Keeping in view the nature of contract being EPC.5044. 3. Male nurse shall take care of providing First Aid treatment to injured workmen immediately & then the worker if so necessary in the opinion of the male nurse. including disinvestments of all temporary works. Coordination shall be conducted by the Construction Manager Provision of waste management at all Jobsite locations. upon completion of Work Waste management shall be fully operational on a day to day basis both for garbage & sewage according to the planned arrangements. Soil report bore holes log direct to employing spread footings in isolation.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . o 4093 c d Supply and coordination of lower tier subcontractor and vendor representatives as necessary CONTRACTOR shall supply & coordinate with all lower tier sub contractors & vendors or their respective representatives to the requirement. shall be sent to Contractor site clinic for further treatment.

After ensuring proper safety arrangements are in. The construction teams shall be constituted to meet the requirement as exhibited on the organization chart.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h .5 m depth & arrangement for suitable access into pit made to the satisfaction of the safety inspector & company. A surveyor shall continuously ensure the Page 283 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. which are very tight for the purpose of physically executing the buildings package. 6. One General foreman shall be deployed for the labour engagement responsibilities on various day-to-day activities. Foundations shall be designed based on the laboratory recommendations.co. All unsuitable excavated material shall continuously be removed from site & suitable material tip off to designated area. All approved controlled drawings shall be issued to surveying team to commence the setting out operations. 4. quality. However. inspect & record all layouts. One project site manager shall be an overall responsible for all on site execution operations & conduct interface with the head office duly supported by safety. construction.5044. o 4093 c d settlement & long-term consolidation controls. All environment controls shall be taken care off during this operation. utilizing the services of an approved laboratory. survey barricading shall be established & necessary grids control fixed & inspected by QA / QC. All horizontal & vertical controls shall be established & monitored by the leader. CONTRACTOR shall further conduct investigations based on the Engineering Services sub contracting firm recommendations. A surveying team shall be constituted lead by a chief / senior surveyor to carry out all site setting works from the stage of preliminary site survey to the point of recording redlines for the purpose of ‘as built’. For all other organization details please refer to Project organization plan. Each team shall comprise of one site engineer. to verify the validity of the soil report. required number of site foreman & further supported by charge hand from each trade. technical & administration sections all to be well established on site. Excavation shall commence after the clearance is obtained & continue according to the plan. For each team one quality assurance/control engineer shall be deployed to conduct QA / QC procedures for the relevant area. Project & Construction manager shall in collaboration constitute six independent dedicated teams for six working divisions/areas lead by each site engineer directly reporting to construction manager as shown on the organization chart. Survey team shall coordinate with each site engineer to meet site requirement. 5. The phases of the construction shall be adhered to meeting the set out milestones. Proper safety shoring shall be arranged during this activity when it crosses 1. pre & post concrete data for the purpose of approval & handover dossiers. It shall be the responsibility of each team to set out.

Setting outs for further stub columns shall be done & preparatory works continued. Chamfer shall also be fixed on the vertical edges of the forms. all services inserts provided & inspections conducted from all disciplines followed by the concrete Page 284 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. When the excavation reaches the formation level. Inspection shall be conducted followed by concrete pouring supplied by an approved ready mix plant. 8. Preparations shall be carried out for the cellar suspended slabs by erecting required supporting system. Area shall be blinded to the design thickness minimum 75 mm properly levelled & trowel applied to make it suitable for the purpose to receive heavy duty concrete protection layer membrane. 7. After completing the preparatory works for the stub columns. Foundation top levels shall be fixed using 25 mm plastic triangular chamfers horizontally. Backfill shall continue up to the formation level below the grade slabs blinding in buildings & where cellar suspended floor slab is to be built. shall be prepared together with surrounding sub structures.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . proper curing arrangements shall be made for the required number of specified days. Field density tests shall be conducted to monitor the requirement of density & water content etc. CONTRACTOR QA / QC shall inspect the formation. After curing is done for the specified period. all works regarding grade beams/walls shall continue complying with all the approved procedures. All starter rebar shall also be fixed supported by plastic spacer. backfill shall be done around the grade structures. 10.co. In parallel. After concreting is finished. After required clearance.5044. Operations of grade beams/walls shall be taken up on similar principle as other activities. inspections & pouring shall be carried out following all procedures. On sides also plastic spacers shall be fixed to keep all rebar in proper position. All ready mix record shall be maintained according to QA approved procedures. arrangement shall be made for blinding all released area according to the approved method statements. Foundations shall be set out to design details to permit formwork erection & rebar placement. Then curing shall be carried out for 3 days. 9. protection membrane shall be applied on both horizontal & vertical surfaces followed by inspection & backfill in compacted layers to specified requirement. dressing shall be started followed by compaction of the soil so that area is ready for inspections. Fabrication of rebars shall be done in a designated area while fabrication of forms too in another designated area all according to approved procedures. o 4093 c d depth of excavation does not exceed the design requirement. forms fixed. rebars placed. For sub stations where cable cellar floor slab is to be built. 11. Application of the protection membrane shall commence thereafter over whole area of the blinding.

On parallel. Similarly. An inspection of the preparatory works shall be conducted by all involved disciplines. leveled & wood floated well to make it sufficient enough to receive the grade slab. Similarly walls of transformer areas shall be built adhering to all QA procedures. Steel rebars shall be fixed placed with spaces & inspections conducted. All vertical & grid controls shall be established by surveyor to keep in line & level all forms of beams alignment & soffits. Level of slab shall be established & then work of form fixing shall commence followed by placing of beams reinforcement.e. on the areas where grade slab is to be built. o 4093 c d pouring observing all QA procedures. After three days of curing on blinding. Inspections shall be conducted for the elements ready for pouring. Work of vertical forms shall commence for sides of columns as well as walls fixed using removable tie bolts with cones/boss at tie rod ends. 12. Works of steel rebar placement shall continue in parallel to speed up the preparatory works. inspections conducted & concrete poured.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . formation level. All preparatory works of superstructure elements shall come into full swing by the fabrication of the forms & steel rebar fabrication to the BBS details. plastic sheet shall be laid after compaction & leveling & all necessary under ground services completion. Scaffolding shall be erected for the fixing & placing vertical rebars of columns & walls in all required areas. pouring shall be carried out adhering to pouring method statement compliance. All necessary services shall be inserted. major sub structural elements have been completed giving a way to commence the super structural works. Services inserts such as electrical conduits. 14. Curing shall follow adhering to the agreed or approved procedures. blinding concrete shall be poured.co. All exposed vertical edges shall be chamfered using plastic chamfer 25 x 25 mm triangular section nailed to the forms. Curing shall be started Page 285 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo.5044. After obtaining approval for the pour. HVAC inserts or block outs if necessary & other inserts shall be marked for establishment. 13. Any inserts necessary for the electrical conduit or earthing. Forms shall be made of fair face ply to produce specified texture to the elevation requirement. Pouring shall commence keeping the height of pour not more than 2 m using vertical pipe chute of the pump reaching up to necessary level. At this stage of the building. Next operation of erection of the propriety scaffolding to support the superstructure roof slab shall commence strictly complying with the scaffolding drawings. shall be installed immediately & inspection conducted. preparation for the grade slab works shall commence & re-bars placed either by site fabrication or using pre fabricated mesh to design requirement. operations of fabrication of forms & rebar shall be taken up. after the completion of the backfill up to the bottom of blinding concrete i.

Over concrete protection paint on parapet. Services site team shall be inducted in full swing for carrying out all disciplinary operations. On New Control Building. Page 286 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. 18. followed by the steel rebar fixing & pour. those shall be provided within the formwork itself. Block work shall be carried out wherever required for walls followed by services fix 1 items & then plastered over as specified. o 4093 c d immediately after finishing the surface as required by the curing compound manufacturer’s instruction for the application of compound & also by using water in combination all to agreed procedures. all inserts shall be fixed followed by all relevant inspections & pour. 17. Seperation geotextile shall be provided according to applicator direction. laying of light weight foam concrete in grade minimum % to receive water proofing membrane. Erection of the scaffolding around shall extend to cover the parapet portion followed by formwork & rebar fixing. nozzle vibrators conforming to perform 10000 oscillation per minute & all other necessary arrangements necessary to perform the best task. Any defective concrete shall be applied remedial measures as agreed with the Company or Client. Suspended ceiling fixers shall also enter in to commence the work. If necessary during hot weather.co. work on the slab finishes shall continue. Aluminum flashing shall be fixed to design details.e. 15. cleaned & surface treatment to the project specification applied to produce specified class of surface texture i. Well-trained teams shall be engaged for such operations. Now the structural framing works have been completed giving way to attack on internal walls & other items such as dry wall lining & preparation for the roofing item. Where there is no ceiling. Wherever special openings have been provided in designs within the structural framing. Forms shall be struck form the elements carefully ensuring full safety intact. membrane application followed by water leak test for 72 hours & then polystyrene boards laid over to be protected by concrete pavers. On the similar pattern as defined earlier. Roofing shall commence by scabbling the slab surface. Concrete surface shall be inspected immediately after removing form.5044. special forms shall be erected for dome portion. concrete pumps. All necessary safety measures shall be installed. rest pauses shall be allowed to workers with the provision of liquid or salt water. 21. 20. 19.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . All aforesaid concreting operations shall be supported by necessary number of transit mixers. Intermediate slabs on the Battery rooms shall be constructed following the foregoing procedure. smooth finish or sandy or rough or grouted. 16. All preparations shall commence for the remaining works.

New control building requires complete furnishing excepting personal computers. work of embankment shall be carried out to the profile shown & back fill done in layers to retain the walkway. Fixing of cable terminations framing steel as well as framing steel for the floor openings shall be carried out according to details. Similarly. o 4093 c d 22. 23. All furniture shall be procured. Wall lining work shall be carried out in accordance to design details after ensuring complete inspections of services conduits etc. Concrete surfaces requiring protection shall be applied accordingly with 3 coat system or any other approved. The engineered structure shall be erected on the foundations. 32. Walkways works shall commence by filling & leveling around the building excluding the instrumentation room on the plant side portions. Works for the planter beds shall also be completed accordingly to the plan requirement. 28. When the works are ready involving the scope of telecommunication routes. 26. 24.co.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Works of external services within 5 m of building shall be completed & tested. Around new control building.5044. Sums shall be constructed to details in floor. All finishing items shall be carried out in wet areas & concealed piping shall be carried out prior to that. 33. 31. Tiling shall be followed on required areas schedules to receive floor or wall tiles. Gravel filling shall be done around the transformer oil containments/enclosures. Walkway Kerb shall be fixed to the profile over the blinding concrete with haunch concrete over. This embankment shall be used for grass growing. 30. Sand shall be filled over the compacted & profiled area of the walkways whereon the interlocking concrete blocks are to be fixed in to design pattern. Services inspections shall be conducted prior to commence the finishing works. are over. Flooring shall be carried out in according to design details. 25. Services operations shall be completed in all areas followed by finishing works. an entry shall be allowed to the related other sub contractor from other scopes provided with full cooperation in all respects. Works of all ramps shall be constructed according to details. All surrounding or backfills shall be completed to the specification provisions. 27. All internal & external light fixtures shall be installed. Operations of constructing transformer foundations shall be carried out & protection applied to that. 34. 29. inspected & installed accordingly to the relevant details. car park shed shall be worked by constructing its foundations with anchor bolts inserts. Necessary directional signs to be installed in buildings shall be fixed to Page 287 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo.

representatives as necessary All necessary lowers tier sub contractor & vendor representatives shall be provided to the scope requirement 39. 35. After ensuring that each installation is efficient in performance. blinding.co. Pre commissioning. chemicals and catalysts required up to issuance of the Provisional Acceptance Certificate. 37. rcc block. EE UI N L N XCT PA O Method statement (PROJECT IMPLEMENTATION STRATEGY) Ci Wk/ i e r pr tos i l os t P a in v r S e a Cnt uto Mhd t t m t os c n e o S e e s r i t a n Sample Only Page 288 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. commissioning and Provisional Acceptance. 36. Foundation works for a 100 m mast to support radio antenna shall be carried out at New Control Building which activities include setting out. For further details on the services method statements for the package. All activities necessary to achieve Pre commissioning.5044. WARRANTY OBLIGATIONS FINAL ACCEPTANCE SHALL be submitted for the work scope items THROUGH TO 43. All fix 1 & fix 2 procedures shall be conducted according to ITPs & approved procedures. fire alarm. All operating & maintenance manuals shall be submitted covering work scope items 42. All other furniture within scope shall be inspected & installed accordingly. fuels. Provisional Acceptance and Final Acceptance All services individual items integrity & tests shall be conducted by related sub contractors & record maintained. External landscape items such as gravel spreading. All required operating and maintenance documentation. Within Contractor scope 41. o 4093 c d approvals. excavation. concrete protection. release for commissioning shall be given. & gas detection system.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . lubricants. please refer to the CCTC documentation (not attached within this proposal). commissioning & provisional acceptance. fire suppression system. Details are included within the technical literature/datasheet Supply and coordination of lower tier subcontractor and vendor 38. All utilities. Commissioning. grass growing shall be undertaken accoding to layout shown on drawing. infrastructure of all other included services require pre commissioning. Services disciplines such as electrical. 40. internal sanitary & drainage.

1. The team members should upon receipt of the project documents should not waste any day but immediately commence with the practical works with the resolutions of all technicalities issues. It is expected that all the design & relevant details pertaining all involved structures shall be issued for construction by the Contractor in time according to the agreed schedule of construction. It is also expected that the site shall also be made available in time to meet the schedule requirement. for product quality assurance as well as customer satisfaction. It is also advised that feed back & homework planning has also been under charting process at the pre mobilization stage as envisaged somewhere else in this document. Our efforts shall be to organize the works in such a way that trained teams are established on site for important activities such as steel fixing. Smooth execution of the construction works necessitates the organization of certain competent teams constituted of capable members fully trained in their respective callings.5044.co. o 4093 c d Civil Works & site preparations shall be executed according to Company & Contractor requirement depending upon the priorities. Quality team shall monitor fully these operations of the construction teams. formwork.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Areas belonging to the standalone scopes may also be taken upon one by one depending upon the Company priority. all our staffing level shall affirmatively follow the guidance & the direction provided to. optimally utilize for the discharge of their functional responsibilities entrusted by the management. Since our organization works adhering to the set standards of execution in compliance with the quality manual & the project quality plan. concreting. 3. 2. Surveyor should efficiently establish all setting outs & its controls with prompt approval according to the guidance of the site engineer. Page 289 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Site engineer in conjunction with the site management should arrange all equipment necessary for the smooth excavation & other following activities. It is proposed to commence the works from all available areas respecting which designs are available immediately after mobilization & upon the receipt of the ‘Permits to Work’ if so required. adhering to the instructions by the site engineer and/or construction manager. concrete protection etc. The team members shall be proficiently skilled in the respective trades & group shall be rotated on the project various locations in sequence to perform the jobs on various work elements following the guidance & direction of the trade foreman & general foreman.

Inspection of the available surface shall be done first visually & then ascertained by spot levelling & undulations noted. All unsuitable material shall be removed to the specified thickness using heavy equipment such as shovels or bulldozers & selected good material filled. This document gives an overall strategy of proposed performance pertaining the site preparation & civil works keeping in view the quantities of various items/descriptions involved & the construction duration according to the defined milestones. Site protection & preparation. which cover major portions of the Preparation & Civil Works for the project. Dry & wet compaction shall be carried out to a suitable state of acceptance. 7. Dressing of whole area shall be conducted to form an acceptable level line profile.co. Surface Compaction using water shall be carried out to maintain the required profile. Company major policies have already been incorporated within the Execution plan of the New Buildings Package which is an EPC forming a part of overall subcontract scopes. These teams shall be extended full technical & administrative support from the engineering as well as procurement & all other controllers based on site as well as in head office immediately. Similar procedure shall be applied to the sloping surfaces. since the main purpose herein is to serve on the communication of specifically significant procedures that may be adopted on the project based on our past experience of construct able competency which has been exhibited by outlining the procedures & definitions that should be adopted for the proficient prosecution/ execution respecting various preparatory works items involved on the project under works code groups entitling Site Preparations & Civil Works 8. o 4093 c d 4. Areas covered around obstacles for both flat as well as sloping shall be dressed manually & compacted by plate compactors or light rollers. Page 290 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Undulation means certain types of ridges & valleys generally of irregular profile. 5. Ridges shall be chipped out & filled into valleys to form a balance throughout the area under consideration.5044. whenever required. 9.Surface levelling-Area for this activity shall be selected according to the scope indicated on the IFC drawings. 6. This document should be considered as an extension of that. The scope involves the sub titles & their description of constructions as follows.

uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . gas. structures and developments. all services that are present upon the site (This includes above ground services as well as buried services). discussions on site shall be conducted concerning alternate methods of removal. suitable compactable fill may be imported or re-located from other parts of the site. 3. chemical. Where necessary. Any obstruction encountered during excavation activities shall be plotted and recorded. o 4093 c d 10. as site-stripping activities proceed. These roads shall be constructed by levelling of the existing terrain. prior to the commencement of the activity. oil. and rubbish material. Technip & client shall be informed. the surveyor shall peg out the haul roads that shall be used by the construction equipment for all the site preparation activities.Profile should be within acceptable limits.5044. shall be demolished in a safe manner. telephone. water etc). 11. The removal of the topsoil shall include all vegetation. 2. The survey team shall locate and mark. Where hazardous material is encountered. Page 291 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. The method of removal of these existing elements shall usually be conducted by dozer or breaker. Where required water shall be spayed for dust control. all obstructions. 5. The details of the material and tipping arrangements shall be documented for review by the client as appropriate. Dependant upon the quality of the existing soil where the roads shall be built. to indicate existing grade and reduced grade. when the full extent of these structures is exposed. Prior to the start of topsoil removal. fences and developments. These existing services shall be marked upon a site drawing and the issues raised with the client for reaching a practical resolution. S P p ra n&E rth o T p a ite re a tio a w rk y ic l 1. approvals and permission shall be obtained from the concerned authorities. 4. The hazardous material shall be collected and removed to a licensed tipping place.co. it shall be identified and isolated. These roads shall be maintained as the work proceeds. Grade pegs shall be set to an agreed grid. The survey team shall also mark upon the site plan. 6. from the work site. Checking procedure. The necessary permits. existing structures. 12. Soft spots should be removed. Wherever within the subcontract scope. These services. shall be clearly marked using stakes and warning tapes. (Electric.

The material shall be deposited onto the areas to receive filling. Where unsuitable material appears. 9. The Geotechnical Engineer shall monitor the activity. moistened and compacted. which have to be defined upon sketches. For general removal of the topsoil activities. 10. The results of the tests shall be recorded upon the relevant QC format. moisture conditioned and compacted. according to the specification criteria. 8.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . The areas to be filled shall be divided into manageable sections that shall be defined upon a sketch. the material that has been excavated shall be transported to the fill area. stockpiling may be required. moisture conditioned and compacted. Sampling and testing of the resultant material shall commence and be conducted for specification verification and compaction data. The excavated formation surface shall be treated by scarification. This excavated material shall be transported to areas that require filling. o 4093 c d 7. The material shall be spread and leveled in 200mm layers. leveled. to ensure that compaction criteria are achieved. it shall be removed. If necessary. tipped. shall be placed in the same method as Page 292 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. where appropriate. using appropriate equipment. The areas shall be divided into manageable sections that shall be defined upon sketches. to ensure that the topsoil material is removed. Where areas are to receive fill. to achieve the required density criteria. to ascertain its suitability for re-use as fill material. The excavated areas shall be divided into manageable sections. The number of tests conducted shall reflect the specification requirement. levelled. moistened and compacted. 12. All areas shall be tested and the results recorded. Upon completion of the topsoil removal activities. The Geotechnical Engineer shall monitor and test all sections. the Geotechnical Engineer shall review the material to be excavated. Attention shall be observed at edges and slopes.co. In excavation areas. the exposed surface shall be scarified. No further fill activity shall be conducted upon an area that has not been approved and released by the Geotechnical Engineer. QC Engineer shall monitor activities regularly. The fill layer shall be moistened and compacted to achieve the required specification criteria. Additional layers of fill material. the areas concerned shall be excavated and graded to levels that shall ensure adequate surface water drainage.5044. The excavated areas shall be monitored by the Geotechnical Engineer to ensure that any unsuitable material does not appear. 11.

Mechanical or manual adjustment shall be carried out to the spread gravel followed by mechanical compaction to bring the material to undisturbed acceptable profile. Add water to the fill layer by passing the water tanker over the fill layer. laying & pipe connection shall be carried out accordingly to the sub contract scope. leaving the fill level to the correct grade. Irrigation network piping & fittings shall be carried out to the indicated areas on IFC drawings.L n s a in ee l o u c a dcp g . 4. The layer is now mixed with the grader until a uniform blend of moist material is achieved.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . 5.Installation of gravel crushed or natural shall be carried out by spreading to the specified thickness of 100 mm or 50 mm as the case may be over the prepared surface uniformly to site feasibility. 6. A time period of approximately one-hour is allowed for this water to soak into the fill layer. Production procedure. Spread and level the imported fill. 9. 1. Verification exercise for fill activity on record has been conducted to establish the economical and effective method for the fill activity.5044. Field Density Testing of the layer shall be conducted to the ITP requirement. o 4093 c d described above. Gravel Finishing. Additional water is added by passing the water tanker over the layer in a uniform sequence.Humus for the grass shall be spread over the IFC drawing indicated area on flat as well as sloped surface to specified thickness & leveled roughly by mechanical means. The water tanker should pass over the layer twice. A time gap of approximately two hours is allowed for the water to soak into the fill material. Work shall be done to the area indicated on IFC drawings. Vibrating rollers shall now compact the fill layer in a logical sequence that densifies the layer uniformly. provided by the relevant authorities within ASAB. 7. until the desired elevation has been achieved. Supply. Import and place fill to controlled areas of approximately 25m wide by 100 150m long. and exposed by hand Page 293 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. P te tio o E is gS rv e ro c n f x tin e ic s 1. V g ta S il S rfa e . 3. 8. From the provision of existing site drawings. existing services shall be located. 2. The fill layer is mixed again with the grader.co.

o 4093 c d excavation. At periodic locations along the route of the existing live service. that existing live service shall be protected. 3. Should an existing service be disbanded or redundant. The Survey Team shall inform the Infrastructure Engineer of the exact location of the service relative to the warning flags. The Infrastructure Engineer.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Ten meters (10m) either side of the route of the existing live service shall be erected posts. to identify the service. through the Technip representative. shall be strung between the posts. to indicate and protect the route of the service shall be conducted. and/or nylon cord. The use of warning tape. A nylon cord. Where an existing live service remains during the site preparation activity. 7. The Survey Team shall locate the live service upon the ground using spray paint or small pegs.co.5044. defined by the Survey Team. sufficient suitable fill material shall be placed on top of the cables to afford adequate protection to by distributing the vehicle axle loadings safely minimising stress concentration. The Survey Team shall check and accurately record these existing services. This shall clearly indicate the service and its route. 8. A line of pegs shall be positioned to indicate the route of the existing services. 9. 2. The Safety Officer shall periodically check the condition of the barriers. shall ask the relevant authority within ASAB. to review the excavated service and confirm the status and action he requires for the removal of the service. 4. with warning tape streamers. shall be displayed at sufficient locations along the route. 5. The redundant service shall be removed under the supervision of the Infrastructure Engineer according to the agreed criteria of that relevant authority. The purpose of this exercise is to ensure that the location of the live service is accurate. Signboards indicating what the live service within the marked corridor exactly is. where necessary refurbishment shall be conducted Page 294 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. that service shall be exposed. small hand dug pits shall be excavated. Where temporary roads cross-existing cables. such as the 33KVA electric cable. 6. to allow confirmation of the status of the service. The posts shall fixed be at suitable & sustainable centres.

Supply shall be affected according to the requirement. The fence post foundation shall be placed in the drilled hole to the correct line and level. Reinforced concrete fence. The Survey Team shall set out the line and level of the fence. A level survey shall demonstrate the accuracy of the site grading activity. shall be drilled for the fence post foundations. Individual elements shall be stocked properly.Pre-cast RCC fence panels shall be erected & connected to the already carried out foundations & inserts to the fence requirement. 13. Road barrier. 4.5044.Pre fabricated elements of the fence shall be procured from the market to the IFC indication & erected on site & connected to the already carried out foundations & connected to the structural requirement. Prefabricated reinforced concrete fence. Page 295 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Fne r c o ec E t n ei . 15. 11.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . 3. 6.pedestrian gates in complete package shall be supplied to the IFC & specification requirement as approved & installation be carried out accordingly. Excavation shall be carried out for the post embedment constructed to the manufacturer instructions by using RCC plug in to the holes to support the post of the fence. Vehicle gate. Using a machine-mounted auger. 14. The final grade level of the area shall be the commencement point for the fence construction. o 4093 c d 10. including post locations for all elements. Galvanized fence-Galvanized mesh shall be installed according to the IFC indicated location. 2. 5.road barriers in complete package shall be supplied to the IFC & specification requirement as approved & installation be carried out accordingly. 1.gates in complete package shall be supplied to the IFC & specification requirement as approved & installation be carried out accordingly to the manufacturer instructions & details. 12. Pedestrian gate. The drilled holes shall be cleaned and bedded to the correct base level.co. 300 and 450mm diameter holes as appropriate.

A survey shall be conducted of formation level upon completion of the excavation. 7. The gap between the ground beams at the location of the fence post shall be concreted to form a continuous beam. Safety barriers shall be erected as the work proceeds. o 4093 c d 7. The fence fabric tie staple shall be grouted in position once the fence fabric is tensioned. Constructability from the drawing shall be ensured. 6. Unsuitable material shall be removed off site to the tip area. The fence fabric shall be strung and tensioned as per the drawing details and manufacturers recommendations 9. 11. 11. A system for quick reference shall be established. 14. The formation shall be visually inspected for unsuitable material. 4. There is no requirement for ground de-watering equipment. 8. Where material is classified as suitable. The engineer shall ensure that the current drawings relating to the excavation activity are approved for construction. 2. Upon acceptance of these Page 296 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Any such material shall be removed. Where applicable. 5. Suitable fill material shall be used to compact around the ground beam. 8.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . 3. a trench shall be excavated for the ground beam. The excavation foreman shall direct the excavation equipment in an agreed sequence. The laboratory test results shall be provided. the sides of the excavation shall be sloped. The surveyor shall provide line and level engineering that shall enable the excavation of the structure. The formation shall be scarified and compacted to the required specification criteria. The surveyor shall inform the excavation foreman of these lines and levels. shoring or support of the excavation sidewalls shall be agreed with Technip on site. Should restrictions be imposed by adjacent structures etc that would make sloping of the sides un practical. 12. the required volume shall be stockpiled on site in an agreed location.co. Dune sand shall be compacted around the foundation. QC procedures shall be closed out on an on-going basis. The surveyor and site engineer shall check the excavation to confirm compliance with his levels and lines.5044. 12. The engineer shall ensure that there are no conflicts with existing services or other discipline issues. 10. Ecvto xaa n i 1. 13. Using hand tools. Excavated material shall be classified by laboratory test. 10. 9. The ground beam shall be placed to the correct line and level.

The layer shall be moisturized and compacted to the agreed criteria.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h .5044. After piles have been driven. Curing shall follow to agreed procedures. All records shall be maintained. An acceptable test result shall allow the next layer of backfill to be placed and compacted. Pile head preparation shall be carried out by cutting pile heads to expose the rebar for connection to pile head or cap rebars. 4. 1. the area shall be cleaned of waste materials and left tidy for the next activity to follow. Upon completion of the backfill activity. o 4093 c d results. Driven cast in place concrete piles with permanent casing. Each backfill layer shall be field density tested by the laboratory. Cast in place concrete piles1. Casing shall be driven truly vertical into the location using the rig & continued Page 297 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. 5.shall be done accordingly & pile location set out by the surveyor. the engineer shall instruct the foreman to carry out this activity. 3. dynamic auscultation & load test shall be conducted to specified requirement. B c fill tos c re ak tru tu s 1. In case of pre cast piles. Piling rig moving. The backfill material shall be placed in layers according to the specification. demobilization of equipment shall be effected 3.Equipment mobilization. P gTp a ilin y ic l . sonic test. 2. It shall be ensured that the pile remains vertical & in its set out location. the rig shall drill the pile bore to specified dia vertically using steel insert protection at pipe toe. After proper placement of the rebars of the pile cap & the pile head. The engineer shall ensure that all subsequent activities are passed and completed. The backfill material shall be sourced from the suitable material stockpile. Upon approval to backfill.co. 6. formwork shall be erected & concrete poured for the pile head or cap.Location of the piles shall be set out. Load test shall be conducted by reaction truck loading or the actual load applied in cycles. This process shall continue until the whole fill is completed. the area shall be released for consequent activities. Pre cast/stressed piles shall be inserted into the bore with compression impact hammer gradually till the whole pile is driven into the strata. Cleaning shall be done. Dynamic auscultation test shall be conducted to the code requirement. 2. Any safety barriers shall be removed to the safety store. 2. After the pile is driven.

All excavated earth shall be removed from site. Pile load test shall be conducted after lapse of specified duration. most of the pile caps shall be thick sections. To ascertain the pile integrity. While withdrawing. Casing base shall be cleared & inspection for the plumb & profile conducted. All reinforcement effected by concrete shall be cleaned. care has to be exercised that verticality is not disturbed. Concrete spacer shall be fixed properly. Ensure dimensions are correct within tolerable limits. concrete shall be poured into the casing keeping a maximum drop of concrete not more than 2 m. 4. sonic test shall be conducted by a hammer impact & the transmission of the sonic waves recorded using the standard equipment. Ensure concrete level at top is fixed properly using 25 x 25 mm plastic chamfers. concrete pouring shall be carried out & the unformed surface finished smooth enough to receive concrete protection. 3. Ensure the side are truly aligned as well as in plumb. Ensure reinforcement placed to the design details. Since. All accumulated water shall be removed by pumping continuously & piling area kept dry. After the inspections are conducted. Test record shall be maintained according to ITP & procedural requirement. Reinforcement cage provided with concrete spacers shall be placed into the casing properly fixed.5044. polythene sheets and clean sand fill below the coverings so that no heat transmission is permitted from the concrete Page 298 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Any tie up beams preparatory works shall be carried out. Engineer shall select the piles to be load tested.co. 1. o 4093 c d until the design depth is reached. In case casing is to be withdrawn. 2. Concrete vibrator shall be kept working into the poured concrete & gradually withdrawn progressively as the concrete moves up. Ensure the vertical corners edges have been fixed with plastic chamfer. Pile shall be poured continuously avoiding any construction joint. This test shall be conducted for all piles for it ascertains the integrity & transparency of the material used. After the piles have been tested successfully. Ensure the spacers are properly fixed & all steel bar in its design locations. it shall also be gradually withdrawn following the gradual & progressive pour. Pouring shall be completed up to the head of the pile. Extra portion of the concrete shall be cut to the pile cap base level. preparation of the pile head shall commence. After inspections. new reinforcement for the pile cap & column starter bars installed. Soil column shall be taken out by pressurised water.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Cyclic load testing shall be applied for 72 hours loading & unloading & reloading. Preparatory form shall be erected for the pile cap. special arrangement shall be made for curing using saturated Hessian.

In the controlled plant area.Sonic test by hammering for construction uniformity & homogeneity. Necessary benchmarks shall be established for Page 299 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Jet Grouting soil Improvement system. Load testing horizontal loading test. bushes. o 4093 c d surface. Earthwork1. 9. CFA piles shall be continuously augur bored into any soil. Micro Piles. vegetation topsoil shall be removed irrespective of its consistency & water content. water shall be sprinkled on the forms from the sides to ensue minimum heat loss in early days of concreting. General Excavation1. plants. reinforcement for Micro piles. reinforcement place in & concrete poured.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . pile location survey. Load testing tensile test. location survey shall be conducted for 5% of the poured piles. Dynamic auscultation test by impedance. All debris shall be removed from site. Pile test. Bored Continuous flight auger (CFA) Piles. Grubbing .co. locations shall be set out. Scrubbing. Curing shall be carried out to the requirement. legal ‘permit to work’ shall be obtained from the ‘operating authority’ 2. These uprooted green materials shall be collected at one place for suitable disposal to a designated area.According to the scope included on the IFC drawings. 2. It shall be made sure that no existing services run under the proposed area from the concerned authorities record. During high temperatures. reinforcement for Continuous Flight auger (CFA) piles6.For the proposed piles. Drilled micro piles. All tests shall be conducted according to previous explanations. Rotary mast shall be utilized to drill a bore into the strata without removing the soil & high pressure cement grouting applied into the bore. After the piles have been cast.5044. 8.According to the scope included on the IFC drawings. Similarly. Load testing (compression). roots shall all be removed completely from the soil ensuring that the soil is not effected adversely. 5. 10. 7. This type of curing is called thermal curing. prior to commence with the excavation. trees.

The surface shall be watered & compaction carried out using heavy road roller of at least 8 T capacity. Such area shall be set out to the IFC details. dressing conducted on the rough formation to bring it to required profile. 4. grids marked on the timber rails around the area periphery. Signs shall include KEEP AWAY DEEP EXCAVATION. After preparing the formation for the engineered fill. general excavation should be carried out which allows saving in excavation time keeping the area tidy.co. which work in strips in parallel overlapping the previous strip. Compaction shall be conducted until rebound occurs. selected granular material shall be placed into the prepared formation in layers. Excavation shall be started by excavator directly loading the material into a dumper truck which shall remove the excavated material from the location to stock pile areas in case the material is suitable for re use as backfill or to a designated dumping area otherwise. HARD HATS ZONE etc 3. Environment protection arrangements shall be charted out to keep the site tidy. Proper safety warning signs shall be erected around proposed general area. further excavation shall be carried out to the design thickness of the improved strata. immediate information shall be notified to the concerned authority so that corrective action can be undertaken. Additional marking shall be set for the general area limits & proposed convenient ramp to allow easy access & egress to & from the area. Where it is feasible to excavate the whole unit area involving all foundations & beams etc. During excavation in case of loose soils such as sand whose angle of repose does not permit.5044.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . soil improvement is to be applied. In case. o 4093 c d surveying controls & monitoring purpose. A surveyor shall constantly monitor excavation formation level. Formation levels shall be recorded. Excavation & soil removal shall continue to reach the formation level. 5. Now the formation is ready to receive the foundations on it. watered & compacted. Field density test shall be conducted for each layer of fill. using heavy excavation equipment. Plate bearing test may also be carried out to know the ultimate & safe bearing capacity of the improved strata. No further excavation shall be carried out. shoring shall be arranged around the periphery to prevent soil subsidence. In case of any mishap caused to the existing services. All debris shall be removed from area. Page 300 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Field density test shall be conducted to ensure the correct formation density has been achieved. atterberg’s limit & moisture content are within acceptable limits.

But in this case. All arrangement for the necessary shoring resorted in advance. Safety signs shall be established. Setting out shall be done accordingly for the extent of the area & grid control established. o 4093 c d 6. Where particular foundation or trench for a cable or an isolated or combined footing or vessel base etc is to be excavated. In case of fibre optic cable exposure. In case water level is high & dewatering is necessary. The quantity of samples to be taken for test shall depend on the extent of area under compaction. 3. Loose soil from the base shall be removed. No dewatering is required.Typical Profile shall be set for the proposed embankment base. according to investigation report. prior to commence with the excavation. In case of any mishap caused to the existing services. immediate information shall be notified to the concerned authority so that corrective action can be taken.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Centreline of the embankment shall be marked. no machine shall be used until specially permitted after the exposure of all existing services.co. In case manual excavation is to be carried out for the protection of the existing services. No dewatering is required. Necessary benchmarks shall be established. Field tests shall be conducted according to the specification requirement. excavation shall be carried out only for that particular area. proper plan shall be made to install the dewatering system until the whole of area is constructed up to the ground level. In the controlled plant area. legal ‘permit to work’ shall be obtained from the ‘operating authority’ 2. Water shall be pumped out & disposed to a suitable agreed discharge point keeping the location tidy. But in this case. watered & compacted using heavy roller. Whole layer shall be compacted to achieve non-structural fill density. soil is free of water. soil is free of water. In case water level is high & dewatering is necessary. Filling shall continue in layers until the whole section is completely backfilled. Embankment template shall be fixed at various spacing longitudinally.5044. according to investigation report. Sectional Excavation1. Excavation shall start by mechanical equipment removing the excavated soil into a dumper truck for disposal to stockpile or to a designated area. proper plan shall be made to install the dewatering system until the whole of area is constructed up to the ground level. Structural backfill compaction density test shall be ensured for the embankment to Page 301 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Water shall be pumped out & disposed to a suitable agreed discharge point keeping the location tidy. Embankment. Backfill shall be carried out in layers 250 mm loose thick. Every layer shall be tested accordingly. only water jetting should be used to excavate the area.

To retain the basins 1. Conglomerate of 10 to 20 mm size.co. Suitable backfill material shall be procured from an approved source including Page 302 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. All forthcoming layers shall be filled adhering to same procedure & tested. Every layer shall be filled 250 mm thick watered & compacted down to 200 mm. Field density test shall be conducted after the compaction to allow the commencement of the upper layer. The top layer to receive the bituminous surface finish shall be prepared suitable accordingly. Surface shall be inspected & density test conducted by taking out the compacted cores. Surface shall be primed with approved material. Soil Improvement. existing soil shall be excavated out in specified thickness & removed to dumping areas. Surface shall be cleaned. Tank foundation area shall be set out to IFC details.By Soil Substitution 1. foundations etc.5044. 4. This material shall be used for the formation of the storage facility foundation fill works. Similarly. Earth dikes. the filling works for the earth dike shall be carried out as stated in the foregoing from excavated material & also if required from the supplied material as the case may be. Body of the dyke shall be covered by application of an approved material to give acceptable finish to the body of the dyke per provisions on the IFC drawings. roads. 2. Reusable material for filling shall be screened out regularly from the stockpiles. 3.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . additional deficient materials of required grading be added to bring the stock to acceptable plasticity index or non-plastic standard. 2. Wherever shown on the IFC drawings. Design profile shall be established & fill layers commenced with. Excavated material from the other excavation areas shall be stockpiled at designated areas. 6. Earthwork for Storage facility1. closed with 5 mm aggregates & bituminous emulsion @ 1 kg/m^2 or in accordance with Contractor standard to from a total compacted thickness 100 mm. the scope of replacement of the existing soil from the plant area. Compliance of this material shall be ascertained by conducting classification tests & if necessary. Similar operations shall be carried out on the sloping areas. 2. levelled properly & top of surface finish level established. 5. o 4093 c d receive heavy loading such as tanks.

4. verticality & joint thickness shall all be controlled. Blinding shall be laid to the required profile in gradient. Soil TreatmentWherever shown on IFC drawings. Alignment of the kerb. Wherever shown on IFC drawings. Walkways Finishes1. Whole area in the scope shall be applied treatment accordingly. 100 mm thick RC concrete with prefab mesh paving given float finish shall be applied with required number of joints properly spaced. Kerb shall be placed on the blinding using defined cement mortar mix sealing the base of kerb & end to end joints perfectly. Walkways kerbWherever shown on IFC drawings. o 4093 c d the site stockpiles & backfilling carried out to replace the excavated portion of the plant area. re-transport to the original location shall be carried out. Testing shall be conducted to ascertain the field density achievement. Finishing over the walkway foundation shall be applied according to IFC drawings & specification requirement 2. After the mixing of the soil.5044. Wherever shown on IFC drawings. water & mix mechanically. proper preparation of the formation duly compacted shall be carried out. spread on to the area. gradient. 3. levelled & compacted in acceptable thickness & bring the profile to the defined levels. All loose soil shall be cleared and formation level made up and well compacted & pesticide treatment applied if so specified. Walkways FoundationGranular material shall be filled below the walkway finishes given required gradient. This fill shall be compacted to the non-structural requirement. the soil shall be stripped out from the area & transported to stockpiles for the purpose to add into this material cement or lime. L y gK rbs n sT p a S m le a in e to e y ic l a p Page 303 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo.co. 30 mm thick rolled thickness of bituminous conglomerate shall be applied. 3. the scope to treat the soil belonging to an area. Any deviation in the alignment shall be within acceptable limits. Watering & compaction shall be carried out all according to approved procedures. the scope of laying & fixing the walkway kerbs.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h .

uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . as shown in (triangular fillet section) 10. Filling up to top of vertical concrete with earth fill & compaction 11. Setting out kerb excavation lines according to drawing Excavation up to the formation level i. Sand screed shall be spread on the surface of the blocks with 2 more vibrator Page 304 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. End to end butting mortar thickness shall be 3 mm 9. 25mm thick for kerb stones grade 20 8. 6. Bedding in cement mortar 1:3. 3. After sufficient blocks have been laid. Placing haunch back fillet concrete grade 20. First Grey or other approved colour interlock blocks shall be laid to position & profiled to form the border pattern. sand bedding shall be carried out using a plate vibrator pressing the blocks to the required level in 2 passes covering entire area with each pass to make the bedding even 9. 4. After profile is well formed to the approval. Thickness of the sand screed bedding 100mm 3.5044. 2. The blocks shall be laid in full but at the edges of the obstacles such as inspection covers where cut blocks may be required.e. o 4093 c d 1. Plank runs shall be used to allow barrows to move on to avoid level disturbance 4. 7. Fixing 12 T re-bars @ 200 c/c vertically supported to forms 7. QC inspection shall be conducted for kerb laying approval and ITP requested to be signed off by QC (Laying Paving Interlocking blocks) 1. First surveyor shall set out the pattern borders all according to shop drawing as well as design drawings 5. Alignment tolerance shall be 3 mm in 75 mm both ways vertically as well horizontally. Fixing kerb on the mortar to the true lines and levels with chamfer facing pavement & jointing with mortar.co. All areas below proposed interlocking course to be filled with 100 mm thick sand screed all according to conventional procedures 12. Thickness of the interlocking blocks 60mm 2. Pouring grade 20 concrete all according to approved procedures 6. whole blocks shall be laid first wherever possible and the trim able blocks exactly marked & cut to the required size. 450mm from the kerb top level Form work fixing and pouring grade 20 concrete 450mm wide and 150 mm thick Formwork fixing and pouring grade 20 concrete 150mm wide and 150 mm thick high 5. the fill in course to the border areas shall be carried out by laying Red or as approved colour blocks 8.

profiling levels to the project drawing & compaction. Prior to the start of the Prime course spreading.e. 10.5044. a s a in s h lt) R a W rk T p a S m le o d o s y ic l a p The following sequences shall be involved to do the roadwork 1. Water shall be sprayed on the surface to make it penetrate in to & around all the voids of the spread material & compaction by heavy roller carried out to densify the whole course. Drying time shall not be less than 48 hours. o 4093 c d passes applied & brushed under the leading edge of the vibrator to allow the joints vibrated 10. After required number of passes probably 6 given by 18 to 12 tonne rollers bringing the laid material to the required thickness 150 mm & exhibiting rebound on the surface. Asphalt concrete shall be laid in widths of driveway roads according to the project drawings. Applying pesticide treatment if required 4. Application of all pre work items such as construction of kerbstone to complete sectional details shown on project drawing miscellaneous details. 9. Sub base approved fill material to interlock the class B material shall be spread on the spread material & dry rolling carried out to produce correct profile of the section 8. QC inspection shall be conducted & QP requested to approve the paving R a s Y rd . the compaction by rolling shall cease. Clearing all services according to the project drawings and inspections/Approvals 2. 12. Inspection of the surface 6. P v g(A p a o d . Sub base class B material shall be spread on the area in strips of required thickness keeping more than design thickness by 25mm i.co. 3. Density test shall be conducted all according to approved ITPs requirement 11. any defect is observed during visible inspection shall be repaired in rectangular or square shape or as agreed with. placing in imported fill material. Asphalt concrete 1. Wearing course thickness being 40mm & that of dense bitumen binder course Page 305 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Preparation of the area to be structured by removing topsoil. 150+25 mm 7. Compacted course shall be left for drying in due course allowing it to be ready to receive Prime Coat MC1. 5.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . 2.

Application of 60mm thick dense binder course 4. Material shall be transported from the plant to the planned location in good condition by trucks cleaned of all foreign material & covered with tarpaulin to prevent dust invasion in inclement/adverse weather conditions 2. All materials shall be mixed at an approved calibrated & approved Asphalt plant 2.5044.co. Application of Tack coat & drying out 6. 80mm Paving works shall be carried out in 2 stages Stage 1 Laying & compacting bottom bituminous binder course Stage 2 Laying & compacting top wearing carriageway Surface preparation 1. 6. Prior to the application of the dense bitumen binder course. already laid & compacted aggregate base course shall be prepared suitable for this purpose 2.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . 4. Re-preparation of aggregate base course surface with water & compaction by pneumatic roller 2. Application of Priming coat & drying out 3. It shall be ensured by obtaining observations using thermometer that the material when laid is within 130 to 165degree Celsius Page 306 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Application of 40mm thick bitumen concrete wearing course Mixing 1. Power brooming the completed dense binder course 5. 7. 5. Base course shall be corrected of any deviation more than 13mm from the designed profile at any point & not more than 9mm in 3m on the longitudinal grade at any location by either adding to or removing from the surface the deficient or redundant material respectively to bring the surface to the design shape. All trucks and other equipment as included shall be readily available for inspection Transportation 1. watered & compacted in accordance to the specification all as stated above Main Operations The following main operations are involved 1. o 4093 c d 3.

uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . well dried & even to the specified priming conditions as well as to receive binder course.5044.4 litre/ m^2  Tack coat 0. water tanks & sprinkling apparatus to keep the wheel sufficiently wet to prevent the bituminous mixture from sticking to the steel surface shall be employed to roll the profiled material immediately after the material is laid to the acceptable profile to prevent the formation of undue displacement or hair cracking 1. Rolling shall be commenced from the side and proceed towards the centre each trip overlapping the previous by at least 300 mm with keeping alternate trip not more than 5 km/h & it shall continue until the surface is impression free.4 to 0.7 litre / m^2 Primer 1. 4. The roller wheels shall be kept properly moistened without excess water or oil 2. Pneumatic tyres rollers shall be engaged only after the compaction by wheel roller is over. QC inspection shall be conducted throughout the above operations to make sure that the material is compacted to the standards and the temperature remains Page 307 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. 2. The material upon arrival at the location shall be spread & struck off to the prepared profile by means of self-poared spreading & finishing equipment attached with a strike off assembly distributing the mixture to a strip 3 m wide Rolling Steel Roller’s # of passes 6 to 8 depending on the surface condition Steel rollers 10 T capacity equipped with adjustable wheel scrapes. Roller shall not pass over the edges of the freshly laid material generally except when the edge is located at a discontinuation for that day 7. It is significant to make sure that the asphalt temperature does not fall below 80 deg C prior to full compaction is achieved 6. QC inspections shall be conducted to ascertain the true profile of the aggregate base course & corrections applied if so required 2. 5. 3. QC inspection shall be conducted prior to the commencement of binder course laying to make sure that the surface is satisfactorily clean. All surfaces planned to be primed shall be barricaded & cleaned of all dirt & any objectionable material 3. o 4093 c d Application  Coverage  Primer coat 0.8 to 1. Mechanical compactors shall be engaged to compact the roll inaccessible area layers.co. Bituminous material shall be applied evenly on the dry surface by means of a pressure distributor spray tanker within a temperature 30 deg to 70 deg C Surfacing Binder Course 1.

QC inspection shall be conducted throughout the above operations to make sure that the material is compacted to the standards and the temperature remains within limits mentioned as well as levels are maintained within specification tolerances Reinforcement Fabrication 1. This bar if correct. cleaned & tack coat applied to receive adjoining material 9. Any error in bending of the bars shall be corrected prior to placement in storage.co. The bending operator shall fabricate the required number of bars of each shape code checking against the check sample when each bar is completed. When reinforcement is to be “cut and bent. At the commencement of the work on the area involving the compacted & chilled edge. o 4093 c d within limits mentioned as well as levels are maintained within specification tolerances particularly over the areas involving shoulders 8. Tack coat shall be applied to the specification requirement 3. 4. No traffic shall be permitted until 12 hours lapse post-rolling completion Wearing Course 1. The bundles shall be tagged with a suitable label that indicate the relevant bar reference and BBS document reference from which these have been fabricated. the material shall be spread & rolled similarly as described in the foregoing.” the foreman shall be issued with a current rebar schedule. Upon bending of the first of each bar type. The correct bent bars shall be stored in bundles & protected against ingress of moisture. The cropper operator shall crop the required bars of each diameter.5044. Page 308 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. 3. 4. 2.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . The correct bar diameter shall be cropped into the specified length as given on the bar schedule. The planned surface shall be cleared of all dust & dirt using power broom or blowing 2. shall be utilized as a check sample for all concurrent bars of that type. Immediately upon arrival. a bevel shall be cut out. 5. it shall be checked by the foreman for correctness. The foreman shall review the schedule and allocate the fabrication process to the relevant fabricator/steel fixer. Material required shall be sourced from the yard storage facilities.

in accordance with the current reinforcement drawing under direct supervision of rebar charge hand or foreman. The completed bundles shall be stored within the reinforcement yard until such time as those are required upon site. 9. 7. chairs. QC shall check all items of different shapes. stirrups and tie wire. pipes. The Site Engineer & charge hand steel fixer/foreman shall check the fabricated reinforcement when all the placement of the reinforcement bars is complete.5044. 8. 6. spacing & numbers. Site Engineer. 2. The relevant reinforcement bars. 11. 10. 12. in accordance with the storage procedure pertaining fabricated & non-fabricated re-bars. 3. The foreman steel fixer shall ensure that the reinforcement has been correctly placed prior to informing the Site Engineer & QC. reinforcement bars and accessories.co. Q A for validity. Particular attention to the following items shall be monitored by the charge hand steel fixer and foreman: 5. Should any inserts. Placement of adequate support chairs and stirrups. Spacing of bars. Storage shall be in accordance with the procedure for store control. conduits. The current revision of the reinforcement drawing that applies to the structure being constructed shall be checked by the Project Engineer. Reinforcement Placement Typical 1. Appropriate concrete cover to formwork and outside faces.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . shall be collected from the stores as well as fabrication yard and made available at the work site. Tie wire protrusions into cover areas. 4. bolts etc. Lap length of bars. additional chairs if required. The material shall be stored at the worksite. require fixing within the structure Page 309 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. spacer blocks. spacer blocks. The steel fixers shall place and tie. o 4093 c d 6. The result of this inspection shall be recorded upon Pre concrete inspection checklist by Site Engineer & QC. 13.

co. These lines and levels shall be explained to the foreman and supervisor in charge/charge hand of the formwork activity. the Page 310 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Where pre-fabricated formwork can be assembled in the carpentry workshop. so that this activity may commence. the steel fixer shall move the relevant bar. 3. The foreman shall inform the Site Engineer when these activities are complete. 4. Should any doubt arise about moving bars. Where a reinforcement bar clashes with such items. the charge hand shall inform the foreman & Site Engineer to resolve the issue with the engineer. 10. 7. 5. Provision where applicable of chamfer and channels have been fixed 13. o 4093 c d according to design details or shop drawings. The QC shall inspect the re-bars placed in the structure for compliance with the design drawings and details as well as other working and shop drawings. the most suitable method of formwork erection. The foreman shall check that the preceding activities have been approved. the steel fixer foreman shall arrange for the placement of these items according to directions by Project Engineer/Site Engineer. Sealing of joints between formwork has been applied properly 9. The supervisor and surveyor shall check the lines and levels of the formwork when all bracing and strutting have been completed. 6. fabrication shall be carried out. Adequate bracing and supports are in tact 11. based on the decision of Engineer.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Tie bolts are in proper positions & snug tight.5044. The form carpenters shall assemble and fix the formwork in accordance with the current drawing. The charge hand of carpenters shall monitor particular issues such as: 8. in good condition for the type of finish required & applied over with shutter form oil. shall be taken to the work site. the formwork foreman shall review the drawing of the structure to be formed & shall decide together with the site engineer. Wherever required. 16. 2. The form carpenters shall ensure that the formwork faces are clean. The surveyor shall establish the lines and levels for the erection of the formwork. The sections of formwork required to form the structure. 14. Fr wr E co Tp a o o r t n yi l m k ei c 1. Project or Site Engineer. Verticality of formwork is according to requirement. 15. Provision where applicable for box outs and inserts have been applied 12. An additional bar may be required to offset this moved bar. Based on site engineer’s instruction.

8. 2. When the formwork activity is complete. columns.co. which should already be located in proper position. The foreman shall review the formwork when completed. The QC inspector shall confirm the acceptance of this activity after review of the items.5044. Where large formwork elements are encountered. The supply order for estimated quantity may be placed in advance but real confirmation shall be done based on the pour approval. Cnr tn Tp asme oce g y i l a p i c l 1. the supervisor shall ensure that these arrangements are adequately supported as well as securely braced. 15. 4. temperature. Immediately. Necessary access to the location shall be prepared using proper supports or platforms duly inspected by the safety officer in charge. The required quantity shall be sequenced depending on the consumption frequency on site. 18. 14. the order for the release of concrete from the batching plant shall be placed. 9. formwork checklist and insert check list. slump. the supervisor shall inspect the formwork and associated works. After the inspections of the preparatory works pertaining to any element namely footings. The concrete shall be poured either by the concrete pump or by the mobile crane depending on the necessity & convenience. 7. 16. recording his observations on approved formats. The supervisor shall ensure that any damaged face of the formwork is repaired. shall receive the load & pump out to the in situ delivery location. the concrete pump. 3. air contents etc all test samples to the specification requirement shall be taken by the ready mix supplier in the presence of the QA engineer. 6. Arrangement shall also be made for the filling of the concrete cubes/cylinders on site & number of specimen to specification requirement. the QC inspector shall review the formwork bracings and supports with the engineer. stubs. Page 311 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. the truckload shall be rejected. o 4093 c d formwork shall be adjusted to conform to the required lines and levels. 5.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . at the arrival of the truck mixer of concrete on site. All inserts and bolt groupings shall be checked for location and level prior to the placement of concrete as well as after the concrete is placed. 19. In case the concrete does not meet the specification requirement. suspended slabs etc & the relevant approval. After the truck is approved by the QA to be transported to the site location. Where anchor bolts or embedded plates are to be suspended in the structure. 17.

The widened portion of the stub in touch with soil shall also be poured in strips not more than 450 mm deep 15. Inspection shall be made immediately post form striking & any defect in concrete shall be brought to QA Engineer notice for deciding remedial action. 19. The grade slab shall be poured in one go in depth bay wise between ground beams or walls. 11. Each Footing shall be poured in one go if not more than 500 mm in depth. insertion vibrator shall be used by a trained operator to compact the mix till no more bubbles appear. 23. In such case previous formed joint shall be scabbled/hacked to expose all aggregate by removing laitance completely.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . As soon as enough mix is available in the element to compact the mix conveniently. washed with cement slurry & new concrete Page 312 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. immediately the last poured line shall be stopped by a formed surface & concrete terminated at that point & in no way shall recommence prior to 24 hours with further approval obtained. 18. In case some plant break down is reported. The portion of the pipe chute shall be inserted into column preparatory works to allow for a 2 m vertical fall maximum. further covered with polythene sheet cover or alternatively curing compound shall be sprayed over the water-wet surface to form a impermeable membrane not to permit evaporation. The joints if so required. The concrete laying gang already present on the site location shall receive & pour the concrete mix into the prepared elements from a height not more than 2 m from the edge of the boom chute pipe. Top level of the concrete shall be levelled & the columns form top covered with plastic sheet 17. Vertical surface shall be covered with saturated Hessian. 22.co. shall be agreed in the beginning of the pour with the engineer. Vertical forms of the columns shall be struck after 48 hours. o 4093 c d 10. 12. Water shall be sprayed over the form during hot weather prior to pouring to avoid flash setting of concrete with re-bars. pouring shall be completed avoiding formation of cold joint 16. For the suspended slabs. Over vibration shall not be permitted 13. beams shall be poured first around the slab & prior to the formation of cold joint.5044. Vibrator shall not be allowed to touch the forms side or re-bars. the slab concrete shall be poured & the whole slab completed. Into columns the mix depth at one rotation shall be 450 mm & in different strips vertically. 21. 14. Foreman shall direct the pump remote control operator about the boom movement & stop & hold points or stages during concreting. 20.

5044. Then after about 2 hours. polythene sheet shall be withdrawn temporarily & saturated hessian placed over concrete & recovered with polythene sheet & the concrete cured for specified period 28. 4. Expansion joint to the details shown on the drawing. Immediately after the compaction of concrete is over & concrete starts setting in. electric conduits or any other insert is disturbed from its design or worked location. Due care shall be taken that no spacers. Weed killer chemical shall be applied to the soil to prevent the organic growth if so specified. it shall be immediately relocated according to the engineer site approval. 27. shall be filled up to the bottom of the concrete slab following the profile given on the drawing and compacted to 95 % dry proctor density. polythene sheet 0.25mm shall be placed with end overlaps at least 150mm at all joints and intersections. 24. 26. End forms shall be fixed on sides allowing a provision to place 20 dia MS dowel bars 650mm long & 300mm centres half painted with 2 coats bit mastic paint with 100mm long cardboard cap containing compressible material such as cotton waste at the 8. All the relevant underground services shall be laid in all respects prior to the commencement of the pavement work 2. repair to hardened concrete is required. Immediate curing shall be applied by spreading polythene sheet cover on slabs & footing. 3. o 4093 c d commenced making proper bond with old concrete.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . approved repair material shall be used according to manufacturer’s instructions. If so. 25. 7.co. On the ’compacted filled area’ to be paved. The thickness of the expansion joint shall be 20mm Page 313 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. The whole area shall be divided into parts to suit the services and the contraction joints formations & as shown on drawings 6. If so disturbed. arrangements for applying U1 finish to the top of slab surface shall be done by timber tamper. Approved sub base material 150mm thick or as specified. The area to be paved shall be made ready by clearing all weak soil & by scarifying. Cnr t Pv g y i a oce ai Tp l e n c 1. 5.

co. dust and loosely adhering materials. Page 314 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. After the inspection. Remaining bays shall be carried out in the next day operation. 12. Preparation for the lining concrete shall be carried out by placing in pre fabricated reinforcement to design details & sides formed at edges parallel to the ditch as well as at the construction joints. Welded wire fabric mesh dia 6mm – 200# shall be placed in the bay centrally located with concrete spacers below. 11. 8. Earth sectional depth dimension as included within specifications Depth 300 to 500 mm. QC inspection shall be conducted. The fibreboard shall be removed to the required depth. Blinding shall be applied on the compacted base to the design thickness. 1000 to 1500mm. 13. 5. 10. E p n io J in b tw e d h s x a s n o ts e e n itc e 1. 6.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Forms shall be set to correct levels so that the total thickness of the concrete is as indicated on the drawings. Isolation layer shall be applied if so provided within the specification. 4. concrete pour shall be carried out in alternate bays with unformed horizontal as well as sloping surfaces finished smooth. Curing compound shall be spread on the surface for immediate curing covered with polythene sheet and later within 2 hours damp hessian added by removing polythene sheet temporarily and recovered thereafter. The expansion joints between the two adjacent slabs shall be filled with elastic joint filler and sealed with a chemical resistant sealant complying with the details shown on the drawings. 4. 2. 3. 14. compressed air etc. C n re L e T p z id l D h s o c te in d ra e o a itc e 1. The surface shall be cleaned of all dirt. QC inspection shall be conducted for the pour approval. 3. Size of the proposed joints to be filled/sealed is 15 mm wide x 15 mm deep. Proper gradient as indicated on the design drawings shall be maintained. 15.5044. Curing shall be carried out accordingly to the approved procedures. Compaction shall be done to the non-structural requirement. Setting out dimension about the proposed ditches shall be marked. 501 to 1000mm. 10. Excavation shall be started & shaped to the design profile. 9. 2. 7. At contraction joints 25 x 25 mm plastic crack inducer shall be provided as shown in the detail & the joints cut for a depth of 20mm with a concrete cutting machine. o 4093 c d 9. All grease and oil contamination shall be removed using hard small brushes. Concrete shall be poured in one layer and compacted using vibrators & given brush finish to correct levels.

The Bit mastic shall be applied to the prepared and masked portions.5044. The fibreboard shall be removed to the required depth. 4 to 6 weeks post application of the sealant. 8. All grease and oil contamination shall be removed using hard small brushes. The contents of the Can shall be removed by a Trowel or a Spatula. Isolation layer shall be applied if so provided within the specification. Painting over concrete surface if so required. Remaining bays shall be carried out in the next day operation. 10. concrete pour shall be carried out in alternate bays with unformed horizontal surface finished smooth. Preparation for the lining concrete shall be carried out by placing in pre fabricated reinforcement to design details & sides formed at edges parallel to the ditch as well as at the construction joints. Under normal circumstances priming is not required. 3. 6. A full cure (a stage when the solvent evaporation is completed) shall normally consume 13. 2. 14. compressed air etc. 9. shall be followed ensuring that the entire volume of the joint is filled in to effect a total contact with joint surfaces. Excavation shall be started & shaped to the rectangular design profile. Proper gradient as indicated on the design drawings shall be maintained. In case of the vertical joints. 2. 4. Curing shall be carried out accordingly to the approved procedures. E p n io J in b tw e d h s x a s n o ts e e n itc e 1. After application. 5. 7. 6. 6.co. 4. Masking tape shall be used to confine the joint borders keeping the adjoining concrete surfaces clean. C n re L e R c n u r D h s o c te in d e ta g la itc e 1. 12. The surface shall be cleaned of all dirt. bottom to top application sequence using a spatula or a trowel. 11. Blinding shall be applied on the compacted base to the design thickness. Size of the proposed joints to be filled/sealed is 15 mm wide x 15 mm deep. Under normal circumstances priming is not required. Masking tape shall be removed immediately after the application is completed to keep the concrete surface clean. 5. 7. 8. the sealant shall be smoothened and compressed into the joint using a spatula or a putty knife moistened with cleaning solvent. dust and loosely adhering materials. shall be carried out only after full cure has taken place. 9. Masking tape shall be used to confine the joint borders keeping the adjoining Page 315 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Compaction shall be done to the non-structural requirement. After the inspection. Setting out dimension about the proposed ditches shall be marked. 3.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . o 4093 c d 5.

4. 8. Bead Lengths to exact site dimensions shall be cut to suit a close fit between the ends. 11. 10. 12. Application of the waterproofing membrane according to the specifications to the defined levels keeping the top 200 mm or variable dimension according to the drawing above the finished ground level.5044. shall be followed ensuring that the entire volume of the joint is filled in to effect a total contact with joint surfaces. 1. Painting over concrete surface if so required. 5. 14. The Bit mastic shall be applied to the prepared and masked portions. In case of the vertical joints. bottom to top application sequence using a spatula or a trowel. 9. After the screws have been fastened and the beads are in proper alignment. 6. A smaller timber spatula soaked in soapy Page 316 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. 4 to 6 weeks post application of the sealant. 2. Every bead shall be provided with a minimum 3 # screws to be drilled and fastened into the concrete penetrating the membrane using an electrical operated Drill. 3. The contents of the Can shall be removed by a Trowel or a Spatula. T rm a nD ta top te tiv m m ra e e in tio e ils ro c e e b n The following operational sequences shall be involved Case 1 Concrete surface shall be cleaned of all dirt & dust using a brush. Masking tape shall be removed immediately after the application is completed to keep the concrete surface clean.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . 15. shall be carried out only after full cure has taken place. approved sealant shall be applied to top of the bead keeping about 5 mm above the bead with a down ward lap as follows. Galvanized grating shall be placed on the ditch later. o 4093 c d concrete surfaces clean.co. A full cure (a stage when the solvent evaporation is completed) shall normally consume 13. the sealant shall be smoothened and compressed into the joint using a spatula or a putty knife moistened with cleaning solvent. Sealant shall be applied using a gun fitted with conical nozzles adjustable to suit the width into the corner using an even trigger pressure & cleaning the nozzle occasionally to avoid contamination. Lines shall be marked on all sides to correct level as per drawing. After application. 7.

4. The surface to be grouted shall be chipped / scabbled without using mechanical bush hammer. 2. The stainless steel shims 50x50x10 mm thick shall be in correct locations covered with mortar so as to allow at least 50 mm grout cover on shim sides.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . The finished surface shall be free from oil. QC inspection shall be conducted & the relevant ITP signed off Case 4 In the paved area. membrane shall continue up to the termination level but the protection board cease at 20 mm below the paving level filled with mastic on top keeping all other details as in case 1 if not chased for rebate. the waterproofing membrane shall be tacked in & sealant applied to the space left in the groove according to specifications and the manufacturer’s instructions. Page 317 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. QC inspection shall be conducted & the relevant ITP signed off Case 2 1.co. paint. membrane shall be terminated at a level ‘150mm plus’ below the footing top level keeping Aluminium bead details typical. grease and paint and correctly aligned according to the approved drawings. All other details shall remain as in ‘case 1’ if no rebate has been chased. Sealant shall be applied around bead continuously. The bolt holes/pockets shall be made water free prior to placement of grout. The base plates/ bolts shall be clean and free of oil. 2. QC inspection shall be conducted & the relevant ITP signed off G u gtop era kb s sty ic l ro tin ip c a e p a 1. o 4093 c d water shall be used to compact the sealant into the joint/junction for a smooth polish finish formation. 7. The mixing and application equipment shall be cleaned immediately after use. Where grooves have already been chased. 3. dirt. No Aluminium bead shall be used in this case. curing compounds etc and be soaked in with water for 24 hours prior to grouting to minimize the localized absorption as well as to assist the free flow of the grout. CONTRACTOR QC inspection shall be conducted & the relevant ITP signed off Case 3 In gravel or soil area. to expose the aggregate and remove the laitance. dust.5044.

12. The forms on the essential sides shall be erected at locations with chamfers. o 4093 c d 5. 4. 9. 11. 3. Page 318 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo.co. 8. 6.e. W te T h e sT s o R CS c rety ic l S m a r ig tn s e t f C tru tu p a u p 1. Inlet shall be laid in place to the levels shown on the drawings as reflected on the water quantity schedule i.5 litres per 25 kg bag of Master flow 928 or any other approved grouting material depending on to requirement. An electric drill fitted with a paddle shall be used for the grout mixing purpose using water @ 3. the Invert levels at maximum supply elevations. The grout thickness varies between 25 to 50 mm. The temperature range 4 to 32 degree C shall be maintained for the 3 post pour continuous days. 7. The mixer shall be clean with no standing water. 2. 10. which has to be kept on for at least 3 to 5 minutes until a uniform lump free consistency is achieved.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . all exposed grout shall be covered with clean dampen Hessian and be kept moist until grout is firm enough to accept a curing membrane.5044. Then the grout shall be poured continuously using the grout pour cone with a constant hydrostatic head of at least 15 cm. The external surfaces of the structure shall be prepared & applied with the specified protective system. Complete filling of the tie rod holes with MBT Master Flow 544 or Conbextra GB or an equal approved shall be carried out according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Having poured the grout Masterflow 928 in place.5 to 4. The structure to be tested shall be completed of all RCC constructions according to the specified and agreed procedures. 90 % of the measured quantity of water required to achieve the desired consistency according to the batch volume be added to the mixer before adding the grout and the Masterflow 928 or any other approved grouting material be added gradually. simultaneously pouring in the remaining 10 % water quantity during mixing.

10. 11. Application of the floor screed as specified shall be carried out 1. During this 7 days period.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . A graduated stick shall be provided on wall top to show the water levels to a ’mm’ count. QC Inspection shall be conducted for the approval of the membrane. Structural backfilling shall be carried out externally to the project specifications & necessary field density tests conducted to the requirement. 4. 3.1 mm according to specification requirement. 6. ‘ Structure Leak Test ‘and the judgement on the test made accordingly. Potable water shall be filled into the respective pit structure at a rate 2 m per 24 hours for which the attached ‘filling scheduled quantities ‘shall apply. Attached schedule shall depend on the structure volume.1 applicable to liquid retaining structures. After the test is successfully completed. water shall be pumped out either to the other structure for testing should that be ready to receive it or if not. water shall be added to maintain the maximum test level in case it is lost during this period. 8. 9.5044. Test shall commence from 8th day and continue for 7 days for a design crack width of 0. If so required. 6. The following operations shall be involved to conduct the water tightness test according to the BS 8007: 1987 Section 9. Observations regarding water level drops shall be recorded every 24 hours by visual measurements on mm scale. 7. absorption and autogeneous healing. it shall be allowed to stay for a period of 7 days for stabilisation. dust dirt etc. to the other construction areas for curing or any other purpose as agreed leaving the pit Page 319 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. The entire surfaces of structure to be tested shall be sweep blasted removing all loose spalls. o 4093 c d 5. After water is filled in to the required level. 2. The test records shall be documented on the approved form. The prepared internal surfaces shall be inspected by QC for approval.co. the total permissible loss in level shall not exceed 1/500 of the average water depth of the full tank or 10 mm. 5.

C n re P te tio C a gT p a o c te ro c n o tin y ic l 1. dust. residual curing compound. The mix quantity shall be such that it could be consumed in one hour during application without allowing any retempering with water. a further test of 7 days’ duration should then be undertaken in accordance with this clause. until a homogeneous lump free consistency is obtained. Application Coverage 1. depressions. voids. The method involves the following sequences in general. Page 320 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. 4. The powder shall be slowly added to the liquid component and agitated /mixed for 2 minutes by using a slow speed hand power drill fitted with a suitable paddle attachment. 13. spalls etc. injection-grouting method may be adopted to seal the seepage routes.8 Kg / sqm at 1 mm thickness.co. scraped lightly into the surface. 2. 7. 14. 3. Mixing. In case of unsatisfactory performance of the water tightness test and upon the agreement with Technip. which could impair adhesion.All grease. Remedial Work if required. All the holes. 8. it should be refilled and if necessary left for a further stabilising period. The whole surface to be coated shall be cleaned using water jetting and visually inspected to ensure that the roughness does not exceed grade 80 sandpaper. then after the completion of the remedial work. allowed to dry and later roughened by hand wire brush on the small areas and gently water jetted on the larger areas. The filled areas shall be visually inspected to ensure that the correct mechanical key is achieved. mould release agent or other contaminants. shall be removed from the surface by degreasing and washing. 6. o 4093 c d empty. The coating shall be 1 mm thick applied in one coat. The prepared and the saturated surface shall be inspected by QC. oil. 5. In hot weather the surface to be coated shall be shaded from direct sunlight. Should the structure not satisfy the 7 days test.5044.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . shall be filled with Masterseal 550 or an equal approved mixed to a trowel consistency. Mixing Master seal is supplied in the pre-measured units and shall be mixed on site using clean containers. Application Details. The areas to be coated shall be saturated with fresh and clean water. 12. Surface preparation.

Keep the area ready in all respects well oriented & aligned to receive the foundation directly to be offloaded. Excavate the location to the required formation level. The mixed material shall be applied while the surface is visibly damp without standing water using short stiff brush or roller. 4. The evenness and the thickness of the applied coating shall be regularly checked during application while the material is still wet. 12. Pour the concrete. QC inspection shall be conducted. Provide the PVC cable duct. 13. 2. 9. 12. 6. 5. Any missed areas shall be saturated and then touched up. The following operations are involved to carry out the production of the light poles foundation bases Pre installation operations 1. The forms to the exact size with the preformed chamfers shall be prepared and Page 321 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . The typical size of the foundation may be 1000x1000mm in plan and 1100mm deep. The materials shall be allowed to dry and visually inspected. Fabricate and erect the side forms 4 #s to the specified dimensions. To cure for the specified period. 10.5044.co. Provide the lifting lugs to carry a gravity load of at least 3 tonnes + handling stresses. Cure the concrete immediately after pouring Post casting operations. 14. Provide the non-critical cathodic protection. To blind the area to be founded with concrete. Waterproof the blinding as specified. (Roller shall be used in major /large areas). Back fill the surrounding space to the relevant grade level Details. Apply the water proofing membrane around as specified. catch basins etc. shall be employed for this purpose also. 3. L h gP le F u d tio sT p a ig tin o s o n a n y ic l Pre casting Area-The existing yard being used for the pre casting of manholes. 7. Provide the bolt assembly to the requirement and location. Fabricate the rebars according to the specified details. 11. 10. o 4093 c d 9. A possible of 10 units may be produced by pre casting every day on an average. Provide the protection board as specified 11. 8.

Page 322 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. 16. and recovered immediately. 21. The side forms shall be removed within the specified period. After 2 hours. 1 # 350 mm internal radius 100 mm dia PVC cable duct formed to the dimensions shall be anchored by binding wires to the exact locations shown on the drawing keeping the upper end flush with the concrete top. 19. 15. care shall be taken to keep the anchor bolts’ position undisturbed and the intermittent checks be continuously made to monitor the spacing /centres between the bolts. The relevant locations shall be made ready to receive the pre-cast units by completing the excavation. 26. The forms for the block outs for the lifting lugs shall be fixed in to the correct locations as shown without clashing with the duct or the rebars allowing a protrusion of the hook. 23. approved curing compound shall be sprayed on the surface forming a continuous membrane which be covered over with a polythene sheet according to the specifications. the horizontal waterproofing and forming the correct alignment. The steel rebars shall be cut. 24. The Lifting lugs as shown on the sketch shall be fixed in to the correct locations. 20. After the concrete is poured in full & well compacted. 22. be positioned into the forms. The curing shall be continued for the specified period. blinding. The bolt assembly shall be fixed in exact position according to the design details. All the supports and the dimensions shall be checked and the plumb monitored. The concrete shall be poured to all the prepared units in 3 layers in vertical sequence. Immediately after the concrete starts setting. o 4093 c d erected. 25. During concreting. bent to the required shape.5044.co. 17. The non-critical cathodic protection shall be arranged using a metallic continuous binding wire connecting all horizontal rebars terminating into a boss fixed at one location near the top in the middle of the side opposite the duct-carrying portion.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . The appropriate vibrator shall be used for the compaction of the concrete. the surface shall be levelled using a wooden float followed by light steel trowel. QC inspection shall be conducted. 18. the polythene sheet shall be temporarily removed to spread over the concrete surface the saturated burlap cloth or hessian. The vertical concrete surfaces shall be spread with the curing compound immediately after striking the forms and covered with the polythene sheet according to requirement. placed and the cage prepared holding 75mm concrete spacers.

3. QC inspection shall be conducted 33. 30. the void filled with concrete by first scabbling the internal surface followed by cement slurry grouting and pouring concrete. 31. The typical size of the Pit type shall be taken from the drawings. 32. QC inspection shall be conducted before pouring concrete and signatures Page 323 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. 20 units shall be produced by pre casting every day The wooden forms to the exact dimensions with pre -formed chamfers shall be prepared and erected. 34.5044. The points to locate the cathodic protection shall be provided with a marker to trace the boss. 1. Pl Ps y i a u i Tp l l t c Operations in Pre casting Yard Pre casting Area. 28. 4. QC inspection shall be conducted. QC inspection shall be conducted. placed with 75mm concrete spacers and positioned into the forms according to the details provided. 3.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . loaded gently onto a trailer and transported to the location for offloading on to the prepared ‘location to receive’ the unit. The steel rebars shall be cut. bent to the required shape. The protruding lifting lug eyes shall be cut to 60 mm inside the block out. The unit shall be installed on the marked location according to the correct orientation to the lighting layout drawing. On an average. The back filling shall be carried out according to the specification up to the required levels in layers and up to the required ground grade or the pavement. The membrane protection board shall be provided covering the surface to the specified details. o 4093 c d 27. catch basins and lighting poles foundations etc. 2. Rebars placement 1. The Lifting lugs shall be fixed in to the correct locations. The unit shall be lifted by a mobile crane. The external surfaces of the foundation shall be applied with the concrete protective membrane according to the specifications. The sequence shall be repeated for all the lighting poles foundations. All supports and dimensions shall be checked and corrected if required. 29. shall be employed for this purpose also Form work. The existing yard being used for the pre casting of manholes.co. 2.

6. 3. On site operations. After the concrete has stiffened but no longer than 2 hours. QC inspection shall be conducted from time to time throughout the operations. The concrete shall be poured into all the approved preparatory works in 1 layer by directly delivering from the concrete truck / transit mixer through the chute 1 # ¾” needle vibrator shall be used to compact the concrete and 1 # reserved standby. the surface shall be levelled using a wooden float followed by light steel trowel. 2. The side forms shall be removed after the specified period of 24 to 36 hours as agreed. 5. The curing shall be continued for the agreed number of days. Setting out 3.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . After the concrete is poured in full & well compacted. o 4093 c d appended to ITPs Pouring concrete & finishing 1. QC inspection shall be conducted throughout the operation and ITP for the survey check signed off Excavation Page 324 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. 4. The area around the excavation coverage shall be barricaded to the site requirement. 2. Immediately after the concrete is finished. The vertical concrete surfaces shall be draped with the saturated hessian immediately after striking the forms and covered with the polythene sheet held firmly in place along all edges & kept continuously wet for duration of curing. 1.post laying of Cable ducts. Lifting. the polythene sheet shall be removed followed by immediate covering the surface with saturated (soaked with mix quality water) hessian and recovered with polythene sheet to prevent evaporation from the hessian. the surface shall be covered with polythene sheet with the edge lapped or tied down to exclude air circulation without permitting the membrane to be in touch with concrete surface according to the specifications. 4.5044. loaded gently onto a trailer and transported to the area concerned to offload on to the prepared ‘location to receive’. loading & transportation The covers shall be lifted by a mobile crane. 2. Throughout the curing period the hessian shall be maintained in a permanent wet condition using mix quality water. Curing 1. The setting out shall be carried out by the surveyor to the required co-ordinates.co.

uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Sand fill 300mm deep sand backfill shall be carried out over the laid ducts not encased in concrete.co. 2.5044. compacted and levelled to receive pre cast covers. The covers shall be properly spaced and levelled to the details shown on the drawing.e. o 4093 c d 1. 3. Mass concrete base 1. shall be carried out accordingly. finished properly and cured to the specified procedures 4. 1300 mm (varying from area to area) from the finished grade monitored by surveyor 2. Excavation shall be carried out (manually if the ducts are not encased in concrete) to the specified formation levels i. 5. spread over. Compacted backfill 1. Concrete shall be poured to the exact levels. Backfill Page 325 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. 2. Concrete protection 5. In case the ducts are not laid in.25mm thick polythene sheet with laps 300mm. 200mm Block work shall be constructed according to details to the required levels so that the cover top level is 100mm from the finished grade/ground level. Block work in walls 1. QC inspection shall be conducted from time to time throughout the operations Compacted sand fill Uncompacted sand shall be filled as indicated on the drawing & in accordance with the specifications. The formwork for the mass concrete that may 500mm wide and 150mm deep shall be prepared and erected to the settings. Concrete protection shall be applied to the mass concrete to the details & specifications. opening shall be provided in the wall 2. Compaction and the tests if so required. The remaining portion shall be backfilled and compacted to the specification requirement. The top surface shall be well prepared. QC inspection shall be conducted from time to time throughout the operations and concrete pour ITPs signed off 3. Placing the pre cast covers 4. The covers shall be offloaded by a crane from a trailer as transported from the pre casting yard to the relevant locations ready with one layer 0.

Setting out shall be done & forms erected. These considerably small foundations shall be placed on the pavement concrete to transfer minor equipment stresses. The exposed concrete surface is a part of pavement and therefore no protection shall be applied. The portion poured previously after vibration must receive over pour within the concrete setting time. Blinding shall be carried out to approved procedures. As dug compacted backfill shall be carried out above the sand fill to the specifications.Thick Element – Typical 1.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . QC inspection shall be conducted from time to time throughout the operations with the relevant ITPs signed off Lugs Fill 1. concrete poured & curing effected to approved procedures. Wherever specified any reinforced concrete structure more than 800 mm in thickness & more than 8 cum of RCC quantity. concrete should be poured in continuous stepping fashion forming an acute angle with the vertical so that the formation of cold joints is completely avoided. o 4093 c d 1. Concrete spacers installed to sides & bottom. Specific attention shall be given to the concrete pour sequence.5044. Dc bns ut a k Page 326 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. F u d tio sc n e te top v gc n re ona n onc d a in o c te 1. After inspection. Cathodic protection if so specified shall be fixed to design details & continuity checked. Reinforcement & formwork fixing shall be carried out to approved procedures. The sand shall be filled in the lifting lugs recess. 2. Concrete foreman must adhere to that & complete the pour successfully. Set out location area shall be roughened by scabbling. 2. Since the quantity of the pour element & depth shall be considerably greater. 2. 2. Any electrical insert placed in. Massive pour requires thermal curing as explained somewhere else in this document that shall be applicable here as well. A sketch shall be issued to site giving complete sequence of pouring. Concrete Protection 3. Excavation shall be carried out to approved procedures. Massive Block Foundation. Rebars shall be fixed to the details. 3. Top-level line fixed with plastic chamfers. the following procedure shall be followed.co. Construction shall include erection of forms & reinforcement placement duly connected to paving.

Preparing the formation to achieve the required levels and dimensions. Excavating the trench to the specified levels and sectional details. Ends shall be closed properly allowing the ducts protrusion from the end forms.co. Forms for the sides of the duct bank concrete shall be erected. Block work 150mm thick in walls to the specified levels up to the pavement down stand beam soffit level. Inspections shall be conducted & concrete poured & cured accordingly to the specified colour. o 4093 c d Excavation shall be carried out to the defined sectional size. Pouring the mass concrete to the strip beam forms. Backfilling the trench with the excavated earth to the specifications. marker shall be placed over the duct concrete & over backfill done. Barricading the involved area to the safety department direction and requirement. The safety arrangement shall be discussed with the safety department and implemented accordingly to control the trench excavation. Ducts ends shall be closed preventing the ingress of dust or any foreign material.5044. Sealing the joint between the pavement and the trench cover. The surveyor shall set out the alignment of the trench concerned according to the relevant details given on the paving and underground services location plans to the reference Co-ordinates. The excavated material shall be transported immediately by a Page 327 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. to provide barricades. Proposed formation area shall be compacted to receive the concrete. Nominal rebars shall be placed to the details. The excavation shall be carried out by an excavator to the lines and the levels. Blinding concrete shall be placed to the required thickness. night-lights.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . 3. to divert the traffic if so required. Setting out the alignment for the trench block walls. Design ducts shall be placed & fixed in defined positions using proper supporting arrangements so that during concreting operation these ducts remain in the set positions. Preparation and concreting the pavement portion monolithic with the down stand beam extended up to the top of the block wall. Cb T n h s a le re c e Dummy / walled trench section Typical 1. Placing the pre cast coloured concrete covers in 1m or 3m standard lengths on the relevant compacted area. QC shall conduct the inspection 3. Details about the above operations in general 1. The surveyor shall monitor all stages of excavation to achieve the required profile. Setting out to the exact alignment the route of the trench to the specified co-ordinates. 2. Form work for the sides of the mass concrete strip beams. 2. The following operational sequences in brief are involved. After the concreting is completed. and to adopt any other necessary measure. Cable marker shall be provided.

10. The walls shall be started from the duct top level. The pavement /down beam monolithic pouring shall be carried out to the specified details according to the procedures. QC shall conduct the inspection throughout the stages of construction Where the dummy trench runs over the duct bank Typical 1. The fabricated forms of width 350mm and depth 100 mm shall be erected/ fixed on the prepared compacted formation duly aligned and levelled. 8. The backfilling shall commence and the trench filled according to the specifications. The forms shall be struck after the specified period. Where the dummy trench and the direct buried trench run parallel Typical All the operations described in general shall be applicable herein as well with the Page 328 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. The alignment of the block walls 150 mm thick shall be set out and the block work carried out in courses in a straight line and plumb. The fractional block course if so remained to make up the required wall height.co. 11. The whole number of courses shall be laid. QC shall conduct the inspection throughout the stages of construction 6. The curing of the mass concrete shall be carried out according to approved procedures and for the specified period. After the excavation is over. Flat width of the crossing shall be in size equal to the value given by the equation “Duct Bank length + 300x2 “. 7. QC shall conduct the inspection throughout the stages of construction 9. The forms shall be fabricated for the mass concrete section. The concrete shall be coloured to the specification requirement.5044. Additionally. the specified pipe shall be laid prior to the block work is commenced or openings shall be formed in the walls (Pipe laying operation by others). 5. 2. Excavation shall be carried out to the top of the duct concrete only. The pre cast covers of 1m or 3 m standard length shall be placed on the filled trench internal surface to the specified levels. shall be constructed as a part of the pavement down beam concrete by extending the bottom to the top of the block walls. where the underground pipe runs crossing the Trench.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . o 4093 c d dump truck to the earth stockpiles temporarily. All the operations described in general shall be applicable herein as well with the following amendments/additions to certain activities. the formation levels shall be well dressed and compacted to the specification requirement 4. The mass concrete shall be poured to the marked levels and tamped by wooden float.

Where direct buried trench crossing under dummy trench Typical All the operations described in general shall be applicable herein as well with the following amendments / additions to certain activities to be supplemented. A joint shall be provided between the pavement and the closed drain trench wall. The crossing flat width shall be the duct bank length + 2x300. Where the cable trench crossing with the closed drain pipe trench Typical All the operations described in general shall be applicable herein as well with the following amendments / additions to certain activities to be supplemented. The duct bank shall be constructed according to the details. The transition of the formations between the trenches and the crossing shall be in grade 1 in 2 as shown on the drawing. Where trench with dummy Trench crossing under direct buried cable trench Typical 1. the profile of the dummy trench shall dictate the profile of the buried trench. The trench corner wall shall be constructed to the details showing the corner length on the trench internal face. Cable tiles under the closed drain trench shall be provided in the direct buried trench only. Page 329 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Width of the closed drain trench in mm + 2x100. Cable tiles under the closed drain trench shall be provided in the direct buried trench only. The length of the duct bank shall be equal to the value given by the equation. The transition of the formations between the trenches and the crossing shall be in grade 1 in 2 as shown on the drawing. A gap of 100mm shall be kept between the duct bank top and the closed drain bottom surfaces. Width of the direct buried cable trench in mm + 2x100. The profile of the cable duct trench shall dictate the profile of the direct buried trench. The level transition shall be established by grading 1 in 2. A gap of 100mm shall be kept between the duct bank top and the closed drain bottom surfaces. 2. Sloping profile to a grade 1 in 2 shall be formed as shown on the drawing. All the operations described in general shall be applicable herein as well with the following amendments / additions to certain activities to be supplemented. A level difference of 350mm shall be kept between the elevations of the crossing formation and the dummy trench.co.5044. The crossing flat width shall be the duct bank length + 2x300.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . o 4093 c d following amendments / additions to certain activities. The profile of the cable duct trench shall dictate the profile of the direct buried trench. The cables passing under the dummy trench shall be protected by cable tiles (By others) . While constructing the buried trench. The length of the duct bank shall be equal to the value given by the equation. The duct bank shall be constructed according to the details.

1. T reduction piece. jointing. anchor blocks 250mm to 2500mm dia etc. Cable tiles shall be provided in unpaved areas and at trench crossing. Carbon steel pipes gravity network 4” dia to 14” dia. jointing. sand bedding. gasket. back filling/ pressure network etc. (direct buried cable trench width + 400x2). sleeves. 5. Ceramic gres pipes & fittings. leak test. The transition of the formations between the trenches and the crossing shall be to grade 1 in 2 as shown on the drawing. T. The crossing formation width shall be equal to the value from the equation in mm. anchor blocks 200 to 2000 mm etc. sand bed. 100 to 500 mm dia etc. 3. leak test etc.5044. Electric Trench Layout at Pumps Typical All the operations described in general shall be applicable herein as well with the following amendments / additions to certain activities. Bonna type pipes & fittings. sleeves. Polythene pipes pressure Y. 2. coating material & welding. anchor blocks 200 to 500mm etc. Option If so required and felt convenient for certain uniform section reaches. 7. Y. bolting. All the operations described in general shall be applicable herein as well with the following amendments / additions to certain activities to be supplemented. the following types of pipes are indicated to be included. A level difference 700 mm shall be kept between direct buried trench and the crossing formation level. 2. Plastic pipes pressure network 110 mm to 410 mm sand bed etc. sand filling. Plastic pipes PVC gravity network 110 mm to 410 mm dia etc. 10. The trench walls shall be continued to the shape as shown. sand bedding. 8.co. 4. testing. cutting.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . leak test etc. valve & flanges. Polythene pipes gravity Y. U d rg u dP in n e ro n ip g In the scope. cutting. sand bed. 6. cuts. o 4093 c d Where direct buried trench crossing under direct buried cable trench Typical 1. Reinforced concrete pipes. Y. pre cast concrete units 100 mm thick may be utilised to substitute 150 mm thick walls directly resting on the prepared formation. flange. The pump base shall be constructed to the details. cuts. cuts. T reduction piece. T. PVC pipes heavy-duty 110 mm to 410 mm send bed etc. 9. Page 330 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Non reinforced concrete pipes.

Wherever indicated. Setting out the alignment of the proposed route according to survey details.co. observations of the water levels falling & the leak detection be conducted & recorded. After approval of the setting out. The following activities are typically involved to carry out underground piping system etc. for the steel flanges. 20. joints shall be glued using tangit 28. Providing safety control barriers on both sides of the excavation allowing enough clearance for the excavator & truck to work without hindrance. for the plastic or p v c pipes. for the plastic pipes. After the route has been aligned truly & fittings included.5044. for the concrete or r c c pipes. pipes either Bonna or carbon steel or concrete or any other make. pipe shall be cut to the actual length of the piece required. Wherever specified. Wherever specified. Wherever required. 25. Ensure no underground existing services exist in the area concerned. push fit system of jointing shall be applied 27. pressure testing shall be conducted for the ready portion with application of required bar pressure. 29. Surveyor shall monitor the levels throughout 21. surveyor shall give the exact alignment of the route. 24. special jointing material shall be applied to meet the requirement. 16. 17. 23. that pipe part shall be removed & re installed & test repeated all according to approved ITPs Page 331 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. RTRP pipes pressure+ gravity 100 to 800 mm etc. Any leak detected in any part. resultant pressure during pressurizing. to use cut pipes to complete the length. 31. Cast iron cement lined pipes gravity etc. 15. The pipes & fittings shall be stacked properly on both sides of the trench according to the manufacturer’s instruction. Risers of the pipes shall be installed on both ends of the pipe line. 14. All joints shall be connected or filled according to specifications. bolting shall be carried out 26. to anchor the bend etc at turning using thrust block. 18. Bed shall be filled with sand up to the pipe external surface level.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . After down taking the pipes & fittings to the trench bed & placing roughly into set out alignment. QC inspection shall be conducted to check the bedding 22. o 4093 c d 11. After all jointing has been completed. excavate the set out portion as trenching & continue up to the design depth according to the formation level of the pipe bedding following the approved excavation procedures. Prepare the bedding formation to the design levels & longitudinal profile specifically for gravity system. counter weight using sand on the pipe surround shall be applied temporarily to avoid pipe uplift during pressure testing or mechanical anchors employed depending upon dia of the pipe & the quantum of water pressure. 19. filled with water under pressure which shall continue for the specified period of 24 to 72 hours during which period. 12. Proper arrangement shall be made to down take the pipes. 13. Wherever specified. Wherever specified. block shall be constructed of concrete to resist the. 30.

dirt or contaminants that could impair bond Formwork Unless otherwise shown on design drawing. dirt. Stainless steel shims 50x50x10 mm thick shall be placed in correct locations covered with mortar so as to allow at least 50 mm grout cover on shim sides.A gap between a base plate and substrate below 25 mm  Thick section.In between the thin and the thick sections The following activities are involved for normal thickness Surface preparation Metal parts that should not be bonded to the grout like jack screws of the reciprocating machinery and part of the foundation bolts shall be sealed with tape prior to grouting. oil. Full extent of the foundation surface under the base plate or equipment to be grouted shall be chipped / scabbled & brushed to remove the weak upper layer of concrete and any oil soaked concrete areas prior to the installation of the base plate. This fill shall be compacted lightly. 1. oil. Base plate surfaces in contact with epoxy grout shall be grit blasted so as to expose white metal. granular fill material shall be used to backfill the remaining section duly compacted in layers all according to approved procedures. pipe service marker shall be placed for identification purpose & granular material filled on the pipe & its surround so that at least 200 mm layer is established on the crown of the pipe. 2. All surfaces and bolt pockets to receive grout must be clean & free of rust.5044. Base plates and equipment bases shall be uniformly supported in order to eliminate sag. E o yg u gtov ra gm c in b s sT p a p x ro tin ib tin a h e a e y ic l  Thin section .uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h .A gap between a base plate and substrate above 80mm     Normal thickness. distortion and levelled using both anchor bolts and jackscrews. o 4093 c d 32. All base plate holding down bolts etc must be free of rust. Page 332 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Later from this level to the ground.co. After the test has been successful. the entire area under the base plate shall be grouted and the forms fixed around the plate keeping a minimum of 25 mm clearance from the plate edge and at least 50 mm from the edge of the pouring side so that total grout able area is equal to underside of the plate and the clearance around the plate. paint and residual curing compound.

4. QC inspection shall be conducted throughout the above operations to ascertain Page 333 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. All required quantity of aggregate shall be added to the mixing vessel which is to be kept turning and mixing continued until a uniform lump free consistency is achieved. QC inspection shall be conducted to ascertain the form profile and general preparatory works Grouting application 1. shall be fixed around the base plate to prevent the leakage of the resin keeping the top of the forms 25mm above the underside of the base plate A chamfer 25mm x 25mm shall be provided on the sides so that top of the chamfer and the top of grout are in one level in case the whole of the foundation area around the plate is to be grouted. 2.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Before the form work is fixed. Over mixing shall be avoided to prevent air entrainment Placing. A coating of an approved release agent shall be applied to the formwork. 5. Pouring shall be carried out only from one side of the base plate to avoid creation of voids and any reduction of the effective bearing area When the grout reaches the far side of the formwork which shall be ensured by poured material rising above the bottom of base plate. A stand by equipment shall also be made available 3.co. Concrete surfaces to be grouted shall be completely dry before grouting Mixing Base and reactor components shall be poured into a suitable mixing vessel and mixing carried out for 1 minute or until successfully blended.5044. 4. All bolt pockets shall be filled with grout prior to pouring the rest of the under plate space as a separate operation to prevent voids formation Pouring of the grout shall start from one end of the base plate and continued until the material reaches the far side. A 45 degree sloping surface above the form on the pouring side shall be constructed to create a pressure head to enable the grout material flow to cover full width of the pour. the pouring location has to move along the length of the base plate keeping the process continued until the whole area is completed. All dirt and debris shall be removed from the form work using compressed air Sufficient Grout material to completely fill the prepared area in a continuous process shall be made available Mixing equipment shall be demonstrated to be in a suitable as well as in good working condition. o 4093 c d 3. it shall be ensured that the foundation area to be grouted and the bolts holes are clean A liquid tight formwork as practicable. Mixed grout shall be steadily poured down the formwork slope to avoid air entrapment.

Should as built records be maintained regularly. Shoulders7. All survey changes or variations shall also be recorded on the drawings based on the pre pour & post pour records taken from survey section. an important & significant part of documentation as well as also a contractual obligation on the part of CONTRACTOR & Technip which should be affected smoothly & regularly throughout the duration of project. o 4093 c d the proper implementation of the procedures according to the manufacturer’s instructions.co. changes. Should there be no change on the Released for construction drawings i.built drawings. it should be an endeavour of the CONTRACTOR that all changes are recorded on contract documents as Red Lines mark up & issued to Technip for approval. It is not the drawings only that are to be recorded but also all changes whatsoever for any document on record. Surveyor shall present all such changes on the corresponding documents to be recorded as Red Line Mark ups. the construction has been carried out all in accordance with the approved documents provisions. 2. All these As Built shall form part of hand over dossiers. These Red Lines mark up shall form the basis of producing all As Built documents on the project. there shall be no purpose of As . It is expected of the site engineers.e. Exposed surfaces shall be brushed with Solvent # 2 just before or as the grout gels 8. As built drawings serve the purpose of telling the user about the building records that should be used for the purpose of maintenance/or for whatever purpose possible. But in practice. to produce physical structures. effects of disciplinary interfaces to bring the work to proper use functions etc. During the whole currency of the contract. The following paragraphs management procedures have been included just for the purpose of information as already covered within the New Buildings package Inspection & Test Plans All necessary Inspection & Test Plans shall be Page 334 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. some changes are imminent due to arising of new requirement. The site design engineers shall keep an eye on this activity & record changes regularly as red line mark up & process the documentation to fulfil the contractual obligation to this extent possible. this part of the dossiers shall be comfortably produced. 6. the design engineers as well as land surveyors to coordinate on site to comply with this obligation efficiently. It is therefore. Curing No curing is required As-built Drawings 1.5044.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h .

monthly bases & no delay allowed & if any. resources available. deficiency of resources. material procurement status. all necessary resources shall be arranged & mobilized by human resources. o 4093 c d originated by the Quality Engineer in collaboration with Engineering in head office & Engineering in site team. ITPs for all disciplinary activities shall be produced for Technip & Company approval from site office in due course. materials delivered & expected time of arrival etc & all necessary measures required to keep the construction on line & valuation worked accordingly. All defined tests shall be conducted by Technip/Company approved laboratory located on site. it is extremely important that complete project should be analyzed from whole to one & all necessary resources to be used or deployed should be known in advance prior to commencement of physical works. Complete details about the quality management system have been included on the respective Quality Procedures document. Generally. The plans shall be monitored regularly. Every effort should be made to keep the progress in line with plan. requisitions shall be raised from site by the relevant Page 335 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . 3. materials. According to the site requirement & provisions made on the plan.5044. immediate recovery shall be planed. Project Control management requires the formation of strategies those can be utilized optimally to achieve the target in minimum cost with best quality product 2. Based on the project design. These ITPs formats shall be issued for Technip & Company approval according to the procedures laid down on Project Quality plan. and technical managers in collaboration with Project Manager. The details of these plans shall be submitted separately. on a weekly basis. Analysis. Production of all these documents shall be the responsibility of CONTRACTOR Quality Manager/Engineer. Every ITP shall be allotted a document number along with a numbered checklist. The relevant reporting shall project the real quantum of planned & actual physical works. 4. For those items the tests shall be conducted by any Technip/Company nominated laboratory.co. Further based on these periods. Project Controls 1. for which facilities are not available on site. planning & charting out at various levels shall be carried out by the Planning Engineer. as the project construction progresses. commissioning and maintenance durations. Check list shall form the basis of inspection requirements. Procurement Note-The term Material herein includes equipment also 1. construction. To achieve as aforesaid. for temporary materials & consumables.

delivered materials shall be recorded in stores receipt documents. 5. Post placement of purchase order. Delivery information shall be circulated to the concerned personnel & quality manager himself shall or delegate an inspector or the relevant inspector shall check the adequacy of quality & if necessary according to ITP provision. an issue to site may be undertaken thereafter. Any deficiency in quantity. A copy of the approval shall be provided to the project manager for follow up the delivery. Separate area shall be located for the materials requiring certain temperature of storage. After the material is delivered to site. samples if applicable. shall invite the Technip / Company engineer to inspect / examine the delivery. negotiate & prepare a comparative statement & based on the merits of responses / quotations. engineer. o 4093 c d 2. quality or any damage observed. 3. numbered & coded by the material controller & approved by the construction manager for transmission to head office procurement manager for further action. Stores shall be well constructed & suraj_engineer@yahoo. After reviewing the proposal. shall apply all efforts to expedite the delivery on appointed date. procurement manager shall process the requisitioned approved item based on the budget quantities following in line the procedures applicable for temporary materials. For permanent works. record his comments based on the comparative statement as well as recommendations for the considerations by the Management. Procurement Manager shall track various stages of material production & transportation or shipment to the site/delivery & if so noticed that an expectation exists for the delay in delivery. the management shall approve or reject the proposal. checked. processed through the document centre after Project manager approval. Cost controller shall further check the budgetary provision applicable & give clearance to the purchase manager for procurement. After obtaining Technip / Company approval on the request. Materials shall be stored in proper designated areas complying with the manufacturer’s instructions.co. proposed material shall be submitted for Technip / Company approval on requisite Material Approval request form along with brochures. Purchase order shall be made on the approved proposal. After inspections & approvals.uk Page 336 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h .5044. Purchase manager shall then invite the inquiries from various sources of material. material controller & relevant engineer shall check the quality & quantity of the delivery. An alternative source shall be located for the rejected proposal. 4. The selected samples of delivered materials shall be sent to an approved laboratory for technical tests for the purpose of certification of compliance. shall immediately be notified to the procurement manager through construction manager.

shall be prepared at the commencement of the contract.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . construction equipment. o 4093 c d shaded. 9. Elaborate details have been given on the CONTRACTOR procurement procedures document PRE MOBILIZATION PLANNING 1. detailed and logical mobilization plan is essential for a successful start-up of construction activities. An elaborated. Proper protection shall be made for all stored materials inside covered area or out side. labour. a store issue shall be affected & recorded on the required issue documentation. 10. 6. 8. The mobilization plan shall be closely coordinated with the construction plan to ensure mobilization activities properly lead into and provide a smooth transition into initial construction activities. Materials which remain unaffected by exposition to weather may be stored open duly protected under proper watch & ward. Page 337 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Any deficiency noticed shall be immediately reported to the procurement manager.5044. 3. Storage of all materials delivered shall be done complying to the set & approved procedures making sure that all inventories can be verified any time & that any material can be traced any time easily. all consumables shall be stored in shade provided with proper lock & key arrangement. construction equipment and camp/site facilities. 7. This plan is already under preparation at tender stage & the schedule about all three packages have been included with the bid. A detailed bar chart schedule shall be prepared with early and late activity bars involving the main activities to achieve full mobilization of staff. temporary facilities and materials at the job site to properly support the construction efforts. This plan must exhibit complete schedule. issues & balance in stores shall be reported to the construction & project manager who shall act further depending on the project requirement. personnel. All entries of the incoming deliveries shall be recorded into the register & verified by the store keeper & material controller that it complies with the details on deliveries documents. 2. 4. Generally. preparation and pre-construction activities necessary to ensure the timely availability of drawings. This outline plan shall be further developed after contract award and concluded within a week of the contract award. After the acceptance of the material by the concerned authority only.co. Necessary protection by removable membranes such as polythene or tarpaulins shall be used to protect material from the ingress of moistures or from effect of dust. Regularly the status of all receipts.

6. which might have occurred then. About CONTRACTOR Management Procedures in brief Work Centres . The following descriptions shall be reviewed and confirmed.  Transport plans including the movement of equipment & vehicles.co. availability of sources  Arrangements for electricity supply. Abu Dhabi. reconfirm assumptions and establish additional information required to permit smooth and timely mobilization & adhering to further activities durations strictly. accommodation and temporary facilities established during the bid stage would be reviewed. trades. All procurement for the project shall be done from the corporate procurement section located in CONTRACTOR Head Office at Musaffah. vehicles. the key personnel to the site Management Team shall be assigned. The following specific activities must be addressed early to be fully effective: Page 338 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Additional site visits shall be undertaken immediately after the project kick off to confirm validity of the data collected during bidding stage. machines.  Access to the job site whether or not available without any obstacle. re-evaluated to ensue its fitness to meet the project requirement & updated to include any other activity necessary to meet the final requirement. Mobilization plans for staff & labour. requirement of generators & also study of direct supply  Arrangements for storage fuels and lubricants  Arrangements for sanitary & its disposal facilities  Final arrangements for security interface with Technip & Company  And all other essential activities needed for successful mobilization Aforesaid review shall provide an impetus to promptly chart out all the processes involved with the mobilization with all solutions handed to the construction team for an efficient implementation. Construction personnel shall be mobilized to the project site office to provide input and direction to the project team.5044. The only activity to continue from Head Office after mobilization period is procurement. o 4093 c d 5. Successful project execution requires construction experts to be active from the onset of the project.  Location areas of temporary facilities whether or not available & if not resort to appropriate procedures. since the day of original preparation.  Company requirements for properly validated licenses and certificates to be held by construction personnel for the equipment. All necessary adjustment measures required shall be incorporated with the update & resolutions reached.  Loss prevention and safety requirements for the camp as well as for the site offices & site  Arrangements for first-aid facilities  Arrangements for drinking water and construction water.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h .CONTRACTOR Head Office Upon notification of contract award.

7. o 4093 c d 1. Actively pursue preliminary site activities such as approvals. policies and procedures required for the execution of the works and ensure they constitute “Project Specific” status. 6.             Safety Regulation Enforcement Quality Assurance Enforcement and Procedures Construction Method Statements Construction Planning Site Documents Control Field Engineering & Design Controls Material Requisitions Materials Control and Tracking Materials Storage Work Procedures Physical Construction Site Administration Mobilization Mobilization shall be coordinated from the CONTRACTOR Head Office at Abu Dhabi with input from CONTRACTOR personnel already mobilized for the Page 339 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. 3. and ensure subcontractors manning levels are compatible. safety and Health (ES&H) and site security plans to ensure compliance with the client’s specifications and guidelines. Review construction equipment needs subcontractors mobilization plans are in place. Overview temporary facility requirements. permits. Review environmental. Review manpower requirements for both non-manual and manual personnel. Review field procedures and method statements defining standards. consumables. The following major activities shall be carried out at site offices. Finalize construction schedule requirements and subsequent approval from Contractor 2. gases and the like and check subcontractors compliance.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . 5. CONTRACTOR Site Office is fully supported by CONTRACTOR Head Office at Musaffah. establishing contracts. including indirects such as tools. and ensure that timely 4. CONTRACTOR Site Office Actual ‘on site management’ would be from offices based on the site next to Contractor and Company’s office. Review Construction Quality plan in line with the guidelines of ISO 9000 and check Established QC parameters by discipline. 8. update these requirements by means of staffing schedules.co. Ensure Lessons Learned & Practices from previous projects are well understood & should be applied effectively from the onset of the works itself to achieve professional products. histograms and craft mixes.5044. 9.

necessary operational crews shall be formed and controlled over to meet the planned progress target to be physically achieved satisfactorily. balance of the CONTRACTOR construction staff shall be mobilized to the site along with construction equipment. At the start of the construction. Temporary facilities at the job site shall include Generator Yard and Construction water storage tank.  Third party independent concrete testing laboratory credentials submission for approval.uk Page 340 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h .co. 1. Safety and security operations etc. lay-down area. consumables. Progress shall be monitored on the basis of actual installed quantities compared to scheduled quantities. re-bar fabrication. 5. For construction areas. 4.  Mobilization shall commence with the following activities:  Kick off meeting to commence the sub contract  Commencement of the required land surveys to establish various horizontal & vertical controls bench marks  Incept of the engineering designs at the Firm office  Soil Investigation by an approved laboratory  Construction of temporary facilities  Obtaining various permits from Authorities and conclusion of arrangements with local committees where necessary. o 4093 c d execution of Site Preparation Package and Temporary Facilities for Contractor and Company. an emphasis shall be given on the critical requirements of the construction schedule. 3. the plans and specification for the site temporary construction facilities shall be finalized and released for installation. During the installation of the temporary facilities existing CONTRACTOR site offices shall be utilized to supervise the site activities required for the temporary facilities installation. 2. Work shall be carried out under continual supervision and inspection over performance.5044. 6. storage and other items necessary to commence the work in accordance with the construction schedule. carpentry yard. site surveying shall begin utilizing the Total Station System to establish accurate control points for the performance of the work. project execution. dedicated work crews shall be allocated for each discipline supervised by foremen and general foremen who in turn shall report to the discipline supervisors / site engineers. As soon as practicable. warehouse and workshop facilities at location A4. Shortly after contract award. tools. QA / QC planning. On completion of the site offices at ASAB. warehousing. Existing teams responsible for the execution of the those two mentioned packages already have substantial cadre of experienced professional well versed in mobilization of temporary facilities. It is the responsibility of the supervisor/site engineer to ensure the efficient suraj_engineer@yahoo. Based on the construction schedule requirements.

In case any minor or specialized work is necessary to be sub contracted on lower tier. within 10 kms of the site. 3. 2. in the mean time. without reservations. supported by his store assistant shall be responsible for the custody of the material prior to issue. water shall be trucked from nearby Desalination plant. we are also seriously considering installing our own concrete batching plant. More information has already been elaborated in the foregoing.uk Page 341 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Procurement 1. For ‘construction operation water’ requirement. The storekeeper. unless an alternative arrangement is made available. Once material has arrived at site. Abu Dhabi. Prior to conduct any testing. Ready Mixed Concrete is envisaged supplied from an established RMC (Ready Mix Concrete) supplier. Contractor and Company (as required by QC Plan and ITP) shall be advised of the tests for witness. Subcontract Strategy 1. 8. 2. machines. Testing And Inspection 1. Material tracking from source to the place of installation shall be conducted by the computerized system. workforce. Material Management 1. The construction manager shall be responsible to provide the technical oversight and direction for the control of materials at the construction site area. Company procedures shall be apply for prequalification and award of the subcontracts. 2. 4.co. However. an establishment with proven track record duly approved for supplying concrete by GASCO. Site ‘construction and temporary facilities electricity requirements’ shall be met by installing suitable size and suitable numbers of generators. equipment etc. Wherever required vendor specialist shall be made available for conduct of testing and inspections. Musaffah. etc 3. The Central procurement department located at the Al Jaber Energy Services. CONTRACTOR shall carry out broadly all civil engineering works employing its own resources of manpower. o 4093 c d utilization of his material. Preparation of Purchase Requisition shall be made based on take-offs suraj_engineer@yahoo. 7. Lower tier sub contracts shall be allowed for the execution of single operations such as supply of ready mix concrete. A field inspection and testing program shall be organized to be in line with CONTRACTOR Quality manual & Approved Project plan under overall responsibility of the QA / QC Manager.5044. UAE office shall be responsible for all purchases adhering to the following procedure. material management shall come under the purview and custody of the site store staff. 2. tools and equipment.

purchase order shall be raised. conditions/packing  Instruction of holding. Samples and technical information shall be submitted to Contractor. suraj_engineer@yahoo. 3. 2. Organization . specifications. design & other drawings. Once the final approval from the client is obtained.co. Broadly all the activities of the above divisions and companies can be divided into:      General Construction Heavy Lifting and Transport Services.  Required delivery dates for all major items. marking  Drawings. manuals etc  Spare parts requirements  Special Instructions to vendors A technical evaluation shall be done in house to verify the conformity with specifications. applicable specifications. with the inclusion of following information. vendor documentation requirements etc. 1. The Contractor is an umbrella organization which has got numerous divisions within in itself and which is also the parent company for various subsidiaries. Purchase requisition shall completely.  Delivery points of major items  Inspection of the goods at the point of origin issue  Certification of test data and/or compliance/ warranty  Method of shipment (if goods imported). indicating cost and budget allocation. Upon receipt of Purchase Requisition.Corporate Organization 1. The Contractor is a separately registered company specifically set-up to target the energy sectors and its clients. Quality required. a purchase order shall be raised and entered in the computer register system. 4. All questionable delivery commitments shall be expedited on a daily.5044. Trading Industrial Plant Construction. Material approvals.uk Page 342 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . 2. etc/ or detailed outline of the material required. weekly and monthly basis as required to ensure prompt delivery in accordance with the requirements. kitting consolidation.  Quantity of each item required with comprehensive breakdown  Adequate information concerning nomenclature description. data sheets. CONTRACTOR has been operating under the The Contractor since 1995. identify all applicable drawings. o 4093 c d quantities calculated from the approved drawings documents. The procurement department shall maintain a follow-up system so that contact suppliers and/or manufactures may be made on continuous basis.

These schedules shall define the monthly manpower levels. We have one of the youngest fleets of equipment in the GCC based on size. These sites are due for demobilisation in the coming months. The planning department shall produce a histogram schedule of the resources by category.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . A charge hand shall be trained and supervised by a foreman. The training in quality awareness shall be an ongoing process through the quality department and the foreman. Manpower Resourcing and Mobilization 1. The The Contractor contains at all times a vast pool of manpower in all Disciplines. The Contractor is one of the largest equipment rental companies in the GCC with over 5000 fleet where modern repair and machine facilities enable them to maintain a first class fleet of equipment. 6. Based on the project schedule. All of the required personnel to execute the work are already in UAE and working on other sites. Eeuo P n xct n l i a Method statement (project implementation strategy) Page 343 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. 3. 2. this ratio may be revised accordingly.co. 5. 2. These workforces are at all times working on various projects in multi discipline fields. Guards. The standard The Contractor site supervision is based upon the principle of training. The scheduled shall also be indicative of manpower mobilization. o 4093 c d Site Organization Proposed site organisation and responsibilities of the key personnel are enclosed. Equipment Resourcing and Mobilization 1. Auto Electricians. All supervisory staff shall be highly experienced and qualified drawn from on-going projects wherever possible. The recruitment of manpower shall ensure that background in the relevant job skill has been achieved. 4. All the personnel on site shall be employees of The Contractor. Training is a requirement of the The Contractor quality management system and foreman and charge hands shall conduct training of the manpower in their respective roles and functions. The charge hand shall then supervise approximately ten labours. Water boys etc and other ancillary staff shall be deployed for the unhindered progress of the work. In normal cases a foreman shall supervise four charge hands. Where a special process is conducted. It has been our company policy to weed out the old equipment on a periodical basis and keep the equipment fleet very young. the planning department shall generate the construction equipment schedules. 3. Sufficient numbers of site supporting staffs which consists of Mechanics. Electricians.5044.

After obtaining Technip approval respecting this Firm. Soil Investigations as required accomplishing the design (Topographic survey shall be performed by CONTRACTOR) Production of all architectural.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . To accomplish this part of the package to the best possible standards. 5. Based on the merits of each offer as well as applying the competency criteria. structural & allied services requirements. The target achievement of this fast track EPC project shall be kept in consideration by all discipline designers to release the necessary documents on planned line. a formal appointment shall be made by executing an engineering services agreement. Compilation of any outstanding data deemed necessary for the completion of the detailed engineering design 6. Act as CONTRACTOR Design & Engineering representative for the relevant Page 344 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. structural & allied services schematic designs Perform all studies. Engineering Services Sub Contractor hereinafter called ‘Firm’ b) The scope of the Firm shall include but not be limited to carrying out the following engineering services’ operations for all buildings included within New Buildings Package 1. 7. 4. CONTRACTOR shall invite certain (possibly 3) reputed & leading architectural engineering Firms as Engineering Services sub contractor. 2. o 4093 c d N BdgP kg e ui saa w i n l c e S pO a l n m e l y Engineering Design a) Building Engineering Design Management necessitates an integrated approach to formulate an overall philosophy. design calculations etc. Production of all architectural & structural detailed designs for Technip approval according to contract & sub contract requirement. intrusive surveys and investigations as may be necessary for the engineering designs.co. a preliminary selection shall be made. 3. able to achieve an intellectual product covering & incorporating a wide range of performance & serviceability requirements that shall completely meet intended functions of the proposed building adequately satisfying architectural.5044. Undertaking additional surveys. Secure all governmental and local Authority permits and approvals if so necessary.

small power & lighting.co. Engineering coordination with the Firm shall be conducted from CONTRACTOR head office. approval & AFC etc efficiently keeping in line with the project construction plan on various phases. Fire Fighting & Fire & Gas Detection / Loss prevention. All the design documents shall be given appropriate numbering reference to meet traceability requirement. Firm shall comply with the agreed documentation system & conduct its operation in all respects accordingly. All field interfaces shall be conducted from site offices in collaboration with CONTRACTOR field engineers 6. CONTRACTOR operates its own system of centralized document control. if so required 9. 8. Liaison. co-ordinate & lead CONTRACTOR services subcontractors’ design & engineering efforts 2. Any delay on this account shall not be Page 345 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Structured Cabling System 1.5044. All engineering design products shall be managed conforming international standards included on the contract documents for the technicalities as well as document controls. Firm shall produce & issue the scheduled documents at various stages of works for reviewing. (CONTRACTOR services subcontractors shall be responsible for the detailed designs and engineering for their relevant scope based on the conceptual drawings and other basic documents issued by Firm) to obtain necessary approvals from Technip 3. Firm shall issue its whole drawings / documents production schedule immediately after the award & commence its design work keeping in line to the programme 4. Abu Dhabi and / or ASAB as CONTRACTOR’s Design & Engineering representative during the course of the contract from its inception to completion as & when required 5.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Civil & Architectural scope from its inception to completion as & when required c) Building services : conceptual drawings only for plumbing & sanitary. All other remaining functional descriptions shall be conducted by CONTRACTOR personnel both in the head office as well as on site office depending on function wise technical nature 7. HVAC. which shall be used fully complying in accordance to Technip & Client Company Procedures by reformation. Represent CONTRACTOR at Technip offices / officials at FRANCE. o 4093 c d Buildings contract scope 8.

direct loads such as dead load. after the issue of the control documents to the site team. Extent of computer application for these activities.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . issue and control of calculations. After considering all direct & indirect imposed loadings according to the relevant codes. d) Detailed Engineering Design: Preparation. which should immediately be resolved by the Firm & duly informed to Technip. These calculations shall be done & certified by a Chartered Engineer of Firm for structural adequacy & structural intended performance. All such documents shall be processed through the documentation system facilitating most convenient trace ability for consultancy & reference 11. Firm shall formulate positioning of all framing members vertically & horizontally befitting coordinates as well as level controls. Immediately. o 4093 c d acceptable to CONTRACTOR management 10. test load/application & also considering various analysis. Preparation of requisitions for enquiry and award. 12. At the very first stage of the commencement of the detailed designs. Buildings services schematic drawings shall be issued to sub contractors for further development of shop & working drawings for Technip approval & issued to the concerned parties after getting duly approved for construction 13. specifications. a most critical case of resulting stresses shall be considered to be adopted for the dimensioning & further details of various vertical & horizontal members forming the framing skeleton. Necessary structural shop drawings shall be produced by CONTRACTOR own engineering personnel in head as well as on site offices. material requisitions and bills of material. live load. Generated model in 3D may be made available for the presentation to Technip & Company to explain & justify the adopted philosophy if so required. the effected design drawings shall be revised & reissued for construction duly incorporated with the solutions & circulated through documents control regularly to all concerned personnel. Page 346 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. seismic shear (though not applicable in Abu Dhabi geographical location) / wind load. technically evaluate bids and review of vendor/lower tier subcontractor documentation shall be done by purchase manager in collaboration with project manager. Calculations shall be done trying various options of loadings in 2D & 3 D & included with the design proposal for approval.5044. Consequent upon the resolution of discrepancies.co. drawings. design model shall be generated using Firm software. All these procedures have been incorporated on the company procurement procedures document. which shall also be processed into document control system for Technip & issued to the concerned parties after getting duly approved for construction 14. blast load/effect. meeting the architectural requirement maintaining the basic design principles that the whole structural skeleton behaves as an integral unit with its centre of gravity passing through or within the permissible vicinity of the resultant of all the applied forces considered avoiding any eccentricity and that settlement of the soil is within permissible limits. field/design engineers shall conduct over review of design & construction ability & consequently relevant design engineer raise technical queries to remedy any discrepancies among these documents if so discovered. Loadings shall include.

All bills shall be generated using appropriate computer software package. o 4093 c d e) Services Designs 1. From the foregoing approved documents.co. 2. h) Co-ordination Procedure The following entitled co-ordinations shall be conducted during various stages of the design & execution that have been outlined below Coordination between CONTRACTOR & Technip head office This part shall be conducted by regular interaction among CONTRACTOR representatives Head Office based in Musaffah & Technip FRANCE office to help resolve all pre & post award issue of Engineering services & monitoring project controls Coordination between CONTRACTOR & Technip site office This part shall be conducted by regular interaction among CONTRACTOR & Technip Page 347 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. loadings. All designs shall be generated using appropriate computer software package f) Specialised discipline. IEE as well as UAE authorities regulations & schematic drawings produced meeting the architectural schematic drawings requirement 3.In accordance to the provision of electrical loadings design criteria as indicated on the Technip / Company documents. Similarly all loads from the HVAC disciplines as well as from the other remaining disciplines shall be included. Bill of Quantities shall be generated discipline wise & building wise which document should be utilised for the purpose of Material Approval Proposal. complying local bodies statutory provisions. 2. detailed designs shall be calculated meeting all requirements of the contract specification.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . These shall be drawn in collaboration with Firm & CONTRACTOR design team keeping in view an overall approach to documented specification criteria as well as conventional engineering & construction practice in similar circumstances. On the similar pattern as described in the foregoing. Electrical . however. This shall be done in close interface with all disciplines coordinated by the Services design coordinator/Design Project Engineer or Manager. Issue of requisitions of the approved materials to the procurement manager. disciplinary performance as well as meeting international & conventional standards. The bill of quantities shall not constitute part of contract documents but serve guidance. to meet some particular requirement.5044. Designs of the services shall be carried out discipline wise. g) Specifications/Supplement Specifications It is intended to adhere to Company specifications provided by Technip within the documents to every extent possible. distribution of loading & all other parameters shall be adopted & calculated adhering to the international standards. All these details shall be included on the drawings documents for approval 4. supplement specifications shall be drawn & proposed for approval wherever necessary for producing better product or the materials for which no specification is defined.Loss Prevention & others 1.

co. i) Review and Approval of Documents This requires effecting an instant action on the part of CONTRACTOR that. Technip shall process it through its system & after obtaining company approval. coordinated & made available on site prior to its requirement to avoid any problem of execution CONTRACTOR internal Coordination among various sections CONTRACTOR in Head office organized with all corporate sections necessary to meet the requirement of this project shall operate as an integral functional team keeping on resolving regularly & as required all issues of project designs & follow up in all respects. it must be reviewed by its design team located at Head Office/Site office as the case may be prior to formally submitting to Technip. return approved or commented original to CONTRACTOR for Page 348 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. issue of all documents. approval of all documents & resolution of all engineering issues on site Coordination between CONTRACTOR / Firm & Technip This shall resolve all issues respecting engineering designs particularly during design stage as well as generally during construction phases for efficient decisions making to help smooth execution of all activities Coordination between CONTRACTOR / Firm & Technip on site This shall resolve all issues respecting engineering designs during construction phases on site for efficient decisions making to help smooth execution of involved activities Coordination between CONTRACTOR Site & Firm This is essential to keep on fast track the availability of complete design information for all ongoing as well as planned activities & should the information be pending.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h .5044. whenever any document is received. it shall be identified. This coordination is ongoing on daily basis & frequent interaction among all corporate managers as well as supporting professionals help the resolutions of all current & forthcoming issues. After its submission to Technip. Management meetings are conducted regularly for making decisions to avoid any pending identified problems CONTRACTOR internal Coordination among various sections on site Similarly on site all project sections managers & supporting professionals shall coordinate to resolve all types of problems to avoid any pending identified problems & notify to corporate management for immediate resolutions should the solution not be possible from site. o 4093 c d site representatives to help resolve all pre & post award issue of Engineering services & monitoring project controls Coordination between CONTRACTOR & Firm This part shall be conducted by frequent interaction between CONTRACTOR & Firm representatives of all disciplines for the resolution of all designs issues.

All documentation shall be carried out adhering to the CONTRACTOR documentation system after tuning that in line to Technip & Company requirement j) CAD Procedure It is intended to use standard CAD software for the production of design & drawings. All standard system of designing shall be adopted at every workstation available in Firm offices.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Should there be no change on the Page 349 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. It is therefore.co. Review and Distribution Procedure All vendors shall be issued schedule of document numbers to be printed on the documents adequately in advance of documents preparation. the design shall be revised & revised document issued following the documentation & approval procedures. The Firm shall then work on the revision. an important & significant part of documentation as well as also a contractual obligation on the part of CONTRACTOR & Technip which should be affected smoothly & regularly throughout the duration of project. n) As-built Drawings As built drawings serve the purpose of telling the user about the building records that should be used for the purpose of maintenance / or for whatever purpose possible. Also included the hardware & software details which are functional in proposed Engineering sub contractor/Firm office k) Engineering Reporting and Change Control The status of design progress shall be submitted to Technip on a weekly basis during progress meeting. Should any change be required. CONTRACTOR document control system is enclosed for reference. The details of all available software & hardware have been given in attachment. that shall be affirmatively considered subject to cost impact resolution & then the change incorporation request issued by CONTRACTOR to Firm.5044. Should there be no such adverse consideration. m) Vendor Print Numbering. All approved procedures of documents shall also apply to vendors' designs. its calculations & advise to CONTRACTOR & Technip of any adverse effect on the structural adequacy/performance or if any amendment to be applied to already worked element / member. l) Document Control Procedure CONTRACTOR operates its centralized DCC (Document Control Centre) in head office that shall be tuned to Technip / Company documentation system & extended to site office to meet the project requirement. o 4093 c d further necessary CONTRACTOR action.

The site design engineers shall keep an eye on this activity & record changes regularly as red line mark up & process the documentation to fulfil the contractual obligation to this extent possible.5044. the construction has been carried out all in accordance with the approved documents provisions. Production of all these documents shall be the responsibility of CONTRACTOR Quality Manager / Engineer. During the whole currency of the contract. ITPs for all disciplinary activities shall be produced for Technip & Company approval from site office in due course. Should as built records be maintained regularly. Project Controls 1. the design engineers as well as land surveyors to coordinate on site to comply with this obligation efficiently. For those items the tests shall be conducted by any Technip / Company nominated laboratory. All these As Built shall form part of hand over dossiers.e.co. it should be an endeavour of the CONTRACTOR that all changes are recorded on contract documents as Red Lines mark up & issued to Technip for approval. Check list shall form the basis of inspection requirements. there shall be no purpose of As built drawings. some changes are imminent due to arising of new requirement. effects of disciplinary interfaces to bring the work to proper use functions etc. o 4093 c d Released for construction drawings i. for which facilities are not available on site. Surveyor shall present all such changes on the corresponding documents to be recorded as Red Line Mark ups. Every ITP shall be allotted a document number along with a numbered checklist. Complete details about the quality management system have been included on the respective Quality Procedures document. The details of these plans shall be submitted separately. All survey changes or variations shall also be recorded on the drawings based on the pre pour & post pour records taken from survey section.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . These ITPs formats shall be issued for Technip & Company approval according to the procedures laid down on Project Quality plan. It is not the drawings only that are to be recorded but also all changes whatsoever for any document on record. It is expected of the site engineers. All defined tests shall be conducted by Technip / Company approved laboratory located on site. Generally. These Red Lines mark up shall form the basis of producing all As Built documents on the project. But in practice. to produce physical structures. Project Control management requires the formation of strategies those can be Page 350 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Inspection & Test Plans All necessary Inspection & Test Plans shall be originated by the Quality Engineer in collaboration with Engineering in head office & Engineering in site team. this part of the dossiers shall be comfortably produced. changes.

the management shall approve or reject the proposal. on a weekly basis. it is extremely important that complete project should be analyzed from whole to one & all necessary resources to be used should be known prior to commencement of physical works. A copy of the approval shall be provided to the project manager for follow up the delivery. resources available. negotiate & prepare a comparative statement & based on the merits of responses/quotations. 3. 4. For permanent works. record his comments based on the comparative statement as well as recommendations for the considerations by the Management. numbered & coded by the material controller & approved by the construction manager for transmission to head office procurement manager for further action. The relevant reporting shall project the real quantum of planned & actual physical works. processed through the document centre after Page 351 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. 1. immediate recovery shall be planed. Cost controller shall further check the budgetary provision applicable & give clearance to the purchase manager for procurement. Purchase manager shall then invite the inquiries from various sources of material. material procurement status. deficiency of resources. Analysis. checked. materials delivered & expected time of arrival etc & all necessary measures required to keep the construction on line & valuation worked accordingly. After reviewing the proposal. construction. proposed material shall be submitted for Technip / Company approval on requisite Material Approval request form along with brochures. To achieve as aforesaid.co. all necessary resources shall be arranged & mobilized by human resources. samples if applicable. Purchase order shall be made on the approved proposal. o 4093 c d utilized optimally to achieve the target in minimum cost with best quality product 2. Based on the project design. planning & charting out at various levels shall be carried out by the Planning Engineer. Every effort should be made to keep the progress in line with plan. materials. requisitions shall be raised from site by the relevant engineer. commissioning and maintenance durations. and technical managers in collaboration with Project Manager. monthly bases & no delay allowed & if any.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . for temporary materials & consumables.5044. An alternative source shall be located for the rejected proposal. The plans shall be monitored regularly. Procurement Note-The term Material herein includes equipment also According to the site requirement & provisions made on the plan. Further based on these periods. as the project construction progresses.

an issue to site may be undertaken thereafter. 7. Storage of all materials delivered shall be done complying to the set & approved procedures making sure that all inventories can be verified any time & that any material can be traced any time easily.5044. shall immediately be notified to the procurement manager through construction manager. material controller & relevant engineer shall check the quality & quantity of the delivery. o 4093 c d 2. After the acceptance of the material by the concerned authority only. Post placement of purchase order. After obtaining Technip / Company approval on the request. procurement manager shall process the requisitioned approved item based on the budget quantities following in line the procedures applicable for temporary materials. all consumables shall be stored in shade provided with proper lock & key arrangement. Delivery information shall be circulated to the concerned personnel & quality manager himself shall or delegate an inspector or the relevant inspector shall check the adequacy of quality & if necessary according to ITP provision. After the material is delivered to site. 3. Separate area shall be located for the materials requiring certain temperature of storage. Materials which remain unaffected by exposition to weather may be stored open duly protected under proper watch & ward. Any deficiency in quantity. Stores shall be well constructed & shaded. 8. 4. Proper protection shall be made for all stored materials inside covered area or out side. Project manager approval. Procurement Manager shall track various stages of material production & transportation or shipment to the site / delivery & if so noticed that an expectation exists for the delay in delivery. quality or any damage observed. 5. All entries of the incoming deliveries shall be recorded into the register & verified by the store keeper & material controller that it complies with the details on deliveries documents. Materials shall be stored in proper designated areas complying with the manufacturer’s instructions. delivered materials shall be recorded in stores receipt documents. 6. shall invite the Technip / Company engineer to inspect/examine the delivery. Generally. The selected samples of delivered materials shall be sent to an approved laboratory for technical tests for the purpose of certification of compliance. a store suraj_engineer@yahoo. Any deficiency noticed shall be immediately reported to the procurement manager. After inspections & approvals. Necessary protection by removable membranes such as polythene or tarpaulins shall be used to protect material from the ingress of moistures or from effect of dust.uk Page 352 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . shall apply all efforts to expedite the delivery on appointed date.co.

If so required. insurance spares and special tools 13. (at cost and extra over Lump Sum Subcontract Price) 17. Process to replace the damaged material shall be carried out at once to avoid any delay. issues & balance in stores shall be reported to the construction & project manager who shall act further depending on the project requirement. Elaborate details have been given on the CONTRACTOR procurement procedures document 16. Tests & Examinations shall be conducted similarly as aforesaid. Recommendation for two-year operating spares for approval by Company in accordance with the G-SPIR format requirements 15. o 4093 c d issue shall be affected & recorded on the required issue documentation. 9. shall also follow the foregoing procedures with the addition that necessary Letter of credits shall be opened by CONTRACTOR adequately in advance of the required date of delivery adhering to schedule date. Most probably. These shall be processed applying the same methods of procurement & delivery received by CONTRACTOR / its services or specialist sub contractors. CONTRACTOR shall apply in time for any statutory road permit for the efficient transportation of the material by suitable vehicles.co. commissioning spares.5044. Regularly the status of all receipts. Elaborate details have been given on the CONTRACTOR procurement procedures document 10. Any claims of insurances for the damaged material shall be made immediately after inspections. 12. Elaborate details have been given on the CONTRACTOR procurement procedures document. Materials & equipment that have to be imported from overseas. International and local transportation and customs clearance 11. This provision shall be followed & spares delivered according to contract & Company requirement by CONTRACTOR / its services sub contractors. so that the delivery is shipped in time from original source. Similarly this provision shall be effected & spares delivered according to Technip / Company instruction to CONTRACTOR subject to the approval of the Page 353 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Procurement and provision of two-years operating spares. Procurement and provision of construction spares. the spares shall form part of the order package. Elaborate details have been given on the CONTRACTOR procurement procedures document 14. CONTRACTOR procurement manager shall arrange all port clearances immediately of shipment arrival & material shipped to work site.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h .

1. This plan must detail all planning.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR vendors shall also comply with this requirement. temporary facilities and materials at the job site to properly support the construction efforts. We shall adhere to Company requirements. personnel. This preliminary mobilization plan shall be further developed after contract award and concluded within a week of the contract award. If so required by Company. Pre Mobilization Planning A thorough and logical mobilization plan is essential for the successful start-up of construction activities. a date & time appointed for the inspection to the convenience of all parties concerned & required inspection at source conducted to the satisfaction of Technip or Company.co. 2. Source inspection 19. Page 354 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. The mobilization plan shall be closely coordinated with the construction plan to ensure mobilization activities properly lead into and provide a smooth transition into initial construction activities. 22. Every effort shall be attempted by Procurement Manager to chart out the available ‘local & GCC sources’ & prepare a database to be used whenever any applicable procurement arises. This plan is already under preparation at this stage. Compliance with Company’s criteria and procedures for selection of vendors including but not limited to compliance with local registration requirements and approval of purchase requisitions.5044. Representatives from Technip and / or Company. arrangement shall be made by CONTRACTOR after meeting with the vendor or manufacturer. o 4093 c d procurement cost prior to the purchase order placement by CONTRACTOR 18. preparation and preconstruction activities necessary to ensure the timely availability of drawings. This procedure is already followed by CONTRACTOR. Involvement by the UAE in particular and GCC in general with respect to the provision of local materials and services shall be encouraged 23. Proper record of inspection shall be made. bidders lists. CONTRACTOR honor & respect with due regards to the provisions of UAE & GCC policies for the materials & professional services which need be availed out of the local & GCC sources subject to the compliance with the quality requirement. 20. technical bid summaries and award recommendations 21. construction equipment. services sub contractor & vendor shall constitute an inspection at source team.

The only activity to continue from Head Office after mobilization period is procurement. the key personnel to the site Management Team shall be assigned. All procurement for the project shall be done from the corporate procurement section located in CONTRACTOR Head Office at Musaffah. All necessary adjustment measures shall be implemented. A time scale bar chart diagram shall be prepared with early and late activity bars detailing the main activities to achieve full mobilization of staff.5044. The following items shall be reviewed and confirmed.  Access to the job site  Locations of temporary facilities  Company requirements for properly validated licenses and certificates to be held by construction personnel  Transport plans  Loss prevention and safety requirements  Arrangements for first-aid facilities  Arrangements for drinking water and construction water  Arrangements for electricity supply  Arrangements for storage fuels and lubricants  Arrangements for sanitary & its disposal facilities  Final arrangements for security interface with Technip & Company Work Centres Contractor Head Office Upon notification of contract award.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h .co. reconfirm assumptions and establish additional information required to permit smooth and timely mobilization. The following specific activities must be addressed early to be fully effective:  Finalize construction schedule requirements and subsequent approval from Contractor  Review manpower requirements for both non-manual and manual personnel. o 4093 c d 3. Construction personnel shall be mobilized to the project site office to provide input and direction to the project team. histograms Page 355 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. construction equipment and camp/site facilities shall be prepared at the commencement of the contract. 5. which may have occurred since the day of preparation. Additional site visits shall be conducted immediately after the project kick off to confirm data collected during bidding stage. Abu Dhabi. accommodation and temporary facilities established during the bid stage (as conceived in pre-mobilization planning) would be studied and re-evaluated in the light of any changes. 4. update these requirements by means of staffing schedules. Mobilization plans for staff & labour. labour. Successful project execution requires construction experts to be active from the onset of the project.

 Review construction equipment needs subcontractors mobilization plans are in place.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . and ensure subcontractors manning levels are compatible.  Review environmental. permits. CONTRACTOR Site Office Actual ‘on site management’ would be from offices based on the site next to Contractor and Company’s office.  Actively pursue preliminary site activities such as approvals. policies and procedures required for the execution of the works and ensure they constitute “Project Specific” status.             Safety Regulation Enforcement Quality Assurance Enforcement and Procedures Construction Method Statements Construction Planning Site Documents Control Field Engineering & Design Controls Material Requisitions Materials Control and Tracking Materials Storage Work Procedures Physical Construction Site Administration Mobilization Mobilization shall be coordinated from the CONTRACTOR Head Office at Abu Dhabi with input from CONTRACTOR personnel already mobilized for the execution of Site Preparation Package and Temporary Facilities for Contractor and Company. and ensure that timely  Review field procedures and method statements defining standards.  Ensure Lessons Learned & Practices from previous projects are well understood & should be applied effectively from the onset of the works itself to achieve professional products. including indirects such as tools. establishing contracts. Existing teams responsible for the execution of the those two Page 356 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. safety and Health (ES&H) and site security plans to ensure compliance with the client’s specifications and guidelines. CONTRACTOR Site Office is fully supported by CONTRACTOR Head Office at Musaffah. consumables.5044.  Review Construction Quality plan in line with the guidelines of ISO 9000 and check Established QC parameters by discipline.  Overview temporary facility requirements. The following major activities shall be carried out at site offices.co. gases and the like and check subcontractors compliance. o 4093 c d and craft mixes.

As soon as practicable.5044. On completion of the site offices at ASAB. dedicated work crews shall be allocated for each discipline supervised by foremen and general foremen who in turn shall report to the discipline supervisors/site engineers.  Third party independent concrete testing laboratory credentials submission for approval. lay-down area. It is the responsibility of the supervisor/site engineer to ensure the efficient utilization of his material. an emphasis shall be given on the critical requirements of the construction schedule. the plans and specification for the site temporary construction facilities shall be finalized and released for installation. necessary operational crews shall be formed and controlled over to meet the planned progress target to be physically achieved satisfactorily.  Mobilization shall commence with the following activities:  Kick off meeting to commence the sub contract  Commencement of the required land surveys to establish various horizontal & vertical controls bench marks  Incept of the engineering designs at the Firm office  Soil Investigation by an approved laboratory  Construction of temporary facilities  Obtaining various permits from Authorities and conclusion of arrangements with local committees where necessary. Progress shall be monitored on the basis of actual installed quantities compared to scheduled quantities. During the installation of the temporary facilities existing CONTRACTOR site offices shall be utilized to supervise the site activities required for the temporary facilities installation. o 4093 c d mentioned packages already have substantial cadre of experienced professional well versed in mobilization of temporary facilities. tools. Safety and security operations etc. re-bar fabrication. storage and other items necessary to commence the work in accordance with the construction schedule. Temporary facilities at the job site shall include Generator Yard and Construction water storage tank. carpentry yard. project execution. Page 357 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. site surveying shall begin utilizing the Total Station System to establish accurate control points for the performance of the work. Shortly after contract award. consumables. warehousing. workforce. At the start of the construction. For construction areas.co. Work shall be carried out under continual supervision and inspection over performance. balance of the CONTRACTOR construction staff shall be mobilized to the site along with construction equipment.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . warehouse and workshop facilities at location A4. Based on the construction schedule requirements. QA / QC planning. tools and equipment.

co. A field inspection and testing program shall be organized to be in line with CONTRACTOR Quality manual & Approved Project plan under overall responsibility of the QA / QC Manager. water shall be trucked from nearby Desalination plant. Testing And Inspection 1. o 4093 c d For ‘construction operation water’ requirement.5044. machines. Prior to conduct any testing. within 10 kms of the site. material management shall come under the purview and custody of the site store staff. Firm shall also represent CONTRACTOR regularly during the project currency Detailed services designs shall be prepared by CONTRACTOR services sub contractors 2. 4. Building Engineering services shall be utilized by appointing a consulting firm. Material tracking from source to the place of installation shall be conducted by the computerized system. to be responsible for the complete architectural. without reservations. 2. equipment etc. The storekeeper. Material Management Once material has arrived at site. Contractor and Company (as required by QC Plan and ITP) shall be advised of the tests for witness. The construction manager shall be responsible to provide the technical oversight and direction for the control of materials at the construction site area. 3. Subcontract Strategy 1. roofing finishes etc 3. However. Company procedures shall be apply for prequalification and award of the subcontracts.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Wherever required vendor specialist shall be made available for conduct of testing and inspections. Page 358 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. 6. unless an alternative arrangement is made available. In case any minor or specialized work is necessary to be sub contracted on lower tier. supported by his store assistant shall be responsible for the custody of the material prior to issue. structural design drawings & documents productions as well as for the services schematic designs drawings production. Lower tier sub contracts shall be allowed for the execution of single operations such as supply of ready mix concrete. More information has already been elaborated in the foregoing. 5. Ready Mixed Concrete is envisaged supplied from an established RMC supplier. an establishment with proven track record duly approved for supplying concrete by GASCO. we are also seriously considering installing our own concrete batching plant. Site ‘construction and temporary facilities electricity requirements’ shall be met by installing suitable size and suitable numbers of generators. in the mean time. CONTRACTOR shall carry out broadly all civil engineering works employing its own resources of manpower.

weekly and monthly basis as required to ensure prompt delivery in accordance with the requirements.  Required delivery dates for all major items. Quantity of each item required with comprehensive breakdown Adequate information concerning nomenclature description. Organization Corporate Organization The Contractor is an umbrella organization which has got numerous divisions within in itself and which is also the parent company for various subsidiaries. CONTRACTOR is a separately registered company specifically set-up to target the energy sectors and its clients. Material approvals. CONTRACTOR has been operating under the CONTRACTOR Page 359 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Abu Dhabi. a purchase order shall be raised and entered in the computer register system. identify all applicable drawings. Once the final approval from the client is obtained. UAE office shall be responsible for all purchases adhering to the following procedure. conditions/packing  Instruction of holding. with the inclusion of following information. Quality required. Musaffah. Preparation of Purchase Requisition shall be made based on take-offs quantities calculated from the approved drawings documents. purchase order shall be raised. manuals etc  Spare parts requirements  Special Instructions to vendors A technical evaluation shall be done in house to verify the conformity with specifications. All questionable delivery commitments shall be expedited on a daily. applicable specifications. etc/ or detailed outline of the material required. design & other drawings.  Delivery points of major items  Inspection of the goods at the point of origin issue  Certification of test data and/or compliance/ warranty  Method of shipment (if goods imported). marking  Drawings. o 4093 c d Procurement The Central procurement department located at the Contractor. indicating cost and budget allocation. data sheets. Purchase requisition shall completely. kitting consolidation.5044.co. The procurement department shall maintain a follow-up system so that contact suppliers and/or manufactures may be made on continuous basis.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Samples and technical information shall be submitted to Contractor. vendor documentation requirements etc. Upon receipt of Purchase Requisition. specifications.

The charge hand shall then supervise approximately ten labours. Manpower Resourcing And Mobilization All the personnel on site shall be employees of The Contractor. The schedule shall also be indicative of manpower mobilization.5044. The recruitment of manpower shall ensure that background in the relevant job skill has been achieved. The standard The Contractor site supervision is based upon the principle of training. These sites are due for demobilisation in the coming months. All supervisory staff shall be highly experienced and qualified drawn from on-going projects wherever possible. Water boys etc and other ancillary staff shall be deployed for the unhindered progress of the work. 2. Auto Electricians.uk Page 360 of 663 IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . The The Contractor contains at all times a vast pool of manpower in all Disciplines. Guards. 7. Based on the project schedule. 1. These workforces are at all times working on various projects in multi discipline fields. Training is a requirement of the The Contractor quality management system and foreman and charge hands shall conduct training of the manpower in their respective roles and functions. this ratio may be revised accordingly.  Site Organization Proposed site organisation and responsibilities of the key personnel are enclosed. Equipment Resourcing And Mobilization 8. o 4093 c d Establishment umbrella since 1995. Electricians. the planning department shall generate the suraj_engineer@yahoo.co. 4. 6. These schedules shall define the monthly manpower levels. Broadly all the activities of the above divisions and companies can be divided into:      General Construction Heavy Lifting and Transport Services. The training in quality awareness shall be an ongoing process through the quality department and the foreman. All of the required personnel to execute the work are already in UAE and working on other sites. The planning department shall produce a histogram schedule of the resources by category. A charge hand shall be trained and supervised by a foreman. 3. Where a special process is conducted. Sufficient numbers of site supporting staffs which consists of Mechanics. Trading Industrial Plant Construction. In normal cases a foreman shall supervise four charge hands. 5.

head office & Company. The Contractor is one of the largest equipment rental companies in the GCC with over 5000 fleet where modern repair and machine facilities enable them to maintain a first class fleet of equipment. safety and quality Page 361 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Monitoring and reporting of all lower tier-subcontracting activities This activity shall be affected by the project manager based on the construction manager report. 3. supervision. of Work to be subcontracted. roofing application. suspended ceiling installation etc. Following the award of the project. 10. Involvement by the UAE in particular and GCC in general with respect to the provision of local services shall be encouraged. 9. The Method Statements related to various project activities shall be submitted for contractor’s approval prior to commencement of any activity during the execution stage. 5. Perform all lower tier subcontracting activities including specification of packages 4.5044. We have one of the youngest fleets of equipment in the GCC based on size. It has been our company policy to weed out the old equipment on a periodical basis and keep the equipment fleet very young. Subcontracting Develop and manage a lower tier subcontracting plan and subcontractor list CONTRACTOR plans to carry out most of the civil activities itself but selected items shall be sub contracted on the lower tier such as ready mix concrete. As included earlier somewhere else that UAE national policy shall fully be honored subject to making no compromise to the quality requirement 10. a detailed contract scope works programme for the whole project shall be developed including all disciplines separately based on already approved outline preliminary programme appended under the coordination of our Construction Manager and Planning Engineer 2.co. These operations shall be managed & controlled by the Construction Manager on site & reported to the Project manager 8. Management of lower tier subcontractors and their activities 7. 9. raised flooring application. The report shall be regularly provided to the planning engineer. Construction Method Statement– New Buildings 1. All relevant information shall be provided by the Project Manager to the purchase manager who should act immediately to conduct the required functions & the lower tier deal finalized after obtaining Company recommendation by the Project manager 6. doors & windows manufacturing. pre-qualification of bidders.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . bid evaluation. Construction including providing labour. painting application. o 4093 c d construction equipment schedules. recommendation and award. issue of ITBs.

CONTRACTOR aggress to extend its full cooperation to meet any Third Party Inspections. transport to Jobsite. All safety & emergency precautionary measures shall be undertaken to the contract requirement. CONTRACTOR shall supply & coordinate with all lower tier sub contractors & vendors or their respective representatives to the requirement. which shall be extended for the use of workers transportation. All these issues have been elaborated earlier somewhere else 11. Provision of Construction Camp. vendor support. inspection. commissioning. messing. Full responsibility for co-ordination with any Third Party Inspectorate 18. o 4093 c d management. Supply and coordination of lower tier subcontractor and vendor representatives as necessary 1. tools. All activities for the buildings part have been described on the method statement appended as well as this document also integrates to Civil Works & Site Preparation Execution & Construction Method Statement. utilities and consumables. Supply of these shall be managed by the Purchase Manager while the Project manager shall manage on site. and construction equipment. All testing facilities required at Jobsite 16.co. All activities necessary for Mechanical Completion. CONTRACTOR shall supply an independent testing laboratory equipped with all equipment necessary for involved tests for this package properly managed by qualified personnel meeting all QA testing & certification requirement. temporary facilities and services. sanitation. the arrangements shall be made for the employed high tier & low tier sub contractors on this package 13. All these shall be fully undertaken by CONTRACTOR based on the site requirement. Pre commissioning. 12. A life camp shall be constructed on site to meet the workforce accommodation requirement. and Provisional Acceptance. for SUBCONTRACTOR’s personnel.5044. 14. Coordination shall be conducted by the Construction Manager Page 362 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. All utilities shall be provided to maintain good house keeping of the camp. Similarly.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Messing shall be resolved by employing catering sub contractors so that all personnel & workers take good food. Project manager & Construction manager shall be responsible to affect this part of the contract. 17. 15. CONTRACTOR operates its own system of transport. utilities etc.

Sub Structures shall also be constructed of RCC in situ. RCC framings shall meet the design criteria of blast resistant & resilient structure productions meaningfully. Keeping in view the nature of contract being EPC.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . to verify the validity of Page 363 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Soil report bore holes log direct to employing spread footings in isolation. shall be sent to Contractor site clinic for further treatment. Medical male nurse shall be employed on job site First Aid centre. Male nurse shall take care of providing First Aid treatment to injured workmen immediately & then the worker if so necessary in the opinion of the male nurse. Provision of waste management at all Jobsite locations. 4.co.5044. Safety manager shall be responsible for the operations of all such activities & report to the Construction/Project Manager regularly 4. including disinvestments of all temporary works. Waste management shall be fully operational on a day to day basis both for garbage & sewage according to the planned arrangements. o 4093 c d 2. Provision of medical and fire-fighting services at Jobsite and for temporary works 5. Utilizing the good composition of the soil. the foundations shall be designed to the best of critical imposed stresses with most economical& optimum use of the construction materials. Soil has been described as sand with some silt traces & classified as very good for the founding purpose for no water is available within explored strata. CONTRACTOR have decided to apply RCC in situ construction for all intended buildings accepting the Company direction on drawings. Soil on site is medium to very dense recommended to give 30 t / m^2 working bearing capacity at 4 m depth & about 10 t / m*2 at 1 m depth according to the soil investigation Geotechnical report issued by Arab Centre for Engineering Studies for ASAB area. However. upon completion of Work 3. It is known from the contract documents that 9 buildings for various intending use as Sub station +Bottle Store. which shall be integrated by grade beams/walls to form an unit for compaction settlement & long-term consolidation controls. No dewatering is necessary for the foundation zones. Safety manager shall be responsible for the operations of all such activities & report to the Construction/Project Manager regularly SPECIFIC SPECIFIC CONSTRUCTION METHOD STATEMENT– NEW BUILDINGS PACKAGE 1. Instrument Equipment Shelter+Bottle Store and Operator Shelter have been defined to be constructed 2. 3.

pre & post concrete data for the purpose of approval & handover dossiers. The phases of the construction shall be adhered to meeting the set out milestones. Foundations shall be designed based on the soil report & further laboratory recommendations combined if so required.co. 7. It shall be the responsibility of each team to set out. For all other organization details please refer to Project organization plan. Excavation shall commence after the clearance is obtained & continue according to the plan. For each team one quality assurance/control engineer shall be deployed to conduct QA / QC procedures for the relevant area. One common project site manager shall be an overall responsible for all on site execution operations & conduct interface with the head office duly supported by safety. Survey team shall coordinate with each site engineer to meet site requirement. inspect & record all layouts. All horizontal & vertical controls shall be established & monitored by the leader. The construction teams shall be constituted to meet the requirement as exhibited on the organization chart. Each team shall comprise of one site engineer. Proper safety shoring shall be arranged during this activity when it crosses 1. 6. construction.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . All unsuitable excavated material shall continuously be removed from site & suitable material tip off to designated area. survey barricading shall be established & necessary grids control fixed & inspected by QA / QC.5 m depth & arrangement for suitable access into pit made to the satisfaction of the safety inspector & company. Project & Construction manager shall in collaboration constitute four independent dedicated teams for four working divisions/areas lead by each site engineer directly reporting to construction manager as shown on the organization chart. A surveying team shall be constituted lead by a chief / senior surveyor to carry out all site setting works from the stage of preliminary site survey to the point of recording red lines for the purpose of ‘as built’. After ensuring proper safety arrangements are in. All approved controlled drawings shall be issued to surveying team to commence the setting out operations. utilizing the services of an approved laboratory. CONTRACTOR may without reservations further conduct investigations based on the Engineering Services sub contracting firm recommendations. o 4093 c d the soil report. technical & administration sections all to be well established on site. required number of site foreman & further supported by charge hand from each trade. One General foreman shall be deployed for the labour engagement responsibilities on various day-to-day activities. quality. which are very tight for the purpose of physically executing the buildings package.5044. All environment controls shall be taken care off during this operation. 5. A surveyor shall continuously ensure the Page 364 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo.

plastic spacers shall be fixed to keep all rebar in proper position. Chamfer shall also be fixed on the vertical edges of the forms. After required clearance. proper curing arrangements shall be made for the required number of specified days. All starter rebar shall also be fixed supported by plastic spacer. shall be prepared together with surrounding sub structures. Backfill shall continue up to the formation level below the grade slabs blinding in buildings & where cellar suspended floor slab is to be built. Foundations shall be set out to design details to permit formwork erection & rebar placement.co. forms fixed. o 4093 c d depth of excavation does not exceed the design requirement. All ready mix record shall be maintained according to QA approved procedures. Application of the protection membrane shall commence thereafter over whole area of the blinding. CONTRACTOR QA / QC shall inspect the formation. After curing is done for the specified period.5044.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Setting outs for further stub columns shall be done & preparatory works continued. 10. Area shall be blinded to the design thickness minimum 75 mm properly levelled & trowel applied to make it suitable for the purpose to receive heavy duty concrete protection layer membrane. all services inserts Page 365 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. backfill shall be done around the grade structures. After completing the preparatory works for the stub columns. 9. 8. 12. For sub stations where cable cellar suspended floor slab is to be built. In parallel. protection membrane shall be applied on both horizontal & vertical surfaces followed by inspection & backfill in compacted layers to specified requirement. Field density tests shall be conducted to monitor the requirement of density & water content etc. On sides also. Operations of grade beams / walls shall be taken up on similar principle as other activities. 11. dressing shall be started followed by compaction of the soil so that area is ready for inspections. When the excavation reaches the formation level. all works regarding grade beams / walls shall continue complying with all the approved procedures. Inspection shall be conducted followed by concrete pouring supplied by an approved ready mix plant. After concreting is finished. Fabrication of rebars shall be done in a designated area while fabrication of forms too in another designated area all according to approved procedures. Then curing shall be carried out for 3 days. rebars placed. inspections & pouring shall be carried out following all procedures. Foundation top levels shall be fixed using 25 mm plastic triangular chamfers horizontally. Preparations shall be carried out for the cellar suspended slabs by erecting required supporting system. arrangement shall be made for blinding all released area according to the approved method statements.

Works of steel rebar placement shall continue in parallel to speed up the preparatory works. Next operation of erection of the propriety scaffolding to support the superstructure roof slab shall commence strictly complying with the scaffolding drawings. Services inserts such as electrical conduits. shall be installed immediately & inspection conducted. Forms shall be made of fair face ply to produce specified texture to the elevation requirement. inspections conducted & concrete poured. After three days of curing on blinding. blinding concrete shall be poured. Scaffolding shall be erected for the fixing & placing vertical rebars of columns & walls in all required areas. At this stage of the building. formation level. Inspections shall be conducted for the elements ready for pouring. pouring shall be carried out Page 366 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo.co.e. preparation for the grade slab works shall commence & rebars placed either by site fabrication or using pre fabricated mesh to design requirement. All vertical & grid controls shall be established by surveyor to keep in line & level all forms of beams alignment & soffits. 15. Similarly. Work of vertical forms shall commence for sides of columns as well as walls fixed using removable tie bolts with cones / boss at tie rod ends. Level of slab shall be established & then work of form fixing shall commence followed by placing of beams reinforcement. HVAC inserts or block outs if necessary & other inserts shall be marked for establishment. Pouring shall commence keeping the height of pour not more than 2 m using vertical pipe chute of the pump reaching up to necessary level. on the areas where grade slab is to be built. After obtaining approval for the pour. All preparatory works of superstructure elements shall come into full swing by the fabrication of the forms & steel rebar fabrication to the BBS details. Any inserts necessary for the electrical conduit or earthing. Curing shall follow adhering to the agreed or approved procedures. Similarly walls of transformer areas shall be built adhering to all QA procedures. major sub structural elements have been completed giving a way to commence the super structural works. levelled & wood floated well to make it sufficient enough to receive the grade slab.5044. o 4093 c d provided & inspections conducted from all disciplines followed by the concrete pouring observing all QA procedures.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . plastic sheet shall be laid after compaction & levelling & all necessary under ground services completion. All necessary services shall be inserted. operations of fabrication of forms & rebar shall be taken up. 14. Steel rebars shall be fixed placed with spaces & inspections conducted. An inspection of the preparatory works shall be conducted by all involved disciplines. 13. On parallel. after the completion of the backfill up to the bottom of blinding concrete i. All exposed vertical edges shall be chamfered using plastic chamfer 25 x 25 mm triangular section nailed to the forms.

nozzle vibrators conforming to perform 10000 oscillation per minute & all other necessary arrangements essential to perform the best task. smooth finish or sandy or rough or grouted. Roofing shall commence by scabbling the slab surface. cleaned & surface treatment to the project specification applied to produce specified class of surface texture i. 17. All necessary safety measures shall be installed. Curing shall be started immediately after finishing the surface as required by the curing compound manufacturer’s instruction for the application of compound & also by using water in combination all to agreed procedures. Over concrete protection paint on parapet. concrete pumps. o 4093 c d adhering to pouring method statement compliance. All aforesaid concreting operations shall be supported by necessary number of transit mixers. Now the structural framing works have been completed giving way to attack on internal walls & other items such as dry wall lining & preparation for the roofing item. Wall lining work shall be carried out in accordance to design details after Page 367 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Well-trained teams shall be engaged for such operations.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Services site team shall be inducted in full swing for carrying out all disciplinary operations. 18. those shall be provided within the formwork itself. membrane application followed by water leak test for 72 hours & then polystyrene boards laid over to be protected by concrete pavers. If necessary during hot weather. Concrete surface shall be inspected immediately after removing form. Suspended ceiling fixers shall also enter in to commence the work. 20. Intermediate slabs on the Battery rooms shall be constructed following the foregoing procedure. On the similar pattern as defined earlier. Forms shall be struck form the elements carefully ensuring full safety intact. 22. Block work shall be carried out wherever required for walls followed by services fix 1 items & then plastered over as specified. all inserts shall be fixed followed by all relevant inspections & pour. Erection of the scaffolding around shall extend to cover the parapet portion followed by formwork & rebar fixing. Seperation geotextile shall be provided according to applicator direction. 21. rest pauses shall be allowed to workers with the provision of liquid or salt water. 16. Wherever special openings have been provided in designs within the structural framing.co. All preparations shall commence for the remaining works. Any defective concrete shall be applied remedial measures as agreed with the Company or Client. 23. Aluminum flashing shall be fixed to design details. laying of light weight foam concrete in grade minimum % to receive water proofing membrane.e. Where there is no ceiling. 19.5044. work on the slab finishes shall continue.

Sumps shall be constructed to details in floor. Services inspections shall be conducted prior to commence the finishing works. All underground services invert level & crown level shall be checked ensuring proper setting to alignment. All units of every discipline shall be tested on site to confirm adequate performance. 31.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Necessary directional signs to be installed in buildings shall be fixed to approvals. Sand shall be filled over the compacted & profiled area of the walkways whereon the interlocking concrete blocks are to be fixed in to design pattern. After ensuring that each installation is efficient in performance. Manholes shall be cleared of all debris. o 4093 c d ensuring complete inspections of services conduits etc. All surrounding or backfills shall be completed to the specification provisions. Gravel filling shall be done around the transformer oil containments / enclosures.5044. all other services shall be checked to ensure that testing for the commissioning can be successfully conducted. are over. 25. 27. According to Page 368 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Works of external services within 5 m of building shall be completed & tested. Details are included within the technical literature / datasheet. Functions of all electrical as well as HVAC appliances & equipment shall be checked for adequacy of functioning. 26. Similarly. Operations of constructing transformer foundations shall be carried out & protection applied to that. When the works are ready involving the scope of telecommunication routes. Flooring shall be carried out in according to design details. 29. All finishing items shall be carried out in wet areas & concealed piping works prior to that. an entry shall be allowed to the related other sub contractor from other scopes provided with full cooperation in all respects. release for commissioning shall be given. Services operations shall be completed in all areas followed by finishing works. Water shall be applied with pressure to clear the dirt. Provisional Acceptance and Final Acceptance All services individual items integrity & tests shall be conducted by related sub contractors & record maintained. Tiling shall be followed on required areas schedules to receive floor or wall tiles. dust or any foreign material. Commissioning. Walkways works shall commence by filling & leveling around the building excluding the instrumentation room on the plant side portions. Walkway Kerb shall be fixed to the profile over the blinding concrete with haunch concrete over.co. 24. Pre commissioning. 28. 30. Fixing of cable terminations framing steel as well as framing steel for the floor openings shall be carried out according to details. Concrete surfaces requiring protection shall be applied accordingly with 3 coat system or any other approved.

These shall be prepared. pre commissioning & commissioning to the contract requirement. internal sanitary & drainage.co. commissioning & provisional acceptance. & gas detection system. infrastructure of all other included services require pre commissioning.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . All operating & maintenance manuals shall be submitted covering work scope items. fuels. o 4093 c d the direction given by the integrated datasheet & brochures. Within Contractor scope All required operating and maintenance documentation. compiled. fire alarm. These representatives shall manage all activities required to be carried out on site for the purpose of construction execution. Brief description has already been elaborated in the foregoing. All fix 1 & fix 2 procedures shall be conducted according to ITPs & approved procedures. All activities necessary to achieve Pre commissioning. Services disciplines such as electrical. All utilities. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ Page 369 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. chemicals and catalysts required up to issuance of the Provisional Acceptance Certificate. lubricants. commissioning and Provisional Acceptance. documented & transmitted according to the provision of the sub contract requirement. For further details on the services method statements for the package. Specialist vendors shall be employed for the specialist operations. Click here Both statements should be referred to as an integral document. discipline wise testing & commissioning shall be carried out & continues for one month. Supply and coordination of lower tier subcontractor and vendor representatives as necessary All necessary lowers tier sub contractor & vendor representatives shall be provided to the scope requirement. Yet some more details have been included for the purpose of indication only within the presentation of Civil Works package that can be opened from this document itself on soft copy. fire suppression system. WARRANTY OBLIGATIONS THROUGH TO FINAL ACCEPTANCE shall be submitted for the work scope items Further detailed method statements based on each significant activities shall be proposed while physically working on site prepared & approved by the site management. please refer to the CCTC documentation to be attached within this proposal. These personnel shall interact with Technip & company if so required for all technical & engineering involvement.5044.

Any existing services so located shall be informed to the relevant authorities as well as company for necessary actions. The project duration is 20 months Period for the tanks construction considered 14 months (60 weeks). Trial pits shall also be excavated to scan whether or not any service exists. Page 370 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Existing services Records shall be checked for the possibilities of any running service. Other detailed typical statements shall be produced during the real execution of the works for each activity as standard procedures applicable to the project.5044. The construction execution of the reservoir RCC structures shall be carried out based on the AFC drawings. all proposed forms shall be designed to the final requirement & calculations with drawings submitted for approval. This statement is meant only for general description of the procedures for various operations involved. Documents Drawings Reference Attached from Doka Formwork G A Walls & Columns Top 50 systems Formwork D 2 Tables Specification For Concrete Specification For Concrete Reservoirs Design Prior to the construction of the reservoir. Two tanks to be constructed simultaneously. Ref. Four number reservoirs are to be built at one location.co. o 4093 c d Sample Only Taweelah Unit III Um Al Nar Water Transmission Scheme Water Reservoir Construction Method Statement Scope The purpose of this document is to define the construction procedures to be adopted for the construction of typical reservoirs.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h .

All fabricated bars shall be tagged according to the BBS (Bar Bending Schedule) references Form fabricationPage 371 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. All safety signboards meant for the excavation safety shall be provided. guide barricades shall be erected for the purpose of locating the grids & reference site levels.co. Toolbox talks shall be imparted daily for all the important operations involved.5044. Rebar fabricationRebar shall be fabricated on the steel yard located elsewhere on the site. Materials Concrete sourceReady mix concrete from an approved supplier shall be used. proper arrangement shall be made to carry out the mass excavation works. Benchmarks shall be established on all corners for the purpose of flying and reestablishing any of working locations. For convenient access of heavy equipment into the formation area. form erection activities etc. Warning tapes Safety cones shall be provided around the defined working area. Around the area. Warning night-lights reflectors shall be provided around. Since the dimension of the built up reservoir are given around 130 M x 90 M.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . during all concreting activities. Ladders shall be provided for the access into the working area located not more than 8 m spacing. ramps shall be provided from the existing or graded level from 2 opposite ends. o 4093 c d Supervision & Control Construction manager. Site engineer. the surveying team shall locate the setting out lines. dewatering arrangements shall be carried out continuously until the foundation slab is constructed. construction foreman & charge hands shall control all activities on site according to the relevant job descriptions. Topographical levels shall be recorded. The site shall be graded to the required ground level. coordinates as well as the surrounding circulation area for the construction purpose. All survey documents shall be prepared for the purpose of verification. The establishment of the base corners points as well as the base level benchmark shall be conducted by licensed land surveyor & documents submitted to the engineer for approvals & records references. If so required. Safety All safety measures shall be taken according to the excavation requirement. A safety officer shall inspect the works every day. Survey According to the AFC drawings. Pouring platform for the people to work safely shall be constructed.

components of the overflow chambers. flat slab. Intermediate suspended slabs & walls. all components of the inlet & outlet chambers. construction joints. stair structure. 1200 mm wide interlocking paving around reservoir construction. columns. The scope of the vendor formwork system shall be confined to retaining walls. Detailed activities prior to structural construction Excavation & Sub Grade After the clearance from the engineer. expansion joints. Roof up stands General activities post structural construction Filling the PVC pipes inserts within the walls with approved propriety material. Roofing & waterproofing Roof handrails External Walls pattern formation. the form works shall be erected according to the vendor drawings. excavation shall be started using heavy equipments removing the excavated material directly into the truck & transporting to the tip off stock piles or in case the material not to be used for the filling purpose. o 4093 c d Fabrication of the plywood forms shall be carried out on site based on the specialist formwork vendor details. suspended slab. Procedures / Method for one reservoir construction Summary of the activities General activities prior to structural construction 300 mm compacted granular sub base 75 mm concrete blinding 2 layers bituminous membrane 50 mm screed Structural construction activities RCC Elements involvedPeriphery retaining walls. baffle walls. to a Page 372 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. baffle walls. Box outs. The supporting system shall be provided by the form vendor based on the detailed design approved by the engineer. Fixing of Manholes covers & frames on roof.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . On site. columns with heads.5044.co. sump elements. Base slab.

Site sample testing shall be conducted according to the specification requirement for both courses. The excavated formation shall be dressed manually as well as using light rollers & after the formation profile is established.co. Before laying new concrete at the set edge of the previous blinding at the edge. 1 st layer shall be laid in a thickness so that after the rolling. bituminous membrane shall be applied over the blinded surface. Polythene sheet shall be spread over the entire area.5044. 2nd course construction shall be carried out. If so required. Curing shall be carried out for 3 days only. debris. heavy rolling shall be carried out over the entire are to reach field compaction to 95 % of dry density. the compacted thickness in both the courses is 300 mm. According to the manufacturer’s instruction. The whole blinding shall be divided into 6 bays each 20m wide & 90 m long. o 4093 c d designated dumping area. the surface shall be cleaned of all dust particles. Proper leveling shall be carried out using wooden float edge by the masons. The surveyor shall control the levels to avoid over excavation. Field compaction test shall be conducted according to the standards & specification requirements. The top profile of the sub base shall be given according to the details which indicates a fall 1 in 500. to the strip profile level. water etc & inspected. The one stage quantifies to about 135 cum which is feasible for a convenient casting. 75 mm concrete blinding & mass concrete to requirement Blinding shall be done in stages parallel to the width of the reservoir. Quality Engineer shall inspect the profile 300 mm compacted granular sub base Approved granular sub base is spread over the entire area in 2 layers. Mass concrete shall be carried out as shown on the approved contract drawings 2 layers bituminous membrane At the end of the curing. Thereafter. Low profile strip formwork for the controlling sides shall be prepared. Excavation shall be carried out approximately to the formation sub grade level only all according to the profile shown on the approved drawings. cement slurry shall be applied to the edge so that new & old concrete is properly bonded. further formation of baying compartments could be established within each bay for alternative laying. Any cracks appearing or any damaged portion located shall be repaired. profiled to true levels & given wooden float after the concrete is ready to receive the float. A concrete laying team shall be grouped for the purpose such that concrete received from the transit mixer is immediately pumped into the location & spread using teeth shovel / garden racks. The whole area shall be laid. Page 373 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. dust control shall be carried out by conventional means. During excavation.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h .

5044.propriety formwork 40 sets. suspended slabs Preparatory works for the suspended slab . 4 repetitions Each wall comprises Preparatory works for the inlet / outlet chamber as well as overflow 1 set.non propriety formwork 384 repetitions of each bay Each bay comprises of 4 sides Preparatory works for the columns.propriety formwork 1 set. o 4093 c d 50 mm screed The membrane shall be protected by an application of 50 mm screed layer as soon as possible & cured accordingly by the repetition of the foregoing activities in sequence but in alternate bays. 6 repetitions (Ref to attached drg GA walls from DOKA) These elements comprise of the base slab.propriety formwork 10 sets. 2 repetitions Flat slab construction (Ref to attached drg D2 Tables from DOKA) L shape wall Setting out for each L shape wall at the corner shall be carried out on the screed for the Page 374 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. walls. 4 stages in repetition (Ref to attached drg GA walls from DOKA) Preparatory works for straight walls – 1 set 40 m long.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . shear key & upright RCC structures Preparatory works for the base slab. Construction of peripheral retaining walls.co. 2 repetitions These comprise of base slab.major elements Preparatory works for one corner L shape – 1 set. 10 repetitions Each column comprises of 4 sides (Ref to attached drg Column top 50 from DOKA) Preparatory works for baffle walls.

The anchoring arrangements sleeved in shall be fastened properly. Arrangement for the construction joint shall be made for the insertion of approved water bar so that lower half of the bar is in the retaining wall base slab concrete. About 500 cum of pour is in this programme that may take about 16 hours. Upright wall Scaffolding shall be erected on both sides for accessing the workers to fix the rebars & erect the formworks for the upright wall. The retaining wall base slab shall be continuous without any joint. QC inspection shall be conducted & engineer’s approval obtained Programme shall be charted out for pouring about 250 cum in one go. Concrete delivery shall be continuous. The concrete Page 375 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Water bar shall be inserted in all vertical positions duly welded using cross as well as Tees wherever required. At the end of the every day work. Vertical forms shall be prepared at site using plywood & wooden battens all to approved methods. Rebars shall be placed properly in compliance with the design details & engineers approval obtained prior to the closure of the forms. polythene membrane shall be spread over the placed & fixed rebars for protection from humidity. It shall be ensured that the erected forms are in true alignment & plumb as well as outer wall forms in designed profile. Following preparatory works for the upper wall portion shall be continued. Re-bars shall be placed according to the details provided with due spacers. After the clearance by the site engineer. The portion of the green concrete at the wall junction shall be roughened before the concrete is hardened. the sides of the forms shall be erected & fixed. Chairs shall be provided between the top & bottom rebar layers. It shall be ensured that the set lines of the forms are in true alignment & plumb.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Permanent bars shall also be inserted as shown on the vendor’s design. The exposed portion of the concrete shall be properly finished to the defined levels & immediate / instant as well as specified duration curing shall be continuously carried out. polythene membrane shall be spread over the placed & fixed rebars for protection from humidity. QC inspection shall be conducted & engineers approval obtained for pouring concrete. Outer forms shall be checked for the correctness of its compliance with design profile while vertical forms for verticality as we as alignment. According to the formwork vendor’s design. All supports as shown on the details shall be provided. Two pumps shall be used for this pour. A platform shall be built on top for the workers safe access & working. At the end of the every day work. o 4093 c d base slab (Toe + Heel) portion.co. All vertical sides shall be well supported so that 1 m high concrete pressure is sustained by the supporting system adequately without bulging.5044. The pouring shall be done in 3 layers so that cold joint is avoided.

5 cum. Total number 384 bays. All the bars shall be properly bound to avoid any kind of slip or dislocation even though steel fixers shall be available to attend the pour to control the bars positions. Form carpenters shall also be available to control the alignment & levels. In this case also. curing shall be carried out as approved. Provision of rebar chairs for the top & bottom rebars supports shall be made.e 500 cum pour. Construction joints to be prepared around to detail requirement. Repetition of the bays shall be done accordingly to complete all 384 bays. 500 mm thick i. Scaffolding shall be erected for accessing the workers to fix the rebars & erect the formworks for the upright wall. Proper placement of concrete spacers shall be made. Straight walls Base Slab preparatory works shall be carried out similarly as given in the foregoing L shape pattern excepting that the forms are straight.e 12. After the concrete is set. Immediately after the finishing of the top surface to the defined profile. Rebar placement to be done continuously to the details Rebars for the starter bars shall be placed for the baffle walls in the correct positions wherever defined Rebars for the starter bars shall be placed for the columns in the correct positions wherever defined Provision of surface water strip shall be made according to details.5044. This pour shall consume about 10 hours. At the end of the every day work. At the end of the pour. Side supports shall be struck only after 48 hours. polythene membrane shall be spread over the placed & fixed rebars for protection from humidity. Two pumps shall be used for the pour for 16 hours programme.co. Side supports shall be struck only after 24 hours. Pour shall be carried out in layers not exceeding 450 mm so that vibrator nozzles penetrates internally. Upright wall Each pour about 100 cum. the top surface shall be properly floated & either curing compound instantly sprayed or covered with polythene sheet. Preparation of forms to be carried out around in general keeping in view that it allows for the continuation of rebars and also the insertion of water bar. Preparation for 40 bays shall be done in one go i. o 4093 c d pouring chute pipe shall be inserted vertically into the prepared works so that the net drop of concrete is not more than 2 m.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Page 376 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. instant curing shall be carried out. Base Slab bay / Floor slabs Size of the bay is 5 m x 5 m.

Programme shall be charted out for pouring about 250 cum in one go. Rebars shall be placed properly in compliance with the design details & engineers approval obtained prior to the closure of the forms. profile & plumb. At the end of the pour. Water bar shall be inserted in all vertical positions duly welded using cross as well as Tees wherever required. the sides of the forms shall be fixed. Side supports shall be struck only after 48 hours. Pour shall be carried out in layers not exceeding 450 mm so that vibrator nozzles penetrates internally. A platform shall be built on top for the workers safe access & working to allow for comfortable & safe circulatory movement for the crew. The tie rods sleeved in shall be fastened properly.co. the sides of the forms shall be fixed. According to the formwork vendor’s design. Programme shall be charted out for pouring about 75 cum in one go. All supports as shown on the details shall be provided. design. QC inspection shall be conducted & engineer’s approval obtained. It shall ensured that the erected forms are in true alignment & plumb. Scaffolding shall be erected for accessing the workers to fix the rebars & erect the formworks. At the end of the pour. The fixing arrangements shall be fastened properly.5044. the top surface shall be properly finish rough & covered with saturated Hessian & polythene Page 377 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. The concrete pouring chute pipe shall be inserted into the form so that the net drop of concrete is not more than 2 m. In this case also. polythene membrane shall be spread over the placed & fixed rebars for protection from humidity. Columns About 75 cum in one go for 40 columns. All supports as shown on the details shall be provided. QC inspection shall be conducted & engineer’s approval obtained. It shall be ensured that the erected forms are in true alignment. Pour shall be carried out in layers not exceeding 450 mm so that vibrator nozzles penetrates internally. polythene membrane shall be spread over the placed & fixed rebars for protection from humidity. the top surface shall be properly floated & either curing compound instantly sprayed or covered with polythene sheet. This pour shall consume about 5 hours. The concrete pouring chute pipe shall be inserted into the form so that the net drop of concrete is not more than 2 m. A platform shall be built on top for the workers safe access & working. At the end of the every day work. At the end of the every day work.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . According to the formwork vendor’s design. o 4093 c d Rebars shall be placed properly in compliance with the design details & engineers approval obtained prior to the closure of the forms. This pour shall consume about 8 hours. Permanent bars shall also be inserted as shown on the vendor’s design.

The columns have to carry cantilevered steps & one landing Stages Page 378 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. This pour shall consume about 5 hours.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . It shall ensured that the erected forms are in true alignment & plumb. A platform shall be built on top for the workers safe access & working to allow for comfortable & safe circulatory movement for the crew. Inlet chamber Base slab of this chamber is at a lower level & 1 m thick. Rebars shall be placed properly in compliance with the design details & engineers approval obtained prior to the closure of the forms. This shall be separately carried out in two stages. It also has grade level suspended slab. Pour shall be carried out in layers not exceeding 450 mm so that vibrator nozzles penetrates internally. The fixing arrangements shall be fastened properly. o 4093 c d sheet. polythene membrane shall be spread over the placed & fixed rebars for protection from humidity. At the end of the pour. Baffle walls Each pour about 75 cum. Side supports shall be struck only after 48 hours. Scaffolding shall be erected for accessing the workers to fix the rebars & erect the formworks for the upright wall. Access stairs to roof 2 numbers These stair structures are to be constructed on 3 columns on isolated footings. the top surface shall be properly floated & either curing compound instantly sprayed or covered with polythene sheet.2 m thick. In this case also. QC inspection shall be conducted & engineer’s approval obtained. Outlet chamber This has a basement sump in stepped profile. At the end of the every day work. This shall be separately carried out in three stages.co. Continuous curing shall be conducted thereafter.5044. Base slab of this chamber is at a lower level & 1. According to the formwork vendor’s design. the sides of the forms shall be fixed. Side supports shall be struck only after 48 hours. It also has walls & intermediate cantilever structure to be connected to the roof suspended slab. All supports as shown on the details shall be provided. The concrete pouring chute pipe shall be inserted into the form so that the net drop of concrete is not more than 2 m. Programme shall be charted out for pouring about 75 cum in one go.

blinding. shall be placed in & approved. The following quality checks shall be conducted prior to pouring is commenced Slab alignment  Levels  Profile of the column head / drop heads  Alignment of the up stands & verticality  Re-bars placement as well as locations & centering  Proper fixing of concrete spacers  All inserts or services fixes if so required. At the end of the every day work. (all shall be carried out comprehensively according to conventional trade practices) Suspended Slab Half portion in one go about 1400 cum. Keeping a speed of 10 minutes for each truck. pouring etc.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . The location of the movement joints shall prepared so that 50 mm thick joint filler is fixed in position correctly as well as supported to remain so during concrete pouring. o 4093 c d Construction of footings shall be carried out comprehensively according to conventional trade practices.  During concrete delivery slump. polythene membrane shall be spread over the placed & fixed rebars for protection from humidity. Preparation & erection of forms shall be done following all approved details.5044. All block outs for the openings shall be prepared to the defined locations & properly anchored to remain in position.  Certification of the supporting system by the form vendor engineer  All access routes shall be properly tagged & certified by safety officer. minimum 2 pumps shall be required for continuous placement of concrete & 1 pump to remain standby. 60 cum each Page 379 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. steel fixing. temperature. Rebar placement shall be done to the details & the spacers provided accordingly. Preparatory works shall be similar to as defined in the foregoing excavation. In one go half portion of the slab is intended to be poured as shown on drawing. air voids tests etc shall be recorded.co.  It shall be ensured that no rebar is susceptible to any possible displacement any time or a possibility to correction must exist during pour. This is a flat structure transferring loads on the column heads. Construction of waist slab & steps shall be carried out comprehensively according to conventional trade practices. The forms for the up stands shall also be erected for monolithic pour with slab concrete for which the fixing arrangements be made accordingly. For pour. formwork. Construction of columns shall be carried out comprehensively according to conventional trade practices. The arrangement of the supporting system shall be strictly adhered to vendor’s instructions as shown on the attached drawing.

Striking of the forms shall be carried out only after 8 days.5044. All other activities about the concrete protection shall be carried out for the above ground concrete on the inner as well as on the external surfaces. Adequate arrangements shall be made to keep the internal space of the reservoir well ventilated during performing the application of concrete protections. polythene layer shall be spread over the saturated Hessian to keep wet for at least 10 days continuously. Roofing After the curing is completed. The surface shall be prepared & any services plinth required shall be constructed to the details. Instant curing shall be carried out by spraying curing compound aver the area to control shrinkage cracks. After closing all openings. All operations of the backfilling of the walls up to the formation levels shall be carried out according to the standard approved methods & field samples tested Page 380 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. True profile required for the drainage shall be prepared for foam concrete over the entire area. a separate small container shall be kept which indicate the loss in level due to weather & the fall of the reservoir level corrected accordingly to reach net loss in level. o 4093 c d hour. After successful completion of the water test. water used for the test shall be pumped out to the other reservoir for testing of that reservoir in sequence.co. 2 pumps shall pour the prepared portion in 10 hours followed by another overlapping 10 hours required for the wooden finishing of the unformed surface. The fall in the water level shall be monitored regularly at defined intervals according to the code provisions. water shall be filled gradually to the required level. The loss of the water should be within prescribed limits Though not necessary in this case since the water is in cover. for the comparison of the loss by evaporation. Foam concrete shall be produced on site & laid by specialist roofing sub contractor All other roofing operations shall be carried out accordingly to the approved method statement Roof waterproofing shall be tested by flooding with water for 48 hours Any leak detected shall be made good according to the agreed procedures. Whole exercise shall be repeated for the second half of the slab. Later. after final profile & finishing the surface. Reservoir testing The structure when completed according to BS 8007 provisions water test shall be conducted to check any leakage.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Other General activities Roof handrails shall be fixed to the required locations. the whole surface shall be scabbled properly to expose the aggregate to meet the bonding requirement of foam concreting.

which now exist or which may come into effect during the course of the Work. shall be complied with by Contractor and its Sub-Contractors operating within the boundaries of PLANT. Works for the kerbstone shall be carried out. Page 381 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. centrifugal pumps to boost out water from the reservoir etc Chapter 13 Ev om t l c ue f r ni n e a l ss o r n a p n I d s i l c yi l t nut a i n a r t C n t u to C nr cs o sr ci n o t a t ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------The Environmental Guidelines & Environmental Protection Criteria (EG&EPC) for Plant Industrial City. claims. tipper trucks. Equipment Shovel. concrete vibrators. whether or not caused by negligence. Compactor. costs. Compaction shall be done for the formation of the walkway area.co. the Contractor shall assume all liabilities for environmental and human health damage of any kind arising directly or indirectly from the Work. Notwithstanding any provisions contained within the Contract.5044. Concrete pumps. in whole or in part. o 4093 c d accordingly. proceedings. damages. relating to environmental protection and management.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Excavator. Laying of the interlocking blocks shall be carried out to the given profile & levels. Contractor warrants that it shall use its best endeavours to protect and to take care of all environmental and natural resources in order to prevent environmental pollution of any kind resulting directly or indirectly from the Work performed under the Contract. Contractor shall comply with all applicable rules and regulations of all relevant agencies having jurisdiction. and Environment and Natural Reserves standards. National Environmental Protection Law. charges and expenses howsoever arising therefrom. Roller. demands. Truck mixers as & whenever required. Preparation of the walkways around shall be carried out for receiving the interlocking blocks. and shall indemnify Company / Client and hold them harmless from and against any and all losses.

discarded material. The Contractor shall reimburse Company/Client for the cost thereof provided always that the amount of any such cost may be deducted by Company / Client from any money due or becoming due to the Contractor. Contractor shall take immediate corrective action(s) to remedy any and all occurrence(s) of environmental pollution and report such incident(s) as per the environmental incident reporting requirement for PLANT.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Demobilisation may only commence upon authorization / approval of this form by Company / Client. Preventive Measures HSE&S Page 382 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo.5044. Company / Client is entitled to impose such penalty as specified in the Environmental Guidelines & Environmental Protection Criteria for Plant Industrial City (PLANT) should the Contractor fail to take the appropriate corrective action (s) or to report such incident. o 4093 c d Without relieving the Contractor of any of its obligations detailed herein or as imposed by any relevant agency. authority. of the Contractor. unspent and serviced material in an environmentally acceptable and approved manner.co. under the foregoing provisions or which is due to any act or omission. Waste Management Plan Environnemental Management Plan Spill Contingency Plan Contractor shall provide Company / Client with Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for all chemicals / materials (where applicable) it shall use or supply prior to shipment. Company/Client may take part to any degree it deems necessary. Contractor shall dispose of all waste including but not limited to packaging. or any other body having jurisdiction. Contractor shall furnish the following documents for the approval of Company/Client at least four (4) weeks prior to the commencement of the Work at the construction site. removal and remediation of any pollution or contamination which is the responsibility of the Contractor. Contractor shall complete and submit an Environmental Discharge Form (in accordance with relevant EXHIBIT) to Company / Client prior to the commencement of any demobilisation. in the control. assess its impact and/or take necessary corrective action and recover the cost involved by such action from the Contractor. In case of an environmental incident Company / Client may take action to investigate the incident. directly or indirectly.

non-process areas. Let us divide the whole plant industrial area into various zones depending on defined & expected risks. Proper arrangements must be made for all personnel to use safety devices of all kinds depending of the nature of the hazard so that all users wear preventive dressing / equipment. All equipments must be made fireproof to the extent possible. No work should be allowed without granting of such permits. o 4093 c d Health. explosive zone. This is the only major potential source leading the plant to major fire as well as explosion hazards. The lost gases or other products or bye products have the potential to spread into the environment air consequently transferring fire possibility a detailed study of that should be made to find a resolution to adopt for suppression measures. The present scope of this book does not allow that to elaborate but informatively included. Every risk must be analysed as any miscalculation may lead to intensive fire breakout resulting in losses of billions of dollars as well as severe human loss. There should be a session of brain storming to find out the causes & solutions for meeting any hazard that may crop in during the operational life of the project. Environmental & Security Standard Procedures / Hazard Control This procedure is applicable to all projects construction site activities. Preventive Maintenance is of utmost significance for such an industrial project that must be kept in full considerations while conceptualizing any scheme. Process area. Safety. administrative zone. Hot as well as cold works areas are defined explicitly for the purpose of preventive adaptation as well as for issuing permits to work within & without plant for the engineering construction works in future.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h .co. Safe procedure must be defined for such activities.5044. All arrangements of fire suppression must be made. Purpose To establish a procedure for systematically identifying all the hazards / risks associated with a task or job and to implement appropriate control measures. Page 383 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. There are nowadays several methods given in industrial safety as well as loss prevention methods for the disaster management to prevent such mishaps. environment unsafe zone etc Process area can be confined to the real trains zone which is a pure chemical product engineering portion comprising of all vessels involving oil & its storage. secured zone. The building contained in such zone must be made blast resistant.

All classes of fire suppression arrangement must be kept fully functional at the relevant hazard locations clearly defined to the personnel involved & competent fire fighting team made available. the inventories & the critical equipment. This is actually a very high potential source of fire & can cause heavy losses to industry as well as to humans. In case of fire disaster. As far as adverse effects during an occurrence of earthquake are concerned.co. o 4093 c d Non process areas should be located distant enough say anything far up to 700 m from the real trains so as the effects are not relocated to this zone that requires only blast resilience structures. Assembly points be clearly defined at various location that allow following fire alarm to assemble & await further directions from the wardens. No unauthorized person be allowed within the corridors. The fire protection installations shall include all required systems and equipment for the adequate protection of the process and utilities areas. Water Fire extinguishing. exposure protection and cooling. Immediate medical attendants & ambulance should be installed. The design and engineering of the fire-fighting systems shall consider the plant layout. Foam Securing and Page 384 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. F P te tio ire ro c n Introduction The Contractor shall design the fire protection system based on this specification. ignition prevention and prevention of vapor cloud formation. Storage area particularly of oil raw material must be provided full protection from firing & explosion viewpoint. roads & many other components of the plant. traffic. Accordingly fire suppression & blast control provisions be applied to the constructions as well as precautionary measures be defined for the personnel. fire intensity control. Accordingly the provisions be given for the disaster management.5044.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . The piping routes must be defined corridors with proper fire protection & guards. Fire Hazard Analysis study The design of the fire-fighting systems shall consider the effectiveness of the individual agents. Circulatory areas should be defined in between the process & non-process areas that cannot be definitely delineated but shall carry piping. the isolation philosophy. adequately effective arrangements must be available fully all times to vacate the personnel as soon as possible from the assembly points & further off the plant to safer locations. Regular training & mock-ups drills must be conducted to keep the involved humans alert to meet any unforeseen. The most important aspect is the control from fire everywhere for which regular mockups should be conducted.

Inergen may be used where an electrically non-conductive medium is required. Preservation and Export Packing. Galvanising. Technical Specifications for Piping Systems. CO2 gas Fire extinguishing by means of oxygen reduction inside enclosures. General Piping Process and Utility Design. IG-541 is the name of Inergen in NFPA 2001. Fire proofing. Combustion Gas Turbines. Codes And Standards It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to be. Inert gases ‘Inergen’ is one product recognised as environmentally safe to be used for Halon. Fire and Gas Detection System. In manned areas. Argon and CO2. Safety Page 385 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . form shall be used as a minimum.  National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)  NFPA 10 Portable fire extinguishers  NFPA 11 Low-Expansion Foam  NFPA 11C Mobile foam apparatus  NFPA 12 Carbon Dioxide Extinguishing System  NFPA 13 Installation of Sprinkler System  NFPA 15 Water Spray Fixed Systems  NFPA 20 Installation of Centrifugal Fire Pumps  NFPA 24 Private Fire Mains  NFPA 30 Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code  NFPA 70 National Electric Code  NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code  NFPA 850 Electric Generating Plants  NFPA 2001 Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing System Reference Documents Project Specifications: Architectural Design Basis. Dry Chemical Powder Control and extinguishing of small flammable liquid spill fires and gas-flash fires. Inergen systems are designed and installed complying NFPA-2001. System Cables. Painting. Control and Earthling Cables. Fireproofing. Power. It is composed of naturally occurring gases Nitrogen. Electrical Design Guidelines. isolation with bunding and catchment shall also considered.co. knowledgeable of the requirements of the relevant International Codes and Standards. CCTV Philosophy. layout. The following latest edition codes and standards to the extent specified herein. Design and Installation of Glass-Fibre Reinforced Epoxy and Polyester Piping. Layout and Drawing. Building Management Systems. o 4093 c d extinguishing of spill fires in the plant. The use of Inergen is subject to ‘room integrity overpressure testing’.5044. a qualified pre-alarm status must be in place.

Shop Inspection and Test Requirements . the related data sheets. fire detection equipment. Narrative Specification. hydrants.co. Criticality Rating Calculation Method . gas detection equipment and alarm system equipment including control panels that shall be listed in project specification. In case of conflict. Project Drawings: Fire Protection General Plant. General building protection (manual call points. mains. An automatic CO2 fire suppression system inside gas turbine enclosures. Quality Assurance and Quality Control Quality Management System shall comply with the applicable requirement of ISO 9001. smoke and gas detection and alarm systems in process areas. hose reels. The purpose of the description herein is to determine factory inspection and testing requirements for fire protection equipment. Fire Water Diesel Pump Document Precedence The Contractor shall notify the Company of any apparent conflict between this specification. o 4093 c d Equipment Specification .5044. Fire. Portable extinguishers (dry chemical powder. Safety and Environmental Philosophy . monitors. Health. The level of shop inspection and test requirements is defined.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Industry Codes and Standards. Concession requests require Company's review / approval prior to the proposed technical changes being implemented. Specification Deviation / Concession Control The Contractor only through Concession Request format shall seek any technical deviations to this specification and its attachments. Description The fire protection and extinguishing system shall include (but not be limited to): Water supply and distribution system including pumps. hose reel stations and fire point shelters. Water spray systems for process equipment. the order of precedence shall be: Data Sheet(s). Automatic fire suppression systems protecting vital equipment inside buildings. Resolution and / or interpretation precedence shall be obtained from the Company in writing before proceeding with the design / manufacture. Project Specifications and Standards. Technical changes implemented prior to Company approval shall be subject to rejection. and portable fire-extinguishers) Fire Training Facility Page 386 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. carbon dioxide and water) and other movables. the Codes and Standards and any other specifications noted herein. hose boxes.

Fire protection shall mainly be provided by automatically and manually operated fixed-installed systems in conjunction with portable and mobile firefighting equipment.co. within an operational complex. Process and equipment design shall be assumed as following good engineering practices such as sufficient spacing of equipment. relieving system. For example. A fire within the plant shall be controlled or extinguished by the plant fire brigade using plant fire engines and plant fire-fighting equipment and devices.5044. Some equipment shall be protected with water spray systems to remain in operation until the fire brigade arrives to determine the appropriate method of extinguishing attack. incorporation of emergency shutdown system. Design of the fire-fighting system shall be based on the assumption that no fire-fighting equipment and no manpower for fighting fires from outside the plant shall be available in case of a fire. it is not always feasible to achieve complete separation of equipment. additional precautionary measures for fire protection shall be evaluated and submitted for Company approval. Equipment arrangement and distances between fire-hazardous equipment shall be set so that in the event of a fire. which require a minimum number of fire fighters. drainage systems and other special safety considerations for the individual process requirements. The quantity of water required for fire protection shall be based on that is required to control and possibly extinguish one major fire situation at a time under the following conditions: Operation of deluge Page 387 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. the updraft associated with air-cooled heat exchangers may cause the fire to spread. This applies particularly to those areas where a chimney effect may occur. the possibilities for escalation are minimized. Access shall be provided for fire fighting particularly for equipment handling flammable liquefied gases or flammable products at or above auto-ignition temperature and the seal / luboil units of rotating equipment. Also. to avoid risk to life and to minimize material damage until the source of hazard has been isolated or consumed. Consequently. o 4093 c d The Basis Of Fire Protection The basic objectives for fire protection is to limit or prevent the escalation of a fire. Requirements Fire prevention and protection measures shall be considered during all stages of plant design.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . however. The philosophy for designing the fire protection facilities is to utilize the automatic systems and the mobile equipment. a minor fire at a pump may affect overhead equipment causing the fire to rapidly develop.

Hose boxes and fire points containing portable fire-fighting equipment to be located at strategic points adjacent to hazardous areas.co. Portable fire extinguishers shall be available in those locations where rapid intervention with a relatively small fire extinguisher may prevent a small fire from escalating.g. The required portable equipment and its location shall be indicated in Fire hazard analysis which must be performed as part of detailed design to address each potential fire Page 388 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Indication panels shall be provided in the control room and fire station to enable operators to take appropriate action and to indicate if a fire protection system has been activated. which shall determine the “worst case scenario”. The restricted zones concept shall be used to define preventive ignition measures to be taken into account for the items of equipment located inside a restricted zone. activate fire protection systems or raise an alarm for action to be taken. Television cameras with monitoring systems shall be installed to overlook general plant areas enabling operators to take appropriate action when fire. Manual call point systems of the 'break glass' type shall also be installed throughout the plant in selected positions to raise an alarm. smoke or gas is detected. Detection systems shall be installed in all the relevant areas (process units and buildings) to detect fire. Note: For large complex units the quantity of water required for fire protection shall be based on the Fire Hazard Analysis study and the QRA. Audible alarms and beacons shall be installed in process units which shall automatically actuate on leakage of gas. o 4093 c d systems in the zone on fire (or at least 1 monitor). vessels. heaters and other process equipment when subjected to severe temperature generated by a liquid hydrocarbon or gas fire. shutting down specified electrical equipment in explosive atmospheres.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Around hydrocarbon production facilities. e.5044. or on the outbreak of a fire. These zones are called Restricted Zones. Passive fire protection shall be installed wherever needed on steel supports. zones or spaces shall be defined in which a gas cloud with gas concentration likely to be above the lower flammability limit (LFL) be present when a major gas or vapor leakage occurs. These shall where required. Operation of deluge systems of 2 adjacent zones if (or at least 2 monitors) and 2 hydrants (or 2 monitors). Positive pressure shall be maintained in the substations and a fire protection clean agent system installed to protect the equipment against damage due to fire. towers. Cables for ESD solenoid valves shall be fireproofed and preferably laid in separate trays. smoke and gas.

Flash points. Lights shall have different colors for different types of alarms. Detection. Necessary fire alarm signals shall be repeated on DCS through serial interface and displayed on control room DCS consoles. Exposure to adjacent combustion. The system shall consist of but not be limited to: Fully intelligent system cabinets and their associated field interface cabinets located within the IES (instrument equipment shelters) and various buildings. Each system cabinet shall incorporate a display matrix for the areas it covers. These lights shall be located in the same general areas as the detectors. Ignition sources.co. Fire and gas detection system The fire and gas detection systems shall be designed complying with Design Specification. Chemicals involved.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . alarm. Fire and gas detectors are part of fire and gas system. Flammable liquids. o 4093 c d hazard This analysis should consider the following aspects: The type of combustibles. Combustible liquids. Ladders may be used. Fire load of the hazard. All fire alarm systems shall have local panels with display matrix in respective buildings. Page 389 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. A maintenance console shall provide diagnostic facilities for the system.5044. The systems shall be used to provide monitoring and control of the plant. Detectors for areas such as compressor shelters should be accessible from crane platforms. Alarm colors (lights) provided in the plant area shall be the same on the matrix panel and CRT graphics and should be as follows: Blue for flammable gas detectors Red for fire detectors and manual call points Orange for toxic gas detectors Maintenance shall be considered for the detector location. Alarm lights and audible alarms shall be provided in the plant for the various systems. automatic control and monitoring systems process area The early detection of a developing fire and an early warning to operational and firefighting personnel form an important aspect in the basic concept of fire protection. Alarm and maintenance printers There shall be a separate Fire & Gas network connecting the fire and gas alarm system of all buildings and the plant. The system shall incorporate data acquisition and printer facilities. Temperature of combustibles.

The signal shall be sent via the data highway to the fire and gas detection system in the fire station and control room it shall initiate: An audible and visual alarm in the Control Room. fire station. it shall be added: A common audible alarm and a common visual alarm (blue flashing light) in the concerned process plant area. fire station. inside the entrance to ventilation intakes and on manifolds and hydrocarbon valves to be defined by Company The type of flammable gas detectors shall be such that concentrate of flammable gas be measured and displayed in the range of 0 to 100 % lower flammability limit (LFL). The signal from the flammable gas detectors shall be sent to Instrument Equipment Shelters (IES) and then to the Control Room (CR). o 4093 c d Flammable gas detection Flammable gas detection in open areas A flammable gas detection system shall be furnished. maintenance workstation When 25 % LFL is reached. The CR shall send a signal to a panel in the fire station. each detector shall give: An individual visual alarm (blue flashing light) on the concerned matrix panel showing the location of gas detection and the system buzzer shall actuate. Detectors shall be provided in the following locations: on gas compressor seals and on seals for pumps which handle flammable liquids. The first alarm shall sound at about 10 % of the lower flammability limit (LFL).5044. Flammable gas detectors shall alarm at multiple points. An audible and visual alarm in the Control Room. Flammable gas detection in the buildings The buildings are divided in 2 categories as follows: The process buildings:  Instrument Equipment Shelter (IES))  Electrical Substation (SS) Page 390 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Around process units handling high-pressure flammable gases (greater than 20 barg). maintenance workstation & concerned area operator shelter Flammable gas detectors for hydrocarbon gases shall be located on two criteria General area coverage detectors shall be as follows: Between process units handling flammable gases and liquids and process units having open flames. The sensor system shall be designed to alarm again at 25% of LFL. Specific locations based on past industry experience. When 10 % LFL is reached.co.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h .

each detector shall give: An individual visual alarm (bleu flashing light) on the concerned matrix panel showing the location of gas detection. An audible and visual alarm in the fire station. An audible and visual alarm in the maintenance workstation An audible and visual alarm in the concerned area operator shelter The ventilation system shall be stopped and dampers closed except for H2 detection in Page 391 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. An audible and visual alarm in the maintenance workstation When 2 out of 3 HC detectors or 1 out of 1 H2 detector reach 25% LFL.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h .5044. A hydrogen (H2) gas detector shall be provided in battery rooms of substations and IES where seal batteries are used.co. An audible and visual alarm in the control room. An audible and visual alarm (blue flashing light) at the entrance and in the concerned building. An audible and visual alarm in the fire station. o 4093 c d         Operator Maintenance Shelter (ZM) Sulphur Weigh station Building (WS) Sulphur Weigh station Truck Driver Building (J2) Process Chemical Shed (PCS) Compressor Shelter (CPS) Smoke room (SM) Fire Point Shelter (FPS) Analyser shelter The non-process buildings:  Laboratory  Storage building  Chemical store  Cooled chemical store  Maintenance building  Fire station  Gate Houses Process buildings (except analyser shelter) Three flammable gas detectors shall be provided at the air intake of HVAC system (if any). When 10 % of LFL for flammable gas detector or H2 detector is reached. the following actions shall be added: An audible and visual alarm in the Control Room.

When one detector reaches 10 % of LFL.co. An audible and visual alarm in the maintenance workstation Shutdown of sockets located inside Analyzer shelter. An individual visual alarm (blue flashing light) on the concerned matrix panel showing the location of gas detection. Cut-off power supply of Operator maintenance shelter (for flammable gas detection at the air intake of Operator maintenance shelter) Each H2 detector located inside a battery room shall cut off the battery feeder. it shall give: A general audible alarm in the IES associated with the concerned plant area. An audible and visual alarm in the fire station. the following actions shall be added: A general audible alarm in the IES associated with the concerned plant area. An audible and visual alarm in the fire station. An audible and visual alarm (blue flashing light) in the concerned process area An audible and visual alarm (blue flashing light) in the concerned process area operator shelter Non process building Two flammable gas detectors shall be provided at the air intake of new HVAC system (if any) depending on detection philosophy. When 25 % of LFL is reached by one detector. Page 392 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. An audible and visual alarm in the control room. o 4093 c d battery room.5044. the following action shall be added: The ventilation system shall be stopped and dampers closed. it shall give: An individual visual alarm on the concerned control or matrix panel showing the location of gas detection and the system buzzer shall be activated. One flammable gas detector shall be installed inside the analyser. An audible and visual alarm in the control room. An audible and visual alarm in the maintenance workstation Shutdown of sockets located inside Analyzer shelter. A visual alarm in the analyser shelter. An individual visual alarm (blue flashing light) on the concerned matrix panel showing the location of gas detection.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . A visual alarm in the analyser shelter. Analyser shelter Two flammable gas detectors shall be provided at each air intake of HVAC system. If 2 out of 2 detectors reach 25% LFL. When one detector reaches 10% LFL.

o 4093 c d An audible and visual (blue flashing light) alarm (if any) at the entrance and in the concerned building. An audible and visual alarm in the Fire Station.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h .co. For the flammable gas detection (distribution and installation) for packages refer to “Instruments furnished with packages” When 10% LFL is reached. the following actions shall be added: A common audible alarm and a common visual alarm (blue flashing light) in the concerned process plant area. The signal from the detectors shall be sent to IES and then to the CR. An audible and visual alarm in the control room. An audible and visual alarm in the maintenance workstation When 2 out of 2 detectors reach 25% LFL. An individual visual alarm (blue flashing light) on the concerned matrix panel. An indication in the fire station. The CR shall send a signal to a panel in the fire station. the following actions shall be added: An indication in the control room. An audible and visual alarm in the maintenance workstation When 25% LFL is reached. An audible and visual alarm in the fire station. The signal shall be sent via the data highway to the fire and gas detection system in the fire station and control room to initiate: An audible and visual alarm in the Control Room. it shall be added: An audible and visual alarm in the Control Room. Close ventilation dampers and shutdown ventilation fans Isolate power supply to all equipment not suitable for zone 1 Toxic gas detection A toxic gas detection system shall be furnished. Page 393 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. each detector shall give: A general audible alarm in the IES and substations associated with the concerned plant area.5044. An audible and visual alarm in the maintenance workstation When two out of two detectors reach 25% LFL. An audible and visual alarm in the maintenance workstation The ventilation system shall be stopped and dampers closed Flammable gas detection for packages Three flammable gas detectors shall be located at each air duct inlet of the package. Shutdown of the machine. An audible and visual alarm in the Fire Station.

An audible and visual alarm in the fire station. Fire Protection Design Basis When 10 ppm is reached. On areas of control valves handling gases that have a significant percentage of H2S. each detector shall give: A general audible alarm in the IES associated with the plant area concerned and operator shelter An individual visual alarm (orange flashing light) on the concerned matrix panel showing the location of gas detection. It shall initiate: A common audible alarm and a common visual alarm (orange flashing light) in the concerned process plant area. An audible and visual alarm in the Control Room. The second alarm shall be set at 20 ppm. The signal shall be sent via the data highway to the fire and gas detection system in the fire station. An audible and visual alarm in the maintenance workstation H2S Gas Detection In buildings Process buildings (except analyser shelter) Page 394 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. An audible and visual alarm in the fire station. the following alarms shall be added: A common audible alarm and a common visual alarm (orange flashing light) in the concerned process plant area.co. An audible and visual alarm in the Control Room. control room and maintenance workstation. An audible and visual alarm in the maintenance workstation When 20 ppm is reached.5044.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . o 4093 c d H2S gas detection in open areas H2S detectors shall be located on two criteria: General coverage detectors shall be as follows: Between the flares Inside area handling substantial quantities of H2S and containing operating personnel Specific location detectors shall be as follows: On seals of gas compressors handling H2S On seals of pumps handling fluids containing H2S. On sulphur Sumps Concentrations of H2S gas shall be measured and displayed over the selectable range of 0-50 ppm. The first alarm point shall be set at 10 parts per million (ppm volume) H2S.

An audible and visual alarm in the maintenance workstation An audible and visual alarm (orange flashing light) in the concerned process area. the following actions shall be added: An audible and visual alarm in the control room. the ventilation system shall be stopped and dampers closed. When 10 ppm of H2S is reached.5044. An individual visual alarm (orange flashing light) on the concerned matrix panel showing the location of gas detection. An audible and visual alarm in the maintenance workstation The ventilation system shall be stopped and dampers closed. each detector shall give: A general audible alarm in the IES associated with the concerned building. An audible and visual alarm in the control room. An audible and visual alarm (orange flashing light) in the concerned process area.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . An audible and visual alarm in the fire station. An audible and visual alarm in the maintenance workstation When one detector reaches 20 ppm. An audible and visual alarm in the fire station. A visual alarm (orange flashing light) in the analyser shelter. An audible and visual alarm in the control room. An audible and visual alarm in the maintenance workstation When 1 out of 2 detectors reach 20 ppm. one H2S detector shall be provided inside analyser shelter. An audible and visual alarm in the fire station. it shall give: A general audible alarm in the IES associated with the concerned plant area. When one detector reaches 10 ppm. An audible and visual alarm (orange flashing light) at the entrance to and in the concerned building.co. o 4093 c d Two H2S detectors shall be provided at the air intake of HVAC system (if any). the following actions shall be added: An audible and visual alarm in the control room. Analyser shelter One H2S detector shall be provided at each air intake of HVAC system. An individual visual alarm (orange flashing light) on the concerned matrix panel showing the location of gas detection. In units containing H2S. If the concerned detector is located at HVAC air intake. Non process buildings Two H2S detectors shall be provided at the air intake of new HVAC system (if any) Page 395 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. An audible and visual alarm in the fire station.

SO2 detectors shall be provided in sulphur handling units for liquid sulphur pumps.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . it shall give: An individual visual alarm on the concerned control or matrix panel showing the location of gas detection. sulphur sump.5044. each detector shall give: A general audible alarm in the IES associated with the concerned plant area. sulphur plant incinerators. When one detector reaches 10 ppm. An audible and visual alarm in the maintenance workstation The ventilation system shall be stopped and dampers closed. An audible and visual alarm in the control room An audible and visual alarm in the maintenance workstation An audible and visual alarm in the fire station. Cl2 Detection Cl2 Detectors shall be provided to chlorine packages and connected to the Fire & Gas Page 396 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. reaction furnaces. An audible and visual (orange flashing light) alarm (if any) at the entrance to and in the concerned building An audible and visual alarm in the control room. An audible and visual (orange flashing light) alarm (if any) at the entrance to and in the concerned building An audible and visual alarm in the control room.co. An individual visual alarm (red flashing light) on the concerned matrix panel showing the location of gas detection. Concentration of SO2 gas shall be measured and displayed over the selectable range of 0-20 ppm. An audible and visual alarm in the fire station. An audible and visual alarm in the fire station. When 3 ppm is reached. A common audible alarm and a common visual alarm (red flashing light) in sulphur handling units. o 4093 c d depending on detection philosophy. the following actions shall be added An individual visual alarm on the concerned control or matrix panel showing the location of gas detection. SO2 detection SO2 detectors shall be used in sulphur handling units as fire detectors: SO2 is a product of sulphur combustion. An audible and visual alarm in the maintenance workstation When 1 out of 2 detectors reach 20 ppm.

An individual visible alarm (red flashing light) on the matrix panel. Manual call points connected to Fire and Gas system shall be clearly recognized. preferable at or near lampposts. o 4093 c d system. When operated. Also manual call points shall be located at the emergency exit point from process areas (usually the normal entrance and exit). An audible and visual alarm in the fire station. manual call points and egress gate points shall give: A general audible alarm in the building or IES associated with the concerned plant area. An audible and visual alarm in the maintenance workstation Fire detection Fire detection in open area Page 397 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Inside the plant and positioned: At the exit doors of IES Along logical escape routes At each exit door of electrical substation At each exit door of operator shelter Near sulphur loading bay. provided with signs and located as follows: Along roads in the plant area at intervals not exceeding 50 m.5044.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Closed circuit television monitoring systems A closed circuit television system shall be supplied. it shall initiate: An audible and visual alarm in the Control Room. Closed circuit television and monitoring system shall be in accordance with Manual call / egress gate points A system of manual call points and egress gate points for initiating a fire alarm shall be provided as part of the plant fire protection system. A general audible and visible (red flashing light) alarm in the concerned process plant area. at each egress gate outside plant and at each egress gate for sulphur truck road. Egress gate points (box containing key for plant fence door) shall be located as follows: At each egress gate inside plant When there is a double fence for plant and for sulphur truck road.co. The operation of the manual call points and egress gate points shall be sent via the data highway to the Fire and Gas Detection System in the fire station and control room.

In case of Low air pressure in the fusible loop. battery rooms. WCs. battery rooms of IES and operator shelters. UPS rooms of IES.co. this transmitter shall send a signal to the plant DCS. A High water pressure alarm in the control room An audible and visual alarm in the fire station. The PSL shall give: A visual alarm (red flashing light) on the matrix panel An Air low-pressure alarm in the control room An audible and visual alarm in the fire station An audible and visual alarm in the maintenance workstation An audible and visual alarm in the concerned process area The PSH shall give: A general audible alarm in the concerned IES. Heat detectors shall be installed in offices. power generation enclosures and diesel driven engines enclosures. o 4093 c d Fusible plug detectors shall be installed on equipment protected by a fixed deluge system. If executive action is not required.5044. Smoke detectors ionization type shall be installed in building corridors. These shall activate the concerned deluge system. A general audible alarm in the IES associated An audible and visual alarm (red flashing light) at the entrance to and in the concerned Page 398 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. only one loop shall be installed with a maximum of 6 detectors per loop in case the system is not addressable. An audible and visual alarm in the maintenance workstation A common audible alarm and a common visual alarm (red flashing light) in the concerned process plant area. A pressure transmitter shall be added on deluge system fusible loops.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . A visual alarm (red flashing light) on the matrix panel. smoking areas. control room of IES. Fire detection in the buildings Optical smoke detectors and heat detectors rate of rise type shall be used. HVAC rooms of IES and substations. switchgear room of electrical substation. voting is required based on two separated loops with a maximum of 6 detectors per loop in case the system is not addressable. When executive action is expected. The fire detection by one detector on one loop shall give: A visual alarm (red flashing light) on the matrix panel in IES associated with the concerned building with the system buzzer. The pressure drop in the fusible loop shall be detected by one low-pressure switch (PSL) and the firewater flow rate in the deluge pipe shall be detected by one high-pressure switch (PSH).

co. and all the smoke detectors in the floor void to be in another separate loops i. one detector per 50 m² with a maximum of 6 detectors per loop shall be provided. When any detector is activated. o 4093 c d building An audible and visual alarm in the control room An audible and visual alarm in the fire station. Where there is an executive action. When installed for alarm only. An audible and visual alarm in the maintenance workstation Stop ventilation system and close fire dampers of the concerned building Release after an adjustable ‘time delay’ the automatic extinguishing system allocated to the concerned loops (when applicable). An audible and visual alarm in the maintenance workstation Page 399 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Which on separate loops. A remote indicator shall be provided for each detector installed in the ceiling and the floor. 2 detectors shall be installed per 50 m² (as per BS 7273). not to club detectors at ceiling void and detectors from floor void in the same loop. the following alarm shall be initiated: A general audible alarm in the IES associated with the concerned plant area.e. Fire detection for packages For the flammable gas detection (distribution and installation) for packages refer to “Instruments furnished with packages” At least two rates of rise heat detectors shall be optimally located in each enclosure compartment of the packages. to include all the smoke detectors in the ceiling void to be in separate loops. The smoke and heat detectors in the enclosed rooms shall be looped separately i. The signal shall be sent via the data high way to the Fire and Gas Detection system in the fire station and control room. it shall initiate: An audible and visual alarm in the fire station.e.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . An audible and visual alarm in the maintenance workstation The fire detection by two detectors on two separate loops shall give the following additional actions: A general audible alarm in the IES associated An audible and visual alarm (red flashing light) at the entrance to and in the concerned building An audible and visual alarm in the control room An audible and visual alarm in the fire station.5044.

An audible and visual alarm in the Control Room An audible and visual alarm in the Fire Station An audible and visual alarm in the maintenance workstation Shutdown and electrical isolation of the machine. Stop fuel supply (when applicable) Shut-down of the ventilation system and closure of the fire dampers (when applicable) Release after an adjustable time delay of the CO2 extinguishing system (30 sec). Firewater should not be used for any other purpose. If necessary. One detector obtains executive action or one loop (no voting by two separated loops).co. fire detectors shall be relocated or recovered. An audible and visual alarm in the main control room An audible and visual alarm in the in fire station An audible and visual alarm in the maintenance workstation The ventilation HVAC system shall be stopped and dampers closed.5044. Fire detection in Non process buildings Fire detection philosophy is fitted to installation. the following alarms and actions shall in addition be activated: A common audible alarm and a common visual alarm (red flashing light) in the concerned plant area. the fire control panel shall be provided. o 4093 c d When two detectors are activated. Basis For A Fire Protection Water System Firewater shall be readily available at all the appropriate locations. at the required pressure and flow. Fire water rate Fire water rate design criteria The quantity of water required for fire protection shall be calculated based upon the criteria of section Firewater ring main system Page 400 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. For each building.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . The fire detection by one detector or one loop shall give: An individual visual alarm on the concerned control or matrix panel associated with the concerned building An audible and visual (red flashing light) alarm (if any) at the entrance and in the concerned building.

and utilities. Hydrants shall be as per ones with 4 x 2 1/2 outlets.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . monitors. hydrants shall be provided with a top mounted water monitor. the number of isolation valves shall be the number of branches minus one. The maximum allowable velocity in the system is 3. Firewater mains shall be installed underground in order to provide a safe and secure system. The minimum size of fire water main shall be 8”(200 mm) The firewater mains shall be provided with full bore valve-flushing connections so that all sections and dead ends can be properly flushed out. A pressure transmitter shall be installed on the main header every 500m and connected to the Plant fire Alarm System. o 4093 c d Firewater ring mains of the required capacity shall be installed to surround all processing units. The valves shall be butterfly / gate valves with position indicators. In the process areas. At each main tee. These sections shall be selected so that the number of consumers is not more than 6. Normally.1 m. Depth of cover shall not be less than 1. these units shall also be bounded by service roads. The flushing connections shall be sized for a fluid velocity in the relevant piping of not less than 80% of the velocity under normal design conditions. The firewater mains network pipe sizes shall be calculated using an approved computer program.installation and material selection Piping materials shall conform to Design Specification. hose reel stations and deluge valves. each enclosed by firewater mains equipped with hydrants and block valves. Each hydrant shall have an isolation valve in addition to the hydrant valve. The firewater ring main systems shall be equipped with hydrants.co. Hydrants Firewater mains shall be provided with permanent hydrants. The complete calculation shall be based on design rates at a minimum pressure of 7 bar g at the take-off points of each appropriate section. The firewater ring main pressure shall be such that under fire conditions a pressure of 7 barg exists at the most remote location under the corresponding design flow conditions. but not less than 2 m/s. Large areas shall be sub-divided into smaller sections. Block valves shall be incorporated in the ring main system so that sections can be isolated for maintenance. located in strategic positions around utilities units / areas. and calculations made to prove that pressure drop is acceptable with a blocked section of piping in the network. workshops. loading facilities. warehouses.5 m/s. Firewater mains .5044. Page 401 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. etc.

are balanced. o 4093 c d Take-off points shall be on the side of the header. The monitor shall be able to rotate 360 degrees by means of a turret.co. Monitors shall be of such design that the hydraulic forces (jet reaction).uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Monitor shall be tested and certified by an independent authority to be approved by the Contractor. The moving parts shall be fully protected / enclosed against sand and salt spray. Larger capacity monitors require the Company approval. Monitors and nozzles shall be of materials and coatings suitable for use with seawater in outdoor weather conditions. Rotation and elevation movement lever operable. considering pressure surges when opening the upstream block (butterfly) valve. The spacing between hydrants shall not exceed the following: Around utility areas 70 m (3 length of hose) Around process unit. As a minimum the test report shall include the following data: Foot print (width x depth). The monitor shall have a capacity of at least 120 m3 / hr at 7 barg. i. provided with a guard post and concrete drainage area. lockable in any position.e. Rotation. Hydrants connected to buried lines do not require bottom drains. When monitors are in use. a total 100 degrees. setting and locking shall be easy. Monitors Firewater mains shall be provided with permanent monitors spaced note more than 50 m around processing units. and buildings or other structures. it shall be possible to leave the monitor unattended operating safely. sharp road curves. Monitors to be installed on firewater hydrants shall be located at least 15m away from protected equipment to ensure accessibility in case of a fire.5044. each monitor shall be provided with a butterfly valve accessible from grade. Min /max operating pressure to be respectively 6 /16 barg. The location shall not be less than 1. elevation and nozzle adjustment shall be done manually without gears. Elevation setting shall be from 15 degrees below to 85 degrees above the horizontal i.e. 50 m (2 length of hose) Hydrants shall be readily accessible from roads and located in such a way that possible damage by road traffic be minimized. The monitors shall comply with the following requirements: Upstream of the mounting flange. The water monitor shall have a 2-½ inch threaded end allowing easy connection of an adjustable nozzle of the constant flow fog to jet stream type. area where 80% of the total water flow hits the horizontal Page 402 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. The manufacturer shall provide a copy of the certified test report.5 m from the edge of the road shoulder and at least 12 m from road crossings.

Firewater supply Firewater supply storage shall be a volume equal to 12 hours consumption at maximum main pump flow rate. Contractor shall define the start-up logic. The complete fire water main system must be flushed with fresh water after being used for emergency purpose. Wind speed and direction. The operation of the main firewater pumps shall actuate an alarm in the control room and fire station panels indicating system pressure. The well water being saline shall serve an emergency source only. Pressure at monitor inlet flange. Hydraulic studies of the Page 403 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. clouds of combustible vapour and from collision or crash damage by vehicles. The automatic starting facilities shall be configured to allow system testing including simulation of alarm activation while the standby system remains operational. Throwing distance (trajectory) measured from nozzle exit to center of foot print. the next designated available pump shall also attempt to start if the system pressure is less than 10 barg. Flow rate. Manual stopping of each pump unit shall only be possible at the pump station. the first firewater pump shall attempt to start. that it is possible to start the pumps against an open discharge with pressure in the fire-water ring main system under non-fire conditions. at 30 seconds intervals. Thereafter. normally at 2 to 3 barg. Firewater pumps shall be electric driven with one diesel driven (backup). at the control room and at the fire station. Firewater pumping facilities Firewater shall be provided by pumps of the horizontal split case centrifugal type (the number of pumps shall be according the worst case scenario). Pumps as well as drives shall comply with the requirements of NFPA20 and applicable Design Specifications.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . o 4093 c d plane through the raised face of the mounting flange for jet and 30 degrees fog (both at 30 degrees elevation). Manual starting of each pump unit shall be possible at the pump.5044. Diameter of used hose connection. Firewater pumps are installed in a location considered to be safe from the effects of fire. The power of the drives for both main and stand-by units shall be so rated. When the pressure in the firewater ring main system drops below the minimum required static normally approximately 2. Angle between wind direction and water trajectory.co.7 barg. The system shall be protected from surge and hammering.

The following additional requirements shall also apply: The capacity of the diesel storage tank shall be such that the engine can operate on full power for at least 12 hours. an expansion dome. The tank shall be installed at a safe distance from the engine with the bottom at least 0. Hydraulic calculations shall be performed using approved software to verify that the firewater pumps capacity (flow rate and pressure) is satisfactory to achieve the required flow rate in each area at 7 bars g minimum.2 m above the suction valve of the diesel injection pump or as specified by the pump vendor. The pump discharge manifold shall be connected to the firewater ring main system by a separate pipeline with a block valve of the same size as the ring main. A ring main surge analysis shall be performed. A clutch shall not be installed between diesel engine and pump. D lu es s m e g y te s Hose reels The hose reel stations for process units shall be designed The hose reels for buildings shall be designed as the hose reel stations but without the Page 404 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. a test valve. a level gauge and a low level alarm which shall sound when the level of the diesel has reached the ‘2-hour diesel’ remaining level. The test line arrangement shall allow testing of either pump while the spare pump remains available for service. Each pump shall be connected separately to a common manifold. The firewater ring main pressure shall be such that under fire conditions a pressure of 7 barg exists at the most remote location under the corresponding design flow conditions the maximum allowable velocity in the system being 3.5 m / s. The diesel engines of the firewater pump shall meet the requirements of NFPA 20 and the applicable Design Specifications. (This shall apply for both electrical and diesel driven pumps) The response time for starting the firewater pumps and for feeding the plant area shall be measured on site for adjustment if necessary. Batteries for the diesel pump and the fire pump controllers shall be located in normally air-conditioned areas.co. a pressure gauge and a block valve with a locking device.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . The tank shall be provided with a sump. The tank shall be provided with one connection for refilling directly from diesel distribution network. o 4093 c d system shall be performed to ensure that water hammer does not occur at all expected operating conditions. The test valves shall have a common return line with a flow-metering unit.5044. The discharge line from the pump shall be fitted with a check valve.

Each box shall contain 4 fire hoses and 2 water branch pipes. in accordance with the requirements shall be available at the first line of attack and for the backing-up of fixed fire protection systems. 1 Stretcher. 3 spray / jet nozzles. gloves. For compressor handling flammable gas one extinguisher to be provided within 5 meters of the equipment at each floor level. 5 Jerry cans each contains 25 liters foam (Fluoro-protein foam FP 70 . the fire point shelters shall also be equipped with chemical resistance gears (boots.co. B and C fires shall be provided Page 405 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. 2 x 75 kg ABC wheeled dry chemical powder fire extinguishers. 1 Foam making branch pipe complete with pick-up tubes and probes. face shields and cover-alls) Fire extinguishers The extinguishers shall be positioned within process units and along walkways such that the travel distance between the extinguisher and the possible fire hazard is limited to 15 meters for process units and 30 meters for other areas. The Contractor has to determine the suitable quantities and the mode of storage. In buildings fire extinguishers shall be installed in concealed type cabinet combined with hose reel.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . 1 First Aid Box At chemical handling areas.AFFF type may be considered as an alternative). Fire / Safety point shelters A weatherproof fire point shelter shall be located near each process and utility unit at non-hazardous area duly equipped with the following: 8 fire hoses in weatherproof cabinet. Dry chemical powder cartridge type suitable for types A.5044. 2 Breathing Apparatus sets 30 min in weatherproof boxes. Hose boxes Hose boxes shall be installed at every other hydrant or monitor. Foam Compound Storage Foam compound Storage is necessary. o 4093 c d associated foam station as for process units. Portable and Mobile Fire Fighting Equipment Portable and mobile equipment.

CO2 extinguishers shall be installed close to electrical and / or electronic equipment with travel distance 6 m maximum. Breathing apparatus sets shall be kept inside weatherproof boxes (as per the one). fire point shelter. utilities unit and near transformers. fire point shelters. compressor handling flammable products and at vessels with a liquid hold up more than 1 m3. Additional BA (10%) shall be provided in fire station as back up. electrical substation and IES building. These shall be also provided on high-level walkways.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . analyzer buildings and laboratory. no water extinguishers shall be provided but only 9 kg dry powder and 5 kg CO2 extinguishers. Fire-fighting vehicles Fire Fighting vehicles and ambulance shall be provided for new plants as per Page 406 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. CO2 extinguishers shall be used for electric and / or electronic equipment fires such as switchgear houses.5044. Utility areas. o 4093 c d in process unit. Units shall also be provided in buildings. operator shelters. analyzer rooms and SCADA shelter. Fire fighting steam If necessary. utility connections from the low-pressure steam system shall be provided for steam lances with 15 m long electrically earthen hoses.co. A breathing air supply for maintenance shall be also provided Fire blankets Wall mounted Fire Blankets shall be provided and installed within Process and Utility units at strategic locations. These shall be provided at pumps. Wheeled Carbon Dioxide extinguishers shall be supplied for substations and boiler areas. For offices. IES. Substations shall be provided with Suitable first aid boxes. Steam lances should be used to smother small fires caused by leakage from equipment handling flammable products on or above auto-ignition temperature First aid boxes One first aid box each shall be installed in each operator shelter. Breathing apparatus 30 min Breathing Apparatus sets shall be located in fluids containing H2S Process. instrument equipment shelters. substations. Water hose reels each containing 11/2”diameter fire hose of maximum length 31 m shall also be installed. Wheeled ABC dry chemical powder extinguisher shall be located in fire point shelters only. connected to the fire water system.

For specific information as to the requirements for fireproofing Fire Station Fire station shall be designed as per requirements. CO2 bottles shall be equipped with pressure indicators and with weighing indicator connected to Fire and Gas System. The automatic CO2 shall meet the requirements of NFPA 850 and NFPA 12. Fire Protection Requirements Per Area Gas turbines. Fireproofing The main objective of fireproofing of steel structures is to prevent the escalation of fires to an unacceptable level providing a temporary protection until full fire-fighting capabilities can be deployed. Each system shall comprise a dedicated fire and gas detection and protection system with extensive requirements with respect to detection. All equipment shall be UL and / or FM approved or Vendor National approval. A branch from the firewater network shall run to the fire training facility. o 4093 c d requirements. visible / audible alarms. logic. Emergency generators and compressors enclosures An automatic CO2 fire suppression system shall be installed to protect the inside of gas turbine. Safety Showers And Eye Washes Safety Showers and / or Eye Washes shall be provided in chemical handling areas Fire Training Facility The fire training facility shall be located with a safety distance of 100 meters from all units.co.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Note: For large processing complexes the addition of satellite or new fire stations shall be considered (based on the minimum response time to the farthest point from the main fire station).5044. This branch shall be fitted with 2 hydrants and 2 hydrants with top mounted monitors. Judicious application of fireproofing shall delay an eventual collapse of steel structures and allow it to occur gradually depicting visible signs that provide time for isolation of the affected equipment as well as for operating and fire-fighting personnel to evacuate safely. Emergency generators and flammable gas compressor enclosures for protection against hazardous gas mixtures and fires. Inerting the enclosure by the reduction of oxygen shall suppress and extinguish the fire. delay of agent Page 407 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo.

2 dm3 / min / m2 of equipment surface. Deluge valves shall be located at least 15 m away from the Page 408 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Each deluge system shall be fed from two different separated headers and provided with drainage facilities. For the specification of monitors. General process areas Fixed-installed fire-protection and fire-fighting systems Monitors Fixed-installed.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Open automatic water spray systems shall be installed for the protection of the following equipment: All pumps handling products close to or above their auto-ignition temperature. manually adjustable and operated water monitors. manually adjustable and operated water monitors shall be positioned at strategic points around hazardous areas. Vertical vessels and columns shall be fully sprayed up to a height of approximately 15 m above the potential source of fire. Water spray systems or deluge systems. Water rate shall be 20 dm3 /min / m2 of ground surface for pumps and of equipment surface for other items. 70 and 72.5044. o 4093 c d release. area ventilation etc. For equipment installed in congested areas where escalation could occur. Water rate shall be 40 dm3 / min / m2 of ground surface. The dedicated fire and gas system shall meet the requirements of NFPA 850. a spray system shall be provided at the potential source of fire generally pumps with additional protection to cover a resultant spill fire and the facing surface areas of adjacent equipment applying water rates as given above. Note: The pump and a width of 1. All compressors handling C4 and lighter products which are not installed in enclosures and cannot be covered by fixed-installed. Water rate shall be 10. All vessels.co.5 m around the pump shall be covered by water spray. Gas turbines and compressor sets installed in the open air shall be protected by a fixedwater spray system. Items of equipment containing flammable products which are installed in locations where a chimney effect occurs in the event of a fire or pumps handling flammable products located underneath air-cooled heat exchangers or critical flanged connections. The water rate directly over the pump shall be approximately 40 dm3 / min / m2 and on the area around the pump 20 dm3 / min / m2. columns and exchangers normally holding a liquid volume of C4 and lighter products of more than 5 m3. excluding the skirt. Pumps handling C4 and lighter products.

Hose reel station Hose reel stations shall be provided in process units. It shall be mounted on a skid. Deluge system shall initiate the local fire alarm. Where relevant. Firewater shall be available close to and inside some buildings. Each automatic deluge valve system shall be provided with an air reservoir as a back up in case of instrument air failure. fire station and automatically start the main pump. Page 409 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Hose reel stations shall be equipped with 31 meter of 1-1/2”. Deluge systems spray nozzles shall have blow-off plastic caps. Hose reel stations shall be protected inside weatherproof closed cabinets. 19 mm internal bore. Portable fire fighting equipment Steam lances Low-pressure steam lances with associated utility connections shall be located proximate to pumps. Equipment replacement and its replacement value shall also be considered when making an assessment for the design of the fire protection systems. Buildings Fire protection systems shall be installed in buildings. Protection for specific buildings shall also be given. 500 # non-collapsible rubber hose and adjustable flow. Reels shall allow hose to be put into service without unwinding the reel. equipment to be protected and the particular fire hazard. combination straight-stream fog type (all brass) nozzles. The protection of a building is based on fighting the fire from both the inside and from the outside of the building. o 4093 c d protected equipment. Manifolding including an eductor shall be provided at each station to permit the use of water only or to allow the introduction of foam from a 115 liters stainless steel foam tank. The type of fire protection systems applied depends on location. Each deluge valve shall be provided with strainer and bypass connections. Two stations shall be positioned within 23 meters (walking distance) from any point within the production facilities area. Deluge system activation shall also give alarms as well as indication at both main control room. compressors handling flammable products at / above auto-ignition temperatures and in sulphur recovery units. all doors to enclosed spaces shall be provided with an instruction plate which clearly indicates what type of extinguishing agents are installed in the particular space. The protection and detection shall be normally provided in areas as defined below.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h .5044. Flushing facility for deluge valve systems shall be provided to prevent salt deposits accumulation and to prevent system piping corrosion. protected against radiant heat by a suitable protection wall and against collision by crash barriers painted in fluorescent red and white paint.co.

All equipment shall be UL and / or FM approved or Vendor National approval. Chemical shed Fire protection shall consist of 9 kg dry chemical powder fire extinguishers and hose Page 410 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. Systems and procedures shall be established to de-energize system when area is occupied. one pair from each PLC). The automatic system shall meet the requirements of NFPA 2001.5044. Inerting the enclosures shall suppress and extinguish the fire. Inergen activation signal from PLC shall be wired in duplex to reduce the malfunction (i. the Inergen gas shall be released only in the room where fire is detected and not to the whole IESs. IES except HVAC. Inergen release to different rooms in IESs shall be distinguished i. HVAC control panels shall be protected by automatic release CO2 system. Where the chances of failures are more important. Calculations shall be integrated with HVAC ventilation system design i. Manual call points shall be provided at each exit door. o 4093 c d Fire protection for building areas Instrument Equipment Shelter (IES) and Electrical Substations (SS) CO2 fire extinguishers shall be provided.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . action from one switch (manual or auto) shall not be changed from any other switch. Door switches shall be designed to inhibit overriding each others i.e.e. Only 9 kg dry powder portable extinguishers shall be installed.co. Lockout system shall be provided to all suppressant systems. An automatic Inergen fire suppression system shall be installed for protection against fires. the pressure calculations shall not exceed the limits to avoid door damage and floor tiles flying.e. Inergen bottles shall be equipped with pressure indicators. SS except HVAC. All the Inergen system shall be activated directly from the approved control panel PLC and shall not be interfaced with any separate control box.e. Manual mechanical activation of Inergen cylinders shall be provided in case of automatic activation fails. Operator shelter No hose reels shall be installed. integrity test shall be carried out and provided to Company for review. At Inergen release.

Appendix D. the FPZ is a volume which a cylinder shall have a radius of 9 m from the Potential Source of Leakage (PSL) and a height of 9 m above the Hazard Level (HL). The hydrocarbon fire is defined in U. lead to consequences beyond the property limit (including environmental damage) or endanger major equipment.co. In special cases Fireproofing is required for critical control and electric cables. Definitions Fireproofing Zones Only specific structures and equipment located within a Fire Proofing Zone (FPZ) shall be fireproofed. A FPZ shall only be applied to a plant or system with a maximum operating inventory of more than 5 metric tons of flammable product. These zones shall be identified early in the detailed engineering phase of the Project For liquid pool fires. The extent of fireproofing shall be shown on the construction drawings. Sphere / bullet storage shell (up to their connecting flanges and nozzles) containing liquefied gases shall be considered as Fire Potential Equipment. Structures Supporting Equipment Steel structures located within a FPZ shall be fireproofed when the supported Page 411 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo. The standard fireproofing material is lightweight vermiculite concrete for steel structures and intumscent mastic for critical control and electric cables. The protection is necessary for vessel skirts and other steel support structures where their sudden collapse due to fire would seriously endanger personnel. Hydrocarbon-type fire This specification describes the minimum fireproofing requirements for protection against a hydrocarbon-type fire. Fireproofing details shall be in accordance with standard drawings. a “system” is the smallest volume of piping and equipment (including vessels) that can be “blocked in” in the event of a fire. For liquid or vapour torch fires. The fire exposure resistance time shall be of 2 hours when exposed to a hydrocarbon fire as defined in the UL 1709 or in the BS 476 Part 20. o 4093 c d reel with 31 m hose connected to the fire water supply. the FPZ is a volume with a special shape.5044.L. The radius of the sphere shall be 9 m. In this context. lead to the release of large quantities of flammable products and / or toxic materials.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . 1709.

Page 412 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo.5 metric tons (including contents). beams and any members within the FPZ designed for the purpose of reducing the effective buckling length of the columns shall be fireproofed. Steel columns. application of the fireproofing as specified. Prefabrication Measures to protect supporting steel structures from torch fires generating thermal radiation level of 350 KW / m² are in descending order of preference: A judicious location and orientation of PSL’s relative to supporting steel structures in order to avoid impact of accidentally released product jets and in case of ignition of the resultant jet flame on the structure. Steel structures within a FPZ supporting air coolers shall be fireproofed if the air cooler contains a total of more than 1 metric ton of flammable product or the total mass of the air cooler(s) supported by the structure exceeds 2. The increased overall dimensions of fireproofed members. walkways. Minimizing the need for bracing in a framework where fireproofing is required. the fireproofing shall be made of reinforced concrete erected from grade level up to a minimum 1. Steel Pipe Supports Individual pipe supports and steel structures supporting overhead piping located in an FPZ shall be fireproofed if one or more of the following apply: The pipe is a flare line or an emergency depressurizing vent line.8 m height. Stairways. When resistance to mechanical damage is required towards the bottom of a column. If neither of the above is possible or practical. The pipe contains toxic material. o 4093 c d equipment contains a total of more than 2 metric tons of flammable product or has a total mass (including contents) of more than 10 metric tons or contains toxic material or sudden failure is likely to cause danger to personnel.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Fire protection policy and plant availability. Application of fire shielding either near the PSL or near the surfaces to be protected to deflect the jet or jet flame and thus avoid impact. gratings or equipment are normally not fireproofed.co.5044. In the early stages of design features which shall be considered include: Comparison of cost and construction time for prefabricated concrete structures versus steel structures and fireproofing. The weight of fireproofing. and platforms designed mainly for live loads and top surfaces of beams supporting floor plates.

Critical Control and Power cabling serving safeguarding systems shall be installed and fire protected against direct radiation and flame impingement. Columns of pipe racks and pipe supports shall be fireproofed from HL up to 0.5044. Fireproofing shall be applied to the inside of the skirt as well.uk IE C rtifie P fe s n l E g e r S ra S g I e d ro s io a n in e u j in h . Codes and Standards The following latest codes and standards to the extent specified herein shall apply. the total mass (including contents) being more than 10 metric tons or it contains toxic material. Vessels and Exchangers The outside of skirts of vertical vessels located within an FPZ shall be fireproofed if the vessel contains a total of more than 2 metric tons of flammable product.2 meter and above. Saddles supporting horizontal vessels and exchangers shall not be fireproofed. If there are flanged pipe connections within the circumference of the skirt of vertical vessels. Spring hangers shall be fireproofed with suitable easy removable covers such as PYTEC fire protection system or equivalent. Diagonal bracing for resisting only lateral forces shall not be fireproofed. The inside of skirts shall be fireproofed if the diameter is 1. o 4093 c d The pipe is connected to equipment which would be severely damaged by additional nozzle loading in the event of loss of pipe support.co. The pipe runs beneath an air cooler whose steel support structure is fireproofed (including horizontal members). Flexible covers shall be installed directly on actuator casing with uniform thickness. ESD Valves Actuators of ESD valves when match “Emergency Shut Down Philosophy”. Protection flow chart shall be fireproofed using flexible covers. The fire protection shall protect the actuators at least 30 minutes assuming a continuous total exposure to fire with a flame temperature of 1100 °C. The pipe is an instrument airline or hydraulic control line whose loss would interfere with the ability to shut down the plant. The pipe carries fire-fighting water and / or other utilities which would reduce the firefighting capability in the event of loss of support. Alternate standards and codes meeting the requirements of the referenced standards Page 413 of 663 suraj_engineer@yahoo.3 m below the lowest horizontal member of the structure. Inside and outside fireproofing of vessel skirts shall be in accordance with the reference Standard Drawing Supports for Insulation and Fireproofing.

Minimum curing period shall be 7 days. The required thickness of fireproofing material shall be calculated according to the criteria Hp/A and from data derived from fireproofing Manufacturer’s data sheets.5044. Material Performances a. Alternative proprietary system with proven track record may be used. o 4093 c d and codes may be used with approval of the Company. (UL) UL 1709 Fire Resistance Rapid Temperature Rise Occupational Safety And Health Administration (OSHA) Code of Federal Regulations. Materials Light weight vermiculite Concrete shall be used as the fireproofing material. b. Surface preparation Steel work surfaces which are to be fireproofed with lightweight vermiculite concrete shall be prepared and painted in accordance with Specification for Painting.1 Structural Welding Code Underwriter’s Laboratories. Any deviations from these established methods shall be submitted to Contractor for approval and Company for review before application on Site. Shore hardness shall be at least 40. Inc. Installation All application procedures and materials used shall be in strict accordan